College-level biology, from the hydrogen bonds in a water molecule to the carbon flowing through an ecosystem, taught unit by unit to the College Board framework. Every lesson ends with two or three practice problems, and every unit ends with a 20-question quiz that mixes stimulus-based multiple choice with short free-response items scored against the real AP rubric. Exam format from 2027: this is a hybrid digital exam: multiple choice in Bluebook, free response handwritten in a paper booklet. Work the free-response practice on paper first, then either type your answer into the response box or photograph your page and have it read in for scoring.
What this course covers, and how the exam weights it.
AP Biology follows the eight units of the College Board course framework. Unit 7 (natural selection) is the heaviest at 13–20%, with Units 3 and 6 close behind at 12–16% each, so the lessons below give those units the most room. The exam is three hours: 60 multiple-choice questions in 90 minutes for the first half, then six free-response questions in 90 minutes for the second, two long questions worth 9 points each (interpreting and evaluating experimental results, and the same task with a graph you construct) and four short questions worth 4 points each (scientific investigation, conceptual analysis, analysis of a model or visual representation, and data analysis). Every unit below ends with a quiz of 15 multiple-choice questions and 5 short free-response questions, several of them built on described data sets, graphs, and models, with a writing space that scores against the four-point AP rubric and a model 4/4 response to compare against.
U1Chemistry of Life8–11%
U2Cell Structure and Function10–13%
U3Cellular Energetics12–16%
U4Cell Communication and Cell Cycle10–15%
U5Heredity8–11%
U6Gene Expression and Regulation12–16%
U7Natural Selection13–20%
U8Ecology10–15%
All eight units are open, 50 lessons in all. Every
lesson pairs a short explanation with worked examples and a problem
to try yourself, the same problem types that show up on the exam.
Each unit closes with a short video walk-through and a ten-problem
practice set with hidden answers.
Free preview: open any 5 lessons, or watch one unit video, without
an account. The counter on the left keeps track.
Lesson 1.1 · Unit 1 · CED topic 1.1
Structure of water and hydrogen bonding
A water molecule is two hydrogens bonded to one oxygen at about 104.5°,
and nearly every property that makes life possible falls out of that
bent, lopsided shape. Oxygen pulls the shared electrons much harder than
hydrogen does, so each O–H bond is polar covalent: a
partial negative charge (δ−) on the oxygen, a partial positive (δ+) on
each hydrogen.
Because the molecule is bent, those charges don't cancel, and one water
can hydrogen-bond to four neighbors at once. Cohesion, surface tension,
high specific heat, evaporative cooling, floating ice, and water's power
as a solvent are that one fact stated six ways.
Definition
A hydrogen bond is the attraction between the δ+
hydrogen of one polar molecule and a δ− O, N, or F on another.
Cohesion is water sticking to water;
adhesion is water sticking to a polar surface such as
a xylem wall. Together they haul an unbroken column of water up a 100 m
tree: transpiration pulls from the top, cohesion drags the next
molecules up, adhesion stops the column slipping back. Water dissolves
ions because those same charges wrap each one in a hydration shell.
Formula
\[ q = mc\Delta T \]
\(q\) is heat in joules, \(m\) mass in grams, \(c\) specific heat in
J/g·°C. Water's \(c = 4.18\) J/g·°C is unusually high because much of
the added energy breaks hydrogen bonds instead of speeding molecules
up; its heat of vaporization, about 2260 J/g, is high for the same
reason.
Worked example · Same heat, two liquids
100.0 g of water and 100.0 g of ethanol (\(c = 2.44\) J/g·°C) each
absorb 2090 J. Find \(\Delta T\) for each and explain the difference.
\[ \Delta T = \frac{q}{mc} = \frac{2090}{(100.0)(4.18)} = 5.00\ ^\circ\mathrm{C}\quad\text{(water)} \]
\[ \Delta T = \frac{2090}{(100.0)(2.44)} = 8.57\ ^\circ\mathrm{C}\quad\text{(ethanol)} \]
Ethanol warms about 1.7 times as much. Describe stops there;
explain must give the why: water forms up to four hydrogen
bonds per molecule and ethanol one, so more of the 2090 J goes into
breaking bonds instead of raising kinetic energy.
Worked example · An overnight cooling curve
Sketch this graph: temperature (°C) on the y-axis from 15 to 35, clock
time on the x-axis from 6 p.m. to 6 a.m. Both traces start at 32 °C.
The sand-dune trace drops steeply to about 17 °C by midnight, then
flattens; the pond trace falls gently and almost straight to 28 °C at
dawn. Explain the gap.
Dry sand has \(c \approx 0.80\) J/g·°C, so the same heat loss costs it
far more temperature: releasing 2090 J from 100 g, sand falls
\(2090/[(100)(0.80)] = 26.1\) °C while water falls 5.00 °C. Water's
hydrogen-bond network stores energy sand cannot, so the pond buffers
overnight: the reason aquatic habitats and cell interiors stay
thermally stable. At 2260 J/g, evaporating just
\(2090/2260 = 0.925\) g of water carries off the same 2090 J.
Practice
Explain, at the molecular level, why ice floats on liquid water, and describe one consequence for organisms in a temperate lake.
Show answer
In ice each molecule is locked into four hydrogen bonds in a rigid lattice that holds neighbors farther apart than the jostling, constantly re-forming bonds of the liquid, so the same mass occupies more volume and the density falls. Consequence: ice forms an insulating layer at the surface, the lake freezes top-down rather than solid, and fish and other organisms survive beneath it. Saying only "ice is less dense" describes without explaining and earns no explanation point.
The table gives specific heats. Using \(q = mc\Delta T\), calculate the heat needed to raise 250 g of each substance by 10.0 °C, and identify which would make the poorest coolant for an engine.
Substance
Water
Ethanol
Dry sand
Specific heat (J/g·°C)
4.18
2.44
0.80
Show answer
Water: \((250)(4.18)(10.0) = 1.045 \times 10^{4}\) J. Ethanol: \((250)(2.44)(10.0) = 6.10 \times 10^{3}\) J. Sand: \((250)(0.80)(10.0) = 2.0 \times 10^{3}\) J. Sand is the poorest coolant: it absorbs only about one-fifth as much heat as water for the same temperature rise (5.2 times less), so it heats up fast and carries little energy away.
A student coats the inside of a glass capillary tube with a nonpolar wax, then stands it in water beside an untreated tube. Predict how far the water rises in the waxed tube relative to the untreated one, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the water rises much less in the waxed tube, and may not rise at all. Justification: capillary rise depends on adhesion; hydrogen bonds between water's δ+ hydrogens and the δ− oxygens of the polar glass surface. Wax is nonpolar and offers no partial charges, so no hydrogen bonds form with the wall; cohesion alone holds the water together but has nothing to climb. A prediction with no named mechanism is a guess, and graders award the justification point only for the connection to hydrogen bonding.
Lesson 1.2 · Unit 1 · CED topics 1.2–1.3
Elements of life, functional groups, and polymers
Six elements (carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, and
sulfur (CHNOPS)) make up about 97% of the mass of a living organism.
Carbon is the one the rest hang from: with four valence electrons it forms four
covalent bonds, so a carbon skeleton can branch, ring, and run to
thousands of atoms while staying stable.
A skeleton alone is inert, though. What a molecule does comes
from the functional groups attached to it: small
clusters of atoms that behave the same way wherever they appear.
Definition
Hydroxyl (, OH), polar, hydrogen-bonds, raises water solubility.
Carbonyl (C=O): polar; at the end of a skeleton it makes an aldehyde, inside it a ketone.
Carboxyl (, COOH), acidic: donates H+ and becomes: COO−.
Amino (, NH2), basic: accepts H+ and becomes: NH3+.
Sulfhydryl (, SH), two of them cross-link into a disulfide bridge that stabilizes protein shape.
Phosphate (, OPO32−), negatively charged; transfers energy in ATP.
Methyl (, CH3), nonpolar; on DNA it changes gene expression without changing sequence.
Rule
Dehydration synthesis joins two monomers by removing
one H2O, an, OH from one and an, H from the other, for
every bond formed. Hydrolysis reverses it, splitting
one bond by inserting one water. So an \(n\)-monomer polymer costs
\(n-1\) waters to build, and its molar mass is
\[ M_{\text{polymer}} = nM_{\text{monomer}} - (n-1)(18.02). \]
Polymers are directional: a polypeptide runs N-terminus to C-terminus,
a nucleic acid 5' to 3'. Enzymes only work on one end.
Worked example · Reading a molecule
Lactic acid is CH3, CHOH, COOH. Identify its functional groups
and predict its behavior in water.
A methyl on one end, a hydroxyl on the middle carbon, a carboxyl on the
other end. Identify means naming them: that is all the first
task asks. The prediction has to be specific: lactic acid
dissolves readily, because the hydroxyl and carboxyl both hydrogen-bond
with water, and the solution turns acidic as the carboxyl donates
H+ to become lactate (: COO−).
Worked example · Counting the water
A starch molecule is 500 glucose monomers (\(M = 180.16\) g/mol) joined
in a chain. How many water molecules were released, and what is the
polymer's molar mass?
Five hundred monomers need 499 bonds, so 499 water
molecules are released. Then
\[ M = 500(180.16) - 499(18.02) = 90{,}080 - 8{,}991.98 = 81{,}088\ \mathrm{g/mol}. \]
Notice the polymer weighs less than its monomers did separately. That
missing mass is the water, and it is exactly what a student gets back
when they hydrolyze the chain.
Practice
A peptide built only from glycine (\(M = 75.07\) g/mol) has a molar mass of 588.52 g/mol. Calculate how many glycine residues it contains and how many waters were released building it.
Show answer
Set \(n(75.07) - (n-1)(18.02) = 588.52\). Expanding, \(57.05n + 18.02 = 588.52\), so \(n = 570.50/57.05 = 10\) residues and \(10 - 1 = 9\) waters released. The trick is that every added residue contributes only \(75.07 - 18.02 = 57.05\) g/mol, not the full monomer mass.
The table gives approximate water solubilities at 25 °C for three four-carbon molecules. Describe the trend and explain it.
Molecule
Butane
1-Butanol
Butanoic acid
Functional group
none (methyl ends only)
hydroxyl
carboxyl
Solubility (g/L)
0.061
73
miscible
Show answer
Describe: solubility rises sharply across the row; 1-butanol dissolves roughly \(73/0.061 \approx 1200\) times better than butane, and butanoic acid mixes with water in any proportion. Explain: all three have the same nonpolar four-carbon skeleton, so the difference is the group. Butane has no partial charges and cannot hydrogen-bond; the hydroxyl can both donate and accept hydrogen bonds; the carboxyl does that and also ionizes to: COO−, which water hydrates strongly. A grader will not accept "the carboxyl makes it more polar" with no mention of hydrogen bonding or charge.
A student incubates the 10-residue glycine peptide above with a protease until it is completely digested, then measures the total mass of dissolved solute. Predict whether that total rises, falls, or stays the same, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the total solute mass rises, from 588.52 g/mol of peptide to \(10(75.07) = 750.70\) g/mol of free glycine. Justification: hydrolysis breaks each of the 9 peptide bonds by inserting a water molecule, adding \(9(18.02) = 162.18\) g/mol that came from the solvent, and \(588.52 + 162.18 = 750.70\), which matches. The mass is not created; it is transferred from water into the solutes.
Lesson 1.3 · Unit 1 · CED topic 1.4
Carbohydrates and lipids
Glucose, fructose, and galactose all share the formula
C6H12O6. Same atoms, different
arrangement, and the cell treats them as different molecules. That is
the theme of this whole lesson: in biology, shape is function, and a
single bond flipped upside down decides whether you can digest something
or not.
Definition
A glycosidic linkage is the covalent bond formed by
dehydration synthesis between two monosaccharides. Its geometry
matters. In starch the linkage is
α-1,4, which curls the chain into a helix that human
amylase can grip and cut. In cellulose it is
β-1,4, which flips every other glucose 180° and gives
a straight chain; neighboring chains hydrogen-bond into rigid
microfibrils, and no human enzyme fits that shape.
Glycogen is starch's animal counterpart with α-1,6
branches every 8–12 residues: many free ends at once, so glucose can
be released fast when muscle demands it.
Model
Lipids are not polymers: they are assembled from unlike parts
and are grouped together because they are hydrophobic. A
triglyceride is glycerol plus three fatty acids by
three dehydration reactions. Saturated tails have no
C=C, pack tightly, and are solid at room temperature;
unsaturated tails have cis double bonds that kink
them apart. A phospholipid swaps one tail for a
charged phosphate group, making it amphipathic: a
hydrophilic head and hydrophobic tails, which is why it self-assembles
into a bilayer. Steroids such as cholesterol are four
fused carbon rings with different groups attached.
Worked example · Double bonds and melting point
All four fatty acids below have 18 carbons. Describe the trend and explain it.
Fatty acid
Stearic
Oleic
Linoleic
Linolenic
C=C double bonds
0
1
2
3
Melting point (°C)
69.3
13.4
−5
−11
Describe: as double bonds go from 0 to 3, melting point falls
monotonically, by about 80 °C in total. Explain: each cis double bond
puts a permanent kink in the tail, so chains cannot stack closely,
fewer attractions form between them, and less energy is needed to pull
them apart. That is why olive oil pours and butter does not, and why a
membrane rich in unsaturated tails stays fluid in the cold.
Worked example · Why fat is the storage molecule
Fat yields about 9 kcal/g, carbohydrate about 4 kcal/g, and stored
glycogen binds roughly 2 g of water per gram. Calculate the mass needed
to store 3,600 kcal each way.
\[ \text{fat: } \frac{3600}{9} = 400\ \mathrm{g} \qquad
\text{glycogen: } \frac{3600}{4} = 900\ \mathrm{g} \]
Glycogen drags 1,800 g of water with it, so the real load is
\(900 + 1800 = 2700\) g; \(2700/400 = 6.8\) times the mass of fat for
the same energy. Fat's tails are highly reduced (C: H rich) and
hydrophobic, so it packs more energy per gram and carries no water.
Practice
Starch and cellulose are both polymers of glucose, yet humans digest one and not the other. Explain why.
Show answer
Starch uses α-1,4 glycosidic linkages, which produce a helical chain that the active site of amylase is complementary to. Cellulose uses β-1,4 linkages, which rotate every second glucose 180° and give a flat, straight chain that hydrogen-bonds with neighboring chains into microfibrils. Humans make no enzyme with an active site complementary to β-1,4, so cellulose passes through as fiber. "Cellulose is tougher" is a restatement, not an explanation: the point is earned by naming the linkage and the enzyme–substrate fit.
A snack bar label lists 12 g fat, 30 g carbohydrate, and 5 g protein (protein also yields about 4 kcal/g). Calculate the total energy and the percent that comes from fat.
Show answer
Fat: \(12 \times 9 = 108\) kcal. Carbohydrate: \(30 \times 4 = 120\) kcal. Protein: \(5 \times 4 = 20\) kcal. Total \(= 108 + 120 + 20 = 248\) kcal, and \(108/248 = 43.5\%\) comes from fat. Note that the fat is the smallest mass on the label but supplies the largest share of the energy after carbohydrate: 12 g of carbohydrate would have supplied only 48 kcal, 60 kcal less.
One culture of a bacterium is grown at 10 °C and another of the same strain at 37 °C. Predict which culture's membrane phospholipids contain a higher proportion of unsaturated fatty acids, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the 10 °C culture. Justification: cis double bonds kink the hydrocarbon tails so they cannot pack tightly, which keeps the bilayer fluid at low temperature; without them the membrane would solidify at 10 °C and stop transport and signaling. The 37 °C culture faces the opposite problem, too much fluidity, so more saturated, straight tails pack tightly and hold the membrane together. A prediction with no mechanism named earns the prediction point only, not the justification point.
Lesson 1.4 · Unit 1 · CED topics 1.4–1.5
Proteins: structure and function
Proteins do almost everything: catalysis, transport, signaling,
structure, defense. They manage it because a chain of twenty possible
monomers folds into an essentially unlimited number of specific shapes.
And the shape is everything: swap one amino acid out of the 146 in
hemoglobin's β chain and you get sickle-cell disease.
Definition
Every amino acid has a central carbon bonded to an
amino group ( (NH2), a carboxyl group () COOH), a hydrogen,
and a variable R group. R groups fall into four
classes: nonpolar and hydrophobic (valine),
polar and hydrophilic (serine),
acidic and negative at cell pH (glutamate), and
basic and positive (lysine). A
peptide bond links one carboxyl to the next amino
group by dehydration synthesis, so the chain has direction: it is built
and written N-terminus to C-terminus.
Model
Primary structure is the amino acid sequence.
Secondary structure, the α helix and the β pleated
sheet, comes from hydrogen bonds along the backbone, not the
R groups. Tertiary structure is the 3-D fold, held by
R-group interactions: hydrophobic groups cluster in a water-excluded
core, charged ones form ionic bonds, two cysteines form a covalent
disulfide bridge.
Quaternary structure is two or more folded chains
assembled, as in hemoglobin. Heat and extreme pH
denature a protein by breaking those weak
interactions; the sequence survives, but the shape, and with it the
function, does not.
Worked example · Anfinsen's ribonuclease experiment
Question: does anything besides the sequence tell a protein
how to fold? Anfinsen treated ribonuclease A (124 amino acids, four
disulfide bridges) with urea (disrupts weak interactions) plus
β-mercaptoethanol (reduces disulfides).
The independent variable is which denaturing agents
are present; the dependent variable is enzyme activity
as a percent of native; the control is untreated
enzyme assayed alongside. Result: treated enzyme lost nearly
all activity, but dialyzing both reagents away restored it to roughly
95% of the control. Conclusion, justified: the primary
sequence carries all the information needed for the native fold,
because the enzyme recovered function with no cellular machinery
present.
Worked example · Reading a pH–activity table
The same enzyme was assayed at three pH values, all at 25 °C.
pH
2
7
10
Initial rate (µmol/min)
2
48
5
Convert to percent of maximum: \(2/48 = 4.2\%\) at pH 2 and
\(5/48 = 10.4\%\) at pH 10. Describe: activity peaks at pH 7
and collapses at both extremes. Explain: at pH 2 excess
H+ protonates acidic R groups; at pH 10 basic R groups lose
H+. Either way the ionic and hydrogen bonds holding the
tertiary fold break, the active site loses its shape, and substrate no
longer binds. "The enzyme denatured" is a restatement: the point comes
from naming the charges.
Practice
A globular enzyme is dissolved in cytosol. Describe where you would expect its nonpolar R groups and its charged R groups to sit, and explain why.
Show answer
Nonpolar R groups are buried in the interior; charged and polar R groups face outward into the water. The reason is the hydrophobic effect: water cannot hydrogen-bond with nonpolar groups, so burying them together lets water maximize its own hydrogen bonding, which is the more stable arrangement. Charged groups on the surface are stabilized by hydration shells. "Like dissolves like" is not an explanation on its own: the grader wants the water and the hydrogen bonds mentioned.
Hemoglobin from three people is run on a gel at pH 8.6 with the anode (+) at the bottom. The unaffected person's sample gives a single band far down the gel; the person with sickle-cell disease gives a single band well above it; the person with sickle-cell trait gives two bands, one at each position. Explain the difference in migration and identify which person is heterozygous.
Show answer
In HbA, position 6 of the β chain is glutamate, whose R group is deprotonated and negative at pH 8.6. In HbS it is valine, which is nonpolar and uncharged, so each HbS molecule carries less net negative charge and is pulled less strongly toward the anode: hence the higher band. The person with two bands is heterozygous: they carry one HbA allele and one HbS allele and make both proteins.
A mutation replaces a leucine buried in an enzyme's hydrophobic core with aspartate. Predict the effect on the enzyme's tertiary structure and activity, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the tertiary structure is destabilized and activity drops sharply, possibly to zero. Justification: aspartate's R group is charged and hydrophilic, so placing it in a water-excluded core is energetically unfavorable, the fold must distort or partially unfold to let the charge reach solvent. Because the active site's geometry depends on that fold, the substrate no longer fits, and by Anfinsen's result the fold is dictated by the primary sequence, so changing the sequence changes the shape. Note the exam wants both a direction (activity decreases) and the principle behind it.
Lesson 1.5 · Unit 1 · CED topic 1.6
Nucleic acids: structure and information
A protein's shape is its function. A nucleic acid's sequence is
its function: the order of four bases is the message, and every feature
of DNA's structure exists to store that message, copy it faithfully, and
hand it out.
Definition
A nucleotide is a five-carbon sugar, a phosphate
group, and a nitrogenous base. Purines (adenine,
guanine) have two fused rings; pyrimidines (cytosine,
thymine, uracil) have one. A phosphodiester bond joins
the 3' carbon of one sugar to the phosphate on the 5' carbon of the
next, so a strand has a free 5' phosphate at one end and a free 3'
hydroxyl at the other: polymerases only add to the 3' end. The two
strands of DNA run antiparallel: one 5'→3' as the
other runs 3'→5'.
Rule
Complementary base pairing: A pairs with T through two
hydrogen bonds, G pairs with C through three. A purine always pairs
with a pyrimidine, which keeps the helix a constant 2 nm wide. Because
a G–C pair costs one more hydrogen bond to break, GC-rich DNA has a
higher melting temperature. RNA differs on three
counts: ribose instead of deoxyribose, uracil instead of thymine, and
single-stranded instead of double.
Worked example · A Chargaff data table
Base composition (mol %) of three samples. Fill the blanks and identify
the sample that is not double-stranded DNA.
Sample
A
T or U
G
C
1
30.4
?
?
19.6
2
24.7
?
?
25.3
3
31.3
24.8 (U)
18.7
25.2
In double-stranded DNA \(\%A = \%T\) and \(\%G = \%C\), so sample 1 is
T = 30.4, G = 19.6 (total \(30.4+30.4+19.6+19.6 = 100.0\)) and sample 2
is T = 24.7, G = 25.3. Sample 3 breaks both equalities, 31.3 ≠ 24.8
and 18.7 ≠ 25.2, and contains uracil, so it is single-stranded RNA.
GC content: \(2(19.6) = 39.2\%\) for sample 1 and \(2(25.3) = 50.6\%\)
for sample 2, so sample 2 melts at the higher temperature.
Worked example · Reading Franklin's diffraction pattern
Describe the model: the 1952 X-ray diffraction image of the B form of
DNA taken by Rosalind Franklin and Raymond Gosling shows dark spots
arranged in an X across the center of the film, with a strong smear far
out along the vertical axis.
Each feature is a measurement. The X is the signature of a
helix. The spacing of its layer lines gives the repeat
distance of one full turn, about 3.4 nm; the strong outer reflection
gives the 0.34 nm rise between stacked bases, so about ten bases per
turn. The pattern's width gives a uniform 2 nm
diameter, and that uniformity is the clinching argument for pairing a
two-ring purine with a one-ring pyrimidine: two purines would bulge,
two pyrimidines would pinch.
Practice
A DNA strand reads 5'-ATGGCCTAG-3'. Write its complementary strand with both ends labeled, then calculate the number of hydrogen bonds holding the duplex together.
Show answer
The complement is antiparallel: 3'-TACCGGATC-5', which written in the conventional 5'→3' direction is 5'-CTAGGCCAT-3'. Counting pairs: 4 A–T pairs and 5 G–C pairs in the 9 bp duplex, so \(4(2) + 5(3) = 8 + 15 = 23\) hydrogen bonds. Losing the end labels is the most common way students lose this point: an unlabeled sequence is ambiguous.
Two DNA samples are heated and absorbance at 260 nm is plotted against temperature; each curve is flat, then rises sigmoidally, then flattens. Sample X's midpoint is 82 °C, sample Y's is 93 °C. One sample is 38% GC and the other 62% GC. Identify which is which, and calculate the percent of adenine in each.
Show answer
Sample Y (midpoint 93 °C) is the 62% GC sample, because G–C pairs are held by three hydrogen bonds rather than two, so more thermal energy is needed to separate the strands. Sample X is 38% GC. Percent adenine: for X, A+T = 100 − 38 = 62%, and since %A = %T, A = 31.0%. For Y, A+T = 100 − 62 = 38%, so A = 19.0%. The rise in absorbance is strand separation: unstacked bases absorb more 260 nm light.
Two synthetic 20-base-pair duplexes are made: one is all G–C pairs, the other all A–T pairs. Predict which denatures at the lower temperature, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the all-A–T duplex denatures at the lower temperature. Justification: it is held by \(20 \times 2 = 40\) hydrogen bonds while the all-G–C duplex has \(20 \times 3 = 60\), fifty percent more, so less thermal energy is needed to break the A–T duplex apart. Note what the exam wants here: "justify" means naming the evidence (the hydrogen-bond counts), not simply restating that A–T is weaker.
Unit 1 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 1 quiz: Chemistry of Life
Fifteen multiple-choice items and five short free-response questions on water, functional groups and polymers, carbohydrates and lipids, protein structure, and nucleic acids: click an option to see why each choice is right or wrong, and write each FRQ out before opening the model response.
Multiple choice
Data: three 200.0 g samples, each in an insulated container, were given 4180 J of heat. Every sample started at 22.0 °C.
Substance
Water
Ethanol
Dry sand
Specific heat (J/g·°C)
4.18
2.44
0.80
Temperature change (°C)
5.0
8.6
26.1
Which claim is best supported by the data?
Every sample received exactly 4180 J, so heat is the variable being held constant and cannot explain the difference. A larger temperature change for the same energy means the substance stores less energy per degree, which is the opposite of what this choice claims.
Water's 5.0 °C rise is the smallest of the three for the same 4180 J, so it takes the most energy to warm each gram by one degree. A water molecule can hydrogen-bond to up to four neighbors, and energy spent pulling those bonds apart does not show up as faster motion, which is what temperature measures.
Mass is held constant at 200.0 g in all three containers, so the number of grams is not the variable. What differs is specific heat, which traces back to how many hydrogen bonds each molecule can form: ethanol's single hydroxyl group offers far fewer than water's two hydrogens and two lone pairs.
Reaching a high temperature quickly is the mark of a poor coolant, not a good one. A coolant has to carry heat away, and sand's 26.1 °C rise for the same 4180 J: about 5.2 times water's rise: shows it carries the least energy for a given temperature change.
Which of the following best explains why a sheet of ice forms on the surface of a temperate lake in winter rather than at the bottom?
This is the mechanism: in liquid water hydrogen bonds constantly break and re-form, letting molecules crowd close, while the ice lattice fixes every molecule at four bonds and a set distance. Lower density means the ice floats, the lake freezes top-down, and organisms survive under an insulating lid.
Freezing does the reverse: it maximizes hydrogen bonding, holding every molecule in four bonds at once. If hydrogen bonds simply broke, water would behave like most substances and contract as it solidified, and the ice would sink.
Ice floats whether or not any heat is moving, because its density is lower than the liquid's; buoyancy, not convection, holds it up. A lake's bottom water does sit near 4 °C, but that is a consequence of water's density maximum, not the cause of floating ice.
Covalent bonds inside a water molecule are untouched by freezing: only the weak attractions between molecules rearrange. Oxygen keeps pulling the shared electrons harder than hydrogen does in ice exactly as it does in liquid water, so the bonds stay polar.
A researcher coats the inner wall of one glass capillary tube with a nonpolar wax and leaves an identical tube untreated. Both are stood upright in a dish of water. Which statement most likely describes the result and its cause?
Capillary rise is not limited by friction; it is driven by an attraction that pulls water up the wall. Removing that attraction removes the driving force, so the waxed tube performs worse rather than better.
Cohesion holds the column together once it is climbing, but something has to grip the wall first. Without adhesion the water has nothing to climb, which is why the same cohesive liquid behaves differently in the two tubes, and why a tree needs both to move water up xylem.
Glass exposes δ− oxygens that hydrogen-bond with water's δ+ hydrogens, and that grip on the wall is adhesion. A nonpolar wax has no partial charges, so no hydrogen bonds form, and the cohesive column has no anchor to pull itself up along.
Surface tension comes from cohesion among the water molecules themselves and is a property of the liquid, not of the tube's coating. Even if it rose, higher surface tension alone would not lift a column up a wall the water cannot bond to.
Data: the pH of 0.1 M aqueous solutions of four small organic molecules at 25 °C, with the functional groups each molecule carries.
Molecule
Ethanol
Acetic acid
Ethylamine
Glycine
Functional group(s)
hydroxyl
carboxyl
amino
amino and carboxyl
pH of 0.1 M solution
7.0
2.9
11.8
6.1
Which claim about functional groups is best supported by the data?
Ethanol's hydroxyl group contains oxygen, yet its 0.1 M solution sits at pH 7.0: exactly neutral. The table separates "contains oxygen" from "donates H+": only the carboxyl group does the second, because losing H+ leaves a resonance-stabilized: COO−.
Acetic acid's carboxyl drives the solution to pH 2.9 by donating H+, ethylamine's amino group drives it to pH 11.8 by accepting H+, and glycine, which has both, lands at 6.1: close to ethanol's neutral 7.0 and nowhere near either extreme. The two groups act in opposite directions and largely cancel.
Polarity and acidity are different properties. Ethanol's hydroxyl is polar enough to hydrogen-bond freely with water, which is why ethanol dissolves without limit, yet its pH is 7.0: polarity governs solubility, while acidity depends on whether a group can actually release a proton.
Glycine at pH 6.1 is a zwitterion: its carboxyl has donated H+ to become, COO− and its amino group has accepted one to become, NH3+. It carries two charges, not none; the solution is near neutral because those charges balance, not because they are absent.
A polypeptide is built by dehydration synthesis from 25 alanine monomers (M = 89.09 g/mol). Water has M = 18.02 g/mol. What is the molar mass of the finished polypeptide?
This subtracts 25 waters instead of 24: 2227.25 − 25(18.02) = 1776.75. A chain of n monomers has only n − 1 bonds between them, so 25 residues release 24 waters, not 25: count the links, not the beads.
Twenty-five residues require 24 peptide bonds, and each bond releases one water: 25(89.09) − 24(18.02) = 2227.25 − 432.48 = 1794.77 g/mol. Equivalently, every residue after the first adds only 89.09 − 18.02 = 71.07 g/mol to the chain.
This is the combined mass of 25 free alanine molecules with no water removed at all. The polymer must weigh less than its monomers did separately, and the missing 432.48 g/mol is exactly the water the cell released while building it.
This adds the water instead of removing it: 2227.25 + 432.48 = 2659.73. Adding water is hydrolysis, the reaction that takes the chain apart; dehydration synthesis, which builds it, removes one H2O per bond formed.
A polypeptide with the sequence Gly–Ala–Ser and one with the sequence Ser–Ala–Gly are different molecules. Which statement best explains why?
Both chains contain one glycine, one alanine, and one serine: the composition is identical. The exam is testing the difference between composition and sequence, and that difference is the whole reason twenty monomers can build an unlimited number of distinct proteins.
Both chains have three residues and therefore two peptide bonds, so both released two waters and both have the same molar mass. Mass cannot distinguish them; only the order along the chain can.
Dehydration synthesis always links a carboxyl to an amino group, which gives every polypeptide a direction: an N-terminus at one end and a C-terminus at the other. Reading Gly–Ala–Ser from the N-terminus puts glycine's hydrogen R group first and serine's hydroxyl last, while the reverse sequence puts them the other way around, producing a different fold and a different function.
Hydrolysis breaks polymers apart; it cannot assemble one. Both of these chains were built the same way, by dehydration synthesis, and the difference between them lies in the order in which the monomers were added.
Data: melting points of four fatty acids at 1 atm.
Fatty acid
Myristic
Palmitic
Stearic
Oleic
Carbons in the tail
14
16
18
18
C=C double bonds
0
0
0
1
Melting point (°C)
54.4
62.9
69.6
13.4
Which claim is best supported by the data?
Stearic and oleic acid have the same 18 carbons yet melt 56.2 °C apart, so chain length cannot be the only factor. The table was built with that pair deliberately matched so that the effect of the double bond could be isolated.
The data run the other way: oleic acid, the only unsaturated one, melts lowest at 13.4 °C. The strength of the C=C bond itself is irrelevant to melting, which depends on the weak attractions between neighboring tails, and a cis kink keeps those tails from stacking closely enough to form many.
Among the three saturated acids the melting point climbs steadily with length, from 54.4 °C at 14 carbons to 69.6 °C at 18. Length matters; it simply matters less than unsaturation does.
Compare the two controlled contrasts. Going from stearic (18:0) to oleic (18:1) holds length constant and drops the melting point 56.2 °C; going from stearic (18:0) to myristic (14:0) holds saturation constant and drops it only 15.2 °C. One kink outweighs four carbons by nearly four to one, which is why a membrane rich in unsaturated tails stays fluid in the cold.
Humans digest starch but pass cellulose through largely unchanged, even though both are polymers of glucose. Which of the following best explains the difference?
The monomer is the same; the geometry of the bond is not. An α-1,4 linkage produces a helical chain amylase can grip and cut, while a β-1,4 linkage rotates alternate residues 180°, giving flat chains that hydrogen-bond to each other into microfibrils. Enzyme–substrate specificity depends on shape, and humans make no enzyme shaped for β-1,4.
Both polymers are made entirely of glucose. That is precisely what makes the comparison useful: with the monomer held constant, the only variable left is the linkage, so the linkage has to be the explanation.
Size is not the barrier: starch molecules are also far too large to absorb, which is exactly why amylase digests them into maltose and glucose first. The problem with cellulose is that the digestive step never happens.
Both starch and cellulose are held together by covalent glycosidic linkages. Hydrogen bonds do appear in cellulose, but between neighboring chains, where they add strength rather than weakness: the opposite of what this choice implies.
A migrating bird must store 1800 kcal. Fat yields about 9 kcal/g. Glycogen yields about 4 kcal/g and binds roughly 2 g of water for every gram stored. Approximately how many times greater is the total mass the bird must carry if it stores the energy as hydrated glycogen rather than as fat?
This is 450/200, the comparison of dry glycogen to fat. It leaves out the water, which is the whole reason glycogen is a poor long-term store: the stem gives you 2 g of water per gram of glycogen for a reason.
This is 900/200, counting only the bound water and forgetting the glycogen itself. The carried mass is the polymer plus its water, not one or the other.
Fat: 1800/9 = 200 g. Glycogen: 1800/4 = 450 g, plus 2(450) = 900 g of bound water, for 1350 g total. Then 1350/200 = 6.8. Fat wins twice over (its highly reduced, C) H-rich tails carry more energy per gram, and being hydrophobic it drags no water along.
This is 2700/200, which doubles the hydrated glycogen mass once too often. Two grams of water per gram of glycogen gives 900 g of water on top of 450 g of polymer, for 1350 g, not 2700 g.
Data: initial rate of a purified intestinal enzyme at 37 °C. Row 1 gives the rate measured at the pH in that column. Row 2 gives the rate measured at pH 7 for a sample that was first held for 20 minutes at the pH in that column and then returned to pH 7.
pH of treatment
3
5
7
9
11
Rate at that pH (µmol/min)
4
22
55
11
1
Rate after return to pH 7 (µmol/min)
3
54
55
53
2
Which statement best explains why the pH 5 and pH 9 samples recover after being returned to pH 7 while the pH 3 and pH 11 samples do not?
If peptide bonds were broken there would be no chain left to recover, but the row-2 values of 3 and 2 µmol/min are not the issue: the pH 5 and pH 9 samples show the chain survives this treatment intact and simply needs its fold back. Denaturation rearranges weak interactions; it does not cut the covalent backbone.
Row 2 is the decisive comparison. The pH 5 and pH 9 samples return to 54 and 53 µmol/min, essentially the untreated 55, so their loss of activity was nothing but a reversible change in the charge on acidic and basic R groups. At pH 3 and pH 11 the ionic and hydrogen bonds between R groups were disrupted enough that the chain settled into a misfolded state, and restoring the pH restores only 3 and 2 µmol/min.
Row 1 alone would fit this idea, but row 2 refutes it: the pH 5 sample was tested away from pH 7 and came back to 54 µmol/min. Being off the optimum is not the same as being permanently damaged, and telling the two apart is exactly what the second row was designed to do.
A competitive inhibitor is removed when it is washed out, so returning the sample to pH 7 would restore activity in every column, which is not what row 2 shows. H+ changes the enzyme by protonating its R groups rather than by occupying the active site.
Figure: hemoglobin from three individuals separated by gel electrophoresis at pH 8.6, with the sample wells at the top of the gel and the anode (+) at the bottom.
Lane 1 shows a single band 62 mm below the wells. Lane 2 shows a single band 41 mm below the wells. Lane 3 shows two bands of roughly equal intensity, one at 62 mm and one at 41 mm. Hemoglobin A carries glutamate at position 6 of each β chain; hemoglobin S carries valine at that position. The two proteins have the same molar mass.
Which statement best explains the position of the band in lane 2 and correctly identifies the heterozygous individual?
At pH 8.6 glutamate's carboxyl R group is deprotonated and negative, so each HbA tetramer carries two more negative charges than an HbS tetramer, whose valines are neutral. More negative charge means a stronger pull to the anode and a band farther down: 62 mm for HbA, 41 mm for HbS. Lane 3 shows both bands, so that person makes both proteins and carries one allele of each.
The stimulus states that the two proteins have the same molar mass, which removes size as an explanation: the substitution swaps one residue for another of similar bulk. A single band also means a single kind of hemoglobin, so lane 1 cannot be the heterozygote.
A denatured protein would still carry charge and still migrate; nothing in the figure indicates unfolding, and sickle hemoglobin is a correctly folded, functional oxygen carrier that simply polymerizes when deoxygenated. One band in lane 2 means one allele's product, so lane 2 is homozygous.
Valine's R group is a nonpolar hydrocarbon; it carries no charge at any physiological pH. The substitution does not add positive charge, it removes negative charge, which is enough to slow migration without reversing it, and lane 1's single band rules it out as the heterozygote anyway.
A mutation replaces a valine buried in the hydrophobic core of a globular enzyme with a lysine. Which of the following is the most likely consequence, with the best reason?
The active site is not an independent part; it is a shape produced by the whole fold, and the fold is held together by R-group interactions throughout the chain. Anfinsen's result that the sequence alone dictates the native structure is the reason a change far from the site can still abolish activity.
Ionic bonds do stabilize tertiary structure, but only where a partner of opposite charge sits nearby and water can reach them. Inside a water-excluded core there is no hydration and usually no counter-ion, so the buried charge destabilizes the fold instead of reinforcing it.
A substitution changes the primary structure; it does not destroy it. The ribosome still builds a full-length chain of the same number of residues: the problem arises afterward, when that chain folds into the wrong shape.
Burying a hydrophobic R group in the core is energetically favorable because it lets water maximize its own hydrogen bonding. A charged lysine there is the opposite: the protein must partially unfold or rearrange to let the charge reach solvent, and the active site, whose geometry depends on that fold, no longer matches the substrate.
Data: base composition of three nucleic acid samples, in mole percent of total bases.
Sample
A
T or U
G
C
W
22.1
22.0 (T)
27.9
28.0
X
29.8
30.1 (T)
20.2
19.9
Y
24.0
19.5 (U)
31.2
25.3
Which claim is best supported by the data?
This reverses the relationship. Sample X is 20.2 + 19.9 = 40.1% G + C, while W is 27.9 + 28.0 = 55.9%, and each G–C pair is held by three hydrogen bonds against A–T's two, so W is the sample that needs more thermal energy to come apart.
Summing to 100% only means the four bases account for all the bases present; it says nothing about pairing. The test for a duplex is whether A matches its partner and G matches its partner, and Y fails both, which is why its composition is free to be lopsided.
Y does not obey them: its A and U differ by 4.5 percentage points and its G and C by 5.9. Chargaff's rules hold only where every base has a complementary partner on a second strand, so a violation is evidence that no such strand exists.
W and X both satisfy %A = %T and %G = %C within rounding, the signature of complementary base pairing in a duplex. W's 55.9% G + C against X's 40.1% means more three-bond pairs per base, hence the higher melting temperature. Y contains uracil and breaks both equalities, 24.0 ≠ 19.5 and 31.2 ≠ 25.3, so it is single-stranded RNA.
A double-stranded DNA fragment is 12 base pairs long and contains 7 G–C pairs. How many hydrogen bonds hold the two strands together?
This treats all 12 pairs as if each had two hydrogen bonds. Only A–T pairs have two; G–C pairs have three, and the extra bond per G–C pair is the reason GC-rich DNA melts at a higher temperature.
This swaps the two counts, giving G–C pairs two bonds and A–T pairs three: 7(2) + 5(3) = 29. Remember it by ring count and letters: guanine and cytosine, the "three-letter" pair in the mnemonic sense, share three bonds.
If 7 of the 12 pairs are G–C, the remaining 5 are A–T. Then 7(3) + 5(2) = 21 + 10 = 31 hydrogen bonds. Note that the purine–pyrimidine rule guarantees exactly 12 pairs total, so no base is left unpaired.
This treats all 12 pairs as three-bond G–C pairs, which would require a fragment with no adenine or thymine at all. The stem specifies only 7 G–C pairs, and the other 5 must be A–T.
Figure: the 1952 X-ray diffraction photograph of the B form of DNA, taken by Rosalind Franklin and Raymond Gosling.
Dark spots form a large X across the center of the film. The vertical spacing of the layer lines corresponds to a repeating distance of 3.4 nm. A strong reflection far out along the vertical axis corresponds to a spacing of 0.34 nm. The overall width of the pattern indicates a molecule whose diameter is a uniform 2.0 nm along its entire length.
Which feature of the pattern provides the strongest evidence that every base pair joins a purine to a pyrimidine?
The X is the classic signature of a helix, and it is what told Watson and Crick the molecule coils, but a helix of any composition would produce it. It constrains the overall shape, not what sits at each rung.
The 3.4 nm layer-line spacing gives the pitch, the distance along the axis for one complete turn. Combined with the 0.34 nm rise it yields about ten base pairs per turn, which is a count, not a statement about which bases pair with which.
Constant width is the clinching argument. Purines have two fused rings and pyrimidines one, so a purine–purine rung would bulge wider than 2.0 nm and a pyrimidine–pyrimidine rung would pinch narrower. Only one large ring system paired with one small one keeps every rung the same length, and the film shows no variation in width.
The 0.34 nm reflection gives the rise between stacked bases, showing how tightly the rungs are packed along the axis. It measures spacing between pairs rather than the composition of any one pair.
Free response
Investigation: the effect of heat on purified lactase, the enzyme that hydrolyzes lactose into glucose and galactose.
A student divided one stock solution of purified lactase into five identical tubes. Tube 1 was held at 25 °C for the entire experiment. Tubes 2 through 5 were held for 10 minutes at 45 °C, 65 °C, 85 °C, and 100 °C respectively, then cooled back to 25 °C. The student then added the same volume of the same lactose solution to every tube and measured the initial rate at which glucose appeared, in µmol per minute, with every tube at 25 °C.
Using the investigation described, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the independent variable in the investigation, and describe the purpose of tube 1.
Explain how holding lactase at 85 °C changes its ability to bind lactose.
Construct a graph the student could use to display the results: state which variable belongs on the x-axis and which on the y-axis, give an appropriate scale and label for each axis, and describe the shape of the curve you would expect.
The student claims that the loss of activity is caused by a change in the enzyme's three-dimensional shape rather than by destruction of its amino acid sequence. Justify this claim using evidence from Anfinsen's ribonuclease experiment.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the independent variable is the temperature at which each tube was held for the 10-minute pre-treatment (45, 65, 85, or 100 °C, with 25 °C as the untreated level). Tube 1 is the control: it receives every step except the heating, so it establishes the activity of undamaged enzyme against which the heated tubes are compared. Do not accept: "temperature" with no indication that it is the pre-treatment temperature rather than the assay temperature; naming tube 1 "the control" without describing what it establishes; identifying the rate of glucose production as the independent variable.
(b) Accept: heat raises molecular motion enough to break the hydrogen bonds, ionic bonds, and hydrophobic interactions among R groups that hold the tertiary fold; the active site loses the shape complementary to lactose, the enzyme–substrate complex no longer forms, and the rate of glucose production falls. Do not accept: "the enzyme is denatured" or "the enzyme is destroyed" with no mechanism; "the enzyme dies"; any claim that heat breaks peptide bonds or alters the amino acid sequence; a general statement about enzymes that is never tied to lactase and lactose.
(c) Accept: pre-treatment temperature in °C on the x-axis because it is the independent variable, with an even scale covering 25–100 °C; initial rate of glucose production in µmol/min on the y-axis, starting at 0 and extending just past the tube 1 rate; both axes labeled with the quantity and its unit. Expected shape: near the tube 1 rate at 25 °C and 45 °C, falling steeply between 45 °C and 85 °C, and near zero at 85 °C and 100 °C. Do not accept: the independent variable on the y-axis; axes named without units; a rate axis that does not begin at zero; "plot rate against temperature" with no scale or labels given; a described shape that rises with temperature throughout.
(d) Accept: Anfinsen treated ribonuclease A with urea and β-mercaptoethanol, which disrupted the weak interactions and reduced the disulfide bridges, and activity fell to nearly zero; when both reagents were dialyzed away, activity returned to about 95% of the untreated control with no cellular machinery present. Because the same chain regained function once the weak interactions could re-form, the sequence must have survived the treatment intact and only the folded shape had been lost. Do not accept: restating the claim in other words; naming Anfinsen without describing the refolding result; "primary structure determines tertiary structure" asserted with no experimental evidence attached; evidence cited with no statement of why it supports the claim.
Show a 4/4 response
a The independent variable is the temperature each tube was held at for the 10-minute pre-treatment, 25, 45, 65, 85, or 100 °C. Tube 1 is the control: it gets every step except the heating, so its rate shows what lactase does undamaged.
b At 85 °C the extra molecular motion shakes apart the hydrogen bonds, ionic bonds, and hydrophobic clustering between R groups that hold lactase in its folded shape. The active site is made by that fold, so once it opens up lactose no longer fits, the enzyme–substrate complex does not form, and almost no glucose appears.
c Pre-treatment temperature in °C goes on the x-axis, since that is what I changed, scaled 25 to 100 °C in steps of 25; initial rate of glucose production in µmol/min goes on the y-axis, starting at 0 and running just past tube 1's rate. Both axes get the quantity and the unit. The curve stays near tube 1's rate through 45 °C, drops steeply from 45 to 85 °C, and flattens near zero at 85 and 100 °C.
d Anfinsen treated ribonuclease A with urea and β-mercaptoethanol until it lost nearly all activity, then dialyzed both reagents away, and activity returned to about 95% of the untreated control with no help from any cell. The same chain was there throughout, so the sequence was never destroyed: only the fold was, and it came back on its own.
A shallow pond and a bare granite outcrop sit side by side in a desert and receive the same sunlight through the day. Answer (a) through (d).
Describe the feature of a water molecule's structure that allows one water molecule to hydrogen-bond to as many as four neighbors.
Explain how hydrogen bonding between water molecules accounts for water's unusually high specific heat.
Water has a specific heat of 4.18 J/g·°C and granite 0.79 J/g·°C. Calculate the temperature change of a 500.0 g sample of each when it absorbs 1.045 × 104 J, showing your setup.
Using your calculated values, justify a claim about which of the two habitats offers an aquatic insect a more thermally stable daytime environment.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the molecule is bent at about 104.5°, and each O–H bond is polar covalent because oxygen pulls the shared electrons harder, leaving a partial negative charge on the oxygen and a partial positive charge on each hydrogen; because the molecule is bent those charges do not cancel, so each molecule can donate two hydrogen bonds through its two hydrogens and accept two at the oxygen's lone pairs. Do not accept: "water is polar" with no structural feature named; "water forms hydrogen bonds," which restates the stem; describing a hydrogen bond as a covalent bond between two water molecules.
(b) Accept: temperature measures average kinetic energy, and a large share of the heat added to water is consumed breaking hydrogen bonds between molecules rather than speeding molecules up, so a great deal of energy must be added per gram to raise the temperature one degree. Do not accept: "water has a high specific heat because of hydrogen bonding" with no statement of where the energy goes; confusing specific heat with heat of vaporization without linking either to bond breaking; a correct general statement never connected to water.
(c) Accept: \(\Delta T = q/(mc)\). Water: 10450/[(500.0)(4.18)] = 5.00 °C. Granite: 10450/[(500.0)(0.79)] = 26.5 °C. Both values with units and the setup shown. Do not accept: an answer with no setup; values with no units; multiplying instead of dividing by mc; a single value when two were requested.
(d) Accept: the pond, justified by the calculated values; for the same 1.045 × 104 J absorbed, the water warms only 5.00 °C while the granite warms 26.5 °C, about 5.3 times as much, because water's hydrogen-bond network absorbs energy the rock cannot. The insect in the pond therefore experiences a far smaller temperature swing over the day. Do not accept: naming the pond with no reference to the calculated values; citing the two numbers without saying which habitat they favor or why; "water has a high specific heat" alone with no evidence from (c).
Show a 4/4 response
a A water molecule is bent, with its two hydrogens about 104.5° apart, and oxygen pulls the shared electrons much harder than hydrogen does. That leaves a partial negative charge on the oxygen and a partial positive on each hydrogen, and because the shape is bent those charges do not cancel. One molecule can therefore donate two hydrogen bonds through its hydrogens and accept two at the oxygen's lone pairs.
b Temperature measures how fast molecules move, but in water much of the heat I add goes into pulling hydrogen bonds apart instead of speeding molecules up. Energy spent that way does not raise the temperature, so warming a gram of water by one degree takes an unusually large amount of heat.
c Rearranging q = mcΔT gives ΔT = q/(mc). Water: 10450/[(500.0)(4.18)] = 5.00 °C. Granite: 10450/[(500.0)(0.79)] = 26.5 °C.
d The pond is the more stable habitat. Both absorb the same 1.045 × 104 J, but the water warms only 5.00 °C while the rock warms 26.5 °C, about 5.3 times as much, because water's hydrogen bonds soak up energy granite cannot store. The insect in the pond faces a temperature swing a fifth the size of the one on the rock.
Model: a space-filling model of a 10 base-pair segment of B-form DNA, shown beside the X-ray diffraction pattern of the same form.
In the model, two sugar–phosphate backbones spiral around the outside of the molecule and the paired bases lie flat in the interior, stacked 0.34 nm apart. The model's diameter is a uniform 2.0 nm along its entire length. In the diffraction pattern, dark spots form an X across the film and the layer-line spacing corresponds to a 3.4 nm repeat. One strand of the modeled segment reads 5'-GGATCCGTAC-3'.
Using the model, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the bond that joins one nucleotide to the next within a single strand, and describe how the two strands of the model are oriented relative to each other.
Explain how the uniform 2.0 nm diameter shown in the model supports the conclusion that each base pair joins a purine to a pyrimidine.
Represent the strand complementary to 5'-GGATCCGTAC-3' with both of its ends labeled, and calculate the number of hydrogen bonds holding the 10 base-pair segment together, showing your setup.
A student claims that a 10 base-pair segment whose strand reads 5'-AATTAATTAA-3' would separate into single strands at a lower temperature than the modeled segment. Justify this claim using your calculation from (c).
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: a phosphodiester bond, joining the 3' carbon of one sugar to the phosphate on the 5' carbon of the next. The two strands are antiparallel: one runs 5' to 3' while the other runs 3' to 5', so each strand's free 5' phosphate lies opposite the other's free 3' hydroxyl. Do not accept: "hydrogen bond" or "peptide bond"; "the strands are opposite" with no statement of 5' and 3' orientation; describing the backbones as running in the same direction.
(b) Accept: a purine has two fused rings and a pyrimidine one, so a purine paired with a purine would make a rung wider than 2.0 nm and two pyrimidines would make one narrower; only a two-ring base opposite a one-ring base keeps every rung the same length, and the model shows no variation in diameter anywhere along the molecule. Do not accept: "A pairs with T and G with C" restated with no reference to ring number or to width; any explanation that appeals only to hydrogen-bond counts; a correct general statement about purines and pyrimidines that is never linked to the uniform diameter.
(c) Accept: 3'-CCTAGGCATG-5' (equivalently written 5'-GTACGGATCC-3'), with both ends labeled. Hydrogen bonds: the segment has 6 G–C pairs and 4 A–T pairs, so 6(3) + 4(2) = 18 + 8 = 26. Do not accept: an unlabeled sequence; a complement written parallel to the given strand; 20 or 30 (treating all pairs alike); a bare number with no setup; a sequence containing uracil.
(d) Accept: the all-A–T segment is held by 10 A–T pairs, or 10(2) = 20 hydrogen bonds, against the modeled segment's 26 (six fewer, about 23% fewer), because each G–C pair contributes three hydrogen bonds and each A–T pair only two. Fewer hydrogen bonds means less thermal energy is needed to pull the strands apart, so the A–T segment melts first. Do not accept: "A–T pairs are weaker" with no bond counts; repeating the claim; citing the 20 and 26 without saying what they imply about the energy required.
Show a 4/4 response
a Nucleotides within a strand are joined by phosphodiester bonds, linking the 3' carbon of one sugar to the phosphate on the 5' carbon of the next. The two strands are antiparallel: one runs 5' to 3' while the other runs 3' to 5', so a free 5' phosphate sits opposite a free 3' hydroxyl.
b Purines have two fused rings and pyrimidines one. If two purines ever paired, that rung would be wider than the rest and the molecule would bulge; two pyrimidines would pinch it in. The model is a uniform 2.0 nm wide everywhere, so every rung must be the same length, which happens only when a two-ring base pairs with a one-ring base.
c The complement is 3'-CCTAGGCATG-5'. The segment has 6 G–C pairs and 4 A–T pairs, so the hydrogen bonds come to 6(3) + 4(2) = 18 + 8 = 26.
d The claim holds. A segment of 5'-AATTAATTAA-3' is 10 A–T pairs, or 10(2) = 20 hydrogen bonds, against the modeled segment's 26: six fewer, about 23% fewer, since G–C pairs bring three bonds each and A–T pairs two. Separating the strands means breaking all of them, so the segment with fewer needs less thermal energy and melts first.
Data: fatty acid composition of the membrane phospholipids of rainbow trout held for six weeks at two water temperatures, as a percent of total fatty acids.
Fatty acids (% of total)
Trout at 5 °C
Trout at 20 °C
Saturated
34
55
Monounsaturated
30
27
Polyunsaturated
36
18
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the percent of fatty acids that are unsaturated in each group of trout, and describe the trend in the data.
Explain how the number of cis double bonds in a fatty acid tail is related to the fluidity of the membrane that tail sits in.
Calculate the ratio of unsaturated to saturated fatty acids for each acclimation temperature, showing your setup.
A student claims that trout acclimated to 12 °C would have a percent of unsaturated fatty acids between the two values you found in (a). Justify this claim using the data and the relationship you described in (b).
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: unsaturated = monounsaturated + polyunsaturated, so 30 + 36 = 66% at 5 °C and 27 + 18 = 45% at 20 °C; the trend is that the percent of unsaturated fatty acids falls, by 21 percentage points, as acclimation temperature rises, with the polyunsaturated fraction accounting for most of the change (36% to 18%). Do not accept: reporting only the saturated percentages; giving the two values with no trend stated; "the fatty acids change" with no direction; adding the columns incorrectly.
(b) Accept: a cis double bond puts a permanent kink in the hydrocarbon tail, so neighboring tails cannot stack closely; fewer attractions form between them, the phospholipids move past one another more easily, and the bilayer stays fluid at lower temperatures. More double bonds means more kinks and a more fluid membrane at any given temperature. Do not accept: "unsaturated fats are liquid" with no mechanism; describing the double bond as making the tail itself more flexible without reference to packing between tails; any statement about fluidity that is never tied to the tails' arrangement.
(c) Accept: at 5 °C, 66/34 = 1.94; at 20 °C, 45/55 = 0.82. Setups shown; two significant figures or better acceptable. Do not accept: inverted ratios presented as unsaturated to saturated; one ratio when two were asked for; a ratio with no setup; use of only the polyunsaturated row.
(d) Accept: the claim is supported because 12 °C lies between the two tested temperatures and the data show a consistent inverse relationship, 66% unsaturated at 5 °C and 45% at 20 °C, so a fish held between those temperatures needs a membrane that is fluid enough for 12 °C but not so fluid as it would be at 5 °C, giving an intermediate value. Do not accept: "yes, because it is in the middle" with no reference to the data or the mechanism; asserting a specific number with no reasoning; restating the relationship from (b) with no connection to the claim about 12 °C.
Show a 4/4 response
a Adding the monounsaturated and polyunsaturated rows, the 5 °C trout are 30 + 36 = 66% unsaturated and the 20 °C trout are 27 + 18 = 45%. Unsaturated fatty acids drop by 21 percentage points as the water warms, and most of that comes from the polyunsaturated fraction falling from 36% to 18%.
b Every cis double bond puts a fixed kink in the tail, and kinked tails cannot pack tightly against their neighbors. With fewer attractions holding them the phospholipids slide past each other more easily, so a membrane with more double bonds stays fluid at a lower temperature than one built from straight saturated tails.
c At 5 °C the ratio of unsaturated to saturated is 66/34 = 1.94. At 20 °C it is 45/55 = 0.82.
d I agree. The data show an inverse relationship between temperature and unsaturation, 66% at 5 °C against 45% at 20 °C, because cold would stiffen a saturated membrane into a gel, so a cold fish needs kinks to stay fluid. At 12 °C that pressure is real but milder than at 5 °C, which puts the trout's unsaturated percentage between the two measured values.
A cell assembles a polypeptide from 40 glycine monomers (M = 75.07 g/mol). Water has M = 18.02 g/mol. Answer (a) through (d).
Identify the reaction that joins two glycine monomers, and describe what happens to the atoms that are removed from them.
Explain why the molar mass of the finished polypeptide is lower than the combined molar mass of 40 free glycine molecules.
Calculate the molar mass of the finished polypeptide, showing your setup.
A protease completely hydrolyzes the polypeptide back to free glycine. Justify a claim about how the total mass of dissolved solute changes, using your calculation from (c).
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: dehydration synthesis (condensation), forming a peptide bond between the carboxyl group of one glycine and the amino group of the next; the, OH taken from one monomer and the, H taken from the other combine and leave as a molecule of water. Do not accept: "hydrolysis"; naming the reaction with no account of the removed atoms; saying atoms are "lost" or "destroyed" rather than released as water.
(b) Accept: each of the 39 bonds formed removes one whole water molecule from the chain, so the polymer's mass is the summed monomer mass minus the mass of the water released; the missing mass is not destroyed but has left the molecule as H2O. Do not accept: "some mass is lost" with no identification of water as what left; an answer that describes the reaction but never addresses mass; claiming the bond itself has negative mass or that atoms disappear.
(c) Accept: 40 residues require 39 bonds, so 40(75.07) − 39(18.02) = 3002.80 − 702.78 = 2300.02 g/mol. Setup shown and units given. Do not accept: 40 waters subtracted (2282.00); no water subtracted (3002.80); water added (3705.58); a value with no setup or no units.
(d) Accept: the total solute mass rises, from 2300.02 g/mol of polypeptide to 40(75.07) = 3002.80 g/mol of free glycine, an increase of 702.78 g/mol: exactly the 39(18.02) g/mol of water subtracted in (c). The justification is that hydrolysis inserts one water molecule at each of the 39 bonds, transferring mass from the solvent into the solutes rather than creating it. Do not accept: "the mass increases" with no value or no mechanism; claiming mass is created; claiming the total is unchanged; citing the numbers without explaining where the added mass came from.
Show a 4/4 response
a The two glycines are joined by dehydration synthesis, which forms a peptide bond between the carboxyl group of one and the amino group of the other. An, OH comes off one monomer and an, H off the other, and those atoms leave together as one molecule of water.
b Building a chain of 40 residues takes 39 bonds, and every bond costs one whole water molecule that used to be part of the monomers. The mass is not gone, it walked away as H2O, but it is no longer counted in the polymer, so the finished chain weighs less than the 40 separate glycines did.
c Forty residues means 39 peptide bonds, so the molar mass is 40(75.07) − 39(18.02) = 3002.80 − 702.78 = 2300.02 g/mol.
d The total dissolved solute mass goes up, from 2300.02 g/mol of polypeptide to 40(75.07) = 3002.80 g/mol of free glycine, a gain of 702.78 g/mol. That figure is exactly the 39(18.02) g/mol I subtracted in (c), which is my evidence for what is happening: hydrolysis puts one water molecule back into each of the 39 bonds, so the mass is transferred out of the solvent and into the solutes instead of being created.
Lesson 2.1 · Unit 2 · CED topics 2.1–2.2
Subcellular components and their functions
A eukaryotic cell is not a bag of enzymes. It is a factory with rooms,
and each room is a membrane-bounded compartment that holds one set of
reactions at one pH with one crew of enzymes. Learn the rooms and you can
predict what a cell does for a living just by looking at what it has a
lot of.
That is the skill the exam tests. It rarely asks you to list organelles;
it hands you a cell and asks you to explain why its structure
fits its function.
Definition
Ribosomes: rRNA and protein, no membrane; free ones make cytosolic protein, bound ones make protein for export.
Rough ER: ribosome-studded sheets that fold and glycosylate proteins headed out of the cell.
Smooth ER: makes lipids and steroids, stores Ca2+, detoxifies drugs.
Golgi: stacked cisternae; takes cargo in at the cis face, tags it, buds it off the trans face.
Lysosomes and vacuoles: hydrolases at pH ≈ 5 digest worn organelles; a plant's central vacuole stores water and pushes on the wall.
Mitochondria and chloroplasts: double membranes, circular DNA, folded interiors (cristae; thylakoids in grana) that pack in membrane area.
Nucleus and nucleolus: a pored double membrane gating RNA out and protein in; the nucleolus builds ribosomal subunits.
Cytoskeleton and cell wall: microtubules, microfilaments, and intermediate filaments for shape and transport; cellulose in plants, peptidoglycan in bacteria.
Model
The endomembrane system is an assembly line, and the
order matters: ribosome on the rough ER → ER lumen → transport vesicle
→ Golgi cis to trans → secretory vesicle → plasma
membrane. Prokaryotes run the same chemistry without
the rooms: no nucleus, no membrane-bound organelles, 70S ribosomes, a
circular chromosome in a nucleoid, and a size of 1–5 µm against a
eukaryote's 10–100 µm, a gap the next lesson explains.
Worked example · Reading an organelle inventory
Values are percent of cell volume. Identify which cell is a pancreatic
acinar cell, which a liver cell, and which cardiac muscle, and justify
each call.
Structure (% of cell volume)
Cell A
Cell B
Cell C
Rough ER
22
9
1
Smooth ER
1
16
3
Mitochondria
8
18
36
Secretory vesicles
20
1
0
Cell A is the pancreatic acinar cell: 22% rough ER with 20% secretory
vesicles is a cell built to make and export protein. Cell B is the liver
cell: its smooth ER is 16 times Cell A's, and smooth ER is where lipids
are made and drugs detoxified. Cell C is cardiac muscle: mitochondria at
36% of volume, 4.5 times Cell A's, because a contracting heart never
stops spending ATP. Naming the organelle is identify; the
justify point comes from tying the number to the job.
Worked example · Palade's pulse-chase
Question: in what order does a secreted protein visit the
compartments? George Palade fed guinea pig pancreas cells ³H-leucine for
three minutes (the pulse), washed it out and replaced it with unlabeled
leucine (the chase), then fractionated cells at intervals and counted
the label in each fraction.
Minutes after the pulse
3
7
20
60
Rough ER (% of label)
84
41
15
6
Golgi (% of label)
12
47
39
12
Secretory granules (% of label)
4
12
46
82
The independent variable is chase time; the
dependent variable is percent of total label per
fraction; the control is a parallel sample never given
³H-leucine, fixing the background count. Each column sums to 100%, so
label is being relocated, not made and destroyed, and the peak
moves rough ER → Golgi → secretory granules. Conclusion,
justified: the compartments act in series, because no fraction
peaks before the one upstream of it does.
Practice
A plasma cell secretes thousands of antibody molecules per second. Describe two features of its cytoplasm you would expect under a microscope, and explain what each one does.
Show answer
Expect abundant rough ER and a large Golgi. The rough ER is where ribosomes deposit the growing antibody chains into the lumen for folding, disulfide bonding, and glycosylation; the Golgi then tags the finished protein and buds it into secretory vesicles. "It has lots of organelles" is not a description: a description states a specific feature, and the explanation must say what that feature does.
A second pulse-chase run gave the values below. Identify the compartment each row must be, and describe the evidence.
Minutes after the pulse
2
10
30
Fraction X (% of label)
8
49
25
Fraction Y (% of label)
90
38
10
Fraction Z (% of label)
2
13
65
Show answer
Y is the rough ER: it holds 90% of the label at 2 minutes, so it is where the labeled amino acid is first built into protein. X is the Golgi, peaking at 49% at 10 minutes, after Y has fallen and before Z has risen. Z is the secretory granule fraction, at 65% by 30 minutes and still climbing. The evidence is the order of the peaks, not the size of any one number: each column sums to 100%, so a rise in one fraction is a transfer out of another.
A drug blocks vesicles from budding off the trans face of the Golgi. Predict what the 60-minute column of Palade's table would look like in treated cells, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: at 60 minutes most of the label sits in the Golgi fraction rather than in granules; roughly the reverse of the untreated 12% Golgi and 82% granules. Justification: the compartments act in series, so blocking the last step leaves the upstream steps running and cargo piles up immediately before the block; label still leaves the rough ER normally, because that transfer is upstream of the drug's target. "Secretion decreases" gives a direction but names no compartment, so it is not specific enough for the point.
Lesson 2.2 · Unit 2 · CED topic 2.3
Cell size and the surface area-to-volume ratio
Why is there no elephant-sized amoeba? Because everything a cell needs
has to cross its surface, and everything it needs the material
for is spread through its volume. Volume grows as the cube of
length while surface grows only as the square, so a cell that doubles in
width doubles its demand relative to its supply.
Formula
\[ \text{cube: } SA = 6s^2,\quad V = s^3,\quad \frac{SA}{V} = \frac{6}{s} \]
\[ \text{sphere: } SA = 4\pi r^2,\quad V = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi r^3,\quad \frac{SA}{V} = \frac{3}{r} \]
Both ratios have the linear dimension in the denominator, so
SA:V falls as anything gets bigger, whatever its
shape. Diffusion makes it worse: the time for a molecule to diffuse a
distance \(d\) scales with \(d^2\), so doubling the radius quadruples
the trip to the center.
Rule
A cell that needs more exchange keeps the same volume and buys back
surface area by changing shape: microvilli on
an intestinal cell, root hairs on a plant epidermal
cell, the flattened biconcave disc of a red blood cell, the long thin
body of a neuron, and, inside the cell, the folded
cristae of a mitochondrion and the stacked thylakoids
of a chloroplast. The same rule runs upward: a mouse loses heat across a
much higher SA:V than an elephant, so its metabolic rate per gram is
far higher.
Worked example · Three cubes and a sphere
Compute surface area, volume, and SA:V for cubes of side 1, 2, and 4 units, then for a sphere of radius 1.
Cube side \(s\)
1
2
4
Surface area \(6s^2\)
6
24
96
Volume \(s^3\)
1
8
64
SA:V
6.0
3.0
1.5
Surface area went up 16-fold from \(s=1\) to \(s=4\), volume 64-fold,
and SA:V fell to a quarter. For the sphere,
\(SA = 4\pi(1)^2 = 12.57\) and \(V = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi(1)^3 = 4.19\), so
\(SA/V = 3.00\): identical to the cube of side 2. Shape alone does not
rescue a cell; size is what sets the ceiling.
Worked example · The agar cube lab
Cubes of agar containing phenolphthalein are soaked in NaOH, which
turns the agar pink where it reaches. After 10 minutes the NaOH has
penetrated 0.5 cm on every face. What percent of each cube's volume has
been reached?
The unreacted core is a cube of side \(s - 2(0.5) = s - 1\), so
\[ \text{percent reached} = \left(1 - \frac{(s-1)^3}{s^3}\right) \times 100. \]
For \(s = 1\): 100%. For \(s = 2\): \(1 - 1/8 = 87.5\%\). For
\(s = 3\): \(1 - 8/27 = 70.4\%\). For \(s = 4\): \(1 - 27/64 = 57.8\%\).
The independent variable is cube side length, the
dependent variable is percent of volume reached, and
soak time is held constant. Note what stays fixed: the NaOH always
travels 0.5 cm. Big cubes do worse not because diffusion slows but
because the interior they must supply grew faster than the surface did.
Practice
Describe one structural adaptation of a cell lining the small intestine, and explain how it solves the problem this lesson describes.
Show answer
Microvilli: hundreds of thin finger-like projections of the plasma membrane on the cell's apical face. They add surface area without adding much volume, so the cell's SA:V rises and far more transport protein can be packed into the absorbing surface. Since nutrient uptake is limited by membrane area while the cell's metabolic demand scales with its volume, raising area alone raises the supply-to-demand ratio. Naming the structure is identify; the point for explain requires the area-per-volume argument.
A cell of volume 27 µm³ is remodeled from a 3 × 3 × 3 cube into a flattened 9 × 1 × 3 sheet. Calculate the SA:V before and after, and describe what changed.
Show answer
Cube: \(SA = 6(3^2) = 54\) µm², \(V = 27\) µm³, so SA:V = 2.0 µm⁻¹. Sheet: \(SA = 2(9\cdot3 + 9\cdot1 + 3\cdot1) = 2(39) = 78\) µm², same \(V = 27\) µm³, so SA:V = \(78/27 = 2.89\) µm⁻¹. The volume is unchanged and the surface area rose by a factor of \(78/54 = 1.44\), so SA:V rose 44%. Flattening also shortens the longest diffusion path from the surface to the center, which matters because diffusion time scales with the square of distance.
Two agar cubes, one 2 cm on a side and one 6 cm on a side, are soaked in NaOH for the same 10 minutes, giving the same 0.5 cm penetration. Predict the percent of each cube reached, and justify why a real cell 6 cm across could not survive.
Show answer
Prediction: the 2 cm cube is \(1 - 1^3/2^3 = 87.5\%\) reached; the 6 cm cube is \(1 - 5^3/6^3 = 1 - 125/216 = 42.1\%\) reached. Justification: the NaOH front advanced the same 0.5 cm into both, but the 6 cm cube's volume is 27 times larger, so the same shell of reacted agar covers a far smaller fraction of it. A cell that size would leave more than half its cytoplasm unsupplied with oxygen and nutrients and unable to clear waste, because its SA:V (\(6/6 = 1.0\)) is a sixth of the 2 cm cube's (\(6/2 = 3.0\)). The justification point needs the ratio or the unreached fraction named, not just "it is too big."
Lesson 2.3 · Unit 2 · CED topics 2.4–2.5
Plasma membrane structure and selective permeability
The membrane is the reason a cell can have an inside at all. It is about
7–8 nm thick, and its whole job is to be picky: some molecules stroll
through, others cannot cross without help, and a few never cross at all.
Which is which follows from two properties of the molecule: its size and
whether it is charged or polar.
Model
In the fluid mosaic model, phospholipids form a
bilayer with hydrophilic phosphate heads facing the watery cytosol and
extracellular fluid and hydrophobic tails buried between them.
Integral proteins span the bilayer with hydrophobic
stretches embedded in the core; peripheral proteins sit
on one face. Cholesterol wedges between tails and
buffers fluidity in both directions: it blocks tight packing in the
cold and restrains motion in the heat. Glycoproteins
and glycolipids carry sugar chains on the outer face
for cell–cell recognition. "Fluid" means the components drift laterally;
"mosaic" means the proteins are scattered, not layered on.
Rule
Selective permeability: the hydrophobic core is the
filter. Small nonpolar molecules (O2, CO2,
N2, steroid hormones) dissolve straight through. Small
uncharged polar molecules (H2O, urea) trickle through slowly.
Large polar molecules (glucose, amino acids) and all ions
(Na+, K+, Cl−, H+) are
blocked and need a protein. An ion's hydration shell is the reason: to
enter the core it would have to shed the water molecules holding it,
which costs far more energy than it has.
Worked example · Two experiments that built the model
Gorter and Grendel, 1925. From 1.0 mL of blood they took
\(4.7 \times 10^{9}\) red cells of surface area 99 µm² each, extracted
the lipids, and spread them as a single layer on water, covering
0.92 m². Total cell surface area is
\[ (4.7\times10^{9})(99\ \mu\mathrm{m}^2) = 4.65\times10^{11}\ \mu\mathrm{m}^2 = 0.465\ \mathrm{m}^2, \]
and \(0.92/0.465 = 1.98\): the lipid covers about twice the cell's
surface, so the membrane is two molecules thick.
Frye and Edidin, 1970. A mouse cell and a human cell were
fused; mouse surface proteins were tagged with a green marker and human
ones with red. The independent variable is time after
fusion, the dependent variable is the percent of hybrid
cells with the two colors fully intermixed, and unfused cells are the
control. Mixing rose from 0% at fusion to about 90% by
40 minutes at 37 °C. Conclusion, justified: membrane proteins
diffuse laterally, because the colors could not redistribute in a rigid
sheet.
Worked example · Ranking solutes by permeability
Measured permeability coefficients for a pure lipid bilayer. Explain the ranking.
Solute
H2O
Urea
Glucose
Cl−
Na+
Permeability (cm/s)
10−3
10−6
10−7
10−11
10−14
Water is \(10^{-3}/10^{-14} = 10^{11}\) times as permeant as
Na+. Water and urea are small and uncharged, so a few slip
through despite being polar. Glucose is uncharged too but much larger,
costing it a factor of 10 against urea. The two ions fall off a cliff
because charge, not size, is the barrier: Na+ is far smaller
than glucose yet \(10^{7}\) times less permeant. O2 and
CO2 sit above water on this list: small and
nonpolar.
Practice
Describe where cholesterol sits in an animal cell membrane, and explain why removing it would hurt a cell at 10 °C as well as one at 40 °C.
Show answer
Cholesterol sits within the bilayer, its rigid ring system wedged between neighboring phospholipid tails. At 10 °C it prevents the tails from packing into a tight, ordered gel, so the membrane stays fluid enough for transport proteins to work; at 40 °C it restrains tail motion and keeps the bilayer from becoming too fluid and leaky. Remove it and the cell fails at both ends: solid in the cold, leaky in the heat. Calling cholesterol a "fluidity buffer" is the term, not the explanation; the point comes from naming both effects.
Using the permeability table above, identify which two solutes must have a transport protein to enter a cell at any useful rate, and describe the evidence for your choice.
Show answer
Cl− and Na+, at \(10^{-11}\) and \(10^{-14}\) cm/s. The evidence is the size of the gap: they are 4 and 7 orders of magnitude below glucose and 8 and 11 below water, so unassisted flux is effectively zero on a cellular timescale. Glucose at \(10^{-7}\) cm/s is also far too slow for a cell that needs it and does in fact use GLUT carriers, but the table's clean break is between the uncharged solutes and the ions: charge, not size, produces the cliff.
Frye and Edidin repeated the fusion experiment at 0 °C instead of 37 °C. Predict what happens to the percent of hybrid cells showing intermixed markers at 40 minutes, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: far fewer than 90%; intermixing is greatly slowed, and most hybrids still show separate green and red halves at 40 minutes. Justification: lateral diffusion of membrane proteins is driven by thermal motion, and cooling lowers kinetic energy; worse, at 0 °C the saturated tails pack tightly and the bilayer approaches a gel, so proteins cannot move through it. The control comparison matters: the same cells at 37 °C reached 90%, so temperature is the only variable that changed. "The membrane freezes" is a claim with no mechanism and earns no justification point.
Lesson 2.4 · Unit 2 · CED topics 2.6–2.7
Passive transport: diffusion, osmosis, and facilitated diffusion
Nothing in this lesson costs the cell a molecule of ATP. A concentration
gradient is stored free energy, and when particles spread out they are
spending it: moving to the more probable, higher-entropy arrangement.
The cell's only decision is whether to open a door.
Definition
Diffusion is net movement of a solute from higher to
lower concentration until the gradient is gone. At that point movement
does not stop: molecules keep crossing in both directions at equal
rates, which is dynamic equilibrium.
Osmosis is the diffusion of water across a
selectively permeable membrane, from the side with less dissolved
solute toward the side with more. Passive transport is passive because
it runs down the gradient; the free energy released is what drives it.
Rule
Simple diffusion sends small nonpolar molecules
directly through the bilayer, and its rate is proportional to the
gradient with no upper limit. Facilitated diffusion
uses proteins and is still passive: channel proteins
form a hydrophilic pore (ion channels; aquaporins, which
pass up to \(3 \times 10^{9}\) water molecules per second), while
carrier proteins bind the solute and change shape
around it. Because there is a fixed number of proteins and each takes
time per cycle, facilitated diffusion saturates. Simple
diffusion never does.
Worked example · Dialysis bags and percent change in mass
Six dialysis bags were each filled with the same 0.4 M sucrose solution
and placed in beakers of different sucrose concentrations for 30 minutes.
Beaker [sucrose] (M)
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Initial mass (g)
12.02
11.95
12.10
12.06
11.98
12.14
Final mass (g)
13.55
12.68
12.11
11.42
10.99
10.83
% change in mass
+12.73
+6.11
+0.08
−5.31
−8.26
−10.79
\[ \%\ \text{change} = \frac{m_f - m_i}{m_i}\times 100 \]
so the 0.0 M bag is \((13.55-12.02)/12.02 \times 100 = +12.73\%\) and
the 0.6 M bag is \((11.42-12.06)/12.06 \times 100 = -5.31\%\). Graph it
with beaker molarity on the x-axis from 0.0 to 1.0 and percent change on
the y-axis from −12 to +14: the points fall in a nearly straight line
and cross zero at 0.4 M. That crossing is the answer, no net
water movement means the beaker matches the bag, and the bag
holds 0.4 M. Divide by initial mass, never by final; bags start at
different masses on purpose.
Worked example · Why one curve plateaus
Glucose uptake by red blood cells, and by artificial vesicles with no proteins, at 37 °C.
[Glucose] outside (mM)
1
2
5
10
20
40
Red cells (µmol/min)
18
32
60
76
84
86
Protein-free vesicles (µmol/min)
1.0
2.0
5.0
10.0
20.0
40.0
The vesicle row is a straight line through the origin: 1.0 µmol/min per
mM at every concentration, because simple diffusion depends only on the
gradient. The red-cell row rises steeply, bends, and flattens near
86 µmol/min, at 40 mM it is only \(86/40 = 2.15\) times the vesicle
rate, against \(18/1.0 = 18\) times at 1 mM. Explain the
plateau by naming the limit: every GLUT carrier is occupied, so adding
substrate cannot add rate. Note that this is still passive: glucose
moves down its gradient and no ATP is hydrolyzed.
Practice
A kidney cell membrane is loaded with aquaporins. Describe what an aquaporin does, and explain why water still crosses a membrane that has none.
Show answer
An aquaporin is an integral channel protein whose pore is lined so that a single file of water molecules passes through while ions, including H+, are excluded. It raises the rate of osmosis enormously but does not change its direction, because it is a passive channel. Water still crosses a bare bilayer because it is small and uncharged, so a little of it dissolves through the hydrophobic core: the measured permeability is about \(10^{-3}\) cm/s, low but not zero. Saying aquaporins "pump water" is wrong: no ATP is used and water only moves down its own potential gradient.
Using the glucose table above, calculate how many times faster the red cells take up glucose than the vesicles at 2 mM and at 20 mM, and describe what the change in that ratio shows.
Show answer
At 2 mM: \(32/2.0 = 16\) times faster. At 20 mM: \(84/20 = 4.2\) times faster. The advantage of having carriers shrinks by roughly a factor of 4 as concentration rises tenfold. That happens because the carrier route is approaching its ceiling (84 of a maximum near 86) while the simple-diffusion route keeps climbing in direct proportion to the gradient. A description that only says "the red cells are faster" misses the trend the data were built to show.
A drug doubles the number of GLUT carriers in the red cell membrane, changing nothing else. Predict the uptake rate at 40 mM and at 1 mM, and justify each prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: at 40 mM the rate roughly doubles, from 86 to about 172 µmol/min; at 1 mM it also roughly doubles, from 18 to about 36 µmol/min. Justification: the plateau is set by the number of carriers times the rate each can cycle, so doubling the carriers doubles the maximum. At 1 mM the carriers are far from saturated and each one works independently of the others, so twice as many transporters handle twice as much glucose per minute. What does not change is the direction: glucose still moves only down its concentration gradient, because adding carriers adds no energy.
Lesson 2.5 · Unit 2 · CED topic 2.8
Water potential, tonicity, and osmoregulation
"Water moves toward the saltier side" is fine until a plant cell pushes
back with its wall. Water potential, written Ψ (psi), is the bookkeeping
that handles both effects at once: it combines how much solute a
compartment holds with how hard it is being squeezed, and water always
moves from higher Ψ to lower Ψ.
Formula
\[ \Psi = \Psi_p + \Psi_s \qquad \Psi_s = -iCRT \]
Ψp is pressure potential (0 in an open beaker, positive
inside a turgid plant cell); Ψs is solute potential, always
negative or zero. In Ψs, \(i\) is the ionization constant
(1 for sucrose and glucose, 2 for NaCl, 3 for CaCl2), \(C\)
is molarity, \(R = 0.0831\) L·bar/(mol·K), and \(T\) is temperature in
kelvin (°C + 273). Pure water in an open container has
Ψ = 0 bars, which is the highest value there is: adding solute can only
pull Ψ down.
Definition
Tonicity compares a solution to the cell in it. In a
hypertonic solution (lower Ψ outside) water leaves: an
animal cell shrivels, or crenates; a plant cell's membrane
pulls away from its wall in plasmolysis. In a
hypotonic solution water enters: an animal cell swells
and can lyse, while a plant cell becomes
turgid as the wall builds up Ψp and stops
the influx. Isotonic means no net movement.
Osmoregulation is the work of staying alive anyway: a
Paramecium's contractile vacuole bails out incoming fresh water
using ATP, and vertebrate kidneys adjust water reabsorption under ADH.
Worked example · Two solutions, one answer
Calculate Ψs for 0.15 M NaCl and for 0.30 M sucrose, both at 22 °C in open beakers.
\(T = 22 + 273 = 295\) K. For NaCl, \(i = 2\):
\[ \Psi_s = -(2)(0.15)(0.0831)(295) = -7.35\ \text{bars} \]
For sucrose, \(i = 1\):
\[ \Psi_s = -(1)(0.30)(0.0831)(295) = -7.35\ \text{bars} \]
Both beakers are open, so Ψp = 0 and Ψ = −7.35 bars for each.
The solutions are isotonic to one another even though one is half the
molarity, because NaCl dissociates into Na+ and
Cl− and it is the count of dissolved particles that sets
Ψs. Forgetting \(i\), or leaving \(T\) in °C, is the single
most common way students lose this calculation.
Worked example · Finding a potato's solute potential
Potato cores were weighed, soaked 24 hours at 22 °C, and reweighed.
[Sucrose] (M)
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
% change in mass
+14.7
+9.5
+4.8
−1.2
−6.9
−11.8
Plot molarity on the x-axis and percent change on the y-axis from −14 to
+16, draw the best-fit line, and read where it crosses zero. Between
0.2 M (+4.8) and 0.3 M (−1.2) the line falls 6.0 percentage points, so
the crossing sits \(4.8/6.0 = 0.80\) of the way across:
\[ 0.2 + (0.80)(0.1) = 0.28\ \mathrm{M}. \]
At zero net mass change the core and the bath are in equilibrium, so
the cells' Ψs equals the 0.28 M sucrose solution's:
\[ \Psi_s = -(1)(0.28)(0.0831)(295) = -6.86\ \text{bars}. \]
In an open beaker that solution has Ψ = −6.86 bars, so the cores' Ψ is
−6.86 bars too.
Practice
Calculate the solute potential of 0.20 M NaCl at 25 °C, and identify the water potential of that solution sitting in an open beaker.
Show answer
\(T = 25 + 273 = 298\) K and \(i = 2\) for NaCl, so \(\Psi_s = -(2)(0.20)(0.0831)(298) = -9.91\) bars. In an open beaker Ψp = 0, so \(\Psi = 0 + (-9.91) = -9.91\) bars. Units are part of the answer: an unlabeled "9.91" does not earn the calculation point, and neither does a positive value, because Ψs can never exceed zero.
A plant cell has Ψs = −4.0 bars and Ψp = 1.5 bars. It is placed in an open beaker of solution whose Ψs is −3.0 bars. Calculate both water potentials and describe the direction of net water movement.
Show answer
Cell: \(\Psi = 1.5 + (-4.0) = -2.5\) bars. Solution: Ψp = 0 in an open beaker, so \(\Psi = -3.0\) bars. Water moves from higher Ψ to lower Ψ, and −2.5 is higher than −3.0, so water leaves the cell and enters the solution. As it goes the cell loses volume, Ψp falls, and the cell moves toward plasmolysis. Comparing solute potentials alone would have given the wrong answer here: the cell's turgor pressure is what flips the comparison.
A Paramecium living in pond water is transferred to a solution that is isotonic with its cytoplasm. Predict what happens to the rate at which its contractile vacuole fills and discharges, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the rate falls sharply, toward zero. Justification: pond water is hypotonic to the cytoplasm, its Ψ is close to 0 bars while the cell's is well below that, so water enters continuously by osmosis, and the contractile vacuole must collect and expel it at an ATP cost or the cell would lyse. In an isotonic medium the two water potentials are equal, there is no net influx, and there is nothing to bail. Note the predicted direction is what earns the point; adding that ATP use also drops is the kind of specific consequence that earns the justification.
Lesson 2.6 · Unit 2 · CED topics 2.9–2.11
Active transport, bulk transport, and compartmentalization
Every gradient in the last two lessons was something the cell spent down.
This lesson is how it builds them back. Moving a solute against
its gradient lowers entropy locally, so it cannot happen for free: the
cell pays, directly with ATP or indirectly with a gradient it made
earlier.
Definition
Primary active transport hydrolyzes ATP at the
transport protein itself. The sodium–potassium pump
moves 3 Na+ out and 2 K+ in per ATP; a
proton pump drives H+ across to acidify a
lysosome or charge a thylakoid. Secondary active transport
spends no ATP directly: a cotransporter lets
Na+ or H+ fall back down its gradient and uses
that free energy to haul a second solute uphill, as SGLT1 does with
glucose in the intestine. What the pump really builds is an
electrochemical gradient: a difference in both
concentration and charge across the membrane.
Model
Anything too big for a protein moves in a vesicle.
Endocytosis comes in three forms:
phagocytosis (a macrophage engulfing a bacterium),
pinocytosis (nonspecific gulps of extracellular fluid),
and receptor-mediated endocytosis, where ligands bind
receptors in a coated pit so the cell takes in exactly what it wants.
Exocytosis fuses a vesicle with the plasma membrane to
release cargo. All of it costs ATP. And this is what
compartments buy: lysosomes hold pH 5 next to a
cytosol at pH 7.2, enzymes and substrates sit concentrated in a small
volume instead of dilute in a large one, and incompatible reactions run
at the same moment a membrane apart.
Worked example · The cost of a resting neuron
A neuron exports \(6.0 \times 10^{8}\) Na+ per second to hold
its resting gradients. Find the ATP spent per second, the K+
imported, and the net charge moved per cycle.
Each ATP drives one cycle of 3 Na+ out and 2 K+ in,
so
\[ \text{ATP/s} = \frac{6.0\times10^{8}}{3} = 2.0\times10^{8} \]
and the same cycles import \(2 \times 2.0\times10^{8} =
4.0\times10^{8}\) K+ per second, moving 5 ions per ATP. Per
cycle the charge balance is \(+3\) out against \(+2\) in, a
net of one positive charge exported, which is
\(2.0\times10^{8}\) charges per second. That is why the pump is called
electrogenic: it leaves the inside slightly more negative and
contributes a few millivolts to the resting membrane potential on top of
the gradients it maintains.
Worked example · Where the compartments came from
Describe the endosymbiotic theory and the evidence a
grader expects with it.
The model: an ancestral host cell engulfed an aerobic bacterium that was
not digested but retained, becoming the mitochondrion; later, one such
lineage engulfed a photosynthetic cyanobacterium, becoming the
chloroplast. Four observations are predictions of that model rather than
of any alternative. Double membranes: the inner is the
bacterium's own, the outer the host's engulfing vesicle.
Circular DNA with no histones, organized the way a
bacterial chromosome is and not like the host's linear chromosomes.
70S ribosomes, the bacterial size, while the
surrounding cytosol runs 80S ones. Binary fission:
these organelles divide on their own schedule and cannot be built from
scratch. Listing the four features is describe; the
justification is saying that each is what the model predicts
and a non-symbiotic origin does not.
Practice
A liver cell takes in cholesterol-carrying LDL particles but ignores most other material in the blood. Identify the process and explain how the cell achieves that selectivity.
Show answer
Receptor-mediated endocytosis. LDL particles bind specific LDL receptors clustered in a coated pit on the membrane's outer face; the pit invaginates and pinches off as a vesicle carrying the bound cargo inside. Selectivity comes from the receptor's shape being complementary to the ligand, so only LDL is concentrated in the pit: fluid and unbound solutes come along only incidentally. The process costs ATP and the membrane is recycled back to the surface. "The cell absorbs it" names no structure and earns nothing.
Intestinal cells were assayed for glucose uptake under three conditions. Using the data, identify which transport mechanism moves glucose across the apical membrane and describe the evidence.
Condition
Normal Na+ gradient
Na+ removed from medium
Ouabain added 30 min
Glucose uptake (nmol/min per mg protein)
46
4
6
Show answer
Secondary active transport by Na+–glucose cotransport. Evidence: removing Na+ cuts uptake from 46 to 4 nmol/min per mg, a drop to about one eleventh (\(46/4 = 11.5\)), so glucose entry depends on Na+ moving in alongside it. Ouabain does not touch the cotransporter, it inhibits the sodium–potassium pump, yet uptake still collapses to 6. That is the decisive result: with the pump stopped the Na+ gradient runs down, and with no gradient there is no free energy to drive glucose uphill.
An antibiotic that binds 70S ribosomes and blocks translation is applied to cultured human cells. Predict its effect on cytosolic protein synthesis and on mitochondrial protein synthesis, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: cytosolic protein synthesis continues at close to normal rate, while protein synthesis inside the mitochondria is inhibited, so over time the cells' ATP output falls. Justification: the endosymbiotic theory holds that mitochondria descend from an engulfed bacterium, and the evidence for that includes their bacterial-type 70S ribosomes; the cell's own cytosolic ribosomes are 80S and are not the drug's target. The prediction earns its point because it is specific about direction in both compartments, and the justification earns its point by naming the 70S-versus-80S evidence rather than just asserting a shared ancestry.
Unit 2 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 2 quiz: Cell Structure and Function
Fifteen multiple-choice items and five short free-response questions on organelles and the endomembrane system, surface area-to-volume constraints, membrane structure, passive and active transport, water potential, and the endosymbiotic origin of compartments: click an option to see why each choice is right or wrong, and write each FRQ out before opening the model response.
Multiple choice
Data: the volume occupied by four structures in three mammalian cell types, as a percent of total cell volume.
Structure (% of cell volume)
Cell D
Cell E
Cell F
Rough ER
25
3
7
Smooth ER
2
4
19
Mitochondria
7
32
15
Secretory vesicles
18
0
1
Which claim is best supported by the data?
Ribosomes on the rough ER deposit proteins destined for export into the ER lumen, and secretory vesicles carry the finished product to the plasma membrane. Cell D devotes 25% plus 18% of its volume to those two steps, more than five times cell F's combined 8%, which is what a plasma cell or a pancreatic acinar cell looks like inside.
A secretory cell is full of loaded vesicles, not empty of them; cell E has none at all. Its 32% mitochondria, more than four times cell D's, points instead to a cell that spends ATP continuously, such as cardiac muscle.
Cell F's 7% rough ER does exceed cell E's 3%, but that is not evidence of specialization when cell D's is 25%. Cell F's real signature is 19% smooth ER against only 1% secretory vesicles, which fits lipid synthesis and drug detoxification in a liver cell rather than protein export.
Every cell needs some rough ER for membrane and lysosomal proteins, so its mere presence says nothing about rate. The data are given as percentages precisely so that the proportion of the cell devoted to a task can be compared, and those proportions differ by a factor of eight.
Data: a pulse–chase experiment. Cells were given radioactive leucine for 3 minutes, washed, and returned to unlabeled leucine. Three membrane fractions were separated at intervals and the label in each was measured as a percent of the total label recovered.
Minutes after the pulse
2
8
25
50
Fraction P (% of label)
88
40
14
5
Fraction Q (% of label)
10
48
41
15
Fraction R (% of label)
2
12
45
80
Which statement is best supported by the data?
Holding the most label late says where protein ends up, not where it was made. At 2 minutes, when the labeled amino acid had just been incorporated, fraction R held only 2%: synthesis happened in P, which held 88%.
Independent synthesis would give three curves that rise together and stay up. Instead each fraction rises and then falls as the next one rises, and that hand-off pattern is what a shared assembly line looks like.
P peaks at 2 minutes, Q at 8, and R at 50, and no fraction peaks before the one upstream of it does: the signature of compartments acting in order, matching ribosome and rough ER, then Golgi, then secretory vesicle. The columns summing to 100% shows the label is being relocated, not created or lost.
The columns sum to 100% at every time point, so no label leaves the system and none is added. Radioactive leucine that disappears from P appears in Q and then R, which is transfer, not destruction and resynthesis.
A drug prevents vesicles from budding off the trans face of the Golgi in a pancreatic acinar cell. Which of the following is the most likely result 60 minutes after a pulse of radioactive leucine?
The drug acts at the Golgi's exit, not at the ER. Transfer from the rough ER to the Golgi is upstream of the block and keeps working, so the ER empties on roughly its normal schedule.
In a pulse–chase, blocking the last step in a series leaves every earlier transfer intact, so label moves out of the ER, into the Golgi, and then stops. The Golgi fraction climbs toward the value the secretory granules would otherwise have reached, which is the reverse of the untreated pattern.
Translation on ribosomes and import into the ER lumen are unaffected by a drug acting at the Golgi's trans face; the compartments are linked in sequence, not wired to fail together. Label does leave the ribosome and does reach the Golgi.
The secretory route in this cell runs rough ER to Golgi to secretory vesicle, and Palade's pulse–chase shows no fraction peaking before the one upstream of it. With the Golgi's exit blocked there is no path to the surface at anything like the normal rate.
Model: three model cells, each with a volume of 64 µm³ but a different shape. All dimensions are in micrometers.
Model cell
Cube 4 × 4 × 4
Sheet 16 × 4 × 1
Rod 32 × 2 × 1
Surface area (µm²)
96
168
196
Volume (µm³)
64
64
64
Surface area-to-volume ratio (µm−1)
1.50
2.63
3.06
Greatest distance from a surface to the interior (µm)
2.0
0.5
0.5
Which claim is best supported by the model?
Volume is held constant at 64 µm³ across all three cells, yet the ratio doubles from 1.50 to 3.06 µm−1. That is exactly the comparison the model was built to make: with volume fixed, any difference left has to come from shape.
The sheet and the rod hold the same 64 µm³ as the cube but wrap it in 168 and 196 µm² of membrane instead of 96, raising the ratio to 2.63 and 3.06 µm−1. Because both are only 1 µm thick, nothing inside them sits more than 0.5 µm from a surface, against 2.0 µm in the cube, and since diffusion time scales with the square of distance, that trip is about sixteen times faster.
All three cells have the same volume, 64 µm³, so volume cannot explain the difference. The rod wins on ratio because stretching a fixed volume into a thin shape exposes more of it as surface.
Being compact is the problem, not the solution. The cube has the lowest ratio, 1.50 µm−1, and the longest distance from any surface to its interior, 2.0 µm, so it is the worst of the three at supplying its own inside.
A spherical cell doubles its radius while keeping its shape. Which of the following best explains why supplying its interior becomes harder?
Nothing about being larger changes the cytoplasm's viscosity, and the diffusion coefficient of a solute is the same in a big cell and a small one. What changes is the distance that has to be covered and the area available to cover it.
Membrane is manufactured as the cell grows rather than stretched like a balloon, and its thickness stays about 7–8 nm. Protein density per square micrometer is not the limiting factor here; total square micrometers per cubic micrometer is.
For a sphere, SA = 4πr² and V = (4/3)πr³, so SA:V = 3/r; doubling r halves the ratio. At the same time the center moves twice as far from the surface, and because diffusion time goes as the square of distance, that doubles into a fourfold delay. Supply per unit of demand falls and delivery slows at once.
A larger cell needs more material in total, and roughly the same amount per unit volume, since the same metabolic reactions run everywhere in the cytoplasm. The mismatch arises because the demand rises with volume while the supply rises only with surface.
Data: permeability coefficients measured for a pure phospholipid bilayer containing no proteins, at 25 °C.
Solute
O2
H2O
Glycerol
Glucose
K+
Molar mass (g/mol)
32
18
92
180
39
Permeability (cm/s)
10−1
10−3
10−6
10−7
10−12
Which claim is best supported by the data?
The table breaks that pattern twice. Water is the lightest solute at 18 g/mol yet is 100 times less permeant than O2 at 32 g/mol, and K+ at 39 g/mol is the least permeant of all: less than glucose, which is more than four times its mass.
The bilayer in this experiment contains no proteins at all, and water still crosses it at 10−3 cm/s. Aquaporins raise that rate enormously in cells that need it, but the data show they are not required for water to get through.
K+ has a molar mass of 39 g/mol against glucose's 180, so on size alone it should cross more easily; instead it is 10−12 against 10−7 cm/s, a factor of 105 the other way. An ion must shed the hydration shell of water molecules bound to its charge before it can enter the hydrocarbon core, and that costs more energy than it has.
Being more permeant than glucose is evidence that glycerol crosses the bare lipid well, not that it needs help. Glycerol is small and uncharged, so like water and urea it trickles through the hydrophobic core unaided: this bilayer has no proteins in it at all.
Which statement best explains how cholesterol helps a mammalian cell survive both a cold night and a hot afternoon?
Cholesterol sits among the tails permanently and buffers fluidity in both directions. In the cold its bulky fused rings get in the way of tight packing, so the bilayer does not solidify; in the heat those same rings limit how freely the tails can move, so the bilayer does not become too fluid and leaky.
Cholesterol does not migrate in and out with temperature; it is a permanent component of the animal cell membrane, anchored by its hydroxyl group near the phosphate heads with its rings among the tails. A molecule that left the core in the heat could not restrain the tails, which is half of what cholesterol does.
Cholesterol's single hydroxyl group does interact with the head region, but that is an anchor, not the mechanism. The two leaflets are held together by the hydrophobic effect on the tails, and cholesterol's effect on fluidity comes from the rings physically wedged between those tails.
Nothing converts one fatty acid into another inside a finished membrane; changing tail saturation requires enzymes that synthesize new phospholipids, which is what bacteria do over hours or days. Cholesterol works instantly and physically, without any chemical change to the phospholipids.
An integral membrane protein is extracted from a bilayer and its sequence examined. Which of the following would most likely be found in the stretch of the chain that spanned the hydrophobic core?
Phosphate heads line the two surfaces of the bilayer, not its core, so they cannot stabilize anything in the middle. Charged R groups do cluster where the protein meets the head region and the surrounding water, which is the opposite end of the span.
Sugar chains mark glycoproteins, and they are always on the outer face where they serve cell–cell recognition. Sugars are highly polar and hydrogen-bond with water, so the hydrophobic core is the last place one would sit.
Disulfide bridges form between two cysteine R groups within or between polypeptides, never between a protein and a phospholipid, which has no sulfhydryl group to bond with. This choice swaps a real protein-stabilizing interaction into a place it cannot occur.
The membrane's interior is a hydrocarbon environment, so the residues facing it must be hydrocarbon-like too: leucine, isoleucine, valine, phenylalanine. Burying a charged or polar R group there would mean stripping away its hydration shell at a large energetic cost, which is why membrane-spanning helices read as long nonpolar stretches.
Data: rate of glucose uptake at 37 °C by human red blood cells and by artificial lipid vesicles that contain no proteins.
[Glucose] outside (mM)
1
2
5
10
25
50
Red blood cells (µmol/min)
20
36
66
84
96
100
Protein-free vesicles (µmol/min)
0.8
1.6
4.0
8.0
20.0
40.0
Which statement best explains why the red blood cell rate levels off while the vesicle rate does not?
Facilitated diffusion spends no ATP: glucose is moving down its own gradient, and the carrier only provides a path. A plateau produced by an energy shortage would also appear in a red cell starved of glucose, which is the opposite of the condition here.
Consumption inside the cell would keep the internal concentration low and so keep the gradient large, which would raise uptake rather than cap it. The ceiling appears at high external concentration, exactly where the gradient is biggest.
The data say the reverse. At every concentration the red cells take up more, and at 1 mM they take up 20 µmol/min against the vesicles' 0.8, twenty-five times as much. What the vesicles have is not more permeability but a rate that never stops rising.
Each carrier binds a glucose molecule, changes shape, releases it, and resets, and that cycle takes time. Once every carrier is working continuously, near 100 µmol/min here, adding substrate cannot add rate. The vesicle row has no such ceiling: it is a straight line at 0.8 µmol/min per mM through the whole range, because simple diffusion has nothing to saturate.
A kidney collecting-duct cell responds to a hormone by inserting additional aquaporins into its plasma membrane. Which of the following best describes the effect?
An aquaporin is a channel, not a pump: it forms an open hydrophilic pore that a single file of water molecules passes through, and it hydrolyzes no ATP. Nothing in the cell can move water against its own potential gradient directly.
Adding channels changes how fast water can cross, not which way it goes. Water still moves from higher water potential to lower, so the hormone lets the kidney reabsorb water quickly when the interstitial fluid is concentrated, and stops the flow when the potentials equalize.
Water is small and uncharged, so it trickles through a bare bilayer on its own at about 10−3 cm/s. That is slow for a kidney cell, which is why aquaporins matter, but it is not zero.
Aquaporins pass water and exclude solutes, including H+, so inserting them moves no solute at all. The cell's solute potential is set by what is dissolved in it, and that is unchanged.
Two compartments separated by a membrane permeable to glucose have reached equal glucose concentrations. Which statement best describes what happens next?
Molecular motion does not switch off; every glucose molecule is still moving and still encountering the membrane. What disappears at equilibrium is the imbalance in crossings, not the crossings themselves.
This is what "dynamic" means in dynamic equilibrium. With equal concentrations on both sides, the probability of a molecule crossing left to right equals the probability of crossing right to left, so the two flows cancel and the measured concentrations hold steady while traffic continues in both directions.
Maintaining equal concentrations is the spontaneous, high-entropy arrangement and costs nothing. ATP is needed only to move a solute against its gradient, which lowers entropy locally: the situation in active transport, not here.
Spontaneous movement back into a gradient would lower the system's entropy with no energy input, which does not happen. Re-establishing a gradient is precisely the job a cell has to pay for with ATP.
Data: six dialysis bags, all filled with the same sucrose solution of unknown molarity, were weighed, submerged for 30 minutes at 22 °C in the beakers shown, blotted, and reweighed.
Beaker [sucrose] (M)
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
% change in mass
+13.8
+8.4
+2.9
−2.9
−8.2
−13.6
Which value best estimates the sucrose molarity of the solution inside the bags?
Bags in 0.2 M gained 8.4% and bags in 0.4 M gained 2.9%, so a bag in 0.30 M would gain mass too. Water entering means the bag contents have the lower water potential, so the bag must be more concentrated than 0.30 M.
At 0.4 M the bags still gained 2.9% of their mass, and a gain means net water movement inward. The bags cannot be 0.40 M, because a bag matched to its bath shows no change at all.
The percent change crosses zero exactly halfway between 0.4 M (+2.9%) and 0.6 M (−2.9%), at 0.50 M. Zero net water movement means the bath and the bag have the same water potential, and since both contain only sucrose in water, they must have the same molarity. Divide by initial mass rather than final, and read the crossing rather than any single point.
In 0.6 M the bags lost 2.9%, so water left them and the bath had the lower water potential of the two. That places the bag's concentration below 0.60 M, not at it.
Calculate the solute potential of a 0.25 M CaCl2 solution at 27 °C. Use \(\Psi_s = -iCRT\) with \(R = 0.0831\) L·bar/(mol·K).
This leaves the temperature in degrees Celsius: −(3)(0.25)(0.0831)(27) = −1.68. The gas constant is defined per kelvin, so the temperature must be converted first, 27 + 273 = 300 K.
This uses i = 1, as if CaCl2 stayed intact in solution: −(1)(0.25)(0.0831)(300) = −6.23. Solute potential depends on the number of dissolved particles, and calcium chloride dissociates into three of them.
This uses i = 2, the value for NaCl. Each CaCl2 formula unit releases one Ca2+ and two Cl−, so the ionization constant is 3, not 2: count the ions, not the elements.
With i = 3, C = 0.25 M, R = 0.0831, and T = 27 + 273 = 300 K, \(\Psi_s = -(3)(0.25)(0.0831)(300) = -18.70\) bars. The two places students lose this point are forgetting i and leaving T in Celsius; the negative sign is required because dissolved solute can only pull water potential down.
Data: glucose uptake across the apical membrane of cultured intestinal epithelial cells, measured over 10 minutes under four conditions. Ouabain inhibits the sodium–potassium pump; phlorizin blocks the SGLT1 sodium–glucose cotransporter.
Condition
Complete medium
Na+ removed
Ouabain added
Phlorizin added
Glucose uptake (nmol/min per mg protein)
62
6
9
5
Which claim is best supported by the data?
Three results converge on this. Removing Na+ drops uptake from 62 to 6, so glucose entry depends on Na+ moving in beside it; phlorizin's drop to 5 identifies SGLT1 as the protein doing it; and ouabain's drop to 9 shows the whole thing collapses once the pump can no longer rebuild the Na+ gradient that supplies the free energy.
Simple diffusion through the bilayer would be indifferent to Na+ in the medium and to a drug that blocks one protein, yet both treatments cut uptake by about 90%. Glucose is a large polar molecule and crosses a bare bilayer at a negligible rate.
The stimulus states that ouabain inhibits the sodium–potassium pump, a different protein in a different membrane. Its effect is indirect and delayed: with the pump stopped, Na+ leaks in until the gradient runs down, and with no gradient there is no energy source for the cotransporter.
SGLT1 hydrolyzes no ATP; that is what makes the transport secondary. The ATP is spent earlier and elsewhere, by the sodium–potassium pump on the basolateral membrane, and stored in the Na+ gradient the cotransporter then spends.
A neuron's sodium–potassium pumps hydrolyze 4.5 × 108 ATP molecules per second. How many Na+ ions leave the cell per second, and what net positive charge leaves per second?
This uses the potassium stoichiometry for sodium. Each ATP drives one cycle that sends 3 Na+ out and brings 2 K+ in, so 9.0 × 108 is the number of K+ imported, not the number of Na+ exported.
One ATP per cycle gives 3(4.5 × 108) = 1.35 × 109 Na+ out and 2(4.5 × 108) = 9.0 × 108 K+ in. The charge balance per cycle is three positive out against two positive in, a net of one, so 4.5 × 108 positive charges leave each second, which is why the pump is called electrogenic and adds a few millivolts to the resting potential.
2.25 × 109 is 5(4.5 × 108), the total number of ions moved per second in both directions. Net charge is a difference, not a sum: the 9.0 × 108 K+ entering cancel all but 4.5 × 108 of the sodium's charge.
The exchange is not one for one. Three sodium ions leave for every two potassium ions that enter, so each cycle leaves the interior one positive charge more negative: an imbalance that accumulates at 4.5 × 108 charges per second.
Free response
Investigation: cubes of agar containing the indicator phenolphthalein were soaked in 0.1 M NaOH, which turns the agar bright pink wherever it penetrates.
Four cubes with sides of 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, and 4.0 cm were cut from one slab of agar, soaked together in the same beaker of NaOH for 10 minutes at 22 °C, blotted, and cut open. In every cube the pink zone extended 0.5 cm inward from each face.
Cube side (cm)
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
Surface area (cm²)
6.0
24.0
54.0
96.0
Volume (cm³)
1.0
8.0
27.0
64.0
Surface area-to-volume ratio (cm−1)
6.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
Percent of volume turned pink
100
87.5
70.4
57.8
Using the investigation and the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the independent variable in the investigation, and describe one variable that had to be held constant and why holding it constant mattered.
Explain the relationship between a cube's surface area-to-volume ratio and the percent of its volume that turned pink.
Construct a graph that displays the relationship between cube side length and percent of volume turned pink: state which variable belongs on each axis, give an appropriate scale and label for each, and describe the shape of the curve.
A student claims that no living cell could function at the size of the 4.0 cm cube. Justify this claim using the data.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the independent variable is the cube's side length (its size). One constant, with a reason: soak time, because the NaOH front advances with time and a longer soak would deepen the pink zone for a reason unrelated to size; or NaOH concentration, temperature, or agar composition, each because it sets how fast the front advances. Do not accept: naming a constant with no reason attached; "all other variables were kept the same" with none named; identifying percent pink or penetration depth as the independent variable.
(b) Accept: as the ratio falls from 6.0 to 1.5 cm−1, the percent pink falls from 100 to 57.8; because the NaOH travels the same 0.5 cm into every cube, the reacted shell scales with surface area while the interior needing to be reached scales with volume, so a cube with less surface per unit volume leaves a larger fraction untouched. Do not accept: "larger cubes take longer to soak" (penetration depth was the same in all four); restating both columns with no causal connection; a general statement about SA:V never applied to these cubes.
(c) Accept: cube side length in cm on the x-axis because it is the independent variable, with an even scale from 0 to 4 cm; percent of volume turned pink on the y-axis, scaled 0 to 100% in even intervals; both axes labeled with quantity and unit. Shape: starts at 100% at 1.0 cm and falls, steeply at first and then more gradually, to 57.8% at 4.0 cm. Do not accept: the independent variable on the y-axis; axes with no units; a percent axis that does not include 0 and 100; "plot the data" with no axes, scale, or labels specified; a straight line through the origin.
(d) Accept: the 4.0 cm cube has a surface area-to-volume ratio of only 1.5 cm−1 and just 57.8% of its volume was reached in 10 minutes, leaving 42.2% untouched; a cell of that size would have more than two-fifths of its cytoplasm receiving no oxygen or nutrients and unable to clear waste, because the membrane area available for exchange is too small for the volume behind it. Do not accept: "it is too big" with no value cited; quoting 57.8% or 1.5 cm−1 without saying what it means for a living cell; claiming diffusion slows down inside large cells.
Show a 4/4 response
a The independent variable is the side length of the cube: 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, or 4.0 cm. Soak time had to be held at 10 minutes for all four, because the NaOH front advances with time, so a cube left in longer would have a deeper pink zone for a reason unrelated to its size.
b The NaOH moved the same 0.5 cm into every cube, so the pink shell tracks surface area while the pale core tracks volume. As side length grows, volume grows faster than surface does and the ratio drops from 6.0 to 1.5 cm−1, so a shell of fixed thickness covers a smaller share of a bigger cube, which is why percent pink falls from 100 to 57.8.
c Side length in cm goes on the x-axis because that is what I set, scaled 0 to 4 cm in 1 cm steps; percent of volume turned pink goes on the y-axis, scaled 0 to 100% in steps of 20. Both axes get the quantity and the unit. The curve starts at 100% at 1.0 cm and falls, steeply at first and then more gently, to 57.8% at 4.0 cm.
d I agree. The 4.0 cm cube has a ratio of only 1.5 cm−1 and only 57.8% of it turned pink, so 42.2% of the interior got nothing in 10 minutes. A cell that size would have more than two-fifths of its cytoplasm cut off from oxygen and nutrients and from waste removal, because its surface is far too small to serve the volume behind it.
A researcher prepares artificial vesicles from pure phospholipid and a second batch of vesicles from the same phospholipid plus cholesterol. Answer (a) through (d).
Describe how the phospholipid molecules are arranged in the bilayer of one of these vesicles, and identify the region of the bilayer a solute must pass through to cross it.
Explain why O2 crosses a pure phospholipid bilayer readily while Na+ crosses at a negligible rate, even though a sodium ion is smaller than an oxygen molecule.
Predict how the fluidity of the cholesterol-containing vesicles compares with that of the pure phospholipid vesicles at 5 °C and at 40 °C.
Justify your prediction in (c) by describing how cholesterol interacts with the phospholipid tails.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: two layers of phospholipids with their hydrophilic phosphate heads facing the water on the outside of the vesicle and on the inside, and their hydrophobic fatty acid tails pointing inward toward each other, away from water; a solute must pass through the hydrophobic core formed by those tails. Do not accept: "a phospholipid bilayer" restated with no description of head and tail orientation; heads and tails reversed; identifying the phosphate heads as the barrier.
(b) Accept: O2 is small and nonpolar, so it dissolves directly into the hydrocarbon core and passes through. Na+ carries a full positive charge and holds a shell of water molecules oriented around it; entering the core would require stripping that hydration shell away, which costs far more energy than the ion has, so charge rather than size is the barrier. Do not accept: "ions are too big" with no mention of charge or hydration; "the membrane is selectively permeable," which restates the question; a correct general rule never applied to O2 and Na+.
(c) Accept a two-part directional prediction: at 5 °C the cholesterol vesicles are more fluid than the pure phospholipid vesicles, and at 40 °C they are less fluid. Do not accept: a single prediction covering only one temperature; "cholesterol changes fluidity" with no direction; "cholesterol makes the membrane more fluid" at both temperatures.
(d) Accept: cholesterol's rigid fused-ring system sits wedged between neighboring phospholipid tails; in the cold it physically prevents the tails from packing into a tightly ordered gel, keeping the bilayer fluid, and in the heat the same rings restrict how far and how fast the tails can swing, holding the bilayer together and preventing it from becoming too fluid and leaky. Do not accept: calling cholesterol a "fluidity buffer" with no mechanism; describing only one of the two temperature effects; claiming cholesterol changes the saturation of the tails.
Show a 4/4 response
a The phospholipids sit in two layers with their phosphate heads facing water (the outside of the vesicle for one layer, the enclosed interior for the other), and their fatty acid tails pointing inward at each other, away from water. Anything crossing must pass through that hydrophobic core of tails.
b O2 is small and nonpolar, so it dissolves into the hydrocarbon core the way it would into oil and comes out the far side. Na+ carries a full positive charge, and in water it is wrapped in a shell of water molecules turned toward it. Entering the core would mean shedding that shell, which costs more energy than the ion has, so the barrier is charge, not size.
c I predict the cholesterol vesicles are more fluid than the pure phospholipid vesicles at 5 °C and less fluid than them at 40 °C.
d Cholesterol's stiff ring system wedges between neighboring tails. At 5 °C those rings block the tails from packing into a tight, ordered gel, so the cholesterol membrane stays fluid while the pure one starts to solidify. At 40 °C the same rings limit how far the tails can swing, so it holds together while the pure one turns too fluid and leaky.
Model: a cross-sectional diagram of a mitochondrion inside a cultured human cell.
The diagram shows a smooth outer membrane and, within it, an inner membrane thrown into deep folds labeled cristae; the space enclosed by the inner membrane is labeled the matrix. In the matrix the diagram shows a small closed loop of DNA with no histone proteins attached and several ribosomes labeled 70S. Ribosomes drawn in the surrounding cytosol are labeled 80S. An arrow beside the organelle is labeled "divides by binary fission."
Using the model, answer (a) through (d).
Identify TWO features shown in the model that the endosymbiotic theory predicts, and describe what that theory proposes each of the two membranes was derived from.
Explain how the cristae shown in the model increase the amount of ATP a single mitochondrion can produce.
An antibiotic that binds 70S ribosomes and blocks translation is added to the culture medium. Predict its effect on protein synthesis in the cytosol and on protein synthesis inside the mitochondrion.
Justify your prediction in (c) using specific features labeled in the model.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept any two of: the double membrane, the circular DNA lacking histones, the 70S (bacterial-size) ribosomes, and division by binary fission. Membranes: the inner membrane is proposed to be the engulfed bacterium's own plasma membrane and the outer membrane the host cell's engulfing vesicle. Do not accept: only one feature named; features listed with no account of where each membrane came from; naming the cristae as evidence of endosymbiosis, since folding is a surface-area adaptation rather than a prediction of the model.
(b) Accept: the folds pack a large area of inner membrane into a small volume, and the electron transport chain proteins and ATP synthase are embedded in that membrane, so more folding means more of those complexes per organelle, more H+ pumped into the intermembrane space, and more ATP made per unit of mitochondrial volume. Do not accept: "cristae increase surface area" with no statement of what the added area holds; placing the electron transport chain in the matrix or in the outer membrane; an answer about ATP that never mentions membrane area.
(c) Accept a two-part directional prediction: cytosolic protein synthesis continues at close to its normal rate, while protein synthesis inside the mitochondrion is inhibited, so mitochondrially encoded proteins are not made and ATP output falls over time. Do not accept: "protein synthesis stops" without distinguishing the two compartments; predicting an effect with no direction; "nothing changes."
(d) Accept: the model labels the matrix ribosomes 70S and the cytosolic ribosomes 80S, and the drug binds only 70S, so the mitochondrial ribosomes are targets and the cell's own are not. The 70S label is itself one of the endosymbiotic predictions, since 70S is the ribosome size found in bacteria. Do not accept: repeating the prediction in other words; asserting shared ancestry with no labeled feature named; citing the double membrane or circular DNA, neither of which determines what the drug binds.
Show a 4/4 response
a Two features the theory predicts are the circular DNA with no histones and the 70S ribosomes in the matrix. On this model the inner membrane is the plasma membrane of the bacterium that was engulfed long ago, and the outer membrane is the vesicle the host cell wrapped around it as it took the bacterium in.
b The cristae fold the inner membrane back on itself so a large membrane area fits inside a small organelle. The electron transport chain proteins and ATP synthase are embedded in that membrane, so the more of it a mitochondrion packs in, the more of those complexes it holds, the more H+ it pumps into the intermembrane space, and the more ATP it makes per unit volume.
c I predict cytosolic protein synthesis continues at close to its normal rate while translation inside the mitochondrion shuts down, so mitochondrial proteins stop being made and the cell's ATP output drops over the following hours.
d The model labels the matrix ribosomes 70S and the cytosolic ones 80S, and the drug binds only 70S, so the mitochondrion's ribosomes are targets and the cell's own are not. That 70S label is itself one of the endosymbiotic predictions, since 70S is the bacterial ribosome size.
Data: potato cores of equal starting mass were blotted, weighed, submerged for 24 hours at 25 °C in the open beakers shown, blotted again, and reweighed.
[Sucrose] in the beaker (M)
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
% change in mass
+16.2
+8.7
+1.8
−5.4
−12.0
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the dependent variable in the investigation, and describe the trend in the data.
Explain, in terms of water potential, why the cores in the 0.0 M beaker gained mass while the cores in the 0.8 M beaker lost mass.
Determine the sucrose molarity at which the cores would show no net change in mass, then calculate the solute potential of that solution at 25 °C, showing your setup. Use \(\Psi_s = -iCRT\) with \(R = 0.0831\) L·bar/(mol·K) and \(i = 1\) for sucrose.
Justify the claim that the water potential of the potato cores is −11.14 bars, using your result from (c) and the conditions of the investigation.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the dependent variable is the percent change in mass of the potato cores. Trend: percent change falls steadily as beaker sucrose concentration rises, from +16.2% at 0.0 M to −12.0% at 0.8 M, changing from a gain to a loss between 0.4 M and 0.6 M. Do not accept: naming sucrose concentration as the dependent variable; "the mass changed" with no direction; listing the endpoints with no statement of the trend.
(b) Accept: pure water in an open beaker has Ψ = 0 bars, the highest value possible, which is higher than the cores' negative Ψ, so water moved into the cells and the cores gained mass. The 0.8 M beaker has a strongly negative solute potential and therefore a Ψ lower than the cores', so water moved out of the cells into the beaker and the cores lost mass. Do not accept: "water moves toward the higher solute concentration" with no reference to water potential; a reversed direction; a general rule never applied to these cores.
(c) Accept: interpolating between 0.4 M (+1.8%) and 0.6 M (−5.4%), the line falls 7.2 percentage points across 0.2 M, so zero lies 1.8/7.2 = 0.25 of the way, at 0.4 + 0.25(0.2) = 0.45 M. Then with T = 25 + 273 = 298 K, \(\Psi_s = -(1)(0.45)(0.0831)(298) = -11.14\) bars. Do not accept: reading the crossing as 0.4 M or 0.6 M with no interpolation; T left in °C; a missing negative sign; a value with no units; a value with no setup shown.
(d) Accept: at 0.45 M there is no net movement of water, so the cores and the bath are at equilibrium and their water potentials are equal. The beaker is open, so its pressure potential is 0 and its water potential equals its solute potential, −11.14 bars; therefore the cores' water potential is −11.14 bars as well. Do not accept: restating the value; asserting the equality with no mention of zero net water movement or of Ψp = 0 in an open beaker; using the 0.8 M beaker's value.
Show a 4/4 response
a The dependent variable is the percent change in mass of the potato cores. It falls steadily as the beaker gets more concentrated, from +16.2% in pure water to −12.0% at 0.8 M, switching from a gain to a loss between 0.4 M and 0.6 M.
b Pure water in an open beaker has a water potential of 0 bars, the highest there is, while the cores' Ψ is negative because of the solutes in their cells. Water moves from higher Ψ to lower, so it entered the cells and those cores gained mass. The 0.8 M beaker has a strongly negative solute potential, putting its Ψ below the cores', so water left the cells instead.
c Between 0.4 M (+1.8%) and 0.6 M (−5.4%) the line drops 7.2 percentage points, so zero sits 1.8/7.2 = 0.25 of the way across: 0.4 + 0.25(0.2) = 0.45 M. With T = 25 + 273 = 298 K, Ψs = −(1)(0.45)(0.0831)(298) = −11.14 bars.
d At 0.45 M the cores neither gain nor lose mass, which means no net water movement and therefore equal water potentials on both sides. The beaker is open to the air, so its pressure potential is 0 and its water potential is nothing but its solute potential, −11.14 bars. Since the cores match it at equilibrium, their water potential is −11.14 bars too.
Data: glucose uptake across the apical membrane of cultured intestinal epithelial cells over 10 minutes under four conditions. Ouabain inhibits the sodium–potassium pump; phlorizin blocks the SGLT1 sodium–glucose cotransporter.
Condition
Complete medium
Na+ removed
Ouabain added
Phlorizin added
Glucose uptake (nmol/min per mg protein)
62
6
9
5
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the transport mechanism that carries glucose across the apical membrane in the complete medium, and describe the immediate source of free energy that drives it.
Explain why ouabain lowers glucose uptake even though it does not bind the SGLT1 cotransporter.
Calculate the percent decrease in glucose uptake caused by removing Na+ and the percent decrease caused by ouabain, showing your setup.
A student claims that cells in a complete medium whose ATP synthesis has been blocked for 30 minutes would take up glucose at a rate close to the ouabain value rather than the complete-medium value. Justify this claim using the data.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: secondary active transport by the SGLT1 Na+–glucose cotransporter; the immediate energy source is the electrochemical gradient of Na+ across the apical membrane, whose free energy is released as Na+ moves down that gradient into the cell and is used to haul glucose in against its own gradient. Do not accept: "active transport" with no statement that it is secondary or that Na+ supplies the energy; naming ATP hydrolysis at SGLT1 as the immediate source; "facilitated diffusion" or "simple diffusion."
(b) Accept: ouabain inhibits the sodium–potassium pump, which is what continually exports Na+ and keeps intracellular Na+ low; with the pump stopped, Na+ leaks in until the gradient runs down, and once there is no gradient there is no free energy for the cotransporter to spend, so uptake falls to 9: close to the value with Na+ removed entirely. Do not accept: claiming ouabain blocks SGLT1; "ATP is needed for transport" with no reference to the pump or the gradient; naming the pump with no explanation of how its loss reaches glucose uptake.
(c) Accept: Na+ removed, (62 − 6)/62 × 100 = 90.3%; ouabain, (62 − 9)/62 × 100 = 85.5%. Setups shown; rounding to one decimal or to the nearest whole percent acceptable. Do not accept: dividing by the treated value instead of the control; reporting the remaining percentage (9.7% and 14.5%) as the decrease; one calculation when two were asked for; a bare number with no setup.
(d) Accept: the claim is supported because blocking ATP synthesis stops the sodium–potassium pump for the same reason ouabain does, and the data show that stopping that pump drops uptake from 62 to 9 even with Na+ still present in the medium. That result is close to the 6 obtained with no Na+ at all, which shows the gradient, not the presence of Na+, is what the cotransporter depends on. Do not accept: "no ATP means no transport" with no mention of the pump or the gradient; restating the claim; citing the ouabain value with no explanation of why blocking ATP synthesis produces the same outcome.
Show a 4/4 response
a Glucose crosses the apical membrane by secondary active transport through the SGLT1 cotransporter. The immediate energy source is the Na+ electrochemical gradient: sodium falls down its own gradient into the cell, and the free energy released as it does drags glucose in with it, uphill against glucose's gradient.
b Ouabain blocks the sodium–potassium pump, which is the protein that keeps pushing Na+ back out and holds internal sodium low. Once the pump stops, Na+ leaks in until inside and outside are nearly equal, and a gradient that has run down releases no free energy. The cotransporter is untouched but has nothing left to spend, so uptake collapses to 9.
d I agree with the student. Blocking ATP synthesis stops the sodium–potassium pump for the same reason ouabain does, just from the fuel side instead of the protein side, and the data show what happens when that pump stops: uptake fell from 62 to 9 even though Na+ was still in the medium the whole time. That 9 is close to the 6 measured with no Na+ at all, which tells me the cotransporter needs the gradient rather than just the ion.
Lesson 3.1 · Unit 3 · CED topics 3.1–3.2
Enzyme structure and catalysis
Almost every reaction a cell needs is thermodynamically allowed and
kinetically hopeless. A jar of sucrose solution really will hydrolyze on
its own: you would just have to wait years. A cell cannot wait, and it
cannot boil itself to force the issue, so it does the only other thing
available: it lowers the barrier.
That is the entire job of an enzyme. It does not make an unfavorable
reaction favorable, change how much free energy the reaction releases, or
shift the equilibrium position. It changes how fast the system
gets to that equilibrium: routinely by a factor of a million.
Definition
An enzyme is a biological catalyst, almost always a
protein, whose folded shape creates an active site: a
pocket whose size, charge, and hydrogen-bonding groups are
complementary to one substrate. That complementarity is
specificity: hexokinase phosphorylates glucose and
ignores the ribose beside it. Binding is not passive, under
induced fit the active site tightens around the
substrate on contact, straining the bonds about to break and forming the
enzyme–substrate complex. Products leave, the site
relaxes, and the enzyme is chemically unchanged, so one molecule runs
the same reaction thousands of times.
Model
Sketch the reaction-coordinate diagram: free energy
(kJ/mol) on the y-axis, reaction progress on the x-axis. Reactants start
on a flat shelf at 0. The curve climbs to a peak, the
transition state, then drops to a products shelf below
the start. The climb is the activation energy
\(E_a\); the vertical gap between the shelves is \(\Delta G\). Adding
enzyme draws a second curve with the same two shelves and a
lower peak. It never moves either shelf, so \(\Delta
G\) and the equilibrium position are identical with and without it.
Worked example · Reading the two curves
For an uncatalyzed reaction \(E_a = 75\) kJ/mol and the products sit
25 kJ/mol below the reactants. With enzyme, \(E_a = 30\) kJ/mol. Give
\(\Delta G\) in both cases and the reduction in the barrier.
\[ \Delta G = -25\ \mathrm{kJ/mol}\ \text{(both)}, \qquad
75 - 30 = 45\ \mathrm{kJ/mol}, \qquad \frac{45}{75} = 60\%. \]
The enzyme removes 60% of the barrier, and \(\Delta G\) is unchanged at
−25 kJ/mol because the shelves never moved. On an exam, "the enzyme
lowers the energy of the reaction" earns nothing: it is the wrong
quantity. Name \(E_a\), and say that \(\Delta G\) is unaffected.
Worked example · Initial rate from a product curve
Catalase was mixed with 50 µmol of hydrogen peroxide at 25 °C and
product was measured over 10 minutes.
Time (min)
0
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
Product (µmol)
0
12.0
24.0
34.0
41.0
48.0
50.0
50.0
The initial rate is the slope of the straight early
portion, not the average over the run:
\[ \text{rate} = \frac{24.0 - 0}{2 - 0} = 12.0\ \text{µmol/min}. \]
Between 6 and 8 minutes the slope is \((50.0-48.0)/2 = 1.0\) µmol/min,
about 8% of that, and after 8 minutes it is zero. The curve levels off
because substrate is running out (by 2 minutes only \(50 - 24 = 26\)
µmol, 52%, remains), so fewer collisions with active sites happen each
second. Averaging the whole run gives \(50/10 = 5.0\) µmol/min, less
than half the true initial rate.
Practice
A reaction is run with 0.010 µmol of enzyme and goes to completion, converting all 50 µmol of substrate. Calculate how many substrate molecules each enzyme molecule handled, and explain what that number shows about enzymes.
Show answer
\(50/0.010 = 5000\) substrate molecules per enzyme molecule. Because the active site is regenerated in its original form each time products leave, the enzyme is a catalyst, not a reactant: it is never consumed and does not appear in the balanced equation. That is why a cell runs a high-throughput pathway on a vanishingly small amount of protein.
Using the catalase table above, calculate the rate from 3 to 4 minutes, compare it with the initial rate, and explain why reporting the later value as "the rate of the enzyme" is an error.
Show answer
\((41.0 - 34.0)/(4-3) = 7.0\) µmol/min, about 58% of the 12.0 µmol/min initial rate. By 3 minutes most of the peroxide is gone, so substrate, not the enzyme, is limiting. The initial rate is the only measurement made while substrate is still in excess, so it is the only one that reflects catalytic capacity rather than a dwindling supply.
A second tube gets the same 50 µmol of peroxide and twice as much catalase. Predict the initial rate and the total product formed at 10 minutes, and justify both predictions.
Show answer
Prediction: the initial rate roughly doubles to about 24 µmol/min, but the total product at 10 minutes is still 50 µmol. Justification: twice the enzyme is twice the available active sites, so while substrate is in excess twice as many enzyme–substrate complexes form per second. The total is fixed by the substrate supplied, and the enzyme changes only \(E_a\), never \(\Delta G\): more enzyme reaches the same endpoint sooner. Predicting "more product" is a specific claim in the wrong direction and scores zero.
Lesson 3.2 · Unit 3 · CED topic 3.3
Environmental effects on enzyme function
An enzyme's power comes entirely from the shape of its active site, so
anything that alters that shape alters the rate. Heat, acid, a molecule
that squats in the pocket, a molecule that binds elsewhere and bends the
protein: all of them show up as a change in µmol of product per minute.
The exam gives you this as a curve or a table and asks you to
describe the pattern and explain the mechanism: two
tasks, two points, so answer both.
Rule
Temperature: rate climbs to an optimum as collisions grow harder and more frequent, then falls off a cliff as heat breaks the weak bonds holding the tertiary fold. Denaturation is not reversed by cooling.
pH: off the optimum, H+ protonates acidic R groups or OH− strips H+ from basic ones, breaking the ionic bonds that shape the active site.
Substrate concentration: rate rises steeply, then bends to a plateau: every active site is occupied, the enzyme is saturated, and more substrate does nothing.
Enzyme concentration: with substrate in excess, rate is proportional to enzyme and the line does not plateau.
Formula
The temperature coefficient compares rates across a
10 °C span:
\[ Q_{10} = \left(\frac{R_2}{R_1}\right)^{\,10/(T_2 - T_1)} \]
When \(T_2 - T_1 = 10\) this is just \(R_2/R_1\). Most biological
reactions give 2 to 3 below the optimum; above it, denaturation
drives \(Q_{10}\) under 1.
Model
Plot rate against substrate concentration. A
competitive inhibitor resembles the substrate and binds
the active site, so the curve rises more slowly but reaches the
same plateau: flooding with substrate outcompetes it.
A noncompetitive (allosteric) inhibitor binds elsewhere
and distorts the active site, so the curve plateaus
lower and extra substrate never recovers it. Allosteric
activators work in reverse, and many enzymes need a
cofactor (Mg2+, Zn2+) or a
vitamin-derived coenzyme (NAD+) bound before
the site works at all.
Worked example · A Q10 calculation
A digestive enzyme converts substrate at 12.0 µmol/min at 25 °C and
27.6 µmol/min at 35 °C. At 45 °C the measured rate is 6.0 µmol/min.
Calculate \(Q_{10}\) for the first span and evaluate the third point.
\[ Q_{10} = \left(\frac{27.6}{12.0}\right)^{10/10} = 2.30 \]
A 10 °C rise more than doubles the rate. If that held, 45 °C would give
\(27.6 \times 2.30 = 63.5\) µmol/min; the measured 6.0 µmol/min is only
9.5% of that. Explain the gap: past the optimum, added thermal
energy breaks the hydrogen and ionic bonds holding the fold, and a
denatured active site cannot bind substrate at all. Collision theory
applies only while the protein is still folded.
Worked example · Two optima, one animal
Activity of two human digestive enzymes, as a percent of each enzyme's own maximum, at 37 °C.
pH
2
5
8
10
Pepsin (% max)
100
12
2
0
Trypsin (% max)
4
9
100
38
Describe: pepsin peaks at pH 2 and is essentially dead by pH 8;
trypsin peaks at pH 8 and manages 4% at pH 2. Explain: each
active site holds its shape only where its R groups carry the right
charges, which is why pepsin works in the stomach and trypsin in the
small intestine, where bicarbonate raises the pH. The same idea runs on
a temperature axis: human amylase peaks at 37 °C and collapses by 55 °C,
while Taq polymerase from the hot-spring bacterium
Thermus aquaticus is still climbing at 55 °C, peaks near 75 °C,
and survives 95 °C. Same curve shape, different position: the enzyme is
matched to its environment.
Practice
An enzyme runs at 6.0 µmol/min at 15 °C and 31.8 µmol/min at 35 °C, both below its optimum. Calculate \(Q_{10}\).
Show answer
\(T_2 - T_1 = 20\), so \(Q_{10} = (31.8/6.0)^{10/20} = (5.30)^{0.5} = 2.30\). Do not report 5.30: that is the ratio over 20 °C, and \(Q_{10}\) is defined per 10 °C. The value sits in the usual band of 2 to 3, confirming both readings were below the optimum.
Two inhibitors are tested on one enzyme across a range of substrate concentrations. With inhibitor X the rate-vs-substrate curve rises more gradually but reaches the same plateau as the uninhibited control. With inhibitor Y the curve plateaus at 40% of the control's. Identify each and explain the difference.
Show answer
X is competitive and Y is noncompetitive. X occupies the active site, so it and the substrate compete for one pocket; raising substrate concentration lets substrate win the race and the maximum rate is restored: hence the same plateau. Y binds an allosteric site and distorts the active site, so a fixed fraction of enzyme molecules are dead however much substrate is present, and the maximum drops permanently. Naming the two without tying each to a feature of its curve is a description, not an explanation.
A student raises the substrate concentration tenfold in a tube that already contains inhibitor Y from the previous problem. Predict the effect on the rate and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the rate rises a little and then plateaus at the same reduced maximum, about 40% of the uninhibited rate, not at the control value. Justification: a noncompetitive inhibitor does not occupy the active site, so substrate cannot displace it by mass action. Every enzyme molecule carrying Y has a deformed active site and contributes nothing, so the excess substrate only saturates the enzyme still working. "The rate increases" alone earns nothing; the exam wants the direction, the ceiling, and why the ceiling is there.
Lesson 3.3 · Unit 3 · CED topic 3.4
Cellular energy, free energy, and ATP coupling
Staying alive is expensive. A cell holds ion gradients against leakage,
builds polymers out of scattered monomers, and keeps its interior far
more ordered than its surroundings: all of it uphill. The universe
permits this only because the cell pays, continuously, by running
downhill reactions alongside the uphill ones. ATP is the currency it pays
in.
Definition
Free energy \(\Delta G\) is the energy available to do
work. A reaction with \(\Delta G \lt 0\) is exergonic:
it releases free energy and proceeds without an input. A reaction with
\(\Delta G \gt 0\) is endergonic: it stores free energy
and will not happen on its own. Note the split from Lesson 3.1:
\(\Delta G\) decides whether, \(E_a\) decides how fast.
A wildly exergonic reaction can sit untouched for years behind a high
barrier.
Model
ATP is adenine, ribose, and three phosphates in a row.
Those phosphate groups each carry a negative charge and are crowded
together, so they repel; hydrolysis of the terminal phosphate
relieves that repulsion and the products are better stabilized by
water, giving \(\Delta G^{\circ\prime} \approx -30.5\) kJ/mol. The cell
spends it by coupling: the released phosphate is
transferred onto a substrate, and that
phosphorylated intermediate is now unstable enough to
react. Add the two \(\Delta G\) values: if the sum is negative, the
coupled pair runs.
Worked example · Making glutamine
Glutamate + NH3 → glutamine has
\(\Delta G = +14.2\) kJ/mol. Show how a cell runs it anyway.
\[\begin{aligned}
\text{glutamate} + \mathrm{NH_3} &\to \text{glutamine} && +14.2 \\
\mathrm{ATP} \to \mathrm{ADP} + \mathrm{P_i} & && -30.5 \\
\hline
\text{coupled} & && -16.3\ \mathrm{kJ/mol}
\end{aligned}\]
The sum is negative, so the coupled reaction is exergonic and proceeds.
Mechanically, ATP phosphorylates glutamate first; ammonia then displaces
the phosphate. The 16.3 kJ/mol of "wasted" energy is the price of making
the whole thing spontaneous: coupling is never free.
Worked example · Two energy budgets, same body mass
A 25 g mouse and a 25 g lizard are measured for a day at 25 °C. The
mouse takes in 78 kJ and spends 70 kJ on maintenance; the lizard takes
in 14 kJ and spends 6 kJ. Find each animal's surplus and the fraction of
intake it represents.
\[ 78 - 70 = 8\ \mathrm{kJ/day}, \quad \frac{8}{78} = 10.3\% \qquad
14 - 6 = 8\ \mathrm{kJ/day}, \quad \frac{8}{14} = 57.1\% \]
Identical surpluses, 240 kJ each over 30 days, from wildly different
budgets. The mouse is an endotherm holding 37 °C against the air, so
most of its intake is burned as heat; the lizard warms itself on a rock
for free. That surplus above maintenance is the only energy available
for growth and reproduction, which is the link to fitness: an organism
that cannot cover maintenance loses mass, stops reproducing, and dies.
Practice
A resting 60 kg adult expends about 7,100 kJ per day. Taking ATP hydrolysis as 30.5 kJ/mol and the molar mass of ATP as 507 g/mol, calculate the mass of ATP that must be hydrolyzed to supply that energy, and explain what the answer tells you about ATP.
Show answer
\(7100/30.5 = 233\) mol of ATP, and \(233 \times 507 = 1.18 \times 10^{5}\) g, about 118 kg: roughly twice the person's body mass. Since the body contains only about 50 g of ATP at any moment, ATP is not a storage molecule; it is a rechargeable carrier that is hydrolyzed and re-synthesized from ADP and Pi thousands of times a day. Long-term energy is stored as fat and glycogen.
The table gives standard free-energy changes. Identify which reactions are exergonic, and determine whether reaction 1 can be driven by reaction 2.
Reaction
ΔG (kJ/mol)
1. Glucose + Pi → glucose-6-phosphate
+13.8
2. ATP → ADP + Pi
−30.5
3. Glucose + ATP → glucose-6-phosphate + ADP
?
Show answer
Only reaction 2 is exergonic; reaction 1 is endergonic and cannot run alone. Coupled, \(+13.8 + (-30.5) = -16.7\) kJ/mol, so reaction 3 is exergonic and does run: this is exactly what hexokinase does in the first step of glycolysis. A common error is to say ATP "gives energy to" glucose without the arithmetic; the point is earned by adding the two values and stating the sign.
The mouse and the lizard above are moved to a 10 °C room and fed the same amount as before. Predict what happens to each animal's surplus energy, and justify your predictions.
Show answer
Prediction: the mouse's surplus falls to near zero or below, while the lizard's surplus changes far less and may even rise slightly as a share of intake. Justification: the endothermic mouse must hold its body at 37 °C, so a larger gradient to the air means a steeper heat loss and a higher maintenance cost, which is subtracted from the same 78 kJ. The ectothermic lizard lets its body temperature drop with the room; its metabolic rate falls with it, so maintenance costs less. Naming "endotherm" and "ectotherm" without connecting the thermal gradient to the maintenance term is not a justification.
Lesson 3.4 · Unit 3 · CED topic 3.5
Photosynthesis I: capturing light
The light reactions solve one problem: turn photons into the two
chemically useful things the Calvin cycle needs, ATP and NADPH. Every
structure in a chloroplast exists to serve that conversion, and the
by-product, the oxygen you are breathing, is simply what is left over
when water is torn apart for its electrons.
Definition
A chloroplast has a double outer membrane around the
stroma, the fluid where the Calvin cycle runs.
Suspended in it are thylakoids, flattened sacs stacked
into grana, enclosing a separate compartment called the
lumen. That extra compartment is the point: it is a
small volume the cell can acidify. Embedded in the thylakoid membrane,
chlorophyll a (the reaction-center pigment) sits with
chlorophyll b and carotenoids, which
absorb wavelengths chlorophyll a misses and pass the energy on.
Method
Linear electron flow, in order: light excites P680 in
photosystem II → the lost electrons are replaced by
photolysis, 2 H2O → 4 H+ + 4
e− + O2 → excited electrons pass down an electron
transport chain, which pumps H+ from stroma into lumen →
light re-excites them at photosystem I → NADP+
reductase makes NADPH. The H+ gradient drives
ATP synthase as protons flow back to the stroma:
chemiosmosis. Water is the electron
source; NADP+ is the final electron
acceptor.
Worked example · Engelmann's filament, 1882
Question: which wavelengths actually drive photosynthesis?
Engelmann laid a filament of the alga Spirogyra across a
microscope slide and used a prism to throw a spectrum along its length,
so each stretch of the same filament received one color. He added
aerobic bacteria, which swim toward oxygen.
The independent variable is wavelength; the
dependent variable is the density of bacteria along the
filament, standing in for the rate of oxygen release; the
control is the darkened stretch of the same filament,
where no bacteria gathered. Result: bacteria crowded in the
blue-violet and red bands and thinned out in the green. Conclusion,
justified: the action spectrum of photosynthesis
matches the absorption spectrum of chlorophyll, so
chlorophyll is the pigment that drives the reaction: the bacteria mark
where oxygen, and therefore photolysis, is fastest.
Worked example · Rf from a chromatogram
A leaf extract is spotted on chromatography paper. The solvent front
travels 9.4 cm and four bands appear. Calculate
\(R_f = \dfrac{\text{distance moved by pigment}}{\text{distance moved by solvent}}\)
for each.
Band
Carotene
Xanthophyll
Chlorophyll a
Chlorophyll b
Distance moved (cm)
8.9
6.8
5.2
4.1
Rf
0.95
0.72
0.55
0.44
For example \(8.9/9.4 = 0.95\) and \(4.1/9.4 = 0.44\). Carotene is the
most nonpolar pigment, so it dissolves best in the nonpolar solvent and
travels farthest; chlorophyll b, the most polar, hydrogen-bonds to the
paper and lags. \(R_f\) is a ratio with no units, which is what makes it
useful: it identifies a pigment no matter how long the solvent was
allowed to run.
Practice
A student's chromatogram runs a shorter distance: the solvent front reaches 8.0 cm and a yellow-green band has moved 3.5 cm. Calculate its Rf and identify the pigment using the table above.
Show answer
\(R_f = 3.5/8.0 = 0.44\), which matches chlorophyll b. The identification still works even though this run was 1.4 cm shorter, because both distances shrink together and the ratio does not change. Reporting "3.5 cm" as the answer earns nothing: Rf is defined as a ratio, and a bare distance is not comparable between runs.
The table gives chlorophyll a's absorption and the measured rate of photosynthesis for an intact leaf, each as a percent of its own maximum. Describe the relationship and explain the two features that stand out.
Wavelength (nm)
450
550
600
670
Chlorophyll a absorption (% max)
100
8
20
95
Photosynthetic rate (% max)
88
22
30
100
Show answer
Describe: the two track each other closely, both peak in the blue-violet near 450 nm and the red near 670 nm and both bottom out near 550 nm. First feature, the green gap: chlorophyll a absorbs only 8% of maximum at 550 nm, so green light is largely reflected and transmitted rather than used, which is why leaves look green. Second feature, the mismatch: at 550 and 600 nm the photosynthetic rate is roughly 10 points higher than chlorophyll a's absorption, because chlorophyll b and the carotenoids absorb there and transfer the energy to the reaction center. A leaf harvests a wider band than any one pigment does.
The herbicide DCMU blocks electron transfer out of photosystem II. Predict what happens to oxygen release and to NADPH production in a treated chloroplast in full light, and justify each prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: both fall to nearly zero. Justification for oxygen: photolysis of water happens only to replace the electrons photosystem II donates to the chain, so once that donation is blocked, water is not split and no O2 is released. Justification for NADPH: photosystem I still absorbs light, but with no electrons arriving from photosystem II it has nothing to pass to NADP+ reductase, so NADPH output collapses and the Calvin cycle stops for lack of reducing power. Saying only "photosynthesis stops" is a restatement: the justification point comes from naming water as the electron source and NADP+ as the acceptor.
Lesson 3.5 · Unit 3 · CED topic 3.5
Photosynthesis II: the Calvin cycle and carbon fixation
The light reactions hand the stroma a supply of ATP and NADPH that is
useless as storage: neither lasts. The Calvin cycle spends both
immediately to pull carbon out of the air and build it into sugar. It
needs light only indirectly, which is why calling it the "dark reaction"
is misleading: it runs in daylight, on the products of the light
reactions.
Definition
Three phases, all in the stroma. Carbon fixation:rubisco attaches CO2 to the 5-carbon
RuBP; the 6-carbon product splits instantly into two
molecules of 3-carbon 3-PGA, the first stable product.
Reduction: ATP phosphorylates 3-PGA and NADPH reduces
it to G3P. Regeneration: most G3P is
rearranged, at the cost of more ATP, back into RuBP so the cycle can
continue. Only the leftover G3P leaves.
Formula
One turn fixes one CO2 and costs 3 ATP and 2 NADPH. Three
turns make six G3P, five of which regenerate three RuBP, leaving one
G3P exported:
\[ 3\,\mathrm{CO_2} + 9\,\mathrm{ATP} + 6\,\mathrm{NADPH} \to 1\ \text{G3P} \]
Two exported G3P make one glucose, so everything doubles.
Worked example · Calvin's lollipop, 1950s
Question: in what order does fixed carbon move through the
cycle? Calvin, Benson, and Bassham grew the alga Chlorella in a
thin, flat, illuminated flask, the "lollipop", injected
14CO2, and drained samples into hot methanol to
kill the cells at set times.
The independent variable is the time between the
14C pulse and the kill; the dependent variable
is which compounds are radioactive, found by separating each extract by
two-dimensional paper chromatography and laying it on X-ray film; the
control is a sample killed before the label was
injected, which shows no labeled spots. Result: after about
5 seconds the label sat almost entirely in one 3-carbon spot, 3-PGA;
with longer pulses it spread to sugar phosphates and finally to RuBP.
Conclusion, justified: 3-PGA is the first stable product of
fixation, because it is labeled first and the others acquire label only
after it does.
Worked example · The cost of one glucose
Compute the CO2, turns, ATP, and NADPH needed for one glucose, and check the carbon.
Glucose is C6H12O6, so six carbons must
be fixed: 6 CO2, one per turn, so
6 turns. Doubling the per-G3P figures gives
\[ 6\,\mathrm{CO_2} + 18\,\mathrm{ATP} + 12\,\mathrm{NADPH} \to 2\ \text{G3P} \to \text{1 glucose}. \]
Carbon check: 6 turns × 1 C each = 6 C in, and 2 G3P × 3 C = 6 C out.
Notice the ratio, \(18:12 = 3:2\), the light reactions must supply ATP
and NADPH in that proportion, which is why cyclic electron flow around
photosystem I exists to top up ATP alone.
Practice
A leaf fixes 30 molecules of CO2. Calculate the number of Calvin-cycle turns, the net G3P exported, the glucose that could be built, and the ATP and NADPH consumed.
Show answer
One CO2 per turn, so 30 turns. Every 3 turns exports 1 net G3P, so \(30/3 = 10\) G3P; two G3P per glucose gives \(10/2 = 5\) glucose. Cost: \(30 \times 3 = 90\) ATP and \(30 \times 2 = 60\) NADPH. Check against the per-glucose figures: \(5 \times 18 = 90\) ATP and \(5 \times 12 = 60\) NADPH. A frequent error is dividing 30 by 6 to get turns: six turns build a glucose, but each turn still fixes only one carbon.
The table gives net photosynthesis for wheat, a C3 plant, and maize, a C4 plant, in full sun. Describe the pattern and explain it.
Leaf temperature
25 °C
38 °C
Wheat, C3 (µmol CO2 m−2 s−1)
22
12
Maize, C4 (µmol CO2 m−2 s−1)
24
34
Show answer
Describe: the two are nearly equal at 25 °C, but on heating to 38 °C wheat falls by \((12-22)/22 = 45\%\) while maize rises by \((34-24)/24 = 42\%\). Explain: rubisco also accepts O2, and at high temperature its oxygenase activity rises while stomata close and the internal CO2-to-O2 ratio falls, so wheat loses carbon to photorespiration, which consumes ATP and releases CO2 without making sugar. Maize fixes carbon first with PEP carboxylase, which has no affinity for O2, and delivers concentrated CO2 to rubisco in the bundle-sheath cells, so photorespiration stays suppressed and the normal temperature rise in enzyme rate wins.
A CAM plant such as a jade plant and a C3 shrub are grown side by side through a hot, dry week during which both keep their stomata shut all day. Predict which plant still fixes carbon at midday and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the CAM plant continues to fix carbon at midday; the C3 shrub essentially stops. Justification: CAM plants open their stomata at night, when evaporative loss is low, and store the carbon as organic acids in vacuoles; by day the acids are decarboxylated inside the closed leaf, supplying rubisco with CO2 while the light reactions run. The C3 shrub has no stored carbon pool, so with stomata shut its internal CO2 falls, O2 from the light reactions accumulates, and rubisco shifts to photorespiration. The exam wants the separation named: CAM separates the two fixation steps in time, C4 separates them in space.
Lesson 3.6 · Unit 3 · CED topic 3.6
Cellular respiration I: glucose to carbon dioxide
Respiration does the reverse of photosynthesis, and it does it in small
steps on purpose. Burning glucose in one shot would release far more
energy than any molecule could capture. Instead the cell strips the
electrons off six carbons a pair at a time, loading them onto NAD+
and FAD, and saves the big payoff for Lesson 3.7. Everything before the
electron transport chain is preparation: it disassembles the glucose and
fills the carriers.
Definition
Glycolysis splits one glucose into two
pyruvate in the cytosol, with no
oxygen and no membrane required. Two ATP are invested to
phosphorylate the sugar, then four are made by
substrate-level phosphorylation, a phosphate handed
directly from an intermediate to ADP, for a
net of 2 ATP, plus 2 NADH. Every
domain of life runs glycolysis the same way, which is strong evidence of
common ancestry.
Model
In eukaryotes pyruvate crosses into the mitochondrial
matrix. Pyruvate oxidation removes one carbon
as CO2, reduces NAD+, and attaches the remaining
2-carbon fragment to coenzyme A as acetyl-CoA. The
citric acid (Krebs) cycle joins acetyl-CoA to
oxaloacetate and, per turn, releases 2 CO2
and yields 3 NADH, 1 FADH2, and 1 ATP.
Both stages run twice per glucose, because glycolysis made two
pyruvate.
Worked example · Where the six carbons go
Track every carbon atom of one glucose to its exit as CO2.
Glucose has 6 C. Glycolysis splits it into two pyruvate of 3 C each:
\(2 \times 3 = 6\), and no carbon leaves, which
surprises students who expect glycolysis to release CO2.
Pyruvate oxidation removes one carbon from each pyruvate:
2 CO2, leaving two acetyl groups of 2 C.
Each Krebs turn releases 2 CO2, and there are two turns:
4 CO2. Total \(2 + 4 = 6\)
CO2: every carbon accounted for, and the glucose skeleton is
completely dismantled before the electron transport chain has done
anything at all.
Worked example · The tally before the chain
Add up the products of all three stages, per glucose.
Stage
ATP (net)
NADH
FADH2
CO2
Glycolysis (cytosol)
2
2
0
0
Pyruvate oxidation (×2)
0
2
0
2
Krebs cycle (×2 turns)
2
6
2
4
Total
4
10
2
6
Only 4 ATP have been made directly, which is a tiny
fraction of what glucose holds. The real product of these stages is the
10 NADH and 2 FADH2: twelve loaded
electron carriers whose energy the next lesson converts into roughly
twenty-eight more ATP.
Practice
A muscle cell fully oxidizes 4 molecules of glucose through the Krebs cycle. Calculate the NADH, FADH2, CO2, and net ATP produced before the electron transport chain.
Show answer
Multiply the per-glucose totals by four: \(4 \times 10 = 40\) NADH, \(4 \times 2 = 8\) FADH2, \(4 \times 6 = 24\) CO2, and \(4 \times 4 = 16\) ATP. Remember the ATP figure is the net: the cell actually made \(4 \times 6 = 24\) ATP by substrate-level phosphorylation and invested \(4 \times 2 = 8\) in the early steps of glycolysis.
Glucose is supplied to three identical cell suspensions and the CO2 released per glucose is measured. Use the results to identify which stages release carbon dioxide.
Treatment
None (control)
Pyruvate dehydrogenase inhibited
Aconitase (early Krebs enzyme) inhibited
CO2 released per glucose
6
0
2
Show answer
Blocking pyruvate dehydrogenase drops the yield from 6 to 0, so glycolysis by itself releases no CO2 and pyruvate cannot be processed further: everything downstream is cut off. Blocking aconitase leaves exactly 2, the two carbons removed during pyruvate oxidation, and eliminates the other 4. So pyruvate oxidation contributes 2 CO2 per glucose and the Krebs cycle contributes 4. The control is essential here: without it there is no baseline to compare the treatments against.
A researcher supplies a cell with 2 molecules of pyruvate instead of 1 glucose. Predict the number of NADH and the net ATP produced before the electron transport chain, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: 8 NADH and 2 net ATP, instead of 10 NADH and 4 net ATP. Justification: starting at pyruvate skips glycolysis entirely, so the 2 NADH and 2 net ATP it contributes are never made. What remains is pyruvate oxidation (2 NADH) and two Krebs turns (6 NADH, 2 FADH2, 2 ATP), giving \(2 + 6 = 8\) NADH and 2 ATP. The FADH2 total is unchanged at 2, because glycolysis makes none. A prediction has to be numerical here: "less ATP" is too vague to earn the point.
Lesson 3.7 · Unit 3 · CED topics 3.6–3.7
Cellular respiration II: chemiosmosis, fermentation, and fitness
Lesson 3.6 left the cell holding 10 NADH and 2 FADH2 and only
4 ATP to show for it. Now those carriers get cashed. The surprising part
is the mechanism: the cell does not hand energy from the carriers to ADP
chemically. It uses the electrons to pump protons, stores the energy as a
gradient, and then lets the gradient turn a rotary motor.
Definition
NADH and FADH2 drop their electrons into the
electron transport chain in the inner mitochondrial
membrane. As electrons fall from carrier to carrier toward
progressively more electronegative acceptors, three complexes pump
H+ from the matrix into the
intermembrane space. Oxygen is the
final electron acceptor, picking up electrons and H+ to form
water; without it the chain backs up and everything upstream stops. The
protons return through ATP synthase, whose rotor
phosphorylates ADP: chemiosmosis, or
oxidative phosphorylation.
Rule
Each NADH yields about 2.5 ATP and each FADH2 about 1.5:
\[ 10(2.5) + 2(1.5) + 4 = 25 + 3 + 4 = 32\ \mathrm{ATP} \]
Quote it as 30–32 ATP per glucose and be ready to say
why it is a range: the yields are not whole numbers, cytosolic NADH must
be shuttled in and sometimes arrives as FADH2 (costing 2 ATP),
protons leak, and the cell spends part of the same gradient on transport
instead of ATP.
Worked example · Mitchell's chemiosmotic hypothesis
Question: what actually links electron transport to ATP
synthesis? Peter Mitchell proposed in 1961 that the link is not a
chemical intermediate but a proton gradient across a closed membrane:
an idea resisted for years and awarded the Nobel Prize in 1978.
The test, exam-style: the independent variable is
whether the inner membrane is intact and impermeable to H+;
the dependent variable is ATP made per oxygen consumed;
the control is undamaged mitochondria. Result:
in intact mitochondria the medium outside acidifies as the chain runs,
and ATP appears. Rupture the inner membrane, or add a molecule that
ferries H+ straight across it, and electrons keep flowing and
oxygen is still consumed, but ATP output collapses.
Conclusion, justified: the gradient is itself the intermediate,
because ATP synthesis fails exactly when the gradient cannot be held,
even though electron transport is untouched.
Worked example · Respirometer data
Three respirometers sit in a 22 °C water bath for 20 minutes with KOH to
absorb CO2, so the pipette reading tracks oxygen consumption
alone. Vials of germinating and dormant peas each hold 24.0 g of seed;
the third holds only glass beads.
Vial
Reading at 0 min (mL)
Reading at 20 min (mL)
Germinating peas
0.90
0.42
Dormant peas
0.88
0.86
Glass beads (control)
0.85
0.89
The control drifts \(0.89 - 0.85 = +0.04\) mL from room temperature and
pressure, so subtract that drift from each vial. Germinating:
\((0.42 - 0.90) - 0.04 = -0.52\), i.e. 0.52 mL O2 consumed.
Dormant: \((0.86 - 0.88) - 0.04 = -0.06\), i.e. 0.06 mL.
\[ \text{germinating} = \frac{0.52}{(24.0)(20)} = 1.08 \times 10^{-3}\ \mathrm{mL\ O_2\,g^{-1}\,min^{-1}} \]
\[ \text{dormant} = \frac{0.06}{(24.0)(20)} = 1.25 \times 10^{-4}\ \mathrm{mL\ O_2\,g^{-1}\,min^{-1}} \]
Germinating seeds respire \(0.52/0.06 = 8.7\) times as fast: they are
building tissue, while dormant seeds only tick over. Skip the control
correction and you report 0.48 mL, understating the value by about 8%.
Practice
Yeast switched to anaerobic conditions makes 2 ATP per glucose by fermentation instead of 32. Calculate the percentage of the aerobic yield this represents and the factor by which glucose consumption must rise to hold ATP output steady, then explain what fermentation accomplishes.
Show answer
\(2/32 = 6.25\%\), so the cell must burn \(32/2 = 16\) times as much glucose per minute for the same ATP. Fermentation makes no ATP of its own beyond glycolysis: its job is to regenerate NAD+. Alcoholic fermentation reduces pyruvate to ethanol and CO2; lactic acid fermentation reduces it to lactate. Either way NADH is reoxidized, and without that recycled NAD+ glycolysis would stall within seconds and even the 2 ATP would stop.
Isolated mitochondria are given substrate and treated with two compounds. All values are percentages of the untreated control. Identify which compound is an uncoupler and explain both sets of results.
Treatment
O2 consumption
ATP synthesis
Heat released
Control
100
100
100
Compound X (DNP)
180
8
250
Compound Y (cyanide)
3
4
15
Show answer
X is the uncoupler. DNP carries H+ back across the inner membrane without passing through ATP synthase, so the gradient collapses and ATP synthesis falls to 8%, but the chain is not blocked, and with no gradient opposing it, electron transport and O2 consumption speed up to 180%, releasing the energy as heat (250%). Cyanide does the opposite: it blocks the last complex so oxygen cannot accept electrons, and O2 use, ATP, and heat all fall together. The diagnostic feature is the split: ATP down while oxygen use rises can only mean uncoupling.
A second respirometer trial repeats the experiment above at 12 °C instead of 22 °C. Predict the corrected oxygen consumption of the germinating peas over 20 minutes and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: less than 0.52 mL: roughly half, near 0.25 mL, if respiration follows the usual \(Q_{10}\) of about 2 over a 10 °C drop. Justification: glycolysis and the Krebs cycle are enzyme-catalyzed, and lowering the temperature reduces both the frequency and the energy of substrate–enzyme collisions, so fewer molecules cross the activation barrier each second and the chain draws less oxygen. Seeds cannot hold their own temperature, so the tissue simply follows the bath. What makes this a justification rather than a guess is that the mechanism is named and a specific number is attached.
Unit 3 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 3 quiz: Cellular Energetics
Fifteen multiple-choice questions and five short free-response questions across all
seven lessons: enzymes and their inhibitors, free energy and ATP coupling, the light reactions and
the Calvin cycle, and the whole path from glucose to ATP. Click an option to see why each choice is
right or wrong, then write each free response on paper against the clock before you open the model.
Multiple choice
Model: a reaction-coordinate diagram for the conversion of substrate S to
product P, drawn twice on the same axes.
Free energy in kJ/mol runs up the y-axis; reaction progress runs along the x-axis. Both curves
start on the same reactant shelf at 0 and end on the same product shelf at −32. Curve 1, for the
uncatalyzed reaction, climbs to a peak of +84 before dropping to the product shelf. Curve 2,
measured with enzyme present, follows the same shelves but peaks at only +35.
Which statement is best supported by the two curves?
Correct. The barrier falls from +84 to +35, a drop of \(84 - 35 = 49\) kJ/mol, and
both curves end on the same product shelf, so \(\Delta G\) is −32 kJ/mol with and without
enzyme. Naming the right quantity is the whole item: an enzyme changes \(E_a\), never
\(\Delta G\).
This is the arithmetic slip of subtracting the barrier reduction from \(\Delta G\):
−32 − 49 gives −81. But the product shelf never moved on the diagram, so the free-energy change
is identical on both curves. "The enzyme lowers the energy of the reaction" is the wrong
quantity and earns nothing on an exam.
Nothing in the figure shows the product shelf rising, and if it did the reaction
would release less free energy, not more. Enzymes also cannot shift an equilibrium
position: they speed the forward and reverse directions by the same factor, so the system
simply arrives at the same equilibrium sooner.
The 32 here is \(\Delta G\), not the change in the barrier; the barrier fell by
49 kJ/mol. The second half of the choice repeats the most common enzyme misconception: a
catalyst changes the rate of approach to equilibrium, not the position of the equilibrium
itself.
Which observation provides the strongest evidence for the induced-fit model of enzyme
action rather than a rigid lock-and-key active site?
This is true and important, it is why a cell runs a high-throughput pathway on a
tiny amount of protein, but a rigid lock-and-key enzyme would also be regenerated unchanged.
An observation that both models predict cannot distinguish between them.
Correct. Induced fit claims the active site is not pre-formed: contact with the
substrate changes its shape, straining the bonds about to break and positioning the
catalytic groups. A structure that differs before and after binding is direct evidence of that
conformational change, which lock-and-key does not predict.
Every catalyst, rigid or flexible, lowers \(E_a\) without touching \(\Delta G\).
This statement describes what enzymes do, not how the active site behaves when substrate
arrives, so it says nothing about which binding model is right.
Saturation follows from having a finite number of active sites and is predicted
equally well by both models. It is good evidence that catalysis happens at discrete sites, but
it does not tell you whether those sites change shape on binding.
Data: initial reaction rate of one enzyme at 30 °C and pH 7.0 across a range
of substrate concentrations, with no inhibitor and with each of two inhibitors held at a fixed
concentration.
[Substrate] (mM)
1
2
5
10
20
No inhibitor (µmol/min)
8.0
14.0
25.0
32.0
36.0
+ Inhibitor X (µmol/min)
3.0
6.0
13.0
22.0
33.0
+ Inhibitor Y (µmol/min)
3.2
5.6
10.0
12.8
14.4
Which conclusion about inhibitor Y is best supported by the data?
Both inhibitors lower the rate at every concentration in the table, so this feature
cannot tell them apart. The diagnostic question is what happens as substrate is flooded in:
X climbs to 33.0 µmol/min, nearly the uninhibited 36.0, while Y stalls at 14.4.
Correct. \(14.4/36.0 = 0.40\), so Y caps the enzyme at 40% of its maximum however
much substrate is added. That is the signature of a noncompetitive inhibitor: it binds an
allosteric site and distorts the active site, so a fixed fraction of enzyme molecules is dead
and substrate cannot compete it away.
A right-shifted curve that still reaches the uninhibited plateau does describe a
competitive inhibitor, but that is inhibitor X, not Y. Y's curve is not merely shifted; its
ceiling is lower, which is a different effect with a different mechanism.
A denatured enzyme has lost its tertiary fold and gives a rate near zero at every
substrate concentration. Y-treated enzyme still rises from 3.2 to 14.4 µmol/min as substrate
increases, so the remaining enzyme is folded and working; it is inhibited, not destroyed.
A lizard's oxygen consumption is 3.50 mL O2 g−1 h−1
at 20 °C and 8.75 mL O2 g−1 h−1 at 30 °C, both temperatures
below the optimum for its enzymes. What is Q10, and what does that value indicate?
Correct. \(Q_{10} = (8.75/3.50)^{10/10} = 2.50\). Most biological rates give 2 to 3
below the optimum, because warming both increases collision frequency and raises the fraction of
collisions carrying enough energy to cross the activation barrier.
This is the arithmetic difference, \(8.75 - 3.50\), not a ratio.
\(Q_{10}\) is defined as the factor by which a rate is multiplied per 10 °C, so it is unitless;
an answer carrying mL O2 g−1 h−1 cannot be a \(Q_{10}\).
0.40 is \(3.50/8.75\): the ratio taken upside down. A \(Q_{10}\) below 1 does
signal denaturation, but only when the measured rate actually falls with warming, and here it
more than doubled.
1.25 would mean a 25% increase per 10 °C, which is roughly what simple diffusion
does. Enzyme-catalyzed processes respond far more steeply, and 2.5 is exactly that steeper
response.
Synthesis of a cellular intermediate has ΔG = +21.0 kJ/mol. In the cell this step is
coupled to ATP hydrolysis, ΔG = −30.5 kJ/mol. What is ΔG for the coupled reaction, and will it
proceed?
Adding 21.0 to 30.5 ignores the sign on ATP hydrolysis, which releases
free energy. Coupled reactions are summed with their signs: \(+21.0 + (-30.5)\). Losing the sign
here turns a spontaneous process into an impossible one.
Correct. \(+21.0 + (-30.5) = -9.5\) kJ/mol, and a negative sum means the coupled
reaction is exergonic and proceeds. Mechanically, ATP phosphorylates an intermediate so the two
steps share one pathway; the 9.5 kJ/mol left over is the margin that makes the pair
spontaneous.
This treats ATP hydrolysis as if the endergonic step were free. The synthesis
still costs +21.0 kJ/mol, and that cost is paid out of the 30.5 released, leaving −9.5. Coupling
is never free: that is why cells need so much ATP.
ATP hydrolysis is a source of free energy, not a catalyst; it changes
\(\Delta G\), while enzymes change \(E_a\). Keeping those two roles separate is the whole point
of this topic, and confusing them is the most common error on coupling questions.
Data: daily energy budget of a 40 g mouse and a 40 g lizard, each measured in
a 25 °C chamber over 24 hours.
Measurement
Mouse (endotherm)
Lizard (ectotherm)
Energy taken in (kJ/day)
120
20
Energy spent on maintenance (kJ/day)
108
8
Which statement is best supported by the data?
Intake alone does not say what is left over. The energy available for growth and
reproduction is intake minus maintenance, and both animals land on the same surplus:
\(120 - 108 = 12\) kJ/day and \(20 - 8 = 12\) kJ/day.
Correct. The surpluses are identical at 12 kJ/day, but \(12/120 = 10\%\) versus
\(12/20 = 60\%\). The mouse holds 37 °C against a 25 °C room and burns most of its intake as
heat; the lizard lets its body temperature follow the chamber, so almost nothing is spent on
thermoregulation.
The 60% is the share of intake left after maintenance, not the share
converted into tissue: some of that surplus is lost in assimilation and in the cost of
building. The table gives no measurement of tissue gained, so this claim goes beyond the
data.
Both maintenance figures are below the corresponding intake, so each animal has a
positive surplus. An organism whose maintenance truly consumed its whole intake would lose mass
and stop reproducing, which is the link between energy budgets and fitness.
Figure: two traces on the same axes; percent of each trace's own maximum on
the y-axis (0 to 100), wavelength in nm on the x-axis (400 to 700).
Trace 1 is the absorption spectrum of purified chlorophyll a: 100 at 430 nm, falling to 6 at
550 nm, rising again to 92 at 680 nm. Trace 2 is the action spectrum of an intact
Elodea leaf, measured as oxygen released: 85 at 430 nm, 24 at 550 nm, and 100 at
680 nm.
Which best explains why the two traces differ most at 550 nm?
Reflected light has by definition left the leaf without being absorbed, so it
cannot drive photolysis. Reflection in the green band is why leaves look green; it is
the reason the action spectrum dips at 550 nm, not the reason it is higher than chlorophyll a's
absorption there.
If extraction lowered absorption uniformly, trace 1 would sit below trace 2
everywhere. It does not, chlorophyll a reads 100 at 430 nm while the leaf reads 85, so a
general underestimate cannot be the explanation for a gap that appears only in the green.
Correct. Trace 1 is one purified pigment; trace 2 is a whole leaf containing
chlorophyll b and carotenoids, which absorb in the band where chlorophyll a is nearly
transparent and transfer that excitation energy to chlorophyll a in the reaction center. That is
why the action spectrum reads 24 where absorption reads 6.
Oxygen release requires photolysis of water at photosystem II, which needs photons
arriving now; stored ATP and NADPH are products of the light reactions and cannot substitute for
them. A leaf in the dark releases no oxygen at all.
DCMU blocks the transfer of electrons from photosystem II to plastoquinone. A
suspension of isolated chloroplasts is illuminated in the presence of DCMU. Which result is
predicted?
This reverses the dependency. Photolysis is not a light-driven reaction that runs
on its own: it is the replacement step, triggered when P680 has lost electrons. Block the
downstream transfer and photosystem II stays reduced, so it stops pulling electrons off
water.
Correct. Water is the electron source, and it is split only to refill
photosystem II. With the exit blocked, no photolysis occurs, so no O2 is released;
NADPH production also collapses, because photosystem I receives no electrons to pass to
NADP+ reductase.
Electrons that cannot leave photosystem II do not generate additional products:
the excited electrons simply return to the ground state, releasing the energy as heat and
fluorescence. Nothing in a blocked chain makes more oxygen or more NADPH.
The proton gradient is built by the electron transport chain pumping
H+ into the lumen and by photolysis releasing H+ there. Blocking electron
flow removes both sources, so the gradient dissipates and ATP synthase runs down.
A leaf fixes 18 molecules of CO2 through the Calvin cycle. How much ATP and
NADPH are consumed, and how many molecules of glucose could be assembled from the G3P
exported?
These are the per-G3P figures for three turns, not for eighteen. One turn fixes one
CO2 and costs 3 ATP and 2 NADPH, so eighteen fixations cost six times as much.
Anchor every Calvin-cycle calculation on "one CO2 per turn."
Correct. Eighteen turns cost \(18 \times 3 = 54\) ATP and \(18 \times 2 = 36\)
NADPH. Every three turns export one net G3P, giving \(18/3 = 6\) G3P, and two G3P build one
glucose, so \(6/2 = 3\) glucose. Check it the other way: \(3 \times 18 = 54\) ATP and
\(3 \times 12 = 36\) NADPH.
Doubling the correct values usually comes from applying the per-glucose costs
(18 ATP, 12 NADPH) to each of six turns. Those per-glucose figures already include all six
turns, so using them again multiplies the cost twice.
The ATP and NADPH are right, but six glucose would need \(6 \times 6 = 36\)
carbons fixed, twice what the stem gives. Dividing 18 by 3 to get glucose confuses turns per
exported G3P with turns per glucose, which is six.
Data: net photosynthesis of soybean (a C3 plant) and maize (a C4 plant),
measured at a leaf temperature of 35 °C in full sun at three atmospheric CO2
concentrations.
Atmospheric CO2 (ppm)
200
400
800
Soybean, C3 (µmol CO2 m−2 s−1)
8
18
30
Maize, C4 (µmol CO2 m−2 s−1)
28
34
35
Raising CO2 from 200 to 800 ppm multiplies soybean's rate by 3.75 but raises
maize's by only 25%. Which explanation is best supported?
Correct. C4 anatomy delivers CO2 to rubisco at a high local
concentration, so maize starts at 28 and has little room to gain: \(35/28 = 1.25\). Soybean's
rubisco is CO2-limited and competing with O2 at 200 ppm, so extra
CO2 both feeds carboxylation and suppresses photorespiration:
\(30/8 = 3.75\).
Maize at 200 ppm already outperforms soybean at 400 ppm, which rules out a plant
that cannot get CO2 in. C4 plants in fact run with less stomatal opening for
the same carbon gain, which is why they conserve water, but stomatal number is not what the data
here distinguish.
CO2 is not used in the light reactions at all: it enters at the
carbon-fixation step of the Calvin cycle. Chlorophyll content sets how much light energy is
captured, which is not the limiting factor in full sun at 200 ppm CO2.
Rubisco is essentially the same enzyme in both plants; the C4 advantage is in
delivery, not affinity. PEP carboxylase, the enzyme that first captures CO2
in maize, is the one with no affinity for O2: swapping the two enzymes is the
standard error on this question.
A cell is supplied with glucose in which all six carbons are 14C and
respires it completely in the presence of oxygen. Where does the labeled carbon leave, and in what
amounts per glucose?
Glycolysis splits a 6-carbon glucose into two 3-carbon pyruvate, \(2 \times 3 = 6\), so every carbon is still in the cell when glycolysis ends. Expecting CO2 from
glycolysis is one of the most common errors on respiration items.
The citric acid cycle contributes 4 of the 6, two per turn over two turns. The
other two leave earlier, during pyruvate oxidation, when each pyruvate loses one carbon as it is
converted to the 2-carbon acetyl group on coenzyme A.
Correct. Pyruvate oxidation releases one CO2 per pyruvate, so 2 per
glucose; each of the two Krebs turns releases 2, so 4 more. \(2 + 4 = 6\), and the glucose
skeleton is fully dismantled before the electron transport chain does anything.
Oxygen's role at the end of the chain is to accept electrons and H+,
forming water, no carbon is involved. Every CO2 is released by a decarboxylation
reaction upstream, in the matrix, before the electrons ever reach the chain.
Per molecule of glucose, how much ATP is produced before the electron transport chain,
and by what mechanism?
The 2 is glycolysis alone, and the mechanism is wrong twice over: glycolysis
happens in the cytosol, and oxidative phosphorylation is the chemiosmotic process that occurs
only once electrons reach the chain. Substrate-level phosphorylation hands a phosphate straight
from an intermediate to ADP.
Ten is the number of NADH per glucose, not ATP. Those carriers hold most of the
energy, but it is not released as ATP until the electron transport chain, and each NADH yields
roughly 2.5 ATP there, not 1.
Thirty-two is the approximate total for the whole of aerobic respiration,
including the chain, and chemiosmosis happens after the stages in question. The point of this
item is that the stages before the chain produce very little ATP directly.
Correct. Glycolysis makes 4 ATP but invests 2, for a net 2, and each of the two
Krebs turns yields 1 ATP (or GTP). All four come from substrate-level phosphorylation; the real
product of these stages is the 10 NADH and 2 FADH2.
Data: pipette readings (mL) from three respirometers held in a 22 °C water
bath for 20 minutes. KOH in each vial absorbs the CO2 released, and each seed vial
contains 15.0 g of peas.
Vial
Reading at 0 min
Reading at 20 min
Germinating peas
1.00
0.55
Dormant peas
0.95
0.92
Glass beads only (control)
0.90
0.93
What is the rate of oxygen consumption of the germinating peas, corrected using the
control?
This is the uncorrected value: \(0.45/(15.0 \times 20) = 1.5 \times 10^{-3}\). The
bead vial drifted \(0.93 - 0.90 = +0.03\) mL from changes in room temperature and pressure, and
that drift pushed every reading up, so it must be subtracted before the rate is computed.
\(2.0 \times 10^{-4}\) is the dormant peas' rate:
\(0.06/(15.0 \times 20)\) after the same correction. It is a useful comparison: germinating
seeds respire \(0.48/0.06 = 8\) times as fast, but it is not what the question asks for.
Correct. Drift \(= 0.93 - 0.90 = +0.03\) mL. Germinating:
\((0.55 - 1.00) - 0.03 = -0.48\), so 0.48 mL of O2 was consumed, and
\(0.48/(15.0 \times 20) = 1.6 \times 10^{-3}\) mL O2 g−1
min−1.
This is \(0.48/20\): the time division only. Respirometer rates are normalized
per gram as well as per minute so that vials with different amounts of tissue can be compared;
dropping the mass term also drops g−1 from the units, which is the clue that
something is missing.
Data: isolated mitochondria supplied with substrate and treated with one of
three compounds. All values are percentages of the untreated control.
Treatment
O2 consumption
ATP synthesis
Heat released
Control
100
100
100
Compound M
165
12
230
Compound N
8
6
20
Compound P
22
9
35
Compound P inhibits ATP synthase and does not act on the electron carriers directly.
Which feature of the data is consistent with that action, and why?
That row is compound M, and the pattern is the signature of an uncoupler:
protons leak back across the membrane without passing the synthase, so nothing opposes the pumps
and electron transport accelerates. An ATP synthase inhibitor does the opposite: it leaves the
gradient in place.
Correct. With the return path shut, H+ accumulates in the intermembrane
space until the pumps can no longer push against it, so electron transport slows and oxygen
consumption falls to 22%. This coupling of ATP demand to oxygen use is called respiratory
control.
Oxygen, not ATP synthase, is the final electron acceptor: that is the vocabulary
error the distractor is testing. The 8%/20% row is compound N, consistent with a chemical such
as cyanide that blocks the last complex of the chain so oxygen cannot be reduced at all.
Energy that cannot be captured as ATP is released as heat only when the protons
are allowed to flow back, which is what an uncoupler permits and an ATP synthase inhibitor
prevents. Compound P's heat is 35%, well below the control, exactly because the whole chain has
slowed.
A yeast culture producing about 32 ATP per glucose aerobically is shifted to anaerobic
conditions, where it produces 2 ATP per glucose. By what factor must glucose consumption rise to
hold ATP production steady, and what does fermentation itself contribute?
Correct. \(32/2 = 16\), so the cell must burn sixteen times as much glucose per
minute. Fermentation's own reactions (pyruvate to ethanol and CO2, or pyruvate to
lactate) make no ATP; they oxidize NADH back to NAD+, without which glycolysis would
stall within seconds and even the 2 ATP would stop.
The factor is right, but the 2 ATP are made in glycolysis, not in the
fermentation step that follows. Attributing them to fermentation hides the real function of
those reactions, which is recycling the electron carrier.
Thirty is the difference \(32 - 2\), not the ratio, and the recycling runs the
other way: NADH is oxidized to NAD+. The citric acid cycle is not running at all under
anaerobic conditions, because the chain that reoxidizes its carriers has no final electron
acceptor.
Fermentation yields \(2/32 = 6.25\%\) of the aerobic ATP per glucose. It is
actually faster per unit time than aerobic respiration, which is why sprinting muscle
uses it, but it is far less thorough: most of the glucose's energy is left in ethanol or
lactate.
Free response
Data: initial rate of O2 production by catalase acting on 1.0%
hydrogen peroxide at 25 °C. Each value is the mean of three trials. A second set of tubes
received catalase that had been boiled for 10 minutes and cooled before use.
pH of buffer
3
5
7
9
11
Catalase (µmol O2/min)
4
22
48
20
3
Boiled catalase (µmol O2/min)
0
0
0
0
0
A student investigated how pH affects catalase activity. Using the investigation and
the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the independent variable in the investigation, and describe the purpose of the
boiled-catalase treatment.
Explain the relationship between pH and the initial reaction rate in terms of the structure of
the enzyme.
Construct a graph of the catalase data: place pH on the x-axis scaled from 3 to 11 and initial
rate on the y-axis scaled from 0 to 50 µmol O2/min, label both axes with units, plot
the five points, and connect them.
A classmate claims the data show that catalase is permanently denatured at pH 11. Justify
whether the data provided are sufficient to support that claim.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the independent variable is the pH of the buffer the reaction is
run in. The boiled tubes are a control showing that the oxygen measured depends on folded,
functional enzyme, not on hydrogen peroxide decomposing on its own or on any other component
of the mixture at that pH. Do not accept: naming the enzyme, the peroxide, or the reaction
rate as the independent variable; "it is the control" with no statement of what it controls
for; restating the stem.
(b) Accept: the rate rises from pH 3 to a maximum at pH 7 and falls on
either side, and away from the optimum excess H+ or OH− changes the
charges on the R groups lining the active site, breaking the ionic and hydrogen bonds that
hold its shape, so the site no longer complements hydrogen peroxide and fewer
enzyme–substrate complexes form. Do not accept: "pH affects the enzyme"; "the enzyme dies";
a description of the trend with no structural mechanism: describing is not explaining.
(c) Accept: pH on the x-axis from 3 to 11 with an even scale, initial rate
on the y-axis from 0 to 50, both axes labeled with units (pH; µmol O2/min), the
five points (3, 4), (5, 22), (7, 48), (9, 20), (11, 3) plotted and connected into a single
peak at pH 7. Do not accept: axes reversed; units omitted from the axis labels; points that
do not match the table.
(d) Accept: the data are not sufficient; they show only that activity is
low at pH 11, which is equally consistent with reversible inhibition; supporting
permanent denaturation requires returning the pH 11 enzyme to pH 7 and showing that activity
does not recover. Do not accept: "yes, because the rate is only 3 µmol/min"; a claim with no
reference to a missing recovery test; asserting denaturation from the boiled row, which was a
different treatment.
Show a 4/4 response
a The independent variable is the pH of the buffer the reaction runs
in. The boiled catalase is the control: the oxygen I measured came from folded, working enzyme
and not from peroxide breaking down on its own, because those tubes gave 0 µmol
O2/min at every pH.
b The rate climbs from 4 µmol/min at pH 3 to 48 at pH 7, then drops
back to 3 at pH 11. Away from pH 7 the extra H+ or OH− changes the
charges on the R groups lining catalase's active site, breaking the ionic and hydrogen bonds
that hold that site in shape. A misshapen site no longer fits hydrogen peroxide, so fewer
enzyme–substrate complexes form each second and the rate falls.
c I would put pH on the x-axis from 3 to 11 and initial rate on the
y-axis from 0 to 50 µmol O2/min, label both axes with those units, plot (3, 4),
(5, 22), (7, 48), (9, 20) and (11, 3), and connect them into a single peak at pH 7.
d The data are not enough. All the table shows is that activity is
low at pH 11, and reversible inhibition would look exactly the same. To support "permanently
denatured" I would have to take the enzyme out of pH 11 buffer, put it back at pH 7, and show
that the rate does not come back.
Data: standard free-energy changes for three reactions in a plant cell.
Reaction
ΔG (kJ/mol)
1. glucose + fructose → sucrose + H2O
+27.0
2. ATP + H2O → ADP + Pi
−30.5
3. activation of one amino acid for protein synthesis
+34.0
Using the values in the table, answer (a) through (d).
Identify which reactions in the table are endergonic, and describe one structural feature of
ATP that makes reaction 2 exergonic.
Explain how coupling reaction 2 to reaction 1 allows a plant cell to make sucrose even though
reaction 1 by itself will not proceed.
Calculate ΔG for reaction 1 coupled to one ATP hydrolysis, and for reaction 3 coupled to one
ATP hydrolysis. Show your setup and give units.
Justify, using your calculated values, the claim that reaction 3 requires the hydrolysis of two
ATP rather than one.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: reactions 1 and 3 are endergonic (positive ΔG). Feature: the
three phosphate groups sit in a row and each carries a negative charge, so they repel one
another; removing the terminal phosphate relieves that repulsion, and ADP and inorganic
phosphate are more stable in water than ATP was. Do not accept: "ATP's bonds store a lot of
energy" with nothing structural; identifying reaction 2 as endergonic; naming the reactions
with no described feature of ATP.
(b) Accept: ATP transfers its terminal phosphate onto one of the sugars,
and that phosphorylated intermediate is reactive enough to proceed; because the two steps
share the intermediate they occur as a single reaction, so only the sum of the two ΔG values
determines whether it runs. Do not accept: "ATP gives the reaction energy" with no
intermediate and no reference to summing; a correct general statement about coupling that is
never applied to sucrose.
(c) Accept: reaction 1, \(+27.0 + (-30.5) = -3.5\) kJ/mol; reaction 3,
\(+34.0 + (-30.5) = +3.5\) kJ/mol. Setup must be shown and units are required. Do not accept:
values with no setup; a sign error that reports reaction 1 as +3.5; answers with no
units.
(d) Accept: with one ATP, reaction 3 is still +3.5 kJ/mol: positive, so it
remains endergonic and will not proceed; with two,
\(+34.0 + 2(-30.5) = -27.0\) kJ/mol, which is negative and therefore spontaneous. The evidence
cited must be the sign of a computed sum. Do not accept: "two ATP give more energy" with no
value; restating part (c) without drawing the conclusion about spontaneity.
Show a 4/4 response
a Reactions 1 and 3 are endergonic: both have a positive ΔG. ATP's
three phosphate groups sit in a row and each carries a negative charge, so they repel one
another. Cutting off the terminal phosphate relieves that repulsion, and ADP plus free
phosphate are more stable in water than ATP was, so the hydrolysis releases free energy.
b The cell does not run the two reactions side by side and hope. ATP
hands its terminal phosphate to one of the sugars first, and that phosphorylated sugar is
unstable enough to react with the other one. Because both steps go through the same
intermediate they are really one reaction, so what decides whether sucrose gets made is the
sum of the two ΔG values, not reaction 1's value on its own.
c Reaction 1 with one ATP: \(+27.0 + (-30.5) = -3.5\) kJ/mol.
Reaction 3 with one ATP: \(+34.0 + (-30.5) = +3.5\) kJ/mol.
d With one ATP, reaction 3 still comes out at +3.5 kJ/mol. That is
positive, so the coupled reaction is still endergonic and will not run on its own. With two
ATP, \(+34.0 + 2(-30.5) = -27.0\) kJ/mol, which is negative and therefore spontaneous. The
sign of that sum is the evidence that one ATP is not enough and two are.
Model: a thylakoid membrane drawn in cross-section, with the stroma above the
membrane and the thylakoid lumen below it.
Embedded in the membrane from left to right are photosystem II, plastoquinone, the cytochrome
complex, plastocyanin, photosystem I, and, at the far right, ATP synthase. An arrow labeled
2 H2O → 4 H+ + 4 e− + O2 points from the lumen into
photosystem II. Curved arrows at the cytochrome complex show H+ moving from the
stroma into the lumen. On the stroma side, NADP+ reductase is drawn accepting
electrons from photosystem I. A pair of labels gives the stroma as pH 8.0 and the lumen as
pH 5.0 in a leaf that has been illuminated for several minutes.
Using the model, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the source of the electrons that replace those lost by photosystem II, and describe
where in the model protons accumulate.
Explain how electron flow through the model generates the pH difference shown between the
stroma and the lumen.
Calculate the ratio of the H+ concentration in the lumen to the H+
concentration in the stroma in the illuminated leaf. Show your setup.
A chemical is added that makes the thylakoid membrane freely permeable to H+.
Justify the claim that ATP synthesis will fall sharply even though electrons continue to flow
from photosystem II to NADP+.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the electrons come from water, split by photolysis on the lumen
side (2 H2O → 4 H+ + 4 e− + O2); protons
accumulate in the thylakoid lumen. Do not accept: "from the sun," "from NADPH," or "from
chlorophyll"; naming water without saying which compartment the protons build up in.
(b) Accept: two sources with directions stated; photolysis releases
H+ directly into the lumen, and the cytochrome complex uses the energy of electrons
falling through the chain to pump H+ from the stroma into the lumen; both raise
lumen H+ and lower stroma H+. Do not accept: "the chain builds a
gradient" with no mechanism or no direction; reversing the two compartments.
(c) Accept: pH 5.0 gives [H+] = 1 × 10−5 M and
pH 8.0 gives 1 × 10−8 M, so the ratio is
\((1 \times 10^{-5})/(1 \times 10^{-8}) = 1 \times 10^{3}\), i.e. 1000 : 1 with the lumen
higher. Do not accept: 8/5 or a difference of 3 reported as the ratio; an answer that does not
say which compartment is more concentrated; no setup shown.
(d) Accept: ATP synthase is driven by H+ flowing down the
gradient through it, so if H+ can cross the membrane anywhere the gradient
dissipates as fast as it is built, few protons take the route through the synthase, and little
ADP is phosphorylated; electron transport is a separate process and continues because no
carrier has been blocked. Do not accept: "the chemical breaks ATP synthase"; a claim that
never identifies the gradient as the energy source for ATP synthesis.
Show a 4/4 response
a The replacement electrons come from water. In the model, water is
split on the lumen side into 4 H+, 4 e−, and O2, and those
electrons go into photosystem II. The protons build up inside the thylakoid lumen, which is
the compartment labeled pH 5.0.
b Two things load the lumen with H+. Splitting water dumps
protons straight into it, and as electrons fall from photosystem II through plastoquinone to
the cytochrome complex, that complex uses the released energy to pump more H+ out
of the stroma and into the lumen. Both moves raise lumen H+ and lower stroma
H+, which is why the lumen sits at pH 5.0 and the stroma at pH 8.0.
c pH 5.0 means [H+] = 1 × 10−5 M and pH 8.0
means [H+] = 1 × 10−8 M, so the ratio is
\((1 \times 10^{-5})/(1 \times 10^{-8}) = 1 \times 10^{3}\). The lumen is 1000 times more
concentrated in H+ than the stroma.
d ATP synthase only works because protons are forced back into the
stroma through it. If the membrane leaks H+ everywhere, the gradient drains as fast
as the chain builds it, so hardly any protons take the route through the synthase and ATP
output collapses. Nothing has touched the electron carriers, so electrons still reach
NADP+, which is what shows ATP synthesis depends on the gradient, not on electron
flow alone.
Data: pipette readings (mL) from three respirometers in a 25 °C water bath,
read at 0 and 15 minutes. Each vial contains KOH to absorb CO2, and the two seed
vials each hold 20.0 g of peas.
Vial
Reading at 0 min
Reading at 15 min
Germinating peas
0.80
0.35
Dormant peas
0.82
0.79
Glass beads only
0.78
0.80
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the independent variable in the investigation, and describe the purpose of the vial
containing only glass beads.
Explain the relationship between the metabolic state of the peas and the volume of oxygen
consumed.
Calculate the corrected rate of oxygen consumption of the germinating peas in mL O2
per gram per minute. Show your setup and give units.
Justify the claim that the difference between the two seed vials is caused by respiration
rather than by the amount of seed used.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the independent variable is the metabolic state of the vial's
contents (germinating peas, dormant peas, or no living tissue). The bead vial is a control for
volume changes caused by shifts in room temperature and barometric pressure over the 15
minutes; its drift is subtracted from the other vials' readings. Do not accept: naming oxygen
consumption (the dependent variable) as the independent variable; "the beads are the control"
with no statement of what they control for.
(b) Accept: germinating seeds are synthesizing proteins, building walls and
dividing cells, so their ATP demand is high; most of that ATP comes from oxidative
phosphorylation, and the electron transport chain runs only while oxygen accepts electrons at
the end, so a high ATP demand produces a high rate of oxygen consumption. Dormant seeds have
very low ATP demand and consume little. Do not accept: "germinating seeds respire more,"
which restates the data; a mechanism that never mentions ATP demand or oxygen's role as final
electron acceptor.
(c) Accept: drift \(= 0.80 - 0.78 = +0.02\) mL; germinating change
\(= 0.35 - 0.80 = -0.45\) mL; corrected \(= -0.45 - 0.02 = -0.47\) mL, so 0.47 mL of
O2 was consumed; rate \(= 0.47/(20.0 \times 15) = 1.57 \times 10^{-3}\) mL
O2 g−1 min−1. Accept 1.6 × 10−3 if the setup shows
the correction. Units are required. Do not accept: 1.5 × 10−3 with no correction
shown; dividing by time or by mass alone; a bare number.
(d) Accept: mass was a controlled variable, both seed vials held 20.0 g,
so it cannot account for 0.47 mL versus 0.05 mL, a difference of about ninefold; the only
variable that differed between those two vials is whether the seeds were germinating. Do not
accept: repeating the two volumes with no reference to the controlled mass; "germinating seeds
are more active" as the entire justification.
Show a 4/4 response
a The independent variable is what is in the vial: germinating peas,
dormant peas, or just beads. The bead vial has no living tissue, so anything that changes its
reading has to be the room warming or the pressure shifting rather than respiration. It drifted
+0.02 mL in 15 minutes, and I subtract that drift from the other two vials.
b Germinating seeds are building tissue: transcribing genes, making
proteins, dividing cells, and all of that costs ATP. Most of that ATP comes from oxidative
phosphorylation, and the electron transport chain can only keep running while oxygen accepts
electrons at the end, so a high ATP demand means a high oxygen demand. Dormant seeds are
barely metabolizing, so they take up almost none.
c Drift \(= 0.80 - 0.78 = +0.02\) mL. Germinating peas:
\(0.35 - 0.80 = -0.45\) mL, corrected to \(-0.45 - 0.02 = -0.47\) mL, so 0.47 mL of
O2 was consumed. Rate \(= 0.47/(20.0 \times 15) = 1.57 \times 10^{-3}\) mL
O2 g−1 min−1.
d Mass was held constant at 20.0 g in both seed vials, so it cannot
be why germinating peas used 0.47 mL and dormant peas only 0.05 mL: about nine times less.
The one thing that differed between those two vials is whether the seeds were germinating, so
the evidence supports metabolic state as the cause.
Data: relative concentrations of two Calvin-cycle intermediates in
illuminated Chlorella. The light was switched off at time 0; CO2 was held at
1% throughout.
Time (s)
−30
0
15
30
60
3-PGA (relative units)
100
100
145
168
175
RuBP (relative units)
100
100
42
18
8
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the two products of the light reactions that the Calvin cycle requires, and describe
what happens to the concentration of RuBP after the light is switched off.
Explain why 3-PGA accumulates over the same interval in which RuBP falls.
Predict the direction of change in 3-PGA and in RuBP if instead the light were left on and
CO2 were removed from the chamber at time 0.
Justify your prediction in (c) using the sequence of reactions in the Calvin cycle.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: ATP and NADPH. RuBP falls steeply, from 100 relative units to
42 within 15 s and to 8 by 60 s, a 92% decrease. Do not accept: naming O2, G3P, or
glucose as a required product of the light reactions; "RuBP changes" with no direction; a
restatement of the stem.
(b) Accept: with the light off no new ATP or NADPH is made, so the
reduction of 3-PGA to G3P stalls and 3-PGA stops being consumed, while rubisco, which needs
no light, keeps fixing the CO2 still present onto the RuBP already in the stroma,
making more 3-PGA and using up RuBP, which cannot be regenerated because regeneration also
costs ATP. Do not accept: "the Calvin cycle stops," which the data contradict; an answer that
never links ATP or NADPH to a specific step of the cycle.
(c) Accept: 3-PGA falls and RuBP rises. Both directions are required. Do
not accept: "the cycle slows down"; only one of the two directions; "no change."
(d) Accept: CO2 is rubisco's other substrate, so removing it
stops carboxylation and no new 3-PGA is formed; because the light is still on, ATP and NADPH
keep arriving and the existing 3-PGA continues to be reduced to G3P and drained away, while
G3P still feeds regeneration, so RuBP is rebuilt with nothing to consume it and accumulates.
Do not accept: restating the prediction in other words; a justification that does not name
CO2 as rubisco's substrate or does not use the continued supply of ATP and
NADPH.
Show a 4/4 response
a The Calvin cycle needs ATP and NADPH from the light reactions. Once
the light goes off, RuBP drops fast, from 100 relative units to 42 in the first 15 seconds
and down to 8 by 60 seconds, a 92% fall.
b In the dark there is no new ATP or NADPH, so the step that reduces
3-PGA to G3P stalls and 3-PGA stops getting used up. Rubisco does not need light, though, so
it keeps attaching the CO2 still in the chamber onto the RuBP already sitting in the
stroma. That makes more 3-PGA while consuming RuBP, and rebuilding RuBP also costs ATP, so the
RuBP pool drains and is never refilled. That is why one rises 75% while the other
collapses.
c 3-PGA would fall and RuBP would rise: the opposite of what the
table shows.
d CO2 is rubisco's other substrate, so taking it away
stops carboxylation and no new 3-PGA is made. The light is still on, so ATP and NADPH keep
arriving and the 3-PGA already there keeps being reduced to G3P, draining that pool. The G3P
still feeds the regeneration phase, so RuBP gets rebuilt with nothing to carboxylate it and
piles up. That is the mirror image of the dark experiment, which is what makes the prediction
consistent with the model.
Lesson 4.1 · Unit 4 · CED topic 4.1
Cell communication: contact, local, and long-distance signals
A cell is a sealed bag of chemistry. Nothing inside a liver cell can feel
you start to sprint. Multicellular life works anyway because cells send
chemical messages, and every message needs three things: a cell that
releases a signal molecule (the ligand), a cell carrying
a receptor shaped to bind it, and a distance the
molecule can actually cross.
That last item sorts signaling into types. Touching cells hand molecules
over directly; cells 20 nm apart let one diffuse across; cells a meter
apart need the bloodstream. Even bacteria do this: they are
unicellular, but they are not alone.
Definition
Direct contact: cytoplasm-to-cytoplasm channels:
plasmodesmata through plant cell walls,
gap junctions between animal cells. Small molecules
pass without entering the extracellular fluid. The other contact
route is cell-surface markers, membrane proteins one
cell reads on another: how a T cell inspects an antigen-presenting
cell.
Paracrine: secreted into the extracellular fluid,
acting on nearby cells, as growth factors do in wound healing.
Synaptic: a neurotransmitter crosses a cleft
about 20 nm wide onto ligand-gated ion channels. Fast and precisely
addressed.
Endocrine: a hormone enters the blood and reaches
the whole body: slow to start, long-lasting, broadcast rather than
addressed.
Rule
The receptor, not the signal, decides who responds.
Insulin circulates past every cell in the body, but only cells carrying
an insulin receptor change what they do. Specificity comes from the
complementary fit between ligand and receptor, exactly as it does
between substrate and enzyme, and one ligand can trigger different
responses in different cell types, because the machinery downstream of
the receptor differs.
Worked example · Quorum sensing in Vibrio fischeri
Question: why do these bacteria glow inside a squid's light
organ but not in open seawater? Each cell leaks a small autoinducer
molecule and carries a receptor for it. Cultures were grown to a range
of densities and luminescence measured.
Cell density (cells/mL)
1×105
1×106
5×106
1×107
5×107
1×108
Light output (relative units)
0.1
1.0
5.0
40
500
1000
Light per 106 cells
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
10.0
10.0
The independent variable is cell density; the
dependent variable is light output; the
control is sterile medium assayed the same way, which
reads zero. Divide light by density and the answer appears: output per
cell is flat at 1.0 up to \(5 \times 10^{6}\) cells/mL, then climbs to
10.0: a tenfold rise per cell. Between \(5 \times 10^{6}\)
and \(1 \times 10^{8}\) the density rises 20-fold but the light rises
\(1000/5 = 200\)-fold. Conclusion, justified: the threshold
lies between \(5 \times 10^{6}\) and \(1 \times 10^{7}\) cells/mL,
because only above it does each cell glow more brightly than it did
before, which cannot be explained by simply adding more cells.
Worked example · A slime mold that signals with cAMP
Dictyostelium discoideum lives as single amoebae while food
lasts. Starve them and something else happens: describe it.
Starved cells secrete pulses of cyclic AMP. Neighbors bind that cAMP on
surface receptors, crawl up the gradient toward the source, and relay
the pulse by secreting cAMP themselves, so the signal spreads outward
in waves. Tens of thousands of amoebae converge into a migrating slug
and then a stalked fruiting body. The exam point: a secreted chemical
acting on nearby cells through surface receptors is
local signaling, and finding it in an organism with no
tissues at all is evidence that signaling mechanisms are ancient and
shared.
Practice
Epinephrine from the adrenal glands reaches the heart in about 20 seconds; acetylcholine from a motor neuron reaches a muscle fiber in under a millisecond. Identify the signaling type in each case and explain the difference in speed.
Show answer
Epinephrine is endocrine: secreted into the bloodstream and carried to distant targets, so the delay is circulation time and the dilution is enormous. Acetylcholine is synaptic: released into a cleft about 20 nm wide, where diffusion takes well under a millisecond, so receptor concentration goes from near zero to high almost instantly. Identify asks only for the names; the explain point comes from naming the distance and the transport route, not from saying one is "faster."
Using the data above, calculate the light output per 106 cells at 1×106 and at 5×107 cells/mL, and describe what the comparison shows about individual cells.
Show answer
At \(1 \times 10^{6}\) cells/mL: \(1.0/1 = 1.0\) unit per \(10^{6}\) cells. At \(5 \times 10^{7}\): \(500/50 = 10.0\) units per \(10^{6}\) cells. Each cell is ten times brighter in the dense culture, so the extra light is not just more cells added together: the cells themselves have changed their gene expression. A description states that feature of the data; "the culture glows more" restates the stem and earns nothing.
A mutant V. fischeri cannot synthesize the autoinducer but makes a normal receptor. It is grown to 1×108 cells/mL in fresh medium, then a sample is moved into sterile medium in which a dense wild-type culture had grown and been filtered out. Predict the light output in each condition and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: dark in fresh medium even at \(1 \times 10^{8}\) cells/mL (near the 0.1-unit baseline), bright in the filtered spent medium. Justification: quorum sensing reads autoinducer concentration, not density. A strain that makes none never crosses threshold no matter how crowded it gets, but its receptor is intact, so autoinducer left behind in the spent medium binds it and switches the luminescence genes on. Filtering is the control showing the signal is a soluble molecule, not cell contact.
Lesson 4.2 · Unit 4 · CED topics 4.2–4.3
Signal transduction: reception, transduction, response
Binding is not responding. Epinephrine never enters a liver cell, yet
within seconds that cell is dumping glucose into the blood. Something has
to carry the news across the membrane, and along the way it has to get
much louder: a hormone present at \(10^{-10}\) M has to move millions of
molecules of sugar.
Every pathway solves this the same way, in three stages the exam expects
you to name.
Definition
Reception. Hydrophilic signals cannot cross the
bilayer, so they bind membrane receptors. A
G protein-coupled receptor changes shape and lets an
attached G protein swap GDP for GTP. A receptor tyrosine
kinase dimerizes on binding, and the two halves
phosphorylate each other's tyrosines, creating many docking sites at
once. A ligand-gated ion channel just opens and lets
ions flow. Small hydrophobic signals (steroid and thyroid hormones,
nitric oxide) diffuse through and bind
intracellular receptors.
Transduction. A phosphorylation
cascade: each protein kinase moves a phosphate from ATP onto
the next kinase, switching it on, and protein phosphatases strip those
phosphates to switch the pathway off. Second
messengers spread the signal through the cytosol: cAMP,
made from ATP by adenylyl cyclase, and Ca2+ released from
the ER.
Response. Either a cytoplasmic enzyme's activity
changes or a transcription factor is switched on and
gene expression changes. Steroid receptors take the
second route directly: the hormone–receptor complex is the
transcription factor.
Formula
Each activated molecule at one step activates many at the next, so the
step factors multiply:
\[ A = n_1 \times n_2 \times n_3 \times \cdots \]
where \(n_i\) is how many molecules one activated molecule turns on at
step \(i\). This is amplification, and it is why a
vanishingly dilute hormone produces a whole-body response.
Worked example · Sutherland and the discovery of cAMP
Question: does epinephrine activate glycogen phosphorylase
directly? Earl Sutherland broke liver cells open and separated the
membrane fragments from the soluble fraction containing the enzyme.
The independent variable is which fraction the
epinephrine is added to; the dependent variable is
glycogen phosphorylase activity; the control is the
same fractions with no hormone. Result: epinephrine added to
the soluble fraction alone did nothing, but epinephrine added to the
membrane fraction produced a small, heat-stable soluble substance that
activated phosphorylase when transferred to the enzyme fraction.
Conclusion, justified: the hormone acts at the membrane and
works through an intracellular messenger, later identified as cyclic
AMP, because activity appeared only when the membranes had seen the
hormone first, never from hormone plus enzyme alone.
Worked example · How loud does the cascade get?
One bound epinephrine receptor activates about 100 G proteins; the
cascade they start activates about \(1 \times 10^{4}\) kinases; those
release about \(1 \times 10^{6}\) glucose-1-phosphate molecules from
glycogen. Find the amplification factor, then the output if 1% of a
liver cell's \(1 \times 10^{4}\) receptors are occupied.
Step factors: 100 G proteins per receptor, \(10^{4}/100 = 100\) kinases
per G protein, \(10^{6}/10^{4} = 100\) sugars per kinase. So
\[ A = 100 \times 100 \times 100 = 1 \times 10^{6} \]
glucose molecules per activated receptor. Occupied receptors:
\(0.01 \times 10^{4} = 100\), so the cell releases
\(100 \times 10^{6} = 1 \times 10^{8}\) glucose-1-phosphate molecules.
State the factor with what it counts ("per receptor") or the
calculation point is at risk.
Practice
Insulin binds a receptor in the plasma membrane; testosterone binds a receptor inside the cell. Explain what property of each hormone accounts for the location of its receptor, and describe the kind of response each produces.
Show answer
Insulin is a protein (large, polar, hydrophilic), so it cannot pass the hydrophobic core of the bilayer and must be detected at the surface; the signal is relayed inward by a phosphorylation cascade, so the response is fast, usually a change in enzyme activity or transporter placement. Testosterone is a steroid: small and hydrophobic, so it diffuses through the membrane, binds an intracellular receptor, and that complex enters the nucleus as a transcription factor, a slower response, and a change in gene expression. The explain point requires naming hydrophobicity and the bilayer, not just "steroids go inside."
In one pathway, a single activated receptor turns on 80 G proteins; each G protein activates an adenylyl cyclase that makes 500 cAMP; it takes 4 cAMP to activate one protein kinase A; each active PKA phosphorylates 250 target enzymes. Calculate the number of target enzymes activated per receptor.
Show answer
cAMP made: \(80 \times 500 = 40{,}000\). Active PKA: \(40{,}000/4 = 10{,}000\). Target enzymes: \(10{,}000 \times 250 = 2.5 \times 10^{6}\) per activated receptor. Note the third step divides: four second messengers are consumed per kinase, so multiplying at every step gives \(4 \times 10^{7}\), sixteen times too large. Read what each number counts before you multiply.
A drug inhibits the protein phosphatases that act on the kinases of a cascade, while leaving the receptor and the kinases themselves untouched. Predict the effect on the duration of the cellular response after the ligand is washed away, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the response persists far longer than normal and may not shut off at all. Justification: a phosphorylation cascade is a two-way switch; kinases add phosphates to turn relay proteins on, phosphatases strip them to turn the proteins off. Washing the ligand away stops new activation at the receptor, but already-phosphorylated proteins stay phosphorylated with nothing to reverse them. Naming the phosphatase's job earns the justification point; "the drug breaks the pathway" is a claim with no mechanism.
Lesson 4.3 · Unit 4 · CED topic 4.4
When a pathway changes: mutations, drugs, and toxins
A pathway with six steps has six places to break, and the exam likes this
precisely because a student who has memorized the word "transduction"
cannot answer, while a student who knows the order of the steps can. The
reasoning is always the same: if you can supply something
downstream of a suspected break and the cell responds, the break
is upstream of what you supplied.
Definition
Loss of function: a mutation in a receptor, G
protein, kinase, or transcription factor that leaves it unable to
activate the next step. The cell fails to respond to its ligand, but
everything downstream of the break still works.
Gain of function: a component locked in the "on"
state, so the response occurs constitutively, with
no ligand present at all.
An agonist binds a receptor and triggers the normal
response (nicotine at acetylcholine receptors). An
antagonist binds and blocks without triggering it:
a beta blocker occupies β-adrenergic receptors so epinephrine cannot.
Method
Bypass the suspect step. Give the cells the ligand;
then give them something that enters the pathway further down:
forskolin, which activates adenylyl cyclase directly, or a
membrane-permeable cAMP analog, which skips the receptor, the G
protein, and the cyclase together. Responding to the bypass but not the
ligand places the break above the entry point; failing both
places it at or below it. Chemicals can also jam a step on:
cholera toxin modifies the Gs α subunit so
it cannot hydrolyze its GTP and stays active, and
caffeine inhibits phosphodiesterase, the enzyme that
degrades cAMP to AMP.
Worked example · Locating the break in four cell lines
Each line was assayed for glucose release (µmol/min per 106
cells) with no treatment, with epinephrine, and with a
membrane-permeable cAMP analog. Identify where each pathway is blocked.
Cell line
Wild type
1
2
3
4
No treatment
1.2
1.1
1.0
22.8
1.2
+ epinephrine
24.0
1.4
1.3
23.4
12.1
+ cAMP analog
23.5
23.8
1.5
23.6
23.0
Wild type is induced \(24.0/1.2 = 20\)-fold by the ligand.
Line 1 reaches only \(1.4/24.0 = 5.8\%\) of that with
ligand but a full \(23.8/23.5 = 101\%\) with cAMP, so the break lies
above cAMP: receptor, G protein, or adenylyl cyclase.
Line 2 fails both (\(1.5/23.5 = 6.4\%\) with cAMP), so
the break is at or below cAMP: protein kinase A or the enzymes it
activates. Line 3 runs at \(22.8/24.0 = 95\%\) of the
stimulated wild-type rate with no ligand: a gain-of-function
component locked on. Line 4 gives
\(12.1/24.0 = 50.4\%\) of the normal ligand response but a normal cAMP
response, consistent with roughly half the usual number of functional
receptors.
Worked example · Two chemicals, two different failures
Resting intestinal cells hold cAMP at 0.5 µM; a normal hormone pulse
raises it to 4.0 µM for about 2 minutes. Cholera toxin drives it to a
sustained 12.0 µM; caffeine leaves the peak at 4.0 µM but stretches the
response to about 10 minutes. Describe each effect quantitatively and
explain the mechanisms.
Cholera toxin: \(12.0/0.5 = 24\)-fold above rest and
\(12.0/4.0 = 3\) times the normal peak, and it never switches off,
because the modified Gs cannot hydrolyze GTP and keeps
adenylyl cyclase running with no ligand at all. The flood of cAMP opens
chloride channels, water follows the salt, and that is the diarrhea.
Caffeine: same peak, but the duration is \(10/2 = 5\) times longer,
because inhibiting phosphodiesterase blocks cAMP removal
rather than boosting its production. One chemical changes the
amplitude, the other the duration.
Practice
A patient takes a beta blocker, an antagonist of the β-adrenergic receptor. Explain why their heart rate rises less than normal during exercise, and identify whether the drug's effect is loss of function or gain of function.
Show answer
Exercise releases epinephrine, which normally binds β-adrenergic receptors on cardiac cells and starts a G protein and cAMP cascade that raises the rate and force of contraction. The antagonist occupies the binding site without changing the receptor's shape in the activating way, so epinephrine finds fewer free receptors and less signal is transduced. The effect mimics loss of function at the receptor: the pathway still runs if it is activated downstream, which is why the drug does not stop the cell responding to cAMP itself.
Two more lines were assayed, adding forskolin (which activates adenylyl cyclase directly). Identify the broken component in each and justify your answer from the data.
Treatment
None
+ epinephrine
+ forskolin
+ cAMP analog
Line 5 (µmol/min per 106 cells)
1.2
1.5
24.1
23.9
Line 6 (µmol/min per 106 cells)
1.1
1.3
1.6
23.5
Show answer
Line 5 barely responds to ligand (\(1.5/1.2 = 1.25\)-fold) but responds fully to forskolin (\(24.1/1.2 = 20.1\)-fold) and to cAMP (\(23.9/1.2 = 19.9\)-fold). Forskolin acts on adenylyl cyclase, so the cyclase and everything below it are intact and the break is at the receptor or the G protein. Line 6 fails with ligand and with forskolin (\(1.6/1.1 = 1.45\)-fold) yet responds fully to the cAMP analog (\(23.5/1.1 = 21.4\)-fold), which places the break at adenylyl cyclase: the one component forskolin needs and the cAMP analog does not.
A researcher deletes the gene for the epinephrine receptor in liver cells, then treats them with cholera toxin. Predict the intracellular cAMP concentration relative to untreated wild-type cells, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: cAMP rises well above the 0.5 µM resting level, to roughly the same sustained high value the toxin produces in cells that still have the receptor. Justification: cholera toxin acts on the Gs α subunit, one step below the receptor, locking it in the GTP-bound active form so it stimulates adenylyl cyclase continuously. Nothing in that mechanism requires a ligand or a receptor, so deleting the receptor removes the normal way of switching the pathway on but not the toxin's way. A prediction that names the step the toxin acts on earns the justification; "the toxin makes cAMP go up" does not.
Lesson 4.4 · Unit 4 · CED topic 4.5
Feedback mechanisms and homeostasis
Homeostasis is not constancy. Your blood glucose is never at 90 mg/dL:
it is always a little above or below and always being pushed back.
Every one of these systems has the same four parts: a
set point, a sensor that detects the deviation, a
control center, and an effector that does something about it.
What makes the loop work is the sign of what the effector does
to the original stimulus.
Definition
In negative feedback the response opposes the
stimulus, driving the variable back toward the set point. Rising blood
glucose triggers insulin from pancreatic β cells, cells take glucose up
and store it as glycogen, and glucose falls; falling glucose triggers
glucagon and glycogen is broken down. Overheating drives sweating and
vasodilation, chilling drives shivering and vasoconstriction. High
blood osmolarity drives ADH release, which inserts aquaporins into the
kidney's collecting duct so more water is reabsorbed. The same logic
runs at the molecular level in the trp operon:
tryptophan binds the repressor, the repressor binds the operator, and
transcription stops, the product shuts off its own production line.
Model
In positive feedback the response amplifies
the stimulus, so the system accelerates away from where it started
until an outside event ends it. Cervical stretch triggers oxytocin,
oxytocin strengthens contractions, contractions increase stretch, and
birth stops the loop. Activated platelets recruit more platelets until
the clot seals the vessel. A ripening fruit releases ethylene, which
triggers ripening and more ethylene nearby. Positive loops cannot
hold a value, having no stable point to sit at, so almost
every homeostatic variable is controlled negatively and positive
feedback is reserved for fast, committed, one-way transitions.
Worked example · Two glucose tolerance curves
Sketch this graph: blood glucose (mg/dL) on the y-axis from 60 to 220,
hours after a meal on the x-axis from 0 to 4. Both traces rise to a
peak at 1 hour and then fall. Identify which person has insulin
resistance and calculate each rate of return.
Time after meal (h)
0
1
2
3
4
Person A (mg/dL)
90
140
108
92
90
Person B (mg/dL)
110
205
185
170
158
Rate of return from the peak to 3 hours:
\[ A:\ \frac{92-140}{3-1} = -24.0\ \mathrm{mg/dL\ per\ hour} \qquad
B:\ \frac{170-205}{3-1} = -17.5\ \mathrm{mg/dL\ per\ hour} \]
Person B has insulin resistance, and three pieces of evidence say so: a
higher fasting value (110 vs 90 mg/dL), a peak 65 mg/dL higher, and a
slower correction. Measured against each person's own excursion the gap
is starker: A rose 50 mg/dL above baseline and is 2 above it at 3
hours, \((50-2)/50 = 96.0\%\) corrected, while B rose 95 and is still
60 above baseline, only \((95-60)/95 = 36.8\%\) corrected. B's negative
feedback loop is intact but weak: insulin is released, and the target
cells respond poorly to it.
Worked example · The trp operon as negative feedback
E. coli was grown with and without tryptophan and assayed for
tryptophan synthase activity (relative units). Wild type: 100 without
tryptophan, 4 with 0.5 mM tryptophan. A strain with a deleted repressor
gene: 100 in both.
Describe: tryptophan reduces wild-type enzyme activity to
\(4/100 = 4\%\) of the unsupplemented level, a 96% reduction, and has
no measurable effect on the repressor-deletion strain. Explain:
tryptophan acts as a corepressor: it binds the trp repressor, which
changes shape, binds the operator, and blocks RNA polymerase. With no
repressor to bind, tryptophan has no way to reach the operator, so the
genes stay on. The deletion strain is the control that
shows the effect runs through the repressor rather than through some
general toxicity of tryptophan.
Practice
Identify each of the following as negative or positive feedback, and explain your reasoning for the clotting case: (i) shivering when body temperature falls, (ii) activated platelets recruiting more platelets to a cut, (iii) glucagon release when blood glucose falls.
Show answer
(i) negative, (ii) positive, (iii) negative. Clotting is positive feedback because the product of the response, activated platelets and thrombin, increases the stimulus for further activation, so the process accelerates instead of settling at a value. That is what is wanted here: the loop runs to completion quickly and is ended by an external endpoint, the sealed vessel, not by a return to a set point. Labeling the three cases earns the identification; the explain point needs the "response increases the stimulus" statement.
Using the two tolerance curves above, calculate the percentage of each person's glucose excursion that has been corrected at 4 hours, and describe what the comparison shows.
Show answer
Person A rose \(140-90 = 50\) mg/dL above baseline and is back to 90 at 4 hours, so \((50-0)/50 = 100\%\) corrected. Person B rose \(205-110 = 95\) mg/dL and is at 158, which is \(158-110 = 48\) above baseline, so \((95-48)/95 = 49.5\%\) corrected. Four hours after the meal A is back at its set point while B has not corrected half its excursion: the loop runs, but its gain is far too low.
A person is given a drug that blocks the ADH receptors of the kidney's collecting duct. Predict the effect on urine volume and on blood osmolarity over the next several hours, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: urine volume increases sharply and blood osmolarity rises above its set point. Justification: ADH normally binds those receptors and triggers insertion of aquaporins into the collecting duct membrane, so water is reabsorbed from the filtrate back into the blood. Blocking the receptor removes the effector arm of the loop: osmoreceptors still detect the rise and the pituitary still releases ADH, but the kidney cannot respond, so water is lost in dilute urine and the blood becomes more concentrated instead of less.
Lesson 4.5 · Unit 4 · CED topic 4.6
The cell cycle: interphase, mitosis, and cytokinesis
One cell becomes two, and each of the two must carry a complete and
identical copy of the genome. Getting that right means copying every
chromosome exactly once, holding the copies together until the whole set
is attached to the spindle, and only then pulling them apart. Almost all
of that work happens before mitosis starts, in a typical dividing cell
roughly 90% of the cycle is interphase.
Definition
Interphase.G1: growth,
protein synthesis, organelle duplication.
S: DNA replication, each chromosome becomes two
identical sister chromatids joined at a centromere,
so DNA doubles but chromosome number does not.
G2: more growth, division proteins,
centrosomes finished. G0 is a
nondividing state cells exit G1 into; neurons and mature
skeletal muscle stay there for life.
Mitosis.Prophase: chromatin condenses,
the nucleolus disappears, the spindle grows from the centrosomes.
Metaphase: the nuclear envelope is gone, kinetochore
microtubules have attached, and chromosomes line up on the metaphase
plate. Anaphase: cohesin is cleaved, sister chromatids
separate, and each is now a full chromosome moving to a pole.
Telophase: chromosomes decondense and two nuclear envelopes
re-form.
Cytokinesis. Animal cells pinch in two with an
actin–myosin contractile ring, forming a cleavage
furrow. Plant cells cannot pinch through a cell wall, so
Golgi vesicles line up at the middle and fuse into a
cell plate that becomes the new wall.
Prokaryotes use binary fission: one circular
chromosome replicates from a single origin, the copies move apart as
the cell elongates, and a septum forms. No spindle, no mitosis.
Rule
Count centromeres for chromosomes, count chromatids for DNA.
Replication in S doubles the DNA without changing the chromosome
number, because the two chromatids share one centromere. The number
doubles for real only in anaphase, when the chromatids separate, and
halves again at cytokinesis.
Worked example · Timing the cycle from an onion root tip
A field of 200 cells from a root tip was scored by phase. The full
cycle for these cells is 24 hours. Calculate the time spent in each
phase, and check that the parts sum to the whole.
Phase
Interphase
Prophase
Metaphase
Anaphase
Telophase
Cells counted (of 200)
148
28
10
6
8
Time (min)
1065.6
201.6
72.0
43.2
57.6
The assumption that makes this work is that a randomly chosen cell is
in a phase in proportion to the time that phase lasts. With
\(24 \times 60 = 1440\) minutes in the cycle,
\[ t_{\text{phase}} = \frac{\text{cells in phase}}{200} \times 1440. \]
Interphase: \((148/200)(1440) = 1065.6\) min, or 17.76 hours.
Prophase: \((28/200)(1440) = 201.6\) min. Metaphase: 72.0 min.
Anaphase: 43.2 min. Telophase: 57.6 min. The check:
\(1065.6 + 201.6 + 72.0 + 43.2 + 57.6 = 1440.0\) min exactly, so all of
M phase takes \(1440 - 1065.6 = 374.4\) min (6.24 h) and the mitotic
index is \(52/200 = 26.0\%\). Anaphase is shortest because chromatid separation is fast, which is
why so few cells are caught in it.
Worked example · Chromosomes and DNA molecules, stage by stage
An organism has \(2n = 12\) and 4.4 pg of nuclear DNA in G1.
Fill in the counts.
Stage
G1
G2
Metaphase
Anaphase
Daughter cell
Chromosomes
12
12
12
24
12
DNA molecules
12
24
24
24
12
DNA (pg)
4.4
8.8
8.8
8.8
4.4
S phase doubles DNA molecules from 12 to 24 and DNA mass from 4.4 to
\(2 \times 4.4 = 8.8\) pg, while the chromosome count holds at 12: the
24 chromatids are paired on 12 centromeres. In anaphase those
centromeres split, so the count jumps to 24 with no new DNA made at
all. Cytokinesis gives each daughter \(24/2 = 12\) chromosomes and
\(8.8/2 = 4.4\) pg, back where G1 started. A student who
writes "the chromosome number doubles in S phase" has made the single
most common error on this topic.
Practice
Describe how cytokinesis differs between a plant cell and an animal cell, and explain what structural feature of plant cells makes the difference necessary.
Show answer
Animal cells form a cleavage furrow: a ring of actin and myosin filaments just inside the plasma membrane contracts and pinches the cell in two from the outside in. Plant cells form a cell plate: Golgi-derived vesicles carrying wall material line up along the middle of the cell, fuse into a growing disc, and join the existing walls, dividing the cell from the inside out. The reason is the rigid cellulose cell wall: it cannot be drawn inward by a contractile ring, so the new boundary has to be built in place. Describe gets the two mechanisms; the explain point is the wall.
A different root tip was scored: of 150 cells, 120 were in interphase, 15 in prophase, 6 in metaphase, 3 in anaphase, and 6 in telophase. The cycle is 20 hours. Calculate the minutes spent in interphase and in metaphase, and calculate the mitotic index.
Show answer
The cycle is \(20 \times 60 = 1200\) min. Interphase: \((120/150)(1200) = 960\) min, which is 16.0 hours. Metaphase: \((6/150)(1200) = 48.0\) min. Mitotic index (cells not in interphase): \((150-120)/150 = 30/150 = 20.0\%\). Check the parts: \(960 + 120 + 48 + 24 + 48 = 1200\) min, so nothing is missing. This tip divides less actively than the 26.0% one above.
A drug blocks assembly of the actin–myosin contractile ring but has no effect on the spindle. An animal cell in G2, with \(2n = 12\), is treated and then allowed to complete one round of division. Predict the number of nuclei and the number of chromosomes in the resulting cell, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: one cell containing two nuclei, with 12 chromosomes in each nucleus, 24 in the cell overall. Justification: mitosis and cytokinesis are separate processes. The spindle is untouched, so chromatids still separate in anaphase and two nuclear envelopes still re-form in telophase, giving two complete 12-chromosome nuclei. The contractile ring is what divides the cytoplasm, and blocking it leaves the two nuclei inside one plasma membrane. A prediction earns its point only if it is specific: "the cell won't divide properly" names no number and no structure.
Lesson 4.6 · Unit 4 · CED topic 4.7
Regulation of the cell cycle: checkpoints, cyclins, and cancer
A cell that divides with damaged DNA, or with one chromosome unattached
to the spindle, does not make two working cells: it makes two broken
ones. So the cycle is not a clock that simply runs. It is a series of
gates, and at each one the cell asks a specific question and refuses to
proceed until the answer is yes.
Definition
G1 checkpoint (the restriction point):
is the cell large enough, are nutrients and growth factors present,
and is the DNA undamaged? A cell that passes is committed to divide;
one that does not enters G0.
G2 checkpoint: is DNA replication
complete, and is the new DNA undamaged?
M (spindle) checkpoint: is every kinetochore
attached to microtubules from both poles? A single unattached
kinetochore keeps sending a "wait" signal, and anaphase cannot begin
until the last chromosome is attached.
Model
A cyclin-dependent kinase (CDK) sits at constant
concentration and does nothing alone. It becomes active only when bound
by a cyclin, and cyclin levels rise and fall on a
schedule, so the timing of the cycle is the timing of the cyclins.
MPF (M-phase-promoting factor) is cyclin B bound to
CDK1; it drives the G2→M transition by phosphorylating
targets that break down the nuclear lamina, condense chromosomes, and
build the spindle. MPF also switches on the complex that destroys
cyclin B, so its activity collapses at anaphase: negative feedback
that resets the cycle. p53 guards the G1
checkpoint: DNA damage activates it, it induces the CDK inhibitor p21,
and the cycle halts for repair or the cell is sent to apoptosis. Normal
cells also stop dividing when crowded (density-dependent
inhibition, also called contact inhibition) or unattached to a
surface. Cancer cells ignore all of it, and a malignant tumor's cells
metastasize.
Worked example · Masui and Markert find MPF
Question: what makes an oocyte mature? In 1971 Masui and
Markert injected cytoplasm from mature (metaphase II) frog oocytes into
immature oocytes arrested in G2 and scored germinal vesicle
breakdown, the visible sign of maturation.
Injected material
Buffer only
Immature (G2) cytoplasm
Mature (metaphase II) cytoplasm
Oocytes maturing / total
2 / 50
3 / 50
46 / 50
Percent maturing
4.0
6.0
92.0
The independent variable is the source of the injected
cytoplasm; the dependent variable is the percent of
recipients undergoing germinal vesicle breakdown; the
controls are buffer alone and immature cytoplasm,
which rule out the injection itself and the act of adding cytoplasm.
Result: \(46/50 = 92.0\%\) versus \(2/50 = 4.0\%\), a gap of
88 percentage points. Conclusion, justified: mature cytoplasm
holds a diffusible factor sufficient to drive maturation, because
recipients given the same volume of immature cytoplasm behaved like the
buffer controls. That factor was MPF, and the same machinery turned up
from the other direction in Hartwell's cdc mutants in budding yeast,
Nurse's cdc2 gene encoding the CDK, and Hunt's cyclins, which build up
and vanish each cycle.
Worked example · Reading the cyclin and MPF traces
Sketch this graph: relative amount (0 to 100) on the y-axis, minutes on
the x-axis from 0 to 60, covering two cleavage cycles of an early frog
embryo. The cyclin B trace climbs steadily from 10 at 0 min to 100 at
30 min, crashes to about 10 within 4 minutes, then repeats to a second
peak at 60 min. The MPF activity trace is flat near 5 until 22 min,
rises steeply to 95 by 28 min, holds through metaphase, and falls below
5 by 32 min. Compare the two rates of rise.
Cyclin accumulates at \((100-10)/(30-0) = 3.0\) units per minute. MPF
rises at \((95-5)/(28-22) = 15.0\) units per minute: five times
faster. That gap is the point of the model: MPF is not a proportional
readout of cyclin, it is a threshold switch. Cyclin
must accumulate past a level before enough CDK1 is bound to trigger
mitosis, and then activation is nearly all-or-none. The fall is faster
still, 95 to 5 in about 4 minutes, or \(-22.5\) units per minute,
because cyclin is actively destroyed rather than left to dilute away.
Practice
Identify what each of the three checkpoints verifies, and explain why a cell with a nonfunctional p53 protein is more likely to accumulate mutations.
Show answer
G1 verifies cell size, nutrients, growth factor signals, and DNA integrity; G2 verifies that replication finished and the new DNA is undamaged; the M checkpoint verifies that every kinetochore is attached to microtubules from both poles. p53 acts at G1: damage activates it, it induces the CDK inhibitor p21, and the cycle arrests so repair enzymes have time to work. Without functional p53 a damaged cell passes into S phase and replicates the damage, copying the mutation into both daughters and every descendant.
Using the traces described above, calculate the rate of cyclin accumulation between 0 and 30 minutes and the rate of MPF activation between 22 and 28 minutes, and describe what the comparison implies about how MPF is controlled.
Show answer
Cyclin: \((100-10)/30 = 3.0\) relative units per minute. MPF: \((95-5)/6 = 15.0\) relative units per minute. MPF rises \(15.0/3.0 = 5\) times faster than the cyclin driving it, which means MPF activity is not simply proportional to cyclin concentration: the cell holds MPF off until cyclin crosses a threshold and then activates it almost all at once. "Both go up" misses the feature the data show, which is the difference in slope.
A frog embryo cell is injected with a mutant cyclin B that cannot be degraded, and is otherwise normal. Predict the stage at which the cell arrests, and justify your prediction using the traces above.
Show answer
Prediction: the cell enters mitosis on schedule and then arrests there, held at metaphase with condensed chromosomes, no nuclear envelope, and an intact spindle; it never reaches telophase or cytokinesis. Justification: the traces show MPF activity collapsing from 95 to below 5 in about 4 minutes, and that collapse is caused by destruction of cyclin B, not by loss of CDK1. Indestructible cyclin keeps CDK1 bound and active, so the phosphorylations holding the cell in M phase are never reversed. Exit from mitosis is not a passive fading: it requires cyclin degradation.
Unit 4 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 4 quiz: Cell Communication and Cell Cycle
Fifteen multiple-choice questions and five short free-response questions across all
six lessons: signal types and receptors, the three stages of transduction, pathways broken by
mutation or toxin, feedback and homeostasis, and the cell cycle with its checkpoints. Click an option
to see why each choice is right or wrong, then time yourself on each free response before opening the
model.
Multiple choice
Data: luminescence of Vibrio fischeri cultures grown in seawater
medium and assayed at five cell densities.
Cell density (cells/mL)
2×105
2×106
8×106
2×107
8×107
Light output (relative units)
0.2
2.0
8.0
60
800
Light output per 106 cells
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
10.0
Which conclusion about the threshold for light production is best supported by the
data?
Light at the lowest density is 0.2 units: exactly what 0.2 million cells glowing
at the baseline rate of 1.0 per 106 would give. A faint glow proportional to cell
number is what an unregulated population looks like, so this density shows no switching on at
all.
Total output does rise across the whole range, but not proportionally. From
8×106 to 8×107 the density rises tenfold while light rises
\(800/8.0 = 100\)-fold. A proportional relationship would hold the per-cell row constant, and it
does not.
Correct. Dividing light by density removes the effect of simply adding more cells.
The per-cell row is 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, then 3.0 and 10.0, so somewhere between 8×106 and
2×107 cells/mL each cell begins producing more light: the autoinducer has reached a
concentration that switches the luminescence genes on.
8×107 is where output is highest, not where it changes character. A
threshold is the point at which the behavior of the system changes, and the per-cell row shows
that change happening an order of magnitude earlier.
Epinephrine released into the bloodstream circulates past every cell in the body, yet
only some cells respond. Which statement best accounts for this?
Correct. Specificity comes from the complementary fit between ligand and receptor,
exactly as it does between substrate and enzyme. One ligand can even produce different responses
in different cell types, because what lies downstream of the receptor differs from tissue to
tissue.
Endocrine signals are built to travel: that is the point of releasing them into
the blood. Epinephrine reaches the heart in about 20 seconds and acts on tissues throughout the
body, so distance from the gland is not what sorts responders from non-responders.
Epinephrine is hydrophilic and does not cross the bilayer in any cell; its
receptor is a membrane protein. The signals that diffuse through membranes are small hydrophobic
ones such as steroid and thyroid hormones, and cholesterol buffers fluidity rather than gating
entry.
Target cells do not make the hormone: the adrenal glands do. Responding to a
signal requires a receptor, not the gene for the signal, and confusing the sending cell with the
receiving cell is the misconception being tested here.
Testosterone's receptor is inside the cell, while insulin's receptor spans the plasma
membrane. Which property of the two signals best explains the difference?
Concentration determines how much receptor is occupied, not where the receptor can
usefully sit. A hydrophilic hormone at any concentration still cannot cross the hydrophobic
interior of the bilayer, which is what sets receptor location.
Correct. The bilayer's interior is a hydrophobic barrier: small nonpolar molecules
pass freely, large polar ones do not. Testosterone diffuses in and binds an intracellular
receptor that acts as a transcription factor; insulin must be detected at the surface and have
its message relayed inward by a phosphorylation cascade.
The two categories are swapped: insulin is a protein hormone and testosterone is
the steroid. The reasoning in the second half is right, which is what makes this a tempting
choice: check the chemical class before you apply the rule.
The speeds are reversed. Steroid responses require transcription and translation
and take hours; membrane-receptor cascades change enzyme activity within seconds. Slow and
long-lasting is the trade-off steroid signaling makes for changing gene expression.
Which feature of a phosphorylation cascade allows a signal both to be amplified and to
be switched off quickly once the ligand is gone?
A one-to-one relay would transmit the signal without amplifying it, and destroying
the chain after each use would make the response impossible to repeat. Cascades are built from
reusable enzymes precisely so the cell can respond again a minute later.
Correct. The multiplication at each step is the amplification, and the phosphatases
are the off switch: they are always working, so as soon as new phosphorylation stops the
existing phosphates are stripped and the relay proteins return to their inactive shapes.
cAMP is a nucleotide derived from ATP, not a protein, so proteases have no effect
on it. It is degraded to AMP by phosphodiesterase, which is a real off switch, but the question
asks about the kinase cascade itself.
Receptor internalization does end new signaling at the top of the pathway, but it
does nothing to proteins already phosphorylated further down. Reversing those requires an enzyme
that removes phosphate groups, which is what a phosphatase does.
Data: glycogen phosphorylase activity (relative units) measured after liver
cells were broken open and separated into a membrane fraction and a soluble fraction containing
the enzyme.
Treatment
Activity
Intact cells + epinephrine
100
Soluble fraction alone
4
Soluble fraction + epinephrine
5
Membrane fraction + epinephrine; boiled supernatant then added to soluble fraction
96
Membrane fraction, no epinephrine; boiled supernatant then added to soluble fraction
6
Which conclusion is best supported by these results?
Four units becomes five: a change far smaller than the 96 obtained through the
membrane route, and within the noise of the assay. If the hormone acted on the enzyme directly,
hormone plus enzyme alone should have given close to the intact-cell value of 100.
Correct. Activity appears only in the treatment where membranes met the hormone
first and the supernatant was then transferred; membranes without hormone gave 6. That is the
logic that identified cyclic AMP: the hormone never enters the cell, and something small and
diffusible carries the message inward.
The enzyme was in the soluble fraction, which is where the assay was performed in
every row. What was transferred from the membrane treatment was the small molecule in the
supernatant, and it produced activity only because the soluble fraction supplying the enzyme was
already there.
Boiling denatures proteins, so surviving it argues that the messenger is
not a protein: it is a small, heat-stable molecule. Reading the evidence backwards is
exactly the trap; ask what the treatment would have destroyed.
Data: glucose release (µmol/min per 106 cells) from four liver-cell
lines, each assayed untreated, with the hormone, with forskolin (which activates adenylyl
cyclase directly), and with a membrane-permeable cAMP analog.
Treatment
Wild type
Line A
Line B
Line C
None
2.0
2.1
1.9
2.0
+ hormone
40.0
2.4
2.2
2.3
+ forskolin
39.0
38.5
2.5
2.4
+ cAMP analog
38.0
38.0
37.5
2.6
In which line is the defect best placed at adenylyl cyclase, and on what evidence?
Line A does fail with the hormone, but it responds fully to forskolin
(\(38.5/2.1 = 18\)-fold), which acts directly on adenylyl cyclase. A working cyclase places the
break above it, at the receptor or the G protein.
Line C fails with everything including the cAMP analog
(\(2.6/2.0 = 1.3\)-fold), so the break is at or below protein kinase A. The cAMP analog enters
the pathway below the cyclase, so a cell that cannot respond to it has a defect further
downstream still.
Correct. Line B gives \(2.5/1.9 = 1.3\)-fold with forskolin but
\(37.5/1.9 = 19.7\)-fold with the analog. Forskolin needs a functional cyclase to make cAMP; the
analog is cAMP and skips the cyclase entirely. The one component that separates the two
treatments is adenylyl cyclase.
Forty versus thirty-nine is assay-to-assay variation, not a defect; the wild type
is the reference every line is compared against, and it responds about twentyfold to all three
activating treatments.
Cholera toxin modifies the α subunit of a Gs protein so that it can no
longer hydrolyze its bound GTP. Which description of the effect is correct?
The toxin blocks GTP hydrolysis, not GTP binding: the difference between
failing to switch on and failing to switch off. Because the G protein's own GTPase activity is
its timer, removing it leaves the protein permanently on.
An agonist binds the receptor's ligand site and triggers the normal, reversible
response. Cholera toxin acts one step below the receptor, on the G protein itself, which is why
deleting the receptor would not protect the cell from it.
The clinical effect runs the other way: cAMP rises sharply, chloride channels open,
water follows the salt into the gut, and the result is severe diarrhea. A pathway locked on
produces too much signal, not too little.
Correct. A component stuck in its active state produces the response
constitutively, no ligand required. That is the definition of a gain-of-function change, and it
is why cholera's effects continue long after any hormone would have been cleared.
A patient taking a β-adrenergic antagonist shows a smaller rise in heart rate during
exercise than an untreated person. Which additional result would best confirm that the drug acts
at the receptor rather than further down the pathway?
Correct. This is the bypass logic the exam rewards: the analog enters the pathway
below the receptor, the G protein, and the cyclase. A full response to it shows everything from
cAMP downward is intact, so the block must lie above, at the receptor the drug occupies.
Normal epinephrine only shows that the signal is being released; it says nothing
about where the receiving cell fails. Both a receptor block and a downstream block would leave
circulating hormone untouched.
Resting heart rate is set largely by parasympathetic input and pacemaker activity,
so a normal resting value is compatible with a block at any step of the β-adrenergic pathway. It
does not localize anything.
Failing both would place the break at or below cAMP: the opposite of the
conclusion being tested. That pattern would argue the drug acts on protein kinase A or
downstream, not on the receptor.
Data: blood glucose (mg/dL) measured hourly after the same standard meal in
two adults.
Time after meal (h)
0
1
2
3
4
Person X (mg/dL)
85
135
100
88
85
Person Y (mg/dL)
118
215
195
178
165
Between hour 1 and hour 3, at what average rate does Person Y's blood glucose fall, and
what does the comparison with Person X indicate?
Correct. \((178 - 215)/(3 - 1) = -18.5\) mg/dL per hour for Y and
\((88 - 135)/(3 - 1) = -23.5\) for X. Y also starts higher and peaks higher, and at hour 4 has
corrected only \((97 - 47)/97 = 51.5\%\) of its excursion against X's 100%: the loop runs but
its gain is low, which is what insulin resistance looks like.
These are the total drops over the two-hour interval, not rates: \(215 - 178 = 37\)
and \(135 - 88 = 47\). A rate requires dividing by the elapsed time, and note that the larger
number here belongs to X, so even the comparison is stated backwards.
\((165 - 215)/3 = -16.7\) mg/dL per hour is the slope from hour 1 to hour 4, a
different interval from the one the question names. There is also no standard that privileges
the four-hour slope; you must read which interval is asked for.
The rates are genuinely different, 18.5 against 23.5, and a higher baseline does
not make a slower correction equivalent. Measured against each person's own excursion the gap
widens rather than closes, because Y rose 97 mg/dL and X only 50.
Which of the following is controlled by positive feedback, and what distinguishes it
from the others?
Shivering is negative feedback: the muscle activity generates heat, which raises
body temperature back toward the set point and therefore removes the stimulus that started it.
The description of the effect here is reversed.
Correct. The output of the loop, stronger contractions, increases the very
stimulus that produced it, so the process accelerates instead of settling at a value. Positive
loops have no stable point to sit at, which is why they are reserved for fast, committed,
one-way transitions ended by an outside event.
ADH inserts aquaporins into the collecting duct so more water is reabsorbed into
the blood, which dilutes it and lowers osmolarity toward the set point. That is
negative feedback, and the choice states the direction backwards.
Insulin is negative feedback: glucose uptake and glycogen storage lower blood
glucose, which removes the stimulus for further insulin release. The loop stops at the set point
near 90 mg/dL, not at exhaustion: running glucose to zero would be lethal.
Data: a partly completed table for a somatic cell of an organism with
2n = 16 dividing by mitosis. One cell of the table has been left blank.
Stage
G1
G2
Metaphase
Anaphase
Each daughter cell
Chromosomes
16
16
16
?
16
DNA molecules (chromatids)
16
32
32
32
16
What value belongs in the cell marked ?, and why?
The chromosome number does not double in S phase: that is the single most
common error on this topic, and the table itself shows it: the count stays 16 from
G1 through metaphase while DNA molecules go from 16 to 32, because the two chromatids
share one centromere.
Correct. Count centromeres for chromosomes and chromatids for DNA. When cohesin is
cleaved in anaphase, each chromatid gains its own centromere and therefore counts as a
chromosome, so 16 becomes 32 with no new DNA synthesized at all. Cytokinesis then returns each
daughter to 16.
Homologous chromosomes are separated in meiosis I, not in mitosis. Mitotic
anaphase separates sister chromatids, and the halving to 16 per cell happens at cytokinesis when
the cytoplasm divides, not by any event that reduces the count below the parental number.
No DNA is replicated during anaphase; the DNA-molecule row correctly stays at 32
throughout M phase. Doubling both rows counts the same chromatids twice, once as DNA and once
again as new chromosomes.
Which statement correctly compares cytokinesis in a plant cell with cytokinesis in an
animal cell and explains the difference?
The two mechanisms are swapped. Animal cells form the furrow; plant cells form the
plate. Membrane flexibility is not the constraint either: the cellulose wall outside the plant
membrane is what cannot be squeezed inward.
Binary fission is prokaryotic: one circular chromosome, one origin, no spindle and
no mitosis. Plant cells are eukaryotic and divide by mitosis followed by cell-plate formation;
having a wall does not make a cell prokaryotic.
Correct. The animal cell is pinched from the outside in by a contractile ring just
inside the plasma membrane; the plant cell is divided from the inside out by Golgi vesicles that
line up at the midline and fuse into a plate that joins the existing wall. The wall is the
reason the new boundary must be built in place.
A plant cell forms no furrow at all. The vesicles that carry wall material fuse
into a disc that grows outward from the center: the opposite geometry from a furrow, which
closes inward from the perimeter.
Figure: two traces on one set of axes for an early frog embryo; relative
amount from 0 to 100 on the y-axis, time in minutes from 0 to 80 on the x-axis.
The cyclin B trace rises in a straight line from 5 at 0 min to 95 at 36 min, then falls to 5
within about 5 minutes, and repeats the same pattern through a second cycle. The MPF activity
trace is flat near 4 until 26 min, rises steeply to 94 by 32 min, holds through metaphase, and
drops below 5 by 38 min.
Which pair of rise rates is correct, and what does the comparison show about how MPF is
controlled?
The rates are right, \((95-5)/36 = 2.5\) and \((94-4)/(32-26) = 15.0\), but the
interpretation is not. MPF is not a molecule being synthesized; it is cyclin B bound to CDK1,
and the trace shows its activity. CDK1 concentration is constant.
2.8 comes from \((94-4)/32\), dividing by the time since 0 min rather than by the
6 minutes over which MPF actually rose. The trace is flat until 26 min, so those first 26
minutes are not part of the rise and must not be in the denominator.
Correct. \((95-5)/36 = 2.5\) and \((94-4)/6 = 15.0\), a ratio of 6. Because
activity climbs six times more steeply than the cyclin driving it, MPF cannot be a proportional
readout: cyclin must accumulate past a threshold before enough CDK1 is bound, and then
activation is nearly all-or-none.
These are peak heights, not rates: a rate needs a change divided by an elapsed
time. Matching maxima say nothing about control, and the interesting feature of the figure is
precisely that the two traces have different shapes.
A tumor cell line carries two nonfunctional copies of the gene for p53. Which
consequence follows most directly?
p53 has no role in spindle assembly; the M checkpoint monitors kinetochore
attachment and works independently of it. A p53-null cell builds a normal spindle, which is
part of why the damage it carries is passed on so efficiently.
Cyclin B degradation is triggered by the anaphase-promoting complex that MPF itself
switches on, and it is what allows exit from mitosis. p53 acts much earlier, before S phase, and
losing it does not trap cells in metaphase.
Entering G0 is what a cell does when it fails the G1
checkpoint, so losing p53 makes cells less likely to stop, not more. Cancer cells are
characteristically able to divide without the growth-factor signals normal cells require.
Correct. DNA damage normally activates p53, which induces the CDK inhibitor p21 and
halts the cycle in G1 for repair or directs the cell to apoptosis. Without it a
damaged cell proceeds into S phase, the damage becomes a fixed mutation, and every descendant
inherits it.
Data: distribution of cells by stage in a human cell culture 6 hours after
adding a drug that prevents microtubules from attaching to kinetochores, compared with an
untreated culture. Values are percentages of 1,000 cells scored.
Stage
Untreated (%)
Drug-treated (%)
Interphase
88
34
Prophase
6
8
Metaphase
3
56
Anaphase
1
1
Telophase
2
1
Which explanation best accounts for the distribution in the treated culture?
Correct. Metaphase rises from 3% to 56% while anaphase and telophase stay at 1%,
so cells are entering mitosis and stopping at exactly the transition the checkpoint guards. A
single unattached kinetochore is enough to keep the wait signal on, which is why the cells sit
at metaphase rather than proceeding with a chromosome missing.
A block before S phase would raise the interphase percentage, and here it
fell from 88% to 34%. The data show cells leaving interphase normally and being stopped later,
which rules out an arrest at G1.
Prophase barely changed, 6% to 8%, and shortening a stage cannot by itself produce
an eighteenfold accumulation in the next one. Cells pile up where they are held, not where they
pass through quickly.
Indestructible cyclin B does arrest cells in M phase, so the pattern is
superficially similar, but the drug described acts on microtubule attachment, and the
checkpoint it trips is what stops anaphase here. Match the mechanism to the stated action of the
treatment, not just to the shape of the data.
Free response
Data: luminescence of Vibrio fischeri cultures held at a constant
density of 5×106 cells/mL. Each culture received a different concentration of
synthetic autoinducer; light output was measured after 60 minutes.
[Autoinducer] (nM)
0
1
5
20
50
100
Light output (relative units)
0.5
0.6
1.2
22
180
240
An investigator tested whether the autoinducer alone, rather than crowding, switches on
luminescence. Using the investigation and the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the independent and dependent variables, and describe the purpose of the 0 nM
treatment.
Explain the relationship between autoinducer concentration and light output shown by the
data.
Construct a graph of these data: place autoinducer concentration on the x-axis scaled from 0
to 100 nM and light output on the y-axis scaled from 0 to 250 relative units, label both axes
with units, plot the six points, and connect them.
Justify the claim that light output is controlled by autoinducer concentration rather than by
cell density, using a feature of the investigation's design.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: independent variable is autoinducer concentration in nM;
dependent variable is light output in relative units. The 0 nM culture is the control: it
establishes the baseline light produced by cells at this density with no autoinducer added
(0.5 units), the value every treatment is compared against. Do not accept: the two variables
reversed; "0 nM is the control" with no statement of what it establishes; naming cell density
as the independent variable.
(b) Accept: output is essentially flat from 0 to 5 nM (0.5 to 1.2 units),
rises steeply between 5 and 50 nM, and begins to level off by 100 nM: a threshold
relationship rather than a proportional one, in which the luminescence genes stay off below a
critical autoinducer concentration and switch on above it. Do not accept: "as autoinducer
rises, light rises," which misses the threshold that is the feature of these data; an answer
that cites no values from the table.
(c) Accept: x-axis = autoinducer concentration in nM from 0 to 100, evenly
scaled; y-axis = light output in relative units from 0 to 250; both axes labeled with units;
the six points (0, 0.5), (1, 0.6), (5, 1.2), (20, 22), (50, 180), (100, 240) plotted and
connected. Do not accept: axes reversed; units omitted from the axis labels; a bar graph of
unlabeled categories.
(d) Accept: cell density was held constant at 5×106 cells/mL in
every culture, making it a controlled variable that cannot account for the roughly 480-fold
difference in output; the only variable that differed across the tubes was autoinducer
concentration. Do not accept: repeating the trend described in (b); "the autoinducer caused
it" with no reference to the constant density.
Show a 4/4 response
a The independent variable is the concentration of synthetic
autoinducer in nM, and the dependent variable is light output in relative units. The 0 nM
culture is the control: it shows how much light these cells make at this density with no
autoinducer added; 0.5 units, so I have a baseline to compare every other tube against.
b The relationship is a threshold, not a straight line. From 0 to
5 nM the light barely moves, 0.5 up to 1.2 units. Between 5 and 50 nM it jumps from 1.2 to
180, and by 100 nM it is 240 and flattening. Below a critical autoinducer concentration the
luminescence genes stay off, and once the cells sense enough they switch on almost at
once.
c I would put autoinducer concentration on the x-axis from 0 to
100 nM and light output on the y-axis from 0 to 250 relative units, label both with those
units, plot (0, 0.5), (1, 0.6), (5, 1.2), (20, 22), (50, 180) and (100, 240), and connect them
into an S-shaped curve.
d Every culture was held at 5×106 cells/mL, so density was
a controlled variable rather than something that changed with the light. Since tubes with
identical density differed about 480-fold in output, crowding cannot be what turned the genes
on: autoinducer concentration is the only thing that varied.
Blood glucose in a healthy adult is held near a set point of about 90 mg/dL. Answer
(a) through (d).
Describe the difference between negative feedback and positive feedback in terms of the effect
the response has on the original stimulus.
Explain how insulin and glucagon together return blood glucose to the set point both after it
rises and after it falls.
Predict what happens to the height of the glucose peak and to the time required to return to
the set point in a person whose β cells release normal amounts of insulin but whose liver and
muscle cells carry only about 30% of the normal number of insulin receptors.
Justify your prediction in (c) by identifying which component of the feedback loop is impaired
and stating what that does to the loop.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: in negative feedback the response opposes the stimulus and
drives the variable back toward the set point; in positive feedback the response reinforces
the stimulus, so the variable moves further from its starting value until an event outside the
loop ends the process. Do not accept: "negative is harmful and positive is helpful"; "negative
decreases and positive increases" with no reference to the stimulus.
(b) Accept: rising glucose is detected by pancreatic β cells, which release
insulin; insulin causes liver and muscle cells to take glucose up and store it as glycogen, so
glucose falls and the stimulus for insulin is removed. Falling glucose triggers α cells to
release glucagon, which drives glycogen breakdown and glucose release from the liver, so
glucose rises. Do not accept: naming the two hormones with no effector action; reversing
insulin and glucagon.
(c) Accept: the peak is higher than normal and the return to the
set point takes longer. Both directional claims are required. Do not accept: "blood glucose is
affected"; only one of the two claims; a prediction of no change.
(d) Accept: the impaired component is the effector arm, the target cells'
response to insulin. The sensor and the signal are intact and insulin is released normally,
but with about 30% of the receptors the same insulin concentration produces far less glucose
uptake, so the loop's gain is low and the correction is slow and incomplete. Do not accept:
"there is not enough insulin," which contradicts the stem; naming the receptor with no
statement of the consequence for the loop.
Show a 4/4 response
a In negative feedback the response pushes back against whatever
started it, so the variable heads back toward the set point. In positive feedback the response
makes the original stimulus stronger, so the system runs further and further from where it
started until something outside the loop stops it.
b When glucose rises after a meal, β cells in the pancreas detect it
and release insulin. Insulin makes liver and muscle cells pull glucose out of the blood and
store it as glycogen, which brings the level down, and lowering glucose removes the signal
for more insulin. When glucose drops too low, α cells release glucagon instead, the liver
breaks glycogen back down and releases glucose, and the level climbs back toward 90 mg/dL.
c The peak will be higher than a normal person's, and it will take
longer than normal to get back down to about 90 mg/dL.
d The sensor and the hormone are fine: this person releases normal
insulin, so the problem is not detection or signaling. What is impaired is the effector arm:
the target cells have only about 30% of the usual receptors, so the same amount of insulin
triggers far less glucose uptake. A loop with a weak effector still runs, but with low gain,
and low gain is exactly what a high peak and a slow correction look like.
Model: a signal-transduction pathway drawn as a vertical sequence of labeled
boxes and arrows for a liver cell responding to epinephrine.
At the top, epinephrine outside the cell binds a β-adrenergic receptor spanning the plasma
membrane. An arrow leads to a Gs protein on the inner face of the membrane, labeled
"1 activated receptor → 50 active G proteins." Each active G protein switches on one adenylyl
cyclase, labeled "each cyclase → 300 cAMP." An arrow from cAMP leads to protein kinase A,
labeled "4 cAMP bind to activate 1 PKA." From PKA an arrow leads to phosphorylase kinase,
labeled "each PKA phosphorylates 120 phosphorylase kinase." A final arrow runs from
phosphorylase kinase to glycogen phosphorylase and then to glucose leaving the cell. A side
arrow shows phosphodiesterase converting cAMP to AMP.
Using the model, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the ligand and the second messenger in the model, and describe the role of the
Gs protein.
Explain how the model accounts for a liver cell responding to epinephrine present in the blood
at about 10−10 M.
Calculate the number of phosphorylase kinase molecules activated per activated receptor. Show
your setup.
A drug inhibits the phosphodiesterase shown in the model. Justify the claim that the response
will last longer without its peak becoming larger.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the ligand is epinephrine and the second messenger is cAMP. The
Gs protein is the relay between the activated receptor and adenylyl cyclase: the
receptor switches it on, and it in turn switches on the cyclase. Do not accept: naming cAMP as
the ligand or epinephrine as the second messenger; "the G protein passes the signal along"
with no named partner on either side.
(b) Accept: each step activates many molecules at the next step, so the
step factors multiply rather than add and one bound hormone molecule produces hundreds of
thousands of downstream events; a concentration far too low to act directly is therefore
sufficient. Do not accept: "the signal gets bigger" with no reference to multiplying step
factors; a number quoted with no explanation.
(c) Accept: cAMP per receptor \(= 50 \times 300 = 15{,}000\); PKA activated
\(= 15{,}000/4 = 3{,}750\); phosphorylase kinase
\(= 3{,}750 \times 120 = 450{,}000\), i.e. \(4.5 \times 10^{5}\) per activated receptor. The
setup must show the division at the cAMP-to-PKA step. Do not accept:
\(50 \times 300 \times 4 \times 120 = 7.2 \times 10^{6}\), which multiplies where the model
divides; a final number with no setup.
(d) Accept: phosphodiesterase is the enzyme that removes cAMP, so
inhibiting it disables the off switch rather than the production step; cAMP already made
persists and PKA stays active longer, but nothing in the drug's action increases the rate at
which adenylyl cyclase produces cAMP, so the peak is still set by reception and transduction.
Do not accept: "the drug makes more cAMP"; restating the claim; a justification that never
states what phosphodiesterase does.
Show a 4/4 response
a The ligand is epinephrine and the second messenger is cAMP. The
Gs protein sits just inside the membrane and works as a relay: the activated
receptor switches it on, and it then switches on adenylyl cyclase.
b Every arrow in the model multiplies instead of adding. One receptor
turns on 50 G proteins, each cyclase makes 300 cAMP, and each PKA goes on to phosphorylate 120
more enzymes. Because those factors multiply, a single hormone molecule ends up moving
hundreds of thousands of downstream molecules, which is how a hormone at 10−10 M
can produce a whole-cell response.
c cAMP made per receptor \(= 50 \times 300 = 15{,}000\). It takes
4 cAMP to activate one PKA, so PKA \(= 15{,}000/4 = 3{,}750\). Each PKA phosphorylates 120, so
\(3{,}750 \times 120 = 450{,}000\), or \(4.5 \times 10^{5}\) phosphorylase kinase molecules
per activated receptor.
d Phosphodiesterase is the only thing in the model that gets rid of
cAMP. Blocking it removes the off switch, so cAMP that has already been made hangs around and
PKA keeps working after the hormone is gone: the response lasts longer. But the drug does
nothing to the receptor, the G protein, or the cyclase, and those are what set how fast cAMP
is made, so the highest level the response reaches is unchanged.
Data: 250 cells from an onion root tip scored by stage. For these cells the
complete cell cycle takes 18 hours.
Stage
Interphase
Prophase
Metaphase
Anaphase
Telophase
Cells counted (of 250)
185
35
12
6
12
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the stage in which these cells spend the most time, and describe the assumption that
allows a count of cells in a stage to be converted into the time spent in that stage.
Explain why so few cells are observed in anaphase.
Calculate the number of minutes a cell spends in metaphase and the mitotic index for this root
tip. Show your setup.
A second root tip has a mitotic index of 12%. Justify the claim that the first tip is dividing
more actively, using both mitotic indices.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: interphase, with 185 of the 250 cells. The assumption is that
the cells were fixed at random moments in their cycles, so the proportion of cells caught in a
stage equals the proportion of the cycle that stage occupies. Do not accept: "most cells are
in interphase" as the answer to the second task, which restates the data instead of stating
the assumption; naming a stage with no assumption given.
(b) Accept: anaphase is the briefest stage, once cohesin is cleaved the
separation of sister chromatids to the poles takes only a few minutes, so at any instant only
a small fraction of the population is in it. Do not accept: "anaphase is rare"; "the cells
were not dividing"; an answer that never connects a short duration to a small count.
(c) Accept: cycle \(= 18 \times 60 = 1080\) min; metaphase
\(= (12/250) \times 1080 = 51.84\) min (accept 51.8 or about 52 min with correct setup);
mitotic index \(= (250 - 185)/250 = 65/250 = 26.0\%\). Units required for the time. Do not
accept: reporting 12/250 as the time; a mitotic index computed from metaphase cells alone; an
answer with no setup.
(d) Accept: 26.0% against 12% means that at any instant more than twice as
large a fraction of the first tip's cells are in M phase; because the mitotic index stands for
the fraction of the cycle spent dividing, the first tip's cells are completing cycles more
often. Do not accept: "26 is bigger than 12" with no reference to what the index measures; a
comparison that treats the index as a count rather than a proportion.
Show a 4/4 response
a Cells spend the most time in interphase, 185 of the 250 scored
were in it. The assumption is that the root tip was fixed at one random moment, so the
fraction of cells caught in a stage is the same as the fraction of the cycle that stage takes
up.
b Anaphase is the shortest part of the cycle. Once the cohesin
holding the sister chromatids together is cleaved, the spindle pulls them to opposite poles in
only a few minutes, so hardly any cells are caught in it at a given instant: 6 out of 250
here.
c The cycle is \(18 \times 60 = 1080\) min. Metaphase
\(= (12/250) \times 1080 = 51.84\) min, about 52 minutes. Mitotic index
\(= (250 - 185)/250 = 65/250 = 0.260\), or 26.0%.
d The mitotic index is the fraction of cells caught in M phase, which
stands for the fraction of the cycle spent dividing. At 26.0% the first tip has more than
twice the fraction of the second tip's 12%, so its cells spend more of their time in division
and finish cycles more often. That is what dividing more actively means, and both numbers come
from the same kind of count.
Data: percentage of cells in each phase of the cell cycle 12 hours after a
DNA-damaging dose of UV, for a human cell line with normal p53 and a line in which both p53
genes have been knocked out.
Phase
p53 normal, no UV
p53 normal, + UV
p53 null, no UV
p53 null, + UV
G1 (%)
52
88
50
51
S (%)
28
5
30
29
G2 + M (%)
20
7
20
20
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the checkpoint at which p53 acts, and describe the change in the distribution of the
p53-normal cells after UV exposure.
Explain how p53 produces that change at the molecular level.
Calculate the change in the percentage of cells in G1 caused by UV in each cell
line, and state which line arrests.
Justify the claim that a cell that loses p53 function is more likely to accumulate mutations,
using the data.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the G1 checkpoint (the restriction point). After UV
the p53-normal cells shift into G1, from 52% to 88%, while S falls from 28% to 5%
and G2 + M from 20% to 7%: cells are being held before S phase. Do not accept:
naming the G2 or M (spindle) checkpoint; "the cells stopped dividing" with no
statement of where they accumulated.
(b) Accept: DNA damage activates p53, which acts as a transcription factor
and induces the CDK inhibitor p21; p21 blocks the G1 cyclin–CDK complex so the cell
cannot pass the restriction point, and it arrests in G1 while repair enzymes work
or is directed to apoptosis if the damage is too severe. Do not accept: "p53 stops the cell
cycle" with no named intermediate or target; describing p53 as an enzyme that repairs DNA
itself.
(c) Accept: p53 normal, \(88 - 52 = +36\) percentage points; p53 null,
\(51 - 50 = +1\) percentage point; only the p53-normal line arrests in G1. Do not
accept: a ratio such as 88/52 offered as the change; omitting one of the two lines; failing to
state which line arrests.
(d) Accept: the p53-null line barely changes after UV, 29% of its cells
are still in S phase, so damaged cells enter S phase and replicate the damage instead of
pausing to repair it, and both daughter cells inherit the resulting mutation; the 36-point
shift into G1 in the normal line is the pause that prevents this. Do not accept:
"p53 is a tumor suppressor" as the whole justification; a claim that cites no number or
comparison from the table.
Show a 4/4 response
a p53 acts at the G1 checkpoint. After UV the p53-normal
cells pile up in G1 (52% before, 88% after), while S phase drops from 28% to 5%
and G2 plus M from 20% to 7%. They are being held before S phase instead of moving
through it.
b UV damage activates p53, and p53 is a transcription factor. It
switches on the gene for p21, a CDK inhibitor, and p21 blocks the G1 cyclin–CDK
complex the cell needs in order to pass the restriction point. With that complex inhibited the
cell cannot enter S phase, so it waits in G1 while repair enzymes work, or is sent
to apoptosis if the damage is too severe to fix.
c p53 normal: \(88 - 52 = +36\) percentage points in G1.
p53 null: \(51 - 50 = +1\) percentage point. Only the p53-normal line arrests.
d In the knockout line UV barely changed anything, 29% of the cells
were still in S phase 12 hours after the damage, against 5% in the normal line. Those cells
are replicating damaged DNA instead of pausing, so the damage gets copied into both daughter
cells and becomes a permanent mutation. The 36-point pile-up in G1 in the normal
line is the pause that prevents exactly that, and the knockout has lost it.
Lesson 5.1 · Unit 5 · CED topic 5.1
Meiosis: one replication, two divisions
Sexual reproduction has an arithmetic problem. If a human egg and sperm
each carried 46 chromosomes, the zygote would carry 92 and the genome
would double every generation. Meiosis is the fix: one
round of replication followed by two divisions, so the
chromosome number halves exactly once.
And it is not halved by throwing chromosomes overboard: each gamete gets
one complete set. That precision comes from one event mitosis never
performs, in meiosis I, homologous chromosomes pair and then separate
from each other, while sister chromatids stay attached.
Definition
Homologous chromosomes are the two copies of the same
chromosome, one inherited from each parent, carrying the same genes in
the same order but possibly different alleles.
Sister chromatids are the two identical copies of one
chromosome made in S phase and held at the centromere.
Diploid (2n) cells carry both members of every
homologous pair; haploid (n) cells carry one. In
Drosophila, 2n = 8 and n = 4. Ploidy counts
chromosomes, not chromatids: a replicated chromosome is still
one chromosome, because it has one centromere.
Model
Meiosis I is the reductional division. In prophase I
homologs undergo synapsis and form a
tetrad of four chromatids; crossing over happens here,
at chiasmata. In metaphase I whole tetrads line up on
the plate, and in anaphase I homologs are pulled to opposite poles with
their sister chromatids still joined: that is the step that takes 2n
to n. Meiosis II is the equational division, mitosis
in miniature: no synapsis, no crossing over, sister chromatids separate
in anaphase II. Mitosis is one division yielding two identical diploid
cells, and it never pairs homologs at all.
Worked example · Chromosome bookkeeping
A Drosophila cell (2n = 8) contains 7.2 pg of DNA at the end
of G1. Complete the table for one cell at each stage.
Per cell
End G1
End G2
Metaphase I
End meiosis I
End meiosis II
Chromosomes
8
8
8
4
4
Chromatids
8
16
16
8
4
DNA (pg)
7.2
14.4
14.4
7.2
3.6
Work it from replication. S phase doubles chromatids and DNA: 16
chromatids, \(2 \times 7.2 = 14.4\) pg, but the chromosome count stays
8, because each still has one centromere. Anaphase I separates
homologs, so each daughter gets 4 replicated chromosomes: 8 chromatids,
\(14.4/2 = 7.2\) pg. Anaphase II separates chromatids: 4 chromosomes, 4
chromatids, \(7.2/2 = 3.6\) pg. Check the books:
\(4 \times 3.6 = 14.4\) pg, the whole G2 content handed out.
And the tetrad count at metaphase I is \(n = 4\), not 8.
Worked example · Reading a stage from a description
Describe the model: a slide shows four groups of four chromatids in a
single row across the cell's equator, with spindle fibers from only one
pole attached to each member of a group. Identify the stage.
Four groups of four chromatids are four tetrads, so this is
metaphase I of a 2n = 8 cell; the one-pole attachment
is the tell. Mitotic metaphase would show 8 replicated chromosomes in
the row, each with fibers from both poles; metaphase II would
show 4. Note what identify asks for: a name; it is
explain that demands the mechanism. The division also runs
differently by sex: spermatogenesis divides the cytoplasm evenly into
four functional sperm, while oogenesis divides it unevenly into one
large ovum and three polar bodies that degenerate, stocking the future
zygote with cytoplasm and nutrients.
Practice
A lily cell (2n = 12) is in anaphase II. State how many chromosomes move to each pole and how many chromatids each has, then explain how the answer differs in anaphase I.
Show answer
Anaphase II: chromatids have just separated, so 6 chromosomes move to each pole, each a single chromatid; 6 chromatids per pole. Anaphase I: homologs separate but chromatids stay joined, so 6 chromosomes still move to each pole, each of two chromatids, giving 12 per pole. The chromosome counts match, the chromatid counts do not, and that is the difference between a reductional and an equational division.
Sketch this graph for the same fly cell: DNA per nucleus (pg) on the y-axis, time (hours) on the x-axis. The trace sits at 7.2 pg to hour 4, rises to 14.4 pg by hour 10, holds to hour 16, drops vertically to 7.2 pg, holds to hour 20, then drops to 3.6 pg. Identify the event at each transition and state which drop is the reduction division.
Show answer
Hours 4–10 is S phase: DNA doubles from 7.2 to 14.4 pg as every chromosome is replicated, while the chromosome count holds at 8. The drop at hour 16 is anaphase I with cytokinesis I, where homologs separate: the reduction division, because ploidy falls from 2n to n here and only here. The drop at hour 20 is anaphase II: chromatids separate and DNA halves to 3.6 pg, but ploidy stays n. Calling that second drop the reduction is the usual error.
A Drosophila mutant (2n = 8) cannot build the synaptonemal complex, so homologs never synapse and each replicated chromosome attaches to the spindle independently. Predict the fraction of meiosis I products that receive a balanced haploid set, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: about \(1/16\), or 6.25%. Justification: with no synapsis there is no tetrad, so each of the 4 homologous pairs segregates at random. For one pair the chance its homologs go to opposite poles is \(1/2\), and the pairs are independent, so all four separate correctly with probability \((1/2)^4 = 1/16\); the other 93.75% are aneuploid. The prediction point needs the number, the justification point the link from pairing to the segregation it guarantees.
Lesson 5.2 · Unit 5 · CED topic 5.2
Where the variation comes from
Halving the chromosome number is only half of what meiosis is for. The
other half is shuffling. A population with no variation has nothing for
selection to act on, and meiosis plus fertilization generates that
variation three ways (crossing over, independent assortment, and random
fertilization) before a single mutation is needed.
The same machinery can fail, and when it does the result is a gamete
with the wrong chromosome number. That failure, nondisjunction, is worth
understanding as a slip in exactly one of the two divisions.
Definition
Crossing over is the reciprocal exchange of segments
between non-sister chromatids of paired homologs in prophase I; the
visible crossing points are chiasmata, and the product
is a chromosome carrying alleles from both parents.
Independent assortment is the random orientation of
each tetrad at metaphase I, so which homolog of one pair goes to a pole
says nothing about any other pair. Random fertilization
pairs any one gamete with any other. Nondisjunction is
the failure of homologs (meiosis I) or sister chromatids (meiosis II)
to separate, yielding aneuploid gametes.
Formula
Independent assortment alone gives \(2^{n}\) genetically different
gametes, where \(n\) is the haploid number, and random fertilization
gives \(2^{n} \times 2^{n}\) zygote combinations. For two genes on the
same chromosome, the recombination frequency from a
test cross is
\[ \mathrm{RF} = \frac{\text{recombinant offspring}}{\text{total offspring}} \times 100\% \]
and 1% recombination is defined as one map unit
(centimorgan). RF rises with distance but tops out near 50%, which is
what unlinked genes give.
Worked example · Counting human combinations
Humans have \(n = 23\). Calculate the number of chromosomally distinct
gametes one person can make from independent assortment alone, and the
number of zygotes two people could produce.
\[ 2^{23} = 8{,}388{,}608 \ \text{gametes} \]
\[ 2^{23} \times 2^{23} = 2^{46} = 70{,}368{,}744{,}177{,}664 \approx 7.0 \times 10^{13}\ \text{zygotes} \]
Seventy trillion, and that is before crossing over. Because one or more
crossovers occur on essentially every chromosome pair, no chromosome a
parent passes on is an intact copy of either grandparent's, so the
real count of distinct gametes is effectively unlimited. A grader
reading "meiosis makes variation" gives nothing; the point is earned by
naming which of the three sources you mean.
Worked example · Morgan's linked genes in Drosophila
Question: are body color and wing size on the same chromosome,
and how far apart? Morgan test-crossed an F1 female
heterozygous for gray body and normal wings to a black,
vestigial-winged male.
Offspring phenotype
Gray, normal
Black, vestigial
Gray, vestigial
Black, normal
Number
965
944
206
185
The independent variable is the allele combination in
the egg; the dependent variable is the count in each
phenotype class; the control is the homozygous
recessive test-cross parent, which contributes nothing that could mask
a recessive allele. Unlinked genes would give 1:1:1:1; instead the two
parental classes dominate. Total \(= 2300\), recombinants
\(= 206 + 185 = 391\), so
\[ \mathrm{RF} = \frac{391}{2300} \times 100\% = 17.0\% \]
Conclusion, justified: the genes lie about 17 map units apart
on one chromosome, because 17% of gametes carried a combination only a
crossover between the loci could produce.
Practice
A plant has 2n = 12. Calculate how many chromosomally different gametes it can make by independent assortment alone, and how many zygote combinations two such plants could produce. Then explain why the true number of distinct gametes is much larger.
Show answer
\(n = 6\), so \(2^{6} = 64\) gametes, and random fertilization gives \(64 \times 64 = 4096\) zygote combinations. The true number is far larger because independent assortment treats each chromosome as an unbreakable unit, and crossing over breaks that assumption: every chiasma builds a chromosome with a new mix of maternal and paternal alleles, so a gamete is not one of 64 pre-existing packages.
In maize, a test cross of a plant heterozygous for kernel color and kernel texture gave 4032 purple starchy, 4035 colorless shrunken, 149 purple shrunken, and 152 colorless starchy. Identify the parental classes and calculate the map distance between the genes.
Show answer
Parental classes are the two most frequent, purple starchy (4032) and colorless shrunken (4035), because a crossover between two nearby loci is rare. Total \(= 4032 + 4035 + 149 + 152 = 8368\); recombinants \(= 149 + 152 = 301\). \(\mathrm{RF} = 301/8368 \times 100\% = 3.6\%\), so the genes are about 3.6 map units apart. Identify classes by frequency, not by which phenotype looks wild type.
In one human primary oocyte, chromosome 21 undergoes nondisjunction in meiosis I; in another, in meiosis II. Predict the chromosome number of the four products in each case, and justify the difference.
Show answer
Meiosis I error: both homologs travel to the same pole, so both meiosis I cells are already wrong and all four products are aneuploid, two with 24 chromosomes (n + 1) and two with 22 (n − 1), 100% abnormal. Meiosis II error: only one of the two cells misdivides, so two products are normal at 23, one has 24, and one 22; 50% abnormal. Justification: an error in meiosis I is copied into everything downstream, while an error in meiosis II is confined to the products of the single cell it occurs in. Fertilizing an n + 1 gamete gives a 47-chromosome trisomic zygote.
Lesson 5.3 · Unit 5 · CED topic 5.3
Mendel's laws, probability, and the chi-square test
Before Mendel, inheritance was assumed to blend, like paint. His pea
crosses killed that idea: a trait that vanished in the F1 came
back intact in the F2, so the hereditary factors had to be
discrete particles that stay whole. We now know why: the particles are
alleles, and meiosis separates them.
Mendel's laws are really statements about meiosis, published in 1866 and
not tied to chromosomes until the Sutton–Boveri theory of 1902. That is
why crosses can be worked with probability rules instead of grids, and
why counted offspring can be tested against a predicted ratio.
Rule
The law of segregation: the two alleles of a gene
separate into different gametes, so each gamete carries one, this is
anaphase I. The law of independent assortment: alleles
of genes on different chromosomes segregate independently of one
another, this is the random orientation of tetrads at metaphase I.
Genotype is the allele pair; phenotype
is what you observe, and a dominant phenotype hides two possible
genotypes. A test cross to a homozygous recessive
resolves them: any recessive offspring at all means the unknown parent
was heterozygous.
Formula
Use the product rule for independent events that must
both happen (multiply) and the sum rule for mutually
exclusive ways one outcome can happen (add): far faster than a 16- or
64-box grid. To test whether counted offspring match a predicted ratio,
\[ \chi^{2} = \sum \frac{(o - e)^{2}}{e}, \qquad df = (\text{number of phenotype classes}) - 1 \]
Critical values at \(p = 0.05\) are 3.841 for \(df = 1\) and 7.815 for
\(df = 3\). If \(\chi^{2}\) is below the critical value you
fail to reject the null hypothesis; you never "prove" it.
Worked example · Product rule beats the grid
In a cross AaBbCc × AaBbCc with all three genes unlinked, find the
probability of an aabbcc offspring and of an
A_bbC_ offspring.
Split it into three one-gene crosses. Each is Aa × Aa, giving
\(1/4\) homozygous recessive and \(3/4\) showing the dominant
phenotype. Then
\[ P(aabbcc) = \tfrac{1}{4} \times \tfrac{1}{4} \times \tfrac{1}{4} = \tfrac{1}{64} = 1.6\% \]
\[ P(A\_bbC\_) = \tfrac{3}{4} \times \tfrac{1}{4} \times \tfrac{3}{4} = \tfrac{9}{64} = 14.1\% \]
A 64-box grid gives the same two answers in twenty minutes instead of
twenty seconds. Show the multiplied fractions on the exam: a bare
\(9/64\) with no setup is not a represent point.
Worked example · Chi-square on a dihybrid F2
Mendel's F2 from a round-yellow × wrinkled-green dihybrid
cross contained 315 round yellow, 108 round green, 101 wrinkled yellow,
and 32 wrinkled green. Do the data fit 9:3:3:1?
Phenotype
Round yellow
Round green
Wrinkled yellow
Wrinkled green
Observed
315
108
101
32
Expected
312.75
104.25
104.25
34.75
(o − e)²/e
0.016
0.135
0.101
0.218
Total \(= 556\), so expected counts are \(556 \times 9/16 = 312.75\),
\(556 \times 3/16 = 104.25\) twice, and \(556 \times 1/16 = 34.75\).
Summing the last row,
\[ \chi^{2} = 0.016 + 0.135 + 0.101 + 0.218 = 0.47 \]
With four classes, \(df = 4 - 1 = 3\) and the critical value is 7.815.
Since \(0.47\) is far below 7.815, we fail to reject the null
hypothesis: the deviations are within what chance sampling produces,
and the data are consistent with independent assortment. Write it that
way: "the genes are independent" overstates what the test shows.
Practice
In peas, tall (T) is dominant to dwarf (t) and yellow seed (Y) to green (y); the genes are unlinked. Using the product rule, calculate the probability that a TtYy × Ttyy cross produces a tall, green-seeded offspring.
Show answer
Treat the genes separately. Tt × Tt gives \(3/4\) tall. Yy × yy gives \(1/2\) green (yy), since half the gametes from the heterozygote carry y and all from the homozygote do. Multiplying, \(3/4 \times 1/2 = 3/8 = 37.5\%\). Answer: 3 in 8. A grid for this cross has 8 boxes, four gamete types from TtYy crossed with two from Ttyy, and exactly 3 come out tall and green, the same answer with more chances to miscount.
A monohybrid F2 is scored as 132 purple and 68 white flowers, where purple is dominant. Test the fit to the expected 3:1 ratio and state the conclusion in the exam's language.
Show answer
Total \(= 200\), so expected are \(200 \times 3/4 = 150\) purple and \(200 \times 1/4 = 50\) white. Terms: \((132-150)^{2}/150 = 324/150 = 2.16\) and \((68-50)^{2}/50 = 324/50 = 6.48\), giving \(\chi^{2} = 8.64\). Two classes means \(df = 1\), critical value 3.841. Since \(8.64\) is greater than 3.841, we reject the null hypothesis: the deviation from 3:1 is larger than chance alone would produce, so something else (reduced viability of one genotype, or a second gene affecting the trait) is at work.
A dihybrid F2 gives 280 A_B_, 30 A_bb, 28 aaB_, and 62 aabb. Predict whether these two genes assort independently, then justify the prediction with a chi-square test at \(df = 3\).
Show answer
Prediction: they do not, the two parental classes are far too common. Justification: with \(n = 400\), expected counts are 225, 75, 75, and 25. Terms: \((280-225)^{2}/225 = 13.444\), \((30-75)^{2}/75 = 27.000\), \((28-75)^{2}/75 = 29.453\), \((62-25)^{2}/25 = 54.760\), so \(\chi^{2} = 124.658\). That is far above the 7.815 critical value at \(df = 3\), so we reject independent assortment. The excess of A_B_ and aabb together with the deficit of both recombinant classes is the signature of linkage on the same chromosome.
Lesson 5.4 · Unit 5 · CED topics 5.4–5.5
Beyond simple dominance, and beyond the genotype
Mendel chose seven traits that each behaved as one gene with two alleles
and clean dominance. Most traits do not. One allele can be only partly
dominant, two can both show, a gene can have dozens of alleles or dozens
of effects, and whole genes can override each other.
And even a fully specified genotype does not fix the phenotype. Temperature,
soil chemistry, nutrition, and population density all feed into what an
organism actually looks like: the same DNA, read in a different place,
gives a different answer.
Definition
In incomplete dominance the heterozygote is
intermediate: red × white snapdragons give pink, and pink × pink gives
1 red : 2 pink : 1 white, because one pigment allele makes roughly half
the pigment. In codominance both alleles are fully
expressed. ABO blood type combines codominance with
multiple alleles: IA and IB are
codominant and both dominant to i, so type A is
IAIA or IAi, type AB is
IAIB, and type O is only ii.
Pleiotropy is one gene with many effects (sickle-cell);
polygenic traits such as skin color come from many
genes adding up, which is why they vary continuously.
Model
Epistasis is one gene masking another. In Labrador
retrievers, B gives black pigment and b brown, but the
E gene decides whether pigment reaches the coat at all: any
ee dog is yellow whatever B says. So a dihybrid cross
yields 9 black : 3 chocolate : 4 yellow, the 3 and the 1 collapse into
one class. Phenotype is also genotype plus environment: Himalayan
rabbits and Siamese cats have temperature-sensitive pigment enzyme,
hydrangeas bloom blue in acidic soil and pink in basic, human height
tracks childhood nutrition, and crowded aphids develop winged forms.
Worked example · An epistatic cross in Labradors
A yellow Lab (BBee) is crossed with a chocolate Lab
(bbEE). Predict the F1, then the F2
ratio and the counts expected among 96 F2 puppies.
Each parent gives one allele per gene, so every F1 pup is
BbEe, and with B and E both present, all of
them are black, which surprises owners of two
non-black parents. BbEe × BbEe gives the usual
9 B_E_ : 3 B_ee : 3 bbE_ : 1 bbee, but both
ee classes are yellow, so the ratio is
9 black : 3 chocolate : 4 yellow. For 96 puppies:
\[ 96 \times \tfrac{9}{16} = 54 \ \text{black}, \quad 96 \times \tfrac{3}{16} = 18 \ \text{chocolate}, \quad 96 \times \tfrac{4}{16} = 24 \ \text{yellow} \]
Check: \(54 + 18 + 24 = 96\).
Worked example · An ABO exclusion
A woman with type B blood has a child with type O blood. She names a
man with type AB blood as the father. Can he be excluded?
Yes. Type O is ii, so the child needed an i from each
parent. The mother can supply one, since type B may be
IBi. The man cannot: type AB is
IAIB and carries no i, so every child of
his gets IA or IB and is type A, B, or AB. Cross
IBi × IAIB and the four boxes
are 1 type A, 2 type B, 1 type AB, no O. Blood typing can
exclude a father but never confirm one. Note the reasoning
direction the exam rewards: work from the child's genotype back to what
each parent could have donated.
Practice
A chocolate Labrador (bbEe) is bred to a yellow Labrador (bbee). State the expected phenotypic ratio of the litter and explain why no black puppies are possible.
Show answer
The E gene: Ee × ee gives 1/2 E_ and 1/2 ee. The B gene: bb × bb gives all bb. So half the pups are bbE_ (chocolate) and half bbee (yellow): 1 chocolate : 1 yellow. No pup can be black, because black requires at least one B together with at least one E, and neither parent carries a B allele to give.
Surface temperature and fur color were recorded at four sites on one Himalayan rabbit. A patch of white back fur was then shaved and held at 28 °C under an ice pack while it regrew. Describe the relationship in the table and explain the regrowth result.
Body region
Ears
Nose
Feet
Back
Surface temperature (°C)
28
29
30
36
Fur color
black
black
black
white
Show answer
Describe: fur is black wherever the surface sits at about 30 °C or below and white at 36 °C, so pigmentation is inversely related to local temperature. Explain: every cell carries the same genotype, but the pigment-producing enzyme in this breed is a temperature-sensitive variant that functions below roughly 33 °C and denatures above it. The shaved patch regrows black because the ice pack holds that skin at 28 °C: the genotype did not change, only the environment did. Saying "the cold made it black" without naming the enzyme earns the description but not the explanation.
A black Labrador of unknown genotype is crossed with a yellow Labrador (bbee). The litter of 8 is 4 black and 4 chocolate, with no yellow puppies. Predict the black parent's genotype and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: BbEE. Justification: the yellow parent donates only b and e, so every puppy's phenotype reports the allele it got from the black parent. No yellow puppies means that parent never donated an e, so it is EE, not Ee: an Ee parent would give about half yellow. The 4 black : 4 chocolate split is a 1:1 ratio for the B gene, the test-cross signature of a heterozygote, so that gene is Bb. A justification stopping at "it must be heterozygous" leaves the E gene unaddressed and loses the point.
Lesson 5.5 · Unit 5 · CED topic 5.6
Chromosomal and extranuclear inheritance
Not every gene sits on a chromosome you have two of. In mammals, females
are XX and males XY, so a male has only one copy of every gene on the X:
he is hemizygous, and a single recessive allele there is
expressed with nothing to mask it. That asymmetry produces inheritance
patterns Mendel never saw.
Two more departures follow. Chromosomes can be miscounted during meiosis,
giving a zygote an extra or missing copy. And mitochondria and
chloroplasts carry their own small DNA, which the egg supplies and the
sperm does not.
Definition
An X-linked gene is carried on the X chromosome. A
female can be XAXA, XAXa
(an unaffected carrier), or XaXa;
a male is only XAY or XaY. So if the recessive
allele has frequency \(q\), affected males occur at \(q\) and affected
females at \(q^{2}\). For red-green color blindness, \(q \approx 0.08\)
gives about 8% of males and \(0.08^{2} = 0.0064\), or 0.64%, of females: roughly 12.5 times as many males. Fathers pass their X only to
daughters, so an X-linked recessive trait travels from an affected
grandfather through an unaffected daughter to a grandson.
Model
A karyotype is written as total count, sex
chromosomes, then any change: 47,XY,+21 is trisomy 21; 47,XXY and 45,X
are sex-chromosome aneuploidies from nondisjunction. Every X beyond the
first is condensed and silenced early in development as a
Barr body, and because the choice is random per cell,
a heterozygous female is a mosaic: this is why calico cats are patched
orange and black. Mitochondrial and chloroplast DNA is
inherited maternally: the egg's cytoplasm supplies the
organelles, so an affected mother passes the trait to all her children
and an affected father to none.
Worked example · Morgan's white-eyed Drosophila
Question: can a gene be shown to sit on a specific chromosome?
Morgan found one white-eyed male in a red-eyed stock and ran the cross
both ways. The independent variable is which parent
carried the white-eye allele; the dependent variable
is eye color sorted by sex; the control is the
true-breeding red-eyed line run alongside.
Red female × white male gave an all-red F1, and an
F2 of 2459 red females, 1011 red males, and 782 white males: about 4.4 red per white rather than the 3 : 1 expected, a shortfall
Morgan attributed to poor survival of white-eyed flies, and
every white fly was male. The reciprocal cross, white female ×
red male, gave the opposite F1: all daughters red, all sons
white.
Conclusion, justified: the gene is on the X, because an
autosomal gene gives identical results in both directions, and only
X-linkage makes a son's phenotype depend on his mother's genotype
alone.
Worked example · Reading a three-generation pedigree
Sketch this pedigree. Generation I is an unaffected couple. Their
children are II-1, an affected male; II-2, an unaffected female; and
II-3, an unaffected male. II-2 marries an unaffected man and has III-1,
an affected male, plus unaffected III-2 (female) and III-3 (male).
III-2 then marries an unaffected man from the general population. Give
the mode of inheritance and the chance their first child is affected.
Every affected individual is male and unaffected parents have affected
sons, so the allele is recessive, and the male-only
pattern passed through unaffected women makes it
X-linked. I-2 must be XAXa,
because II-1 got his only X from her; II-2 is an obligate carrier for
the same reason, since her husband is XAY. III-2 is
unaffected, so she is XAXA or
XAXa, each with probability \(1/2\), and a carrier
× XAY cross gives \(1/4\) affected children, all sons:
\[ P(\text{affected}) = \tfrac{1}{2} \times \tfrac{1}{4} = \tfrac{1}{8} = 12.5\% \]
If the child is known to be a son, it is \(1/2 \times 1/2 = 1/4\).
Practice
Explain why calico coat color appears almost only in female cats, and describe what a Barr body is.
Show answer
The orange-versus-black coat color gene is X-linked, so a patched cat must carry two different alleles, which requires two X chromosomes. Early in development each cell randomly silences one X and every descendant keeps the same X off, so the coat is a mosaic of patches. The Barr body is that condensed, transcriptionally inactive X, a dark spot at the edge of the nucleus. Male calicos occur essentially only in XXY cats produced by nondisjunction.
Three karyotypes are summarized below. Write the standard notation for each, identify the two that arose from nondisjunction of a sex-chromosome pair, and state how many Barr bodies each cell contains.
Individual
1
2
3
Total chromosomes
47
47
45
Autosomes
21 matched pairs plus three copies of 21
22 matched pairs
22 matched pairs
Sex chromosomes
X and Y
X, X, and Y
a single X
Show answer
Individual 1 is 47,XY,+21: trisomy 21, from nondisjunction of an autosome. Individual 2 is 47,XXY and individual 3 is 45,X; both came from nondisjunction of a sex-chromosome pair, one receiving an extra X and the other no second sex chromosome. Barr bodies: one in individual 2, since every X past the first is silenced, and none in individuals 1 or 3, which each have a single X. Check the arithmetic: 42 + 3 + 2 = 47, 44 + 3 = 47, 44 + 1 = 45.
A man has a mitochondrial myopathy caused by an mtDNA mutation; his wife is unaffected. His affected sister is married to an unaffected man. Predict the proportion of affected children in each couple and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: none of the man's children are affected, and all of his sister's are, sons and daughters alike. Justification: essentially all of a zygote's mitochondria come from the egg's cytoplasm, sperm contribute effectively none, so an mtDNA allele passes only from mother to child. That asymmetry is what separates mitochondrial from X-linked recessive inheritance, where an affected mother gives her daughters a carrier phenotype and her sons a 1/2 risk. Severity can still vary among the sister's children, because cells carry a mixture of mutant and normal mitochondria.
Unit 5 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 5 quiz: Heredity
Fifteen multiple-choice questions and five short free-response questions covering meiosis, the three sources of genetic diversity, Mendelian crosses and chi-square, non-Mendelian patterns and environmental effects, and sex-linked, chromosomal, and extranuclear inheritance: click an option to see why each answer works or fails, and write each FRQ on paper before you open the model response.
Multiple choice
Figure: a dividing cell from an organism with 2n = 6, drawn from a light micrograph.
Six chromosomes, each clearly made of two sister chromatids, lie across the middle of the cell. They are arranged as three side-by-side pairs, so the row is three units long rather than six. Spindle fibers reach each chromosome from one pole only, and the two members of each pair are attached to opposite poles. No nuclear envelope is visible.
The cell shown is in which stage of division?
Correct. Three side-by-side pairs of replicated chromosomes are three tetrads, which is what a 2n = 6 cell makes, and the one-pole attachment per chromosome is the arrangement that lets whole homologs, not chromatids, be pulled apart in anaphase I.
Metaphase II follows the reduction division, so each cell would hold only three replicated chromosomes, not six, and they would line up singly with fibers from both poles. Counting the chromatids in the figure gives twelve, twice what a haploid cell in meiosis II contains.
In anaphase I the homologs have already separated and are moving toward opposite poles, so the chromosomes would be in two groups away from the equator. Here everything is still aligned in a single row at the center, which defines a metaphase, not an anaphase.
Mitotic metaphase in a 2n = 6 cell would show six replicated chromosomes lined up singly, six units long, with spindle fibers from both poles attached to each centromere. The figure shows paired chromosomes with one-pole attachment, which mitosis never produces because it does not pair homologs at all.
Data: chromosome and DNA content of one grasshopper cell (2n = 10) as it proceeds through meiosis, measured at four points.
Per cell
End of G1
End of G2
End of meiosis I
End of meiosis II
Chromosomes
10
10
5
?
DNA (pg)
6.0
12.0
6.0
?
Which pair of values correctly completes the final column?
The DNA value is right but the chromosome count is not: the diploid number is restored only at fertilization, never by a meiotic division. Meiosis II separates sister chromatids within an already haploid cell, so the count stays at 5 and cannot climb back to 10.
The chromosome count is right and the DNA value is not. Anaphase II pulls the two chromatids of each chromosome apart into different cells, so the 6.0 pg held by a cell at the end of meiosis I is divided between two products, giving 3.0 pg each.
Correct. Meiosis II is an equational division: chromosome number stays at 5 because each chromosome keeps its single centromere, while the DNA halves from 6.0 to 3.0 pg as the chromatids separate. Check the bookkeeping: four products at 3.0 pg account for the 12.0 pg present at the end of G2.
Chromosomes are counted as whole physical structures, so a fractional chromosome number is not possible. This choice comes from halving both rows again, as though a third division followed; meiosis is exactly two divisions after one round of replication.
Which event occurs during meiosis I but never during mitosis?
Nuclear envelope breakdown, spindle assembly, and reassembly at telophase occur in mitosis and in both meiotic divisions. Shared machinery like this is common in distractors because it is true: it just does not answer the question being asked.
Sister chromatids separate in mitotic anaphase and again in anaphase II, so this is the one event the two processes share most obviously. It is also precisely what does not happen in anaphase I, where the chromatids stay joined while the homologs are pulled apart.
Both processes are preceded by a single S phase that doubles the DNA; that is why a meiotic cell needs two divisions to reach the haploid amount. Replication is the shared setup, not the distinguishing step.
Correct. Synapsis pairs the two homologs into a tetrad and crossing over swaps segments between non-sister chromatids, and neither happens in mitosis, where homologs behave as unrelated chromosomes. That pairing is also what makes the reduction to haploid possible in the first place.
Data: offspring of a test cross in tomato. An F1 plant heterozygous for stem height and fruit skin was crossed to a dwarf, peach-skinned plant, and 1,400 offspring were scored.
Offspring phenotype
Tall, smooth
Dwarf, peach
Tall, peach
Dwarf, smooth
Number
621
604
98
77
What is the map distance between the two loci?
This is \(77/1400\), only one of the two recombinant classes. A single crossover between the loci produces both reciprocal products in roughly equal numbers, so 98 and 77 must be added before dividing by the total.
Correct. The two frequent classes are parental, so the recombinants are \(98 + 77 = 175\) out of 1,400, and \(175/1400 \times 100\% = 12.5\%\), which by definition is 12.5 map units. The near-equality of 98 and 77 is the sign that both came from the same crossover event.
This doubles the recombination frequency, a step that has no justification: one map unit is defined as 1% recombinant offspring, with no factor of two. The doubling error usually comes from thinking each crossover involves two chromatids and therefore needs correcting.
Unlinked genes give a 1:1:1:1 test-cross ratio, which here would be four classes of 350. Instead two classes hold 1,225 of the 1,400 offspring, so the alleles are travelling together far more often than chance allows and the genes must be linked.
In a human primary oocyte, the sister chromatids of chromosome 21 fail to separate during meiosis II. Which statement best describes the four products of that meiosis?
A product with two copies of chromosome 21 has 24 chromosomes, not 23: adding a chromosome changes the count. This choice confuses an extra chromosome with an extra chromatid, which is the distinction anaphase II actually resolves.
No meiotic product is diploid. Meiosis II separates chromatids within cells that are already haploid, so the products range from 22 to 24 chromosomes; a 46-chromosome cell would require both divisions to be skipped.
This is the outcome of nondisjunction in meiosis I, where both homologs go to the same pole and every downstream cell inherits the mistake. A meiosis II error happens after the two cells have already separated, so only one of them can be affected.
Correct. The cell that divides normally yields two products with 23 chromosomes; the cell whose chromatids fail to separate yields one product with both copies of chromosome 21 (24 chromosomes) and one missing it entirely (22). Half the products are normal, which is the signature of a meiosis II error.
Description of a karyotype prepared from cultured cells of a newborn and arranged by chromosome size.
Forty-five chromosomes are present. Twenty-two matched autosomal pairs are arranged in order; no autosome appears in one copy or in three. There is a single X chromosome and no second sex chromosome.
Which statement about this karyotype is best supported?
Correct. Notation 45,X arises when a gamete that received no sex chromosome, from nondisjunction in either meiotic division, fertilizes or is fertilized by a normal gamete. Only X chromosomes beyond the first are condensed into Barr bodies, so a cell with a single X has none.
X inactivation silences every X past the first, not the only X a cell has: a typical XX female cell shows one Barr body and a typical XY cell shows none. Silencing the lone X here would leave the cell with no expressed copy of hundreds of essential genes.
Gaining a chromosome would raise the total above 46, not lower it to 45. The count is odd because one chromosome is absent, which is what makes 45,X a monosomy rather than a trisomy.
Trisomy 21 would show three copies of chromosome 21 and a total of 47, and the description states explicitly that every autosome is present as a matched pair. The missing chromosome here is a sex chromosome, so the nondisjunction involved the X–Y pair or the two X chromatids.
Data: F2 phenotypes from a monohybrid cross in peas, with the counts expected under a 3:1 ratio.
Phenotype
Tall
Dwarf
Total
Observed
792
208
1,000
Expected (3:1)
750
250
1,000
Using \(\chi^{2} = \sum (o-e)^{2}/e\) and the critical value 3.841, which conclusion is best supported?
Correct. The terms are \((792-750)^{2}/750 = 1764/750 = 2.352\) and \((208-250)^{2}/250 = 1764/250 = 7.056\), summing to 9.408. Two phenotype classes give \(df = 1\), and 9.41 exceeds 3.841, so the null hypothesis of a 3:1 ratio is rejected.
The chi-square value is computed correctly but the degrees of freedom are not: \(df\) is the number of phenotype classes minus one, and there are two classes here, not four. Using 7.815 flips a rejection into a non-rejection, which is why counting classes first is worth the five seconds.
This is what you get by dividing the raw deviation by the expected value instead of the squared deviation: \(42/750 + 42/250 = 0.224\). Squaring is what makes the statistic insensitive to the direction of the deviation and puts it on the scale the critical values were built for.
A chi-square test never proves anything, and rejecting a 3:1 ratio does not implicate segregation specifically. Reduced viability of one genotype, a second gene affecting height, or a scoring bias would all produce this result, so the honest conclusion names the ratio, not the mechanism.
In the cross AaBbCc × AaBbcc, with all three genes unlinked, what is the probability that an offspring shows the dominant phenotype for gene A and the recessive phenotypes for genes B and C?
This multiplies \(3/4 \times 3/4 \times 1/4\), which is the probability of dominant A, dominant B, and recessive C. Reading which gene needs the recessive phenotype is half the work in these items; the stem asks for recessive at both B and C.
This uses \(1/4\) for the C gene, as if both parents were Cc. The second parent is cc and contributes only c, so a Cc × cc cross gives \(1/2\) recessive offspring, not \(1/4\).
Correct. Treat each gene separately and multiply: \(Aa \times Aa\) gives \(3/4\) dominant, \(Bb \times Bb\) gives \(1/4\) bb, and \(Cc \times cc\) gives \(1/2\) cc, so \(3/4 \times 1/4 \times 1/2 = 3/32\), about 9.4%. The product rule gets this in seconds; a 32-box grid does not.
This is \(1/4 \times 1/4\), the answer for recessive at A and B with the C gene ignored altogether. Every gene named in the stem has to appear as a factor, even when its probability is \(1/2\) rather than \(1/4\).
A breeder has a purple-flowered plant and needs to know whether it is PP or Pp, where purple is dominant to white. Which cross settles the question, and what result identifies a heterozygote?
Correct. A test cross to the homozygous recessive contributes only p, so each offspring's phenotype reports the allele it received from the unknown parent. A Pp plant donates p half the time, giving about 20 white offspring in 40; a PP plant donates P every time and gives none.
A PP partner donates P to every offspring, so every offspring has at least one dominant allele and all of them are purple whatever the unknown plant is. A cross that gives the same result for both hypotheses cannot distinguish them.
Selfing does work in principle, but the interpretation here is backwards: a Pp plant selfed gives about \(1/4\) white offspring, so 40 purple offspring point toward PP, not Pp. The test cross is preferred because it produces a 1:1 split, which is easier to detect in a small litter than 3:1.
White offspring are pp and need a p allele from each parent, so a white offspring shows the plant is Pp: the opposite of what this choice claims. An unknown second parent also leaves the result uninterpretable when no white offspring appear.
Data: coat colors among 160 F2 Labrador retriever puppies from crosses between black F1 dogs of genotype BbEe.
Coat color
Black
Chocolate
Yellow
Number of puppies
88
33
39
Which statement best explains why the yellow class is larger than the chocolate class?
Yellow and chocolate are not alleles of one gene, so no dominance relationship exists between them: yellow is an ee phenotype at one locus and chocolate is a bbE_ phenotype involving both. Treating the three coat colors as three alleles of a single gene is the usual first move here, and it cannot generate a 9:3:4 ratio.
Correct. Any ee dog fails to deposit pigment in the coat and is yellow no matter what the B gene says, so the \(3/16\) B_ee and \(1/16\) bbee classes merge. Expected counts in 160 puppies are 90 black, 30 chocolate, and 40 yellow, and the observed 88, 33, 39 match closely.
Linkage changes which allele combinations travel together and would distort the ratio in a test cross, but it cannot merge two phenotype classes into one. The clue that this is epistasis rather than linkage is that the yellow class is exactly the sum of two of the four dihybrid classes.
Sampling error explains the gap between 39 and the expected 40, not the gap between the chocolate and yellow classes, which is predicted by the model before any puppies are counted. Expected values of 30 and 40 are not equal, so no sample size would make the observed classes converge.
A woman with type O blood has a child with type B blood. She names a man with type AB blood as the father. Which statement is best supported?
IA and IB are codominant with each other but both are dominant to i, so a child who receives IA from the father and i from the mother is type A, and one who receives IB is type B. Only a child carrying both IA and IB is type AB, which is impossible with an ii mother.
Blood typing can exclude a man but can never confirm one, because a large share of the population carries the same alleles. Any type AB or type B man in the population would be equally compatible with this child, so the evidence is consistent with him rather than specific to him.
A type AB man is IAIB and donates one of those two alleles to each child, so half his children by a type O mother are expected to be type B. The exclusion rule works the other way round: an AB man cannot father a type O child, because he carries no i.
Correct. Work backwards from the child: type B is IBIB or IBi, and since the mother can only supply i, the child is IBi and needs IB from the father. A type AB man has one, so nothing in these data excludes him.
Data: twelve cuttings taken from a single hydrangea plant, rooted and then grown one season in soils adjusted to four pH values, three cuttings per soil.
Soil pH
4.5
5.5
6.5
7.5
Flower color
deep blue
blue-purple
pink-purple
pink
Cuttings scored
3
3
3
3
Which conclusion is best supported by these data?
Cuttings from one plant are clones, so this conclusion contradicts the design of the investigation rather than following from it. The whole point of using cuttings is to hold the genotype constant so that any variation in phenotype has to come from somewhere else.
Mutations are random changes in base sequence, not directed responses that happen to produce a useful or matching phenotype in every one of three plants per treatment. A mutagen would also not produce the same color in all three cuttings at each pH, and reversing the color when the plant is moved would be impossible.
Correct. All twelve plants carry identical DNA, and the only variable that differs among the groups is soil pH, which controls how much aluminum the roots can take up and therefore the color of the pigment complex in the petals. Phenotype is genotype plus environment, and this design isolates the environmental half.
Incomplete dominance is a relationship between two alleles at one locus, which would require genetically different plants and would give a fixed ratio of colors within one environment. Here the color tracks a measured environmental gradient across clones, which no allele-based model can explain.
Description of a three-generation pedigree for a rare human trait. Squares are males, circles are females, and filled symbols are affected.
Generation I: I-1, an affected male, is married to I-2, an unaffected female. Their children are II-1, an unaffected female, and II-3, an unaffected male. II-1 married II-2, an unaffected male from outside the family; II-3 married II-4, an unaffected female from outside the family. Generation III: II-1 and II-2 have III-1, an affected male, and III-2, an unaffected female. II-3 and II-4 have III-3, an unaffected male, and III-4, an unaffected female.
Which mode of inheritance is best supported by this pedigree?
A dominant allele is expressed in every carrier, so an affected child must have an affected parent. III-1 is affected while both II-1 and II-2 are unaffected, which rules dominance out at once and tells you the allele is recessive.
A Y-linked allele passes from father to every son and to no daughter, so II-3 would be affected and would pass the trait to III-3. Both are unaffected, and the trait instead reappears through I-1's daughter, which a Y-linked allele can never do.
Correct. I-1 passes his only X to both daughters, so II-1 is an obligate carrier, and her son III-1 received her Xa with no second X to mask it. The same allele cannot reach III-3 through II-3, because a father gives his son a Y, which is exactly the skipping pattern the pedigree shows.
Mitochondrial DNA is inherited from the egg alone, so an affected father transmits to none of his children and an affected mother to all of hers. Here the affected individual in generation I is male and his grandson is affected through a daughter, the opposite of maternal transmission.
An X-linked recessive allele has a frequency of \(q = 0.04\) in a large population that mates at random. Approximately what percentage of males and of females are affected?
This treats the two sexes as equivalent, which is exactly what X-linkage rules out. A male is hemizygous, so one copy of the allele is enough; a female needs two, and those are very different probabilities when \(q\) is small.
Correct. A male is affected whenever his single X carries the allele, so the frequency is \(q = 0.04\), or 4%. A female needs the allele on both X chromosomes, so the frequency is \(q^{2} = 0.0016\), or 0.16%, and \(0.04/0.0016 = 25\).
The two values are the right numbers assigned to the wrong sexes. Squaring a frequency below one always makes it smaller, so the rarer outcome, \(q^{2}\), has to belong to the sex that needs two copies, which is the female.
Nothing in the model doubles the male frequency; having one X means the probability is \(q\) itself, not \(2q\). The factor of two shows up in \(2pq\), the frequency of heterozygous carrier females, which is \(2(0.96)(0.04) = 7.7\%\) here.
Description of a pedigree for a human myopathy that causes exercise intolerance. Squares are males, circles are females, and filled symbols are affected.
Generation I: I-1, an affected female, married I-2, an unaffected male. All four of their children are affected: II-1 (male), II-2 (female), II-3 (male), and II-4 (female). Generation III: II-1 married an unaffected woman, and neither of their two children is affected. II-2 married an unaffected man, and both of their children are affected.
Which statement best explains the pattern of transmission in this pedigree?
An X-linked dominant allele in a heterozygous mother reaches about half her children, not all four, and an affected father would transmit it to every daughter. Here II-1 is affected and has no affected children at all, which no X-linked model allows.
Correct. Essentially all of a zygote's mitochondria come from the egg's cytoplasm, so every child of an affected mother inherits the mutant organelles while a father contributes none. The pedigree shows exactly that asymmetry: II-2's children are affected and II-1's are not.
Incomplete penetrance would produce unaffected carriers scattered through the pedigree in both sexes, not a clean split by the sex of the transmitting parent. It also cannot explain why all of an affected mother's children are affected while none of an affected father's are.
Under X-linked recessive inheritance an affected female passes her allele to every son, so all of I-1's sons would be affected but her daughters would only be carriers, and II-2 is affected, not a carrier. The variable severity mitochondrial disorders show is a better fit for the same data.
Free response
Data: F2 phenotypes from a dihybrid cross in tomato. True-breeding tall, purple-stemmed plants were crossed to true-breeding dwarf, green-stemmed plants; the F1 were all tall and purple-stemmed and were allowed to self-pollinate. 640 F2 plants were scored.
F2 phenotype
Tall, purple
Tall, green
Dwarf, purple
Dwarf, green
Observed number
371
118
126
25
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the null hypothesis being tested by a chi-square analysis of these data, and describe the phenotypic ratio that hypothesis predicts.
Explain why a chi-square test rather than an inspection of the counts is needed to decide whether these data are consistent with independent assortment.
Calculate the chi-square value for these data. Show the expected count for each phenotype class and your setup.
The critical value at \(p = 0.05\) with \(df = 3\) is 7.815. Justify a conclusion about independent assortment of these two genes, using your calculated value as evidence.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the null hypothesis is that the two genes assort independently and the F2 fits a 9:3:3:1 phenotypic ratio, so any deviation from that ratio is due to chance sampling. Do not accept: "the genes are linked" (that is the alternative hypothesis); restating the stem; naming 9:3:3:1 with no statement of what the hypothesis claims.
(b) Accept: an explanation that every real sample deviates from its expected ratio by chance, so a decision needs a measure of how large the deviation is relative to what chance alone produces; the test converts the four deviations into one number that can be compared with a threshold. Do not accept: "the numbers look close" or "to be more accurate" with no reasoning; a description of how to compute the statistic instead of why it is needed.
(c) Accept: expected counts of \(640 \times 9/16 = 360\), \(640 \times 3/16 = 120\) twice, and \(640 \times 1/16 = 40\); terms 0.336, 0.033, 0.300, and 5.625; \(\chi^{2} = 6.29\) (accept 6.28–6.30). Setup must be shown. Do not accept: a bare number with no expected values; expected counts that do not sum to 640; use of percentages in place of counts.
(d) Accept: \(\chi^{2} = 6.29\) is less than 7.815, so we fail to reject the null hypothesis and the data are consistent with independent assortment; the reasoning must name the comparison. Do not accept: "the genes assort independently" stated as proven; "we accept the null hypothesis"; a conclusion with no comparison to the critical value.
Show a 4/4 response
a The null hypothesis is that the height gene and the stem-color gene assort independently, so the F2 should fall into a 9:3:3:1 ratio of tall purple to tall green to dwarf purple to dwarf green, and any difference from that is just chance.
b Even if the genes really do assort independently, I would never get exactly 360:120:120:40 in a real sample of 640 plants, because which gametes happen to fuse is random. The chi-square test tells me how big my deviation is compared with the deviations chance alone produces, so I am not just eyeballing whether 25 is "close enough" to 40.
d Since 6.29 is less than the critical value of 7.815 at \(df = 3\), I fail to reject the null hypothesis. Almost all of the statistic comes from the dwarf green class being 15 plants short, and a deviation that size still falls inside the range chance produces, so these data are consistent with the two genes assorting independently.
Description of a pedigree for a rare human metabolic disorder. Squares are males, circles are females, and filled symbols are affected.
Family 1: I-1, an unaffected male, and I-2, an unaffected female, have three children: II-1, an affected female; II-2, an unaffected male; and II-3, an unaffected female. Family 2: I-3, an unaffected male, and I-4, an unaffected female, have two children: II-4, an affected male, and II-5, an unaffected female. II-2 and II-5 have married; they have no children yet. No one else in either family is affected.
Using the pedigree, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the mode of inheritance of this disorder, and describe the feature of the pedigree that rules out a dominant allele.
Explain why the pedigree is not consistent with X-linked recessive inheritance.
Calculate the probability that the first child of II-2 and II-5 is affected. Show your setup.
Justify the claim that II-2 and II-5 are at higher risk of having an affected child than a couple chosen at random from the population, using evidence from the pedigree.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: autosomal recessive, supported by affected children born to two unaffected parents in both families (I-1 × I-2 → II-1; I-3 × I-4 → II-4), which means carriers exist and the allele is not expressed in them. Do not accept: naming "recessive" with no evidence; citing only one family; claiming the trait skipped a generation without saying what that implies.
(b) Accept: II-1 is an affected female whose father I-1 is unaffected; under X-linked recessive inheritance an affected female must be XaXa and therefore must have received an Xa from her father, who would then be affected himself. Do not accept: "affected individuals are both male and female" alone, which is suggestive but not decisive; any answer that does not use a specific individual.
(c) Accept: \(2/3 \times 2/3 \times 1/4 = 4/36 = 1/9 \approx 11\%\), with the \(2/3\) values explained as the probability that an unaffected child of two carriers is a heterozygote. Setup required. Do not accept: \(1/4\) (ignoring the parents' genotype uncertainty); \(1/2 \times 1/2 \times 1/4\) (using \(1/2\) for the carrier probabilities); a bare fraction with no setup.
(d) Accept: each of them has an affected full sibling, so both sets of grandparents are obligate carriers and each of II-2 and II-5 is a carrier with probability \(2/3\), far above the carrier frequency for a rare allele in the general population; the named evidence must be the affected siblings. Do not accept: "it runs in the family"; repeating the \(1/9\) figure with no comparison; a claim with no reasoning attached.
Show a 4/4 response
a It is autosomal recessive. In both families two unaffected parents have an affected child (I-1 and I-2 have II-1, and I-3 and I-4 have II-4), and a dominant allele has to show up in anyone who carries it, so neither set of parents could have been hiding a dominant allele.
b It is not X-linked recessive because II-1 is an affected female. She would have to be XaXa, and one of those X chromosomes came from her father I-1, who would then be XaY and affected himself. He is unaffected, so the gene is on an autosome.
c II-2 is unaffected and his parents are both carriers, so he is \(2/3\) likely to be Aa; the same reasoning gives II-5 a \(2/3\) chance. If both are carriers, \(1/4\) of their children are aa. So \(P = 2/3 \times 2/3 \times 1/4 = 4/36 = 1/9\), about 11%.
d Both of them have an affected full sibling, which proves all four of their parents carry the allele; that is what makes each of them a \(2/3\) carrier instead of the very low carrier frequency you would expect for a rare recessive allele in the general population. Two \(2/3\) carriers marrying is exactly why the risk climbs to \(1/9\).
Data: a test cross in Drosophila melanogaster. A female heterozygous for two autosomal genes, eye color (wild type dominant to scarlet) and bristle shape (straight dominant to forked), was crossed to a male homozygous recessive for both genes. 1,000 offspring were scored.
Offspring phenotype
Wild eyes, straight
Scarlet eyes, forked
Wild eyes, forked
Scarlet eyes, straight
Number
452
448
52
48
Using the investigation and the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the dependent variable in this investigation, and describe the purpose of crossing the heterozygous female to a male that is homozygous recessive for both genes.
Explain how the distribution of the four offspring classes shows that these two genes are not assorting independently.
Calculate the recombination frequency, and convert it to a map distance in map units. Show your setup.
Justify a claim about the two recombinant classes being nearly equal in number, using the mechanism of crossing over as your reasoning.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the dependent variable is the number (or frequency) of offspring in each of the four phenotype classes; the homozygous recessive father contributes only recessive alleles, so every offspring's phenotype reports directly which allele combination the egg carried. Do not accept: naming the variable with no description of the cross's purpose; "the father is the control" with no mechanism; calling eye color alone the dependent variable.
(b) Accept: independent assortment predicts four equal classes of about 250 each, but two classes hold 900 of the 1,000 offspring while the other two hold 100, so the parental allele combinations stay together far more often than chance allows, which happens when the loci are on the same chromosome. Do not accept: "the numbers are uneven" with no expected ratio named; asserting linkage with no comparison to 1:1:1:1.
(c) Accept: recombinants \(= 52 + 48 = 100\); \(\mathrm{RF} = 100/1000 \times 100\% = 10.0\%\), so the genes are 10 map units apart. Do not accept: using one recombinant class only; doubling the frequency; omitting the conversion statement that 1% recombination equals 1 map unit.
(d) Accept: a single crossover between the two loci is a reciprocal exchange between non-sister chromatids, so it produces one chromosome of each recombinant type at the same time, and the two classes should therefore appear in about equal numbers, 52 and 48 differ by an amount chance sampling easily explains. Do not accept: "they are close so it is random"; restating the numbers with no mechanism; attributing the equality to independent assortment.
Show a 4/4 response
a The dependent variable is the number of offspring falling into each of the four phenotype classes. The father is homozygous recessive for both genes, so he can only donate recessive alleles and never masks anything; that means each offspring's appearance tells me exactly which pair of alleles came in the egg.
b If these genes were on different chromosomes, independent assortment would give four classes of about 250 each. Instead the wild-straight and scarlet-forked classes together hold 900 flies and the other two hold only 100, so the alleles the mother inherited together are staying together. That happens when both loci sit on the same chromosome and only a crossover can separate them.
c The recombinants are the two rare classes: \(52 + 48 = 100\) out of 1,000. So \(\mathrm{RF} = 100/1000 \times 100\% = 10.0\%\), and since 1% recombination is defined as one map unit, the genes are about 10 map units apart.
d A crossover is a reciprocal swap between two non-sister chromatids, so the same event that makes a wild-forked chromosome also makes a scarlet-straight one. The two recombinant classes therefore come out of the same events in equal numbers, and the observed 52 versus 48 is the kind of small gap random sampling of 1,000 flies produces.
An animal has a diploid chromosome number of 2n = 10. Answer (a) through (d) about meiosis in this organism.
Describe one difference between anaphase I and anaphase II in terms of what structures separate and what happens to ploidy.
Explain how crossing over during prophase I increases the genetic variation among gametes beyond what independent assortment alone can produce.
Calculate the number of chromosomally distinct gametes this organism can produce from independent assortment alone, and the number of distinct zygote combinations possible when two such individuals mate. Show your setup.
A mutant of this species cannot assemble the synaptonemal complex, so homologs never synapse and each replicated chromosome attaches to the spindle independently. Predict the fraction of meiosis I products that receive a balanced haploid set, and justify your prediction.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: in anaphase I homologous chromosomes separate while sister chromatids stay attached, and ploidy falls from 2n to n; in anaphase II sister chromatids separate and ploidy stays at n. Do not accept: "chromosomes separate in both" with no distinction; describing only one of the two anaphases; saying meiosis II halves the chromosome number.
(b) Accept: independent assortment shuffles whole chromosomes, so each gamete gets one intact maternal or paternal chromosome per pair; crossing over exchanges segments between non-sister chromatids, producing chromosomes that carry maternal alleles at some loci and paternal alleles at others, which are combinations independent assortment cannot make. Do not accept: "it makes more variation" with no mechanism; confusing crossing over with independent assortment; describing crossing over without connecting it to allele combinations.
(c) Accept: \(n = 5\), so \(2^{5} = 32\) chromosomally distinct gametes, and \(32 \times 32 = 1{,}024\) zygote combinations. Do not accept: \(2^{10}\) (using the diploid number); \(32 + 32\); an answer with no setup shown.
(d) Accept: about \(1/32\) or 3.125%, justified by noting that without synapsis each of the 5 pairs segregates at random, giving each pair a \(1/2\) chance of sending its two homologs to opposite poles, and \((1/2)^{5} = 1/32\) for all five together. Do not accept: "most gametes will be abnormal" with no number; a number with no link between pairing and segregation; the claim that no gametes at all would be balanced.
Show a 4/4 response
a In anaphase I whole homologous chromosomes are pulled apart while their sister chromatids stay stuck together at the centromere, and that is the step where the cell goes from 2n to n. In anaphase II the sister chromatids finally separate, and ploidy does not change: the products are still haploid, just with unreplicated chromosomes.
b Independent assortment only decides which whole chromosome of each pair goes to a pole, so every chromosome in a gamete would be an intact copy from one grandparent. Crossing over swaps segments between non-sister chromatids, so a single chromosome ends up carrying my grandmother's alleles at some loci and my grandfather's at others. Those mixed chromosomes are new combinations that no amount of shuffling whole chromosomes could produce.
c With 2n = 10, \(n = 5\), so independent assortment gives \(2^{5} = 32\) chromosomally different gametes. Two individuals mating gives \(32 \times 32 = 1{,}024\) zygote combinations.
d I predict about \(1/32\), or 3.1%, are balanced. Without a synaptonemal complex the homologs never pair, so nothing makes the two members of a pair face opposite poles; each pair segregates correctly by chance with probability \(1/2\), and the five pairs are independent, so \((1/2)^{5} = 1/32\). Everything else is aneuploid, which shows that pairing is what guarantees an even split.
Data: Himalayan rabbits from one inbred, genetically uniform line were raised from weaning at five ambient temperatures, ten rabbits per group. At twelve weeks the percentage of body surface covered by black fur was measured.
Ambient temperature (°C)
5
15
25
30
35
Black fur (% of body surface)
96
72
41
12
0
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Describe the relationship between ambient temperature and the percentage of body surface covered by black fur.
Explain, in terms of the pigment-producing enzyme, why rabbits with identical genotypes differ in coat color across the five groups.
Construct a graph of these data: put ambient temperature in °C on the x-axis with a scale from 0 to 40, put percent black fur on the y-axis with a scale from 0 to 100, label both axes with units, plot the five points, and draw a best-fit line. Then calculate the mean rate of change in percent black fur per degree Celsius between 5 °C and 35 °C.
A student claims that the rabbits raised at 35 °C must carry a different allele of the pigment gene from those raised at 5 °C. Justify a rejection of that claim, using evidence from the investigation.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: as ambient temperature rises the percentage of black fur falls, from 96% at 5 °C to 0% at 35 °C, a negative relationship, with the sharpest drop between 25 °C and 30 °C. Accept a correct statement of the inverse relationship with at least one pair of values cited. Do not accept: "temperature affects fur color" with no direction; restating the table row by row with no trend statement.
(b) Accept: all the rabbits carry the same temperature-sensitive form of the pigment-producing enzyme, which folds and functions at cool surface temperatures but denatures above roughly 33 °C, so pigment is deposited only where the skin is cool; warm-reared rabbits keep almost no cool skin, so almost no fur is pigmented. Do not accept: "the cold makes it black" with no enzyme named; "the gene turns off in the heat" with no mechanism; any claim that the genotype changes.
(c) Accept: temperature on the x-axis (0–40 °C) and percent black fur on the y-axis (0–100%), both axes labeled with units, all five points plotted correctly, and a best-fit line drawn; plus \((0 - 96)/(35 - 5) = -96/30 = -3.2\) percentage points per °C. Accept 3.2 stated as a decrease. Do not accept: reversed axes; an unlabeled axis or missing units; a rate with no sign or no units; connecting the dots in place of a best-fit line is acceptable only if the line is described as such.
(d) Accept: the rabbits come from one inbred, genetically uniform line and were assigned to temperature groups, so genotype was held constant by design and cannot be the source of the difference; the only variable that differed was ambient temperature, so the phenotype difference is environmental. Do not accept: "phenotype equals genotype plus environment" with no reference to this investigation; rejecting the claim with no evidence named; arguing only that alleles cannot change.
Show a 4/4 response
a The warmer the rabbits were raised, the less black fur they had. Black coverage falls steadily from 96% of the body surface at 5 °C to 0% at 35 °C, and the steepest part of the drop is between 25 °C and 30 °C, where it falls from 41% to 12%.
b Every rabbit has the same allele for the pigment enzyme, and in this breed that enzyme only works at cool temperatures: above about 33 °C it denatures and stops making pigment. In a cold room most of the skin surface is cool enough for the enzyme to fold properly, so most of the fur grows in black; in a warm room almost no skin is cool enough, so the fur grows in white.
c I put ambient temperature (°C) on the x-axis from 0 to 40 and percent black fur on the y-axis from 0 to 100, labeled both with units, plotted (5, 96), (15, 72), (25, 41), (30, 12), and (35, 0), and drew a best-fit line through them. Mean rate of change: \((0 - 96)/(35 - 5) = -96/30 = -3.2\) percentage points of black fur per °C.
d I reject that claim. All fifty rabbits came from one inbred, genetically uniform line, so their pigment-gene alleles are the same before the experiment starts: genotype was controlled by the design. The only thing that differed between the 5 °C and 35 °C groups was the temperature they were raised at, so the difference in coat color has to be environmental, not allelic.
Lesson 6.1 · Unit 6 · CED topic 6.1
DNA as the genetic material, and the structure that explains it
By 1940 everyone agreed that chromosomes carried the genes. Most
biologists also assumed the genes themselves were protein: proteins come
in twenty monomer flavors and DNA in only four, so DNA looked too
monotonous to spell anything. Three experiments overturned that, and all
three run on the same logic: take a mixture that works, remove one
component at a time, and see which removal kills the effect. Learn that
logic by name: elimination is the control design, and Section II
asks you to name the independent variable, the dependent variable, and the
control in exactly these setups.
Definition
Transformation is a cell taking up free DNA from its
surroundings and expressing it. Griffith (1928) injected mice with
Streptococcus pneumoniae: live S (smooth, capsuled) killed them,
live R (rough) did not, heat-killed S did not, but heat-killed S
mixed with live R killed the mice, and live S bacteria were
recovered from the blood. Something from the dead cells permanently
converted R into S: the transforming principle. Avery,
MacLeod, and McCarty (1944) split that extract into tubes and added
protease, RNase, or DNase. Protease and RNase left transformation intact;
only DNase abolished it. The independent variable is which enzyme is
added, the dependent variable is whether R colonies become S, and the
untreated extract is the control.
Model
Chargaff's rules: in double-stranded DNA %A = %T and
%G = %C, while the A+T to G+C ratio varies by species. Franklin and
Gosling's 1952 X-ray image of B-form DNA showed a bold X of spots, the
signature of a helix, with a 3.4 nm repeat per turn, a 0.34 nm rise per
base, and a uniform 2 nm width. Watson and Crick (1953) put those facts
into one model: two antiparallel strands,
sugar–phosphate backbones outside joined by phosphodiester bonds, bases
stacked inside and hydrogen-bonded A to T (two bonds) and G to C (three).
Pairing a two-ring purine with a one-ring pyrimidine is what holds the
width constant. RNA breaks three of those rules: ribose, uracil for
thymine, and a single strand that folds back on itself.
Worked example · Hershey and Chase, 1952
Question: when a T2 bacteriophage infects E. coli, does
it inject protein or DNA? Design: grow one batch of phage with
35S, which labels protein only (sulfur sits in cysteine and
methionine; DNA has none), and another with 32P, which labels
DNA only. Infect cells, blend to shear the spent coats off, then
centrifuge: heavy bacteria form the pellet, light phage
ghosts stay in the supernatant. A representative trial:
Labeled phage
Label in pellet (cells)
Label in supernatant (ghosts)
35S, protein
20%
80%
32P, DNA
70%
30%
Independent variable: which molecule carries the isotope. Dependent
variable: percent of radioactivity in each fraction. Control: blending
and spinning uninfected labeled phage, to show the coats really shear
off. Conclusion, justified: DNA is the injected material,
because 32P sediments with the cells that go on to make
progeny phage while four-fifths of the 35S is discarded.
Worked example · Filling a Chargaff table
Base composition in mol %. Complete rows 1 and 2, then identify the odd sample.
Sample
A
T
G
C
1: calf thymus
28.2
?
?
?
2: E. coli
24.7
?
?
25.3
3: phage φX174
24.6
32.7
24.1
18.5
Row 1: T = A = 28.2, so A+T = 56.4, leaving G+C = 43.6 split evenly at
G = C = 21.8; check \(28.2+28.2+21.8+21.8 = 100.0\). Row 2: T = 24.7 and
G = 25.3, total 100.0, so %GC = 50.6 against 43.6 for calf thymus. Row 3
obeys neither equality (24.6 ≠ 32.7, 24.1 ≠ 18.5) and its
purine-to-pyrimidine ratio is \(48.7/51.2 = 0.951\), not 1. φX174 is
single-stranded, with no partner strand nothing forces the equalities.
Practice
In the Avery–MacLeod–McCarty experiment, explain why running protease and RNase alongside DNase was essential, rather than testing DNase alone.
Show answer
DNase alone shows only that destroying DNA destroys transformation; a critic can answer that the enzyme preparation was dirty, or that any harsh treatment ruins the extract. Protease and RNase are the comparison treatments (equally destructive to their own targets, yet transformation survives them intact), so the loss seen with DNase is attributable to removing DNA specifically and not to handling. Explain requires that "why": naming the enzymes without saying what the comparison rules out is a description, and it does not earn the explanation point.
A sample of double-stranded DNA is 22.0% cytosine. Calculate the percentages of the other three bases and the %GC, then state whether this DNA or calf thymus DNA (43.6% GC) melts at the higher temperature.
Show answer
%G = %C = 22.0, so G+C = 44.0 and A+T = 100 − 44.0 = 56.0, giving %A = %T = 28.0; check 22.0 + 22.0 + 28.0 + 28.0 = 100.0. At 44.0% GC this sample sits barely above calf thymus at 43.6%, so it melts at a very slightly higher temperature: each G–C pair costs three hydrogen bonds to break rather than two. A good answer adds that a 0.4 percentage-point gap is trivially small.
A student repeats Hershey and Chase with 35S-labeled phage but forgets the blender step before centrifuging. Predict where the radioactivity will be found, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: most of the 35S ends up in the pellet with the cells, not the supernatant. Justification: the labeled coats attach to the outside of the bacteria and stay attached unless shearing knocks them off, so without blending they sediment with the heavy cells they are stuck to. That result would falsely suggest protein entered the cell, which is why the blending step, not the isotope, is the part of the design that makes the conclusion possible.
Lesson 6.2 · Unit 6 · CED topic 6.2
DNA replication: the fork, the enzymes, and Meselson–Stahl
Watson and Crick noted that complementary pairing hands you a copying
mechanism for free: unzip the helix and each old strand specifies its new
partner. But three models fit that sentence. Conservative
replication returns the two original strands to one duplex and builds a
wholly new one. Semiconservative gives every daughter
duplex one old strand and one new. Dispersive chops and
splices, so every strand is a patchwork of old and new. Deciding between
them took a density label and a centrifuge.
Definition
Replication is semiconservative: each daughter molecule
keeps one parental strand as a template and one newly synthesized strand.
It starts at an origin of replication (one in a
circular bacterial chromosome, thousands along each linear eukaryotic
chromosome) where the strands separate into a
replication bubble with a
replication fork at each end, so synthesis runs
bidirectionally away from the origin.
Method
At each fork, in order: helicase breaks the hydrogen
bonds and unwinds; single-strand binding proteins hold
the separated strands apart; topoisomerase nicks and
reseals ahead of the fork to relieve the supercoiling that unwinding
creates; primase lays down a short RNA primer.
DNA polymerase III then extends only in the
5'→3' direction, because it can only add a nucleotide to
a free 3'-OH. That one constraint forces everything else: the
leading strand is built continuously toward the fork,
while the lagging strand is built away from it in short
Okazaki fragments, each needing its own primer.
DNA polymerase I replaces every RNA primer with DNA and
ligase seals the remaining nicks. Fidelity comes from
polymerase III's 3'→5' proofreading exonuclease plus mismatch repair,
together leaving about one error per 109 base pairs. Because
the last lagging-strand primer has nothing upstream to replace it, linear
chromosomes shorten each round; repetitive telomeres
absorb the loss, and telomerase rebuilds them in germ
cells, stem cells, and most cancers.
Worked example · Meselson and Stahl, 1958
Question: which of the three models is right? Design: grow
E. coli for many generations in 15N so all DNA is
heavy, then transfer to 14N medium and sample each generation.
Spin each sample in a cesium chloride density gradient, where a molecule
settles at the depth matching its own density. Independent variable:
generations after the switch. Dependent variable: the depth of each band.
Control: the generation-0 heavy sample and a pure 14N sample,
which mark the two extreme positions.
Generation in 14N
0
1
2
3
Molecules per starting duplex
1
2
4
8
Hybrid molecules
0
2
2
2
Percent hybrid
0
100
50
25
Only the two original heavy strands survive, and they can never be in
more than two molecules, so the hybrid fraction is
\(2/2^{n} = 1/2^{\,n-1}\): 100%, 50%, 25%, then 12.5% at generation 4,
with the rest light. Conclusion, justified: replication is
semiconservative, because conservative replication predicts heavy and
light bands with no intermediate at generation 1, and dispersive
replication predicts a single band drifting lighter each generation and
never splitting in two.
Worked example · How long a fork takes
The E. coli chromosome is \(4.6 \times 10^{6}\) base pairs with
one origin; DNA polymerase III runs at about 1,000 nucleotides per
second. Find the replication time and the number of Okazaki fragments if
each is 1,200 nucleotides.
Two forks leave the origin in opposite directions, so each copies half:
\[ \frac{4.6 \times 10^{6}}{2} = 2.3 \times 10^{6}\ \text{bp per fork} \]
\[ t = \frac{2.3 \times 10^{6}}{1000} = 2300\ \mathrm{s} = 38.3\ \text{min} \]
which matches the roughly 40-minute observed value. Each fork's lagging
strand needs \(2.3 \times 10^{6}/1200 \approx 1{,}917\) fragments, and
therefore 1,917 primers: one reason primase and ligase mutants are
lethal while the leading strand needs a single primer per fork.
Practice
A bacterial strain carries a temperature-sensitive DNA ligase. At the restrictive temperature, describe what accumulates and explain why the leading strand is much less affected.
Show answer
Short lagging-strand pieces accumulate: Okazaki fragments with their primers already replaced by DNA but their 3'–5' nicks unsealed, so the lagging strand stays as discontinuous segments. The leading strand is barely affected because it is synthesized continuously from a single primer, so it contains one nick per fork instead of thousands. Explain means giving the cause: the 5'→3'-only rule of DNA polymerase forces fragment-by-fragment synthesis on the strand whose template runs the wrong way, and every fragment junction is a substrate for ligase.
A Meselson–Stahl gradient is read as three positions: heavy at the bottom, hybrid in the middle, light on top. At generation 3 a tube shows bands only at the hybrid and light positions. Calculate the percent of DNA at each position, and state what the tube would look like at generation 4.
Show answer
At generation 3 there are \(2^{3} = 8\) molecules per original duplex, and exactly 2 of them still carry one 15N strand, so hybrid = \(2/8 = 25\%\) and light = \(6/8 = 75\%\); no heavy band remains after generation 1. At generation 4, \(2^{4} = 16\) molecules with the same 2 hybrids gives \(2/16 = 12.5\%\) hybrid and 87.5% light: the hybrid band halves every generation but never disappears, because those two parental strands are never destroyed.
A drug that inhibits telomerase is added to a tumor cell line and to a culture of skin fibroblasts, both dividing. Predict which culture stops dividing sooner, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the tumor cell line stops sooner. Justification: most cancer cells switch telomerase back on and depend on it to replace the telomeric DNA lost at every lagging-strand end, so blocking the enzyme lets their already-short telomeres erode to the point that division arrests. Ordinary fibroblasts have little or no telomerase activity to begin with, so the drug removes nothing they were using; they simply continue toward their normal division limit. The justification point is earned by naming the end-replication problem, not by saying the drug "targets cancer."
Lesson 6.3 · Unit 6 · CED topic 6.3
Transcription and RNA processing
A eukaryotic cell will not risk its chromosomes in the cytoplasm, and the
ribosomes are not coming into the nucleus. So the cell makes a disposable
working copy of one gene at a time. That copy is RNA, and everything odd
about it (why it is single-stranded, why it is short-lived, why it gets a
cap and a tail before it leaves) follows from its being a message rather
than an archive.
Definition
Transcription builds RNA from a DNA template.
RNA polymerase binds the promoter, a
sequence just upstream of the gene that includes the
TATA box in eukaryotes and is recognized with the help
of general transcription factors. Only one strand is
copied: the template (antisense) strand, read
3'→5'. The RNA itself grows 5'→3', so it comes out
matching the other strand, the coding (sense) strand, with U wherever that strand has T. RNA polymerase needs no primer, and it
proofreads far less than DNA polymerase does: affordable, because a
transcript is temporary. Termination is a specific sequence in bacteria;
in eukaryotes
the transcript is cut loose downstream of a polyadenylation signal.
Model
Three products matter: mRNA carries the message,
tRNA delivers amino acids, and rRNA
plus protein makes the ribosome. A eukaryotic pre-mRNA
is then processed three ways: a modified guanine 5' cap
and a poly-A tail of roughly 50–250 adenines are added,
both protecting the ends from degradation and helping export and ribosome
binding; and the spliceosome, built from snRNPs, excises
the introns and joins the exons.
Splicing the same pre-mRNA different ways, alternative splicing, lets one gene specify several
proteins. Prokaryotes do none of this: no nucleus, so a ribosome starts
translating an mRNA while RNA polymerase is still transcribing it, and
one transcript often carries several genes.
Worked example · Reading off a template strand
A gene's template strand reads 3'-TACCGGTTAGCCATT-5'. Give the mRNA and
the coding strand, both with ends labeled.
Pair each template base with its RNA complement (A→U, T→A, C→G, G→C) and
write the product 5'→3', which is the same left-to-right order here
because the strands are antiparallel:
mRNA 5'-AUGGCCAAUCGGUAA-3'. The coding strand is that
sequence with T for U: 5'-ATGGCCAATCGGTAA-3'. Read in
triplets the mRNA is AUG GCC AAU CGG UAA: a start codon, three sense
codons, and a stop, so 15 nucleotides encode a 4-residue peptide. The
commonest lost point is copying the template as if it were the
coding strand; check yourself by confirming the mRNA matches the coding
strand, never the template.
Worked example · Roberts and Sharp find split genes
Question (1977): is a eukaryotic gene colinear with its mRNA?
Design: hybridize mature adenovirus mRNA to the single-stranded viral DNA
of its own gene and look at the hybrids by electron microscopy. Where
mRNA pairs with DNA you see a thick double-stranded thread; DNA with no
mRNA partner is forced out as a thin single-stranded loop.
Independent variable: whether the DNA is hybridized to its mature mRNA or
left alone. Dependent variable: the number and length of unpaired DNA
loops. Control: the same procedure on a bacterial gene known to be
continuous, which yields one unbroken hybrid and no loops.
Result: the viral hybrids showed several separate paired
segments with large loops between them. Conclusion, justified:
the gene is split, because every loop is DNA present in the gene but
absent from the finished message: an intron. If that gene has five exons
and the first and last are always kept while each of the three internal
exons is independently included or skipped, alternative splicing yields
\(2^{3} = 8\) distinct mature mRNAs.
Practice
An mRNA reads 5'-AUGCCGAUUGGCUAA-3'. Write the template strand with both ends labeled, and identify the coding strand.
Show answer
The template is antiparallel and complementary to the mRNA: 3'-TACGGCTAACCGATT-5', which written conventionally 5'→3' is 5'-TTAGCCAATCGGCAT-3'. The coding strand is the mRNA's own sequence in DNA form, 5'-ATGCCGATTGGCTAA-3'. Notice that the coding strand is not transcribed: it is named for matching the message. Leaving the 5' and 3' labels off makes the answer ambiguous and costs the point.
Three human genes were compared. Calculate the percent of each pre-mRNA removed as introns, and identify which gene can generate the most alternative splice variants if only its internal exons are skippable.
Gene
A
B
C
Pre-mRNA length (nt)
9,400
2,400
1,100
Mature mRNA length (nt)
1,850
1,200
1,050
Number of exons
8
3
2
Show answer
Gene A: \((9400-1850)/9400 = 7550/9400 = 80.3\%\) removed. Gene B: \(1200/2400 = 50.0\%\). Gene C: \(50/1100 = 4.5\%\). Gene A also has the most internal exons, 8 total minus the first and last leaves 6 skippable, so it can make \(2^{6} = 64\) variants, against \(2^{1} = 2\) for gene B and only 1 for gene C. Intron content and exon number, not transcript length by itself, set the ceiling on splice variants.
A point mutation destroys the sequence at the 5' end of intron 2 that the spliceosome recognizes. Predict the effect on the mature mRNA and on the protein, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: intron 2 is retained in the mature mRNA, so the transcript is longer than normal and the protein is altered or truncated. Justification: the spliceosome locates an intron by its conserved boundary sequences, so a destroyed 5' splice site prevents the cut at that boundary and the intron stays in-frame with the flanking exons. Retained intron sequence is translated as extra amino acids until an in-frame stop codon appears inside it, which usually happens quickly, and because intron length is rarely a multiple of three, the downstream exons are commonly read out of frame as well. A prediction that stops at "splicing fails" has not named the consequence for the protein.
Lesson 6.4 · Unit 6 · CED topic 6.4
Translation and the genetic code
The message has four letters and the product has twenty. Two RNA letters
per amino acid would give only \(4^{2} = 16\) combinations, not enough.
Three give \(4^{3} = 64\), comfortably more than enough, and that surplus
is why the code is redundant rather than tight. Translation is the
machinery that reads those triplets and welds amino acids together in the
order they specify.
Definition
A codon is three consecutive mRNA nucleotides, read
5'→3'. Of the 64 codons, 61 specify amino acids and three (UAA, UAG, UGA) are stop codons.
AUG does double duty: it codes for methionine and it is
the start codon, which is what fixes the
reading frame for everything downstream. The code is
redundant (most amino acids have several codons,
usually differing only in the third base) but not ambiguous (one codon
never means two amino acids), and it is nearly
universal: the same table runs in bacteria, yeast, and
humans, which is exactly why a bacterium can be made to build human
insulin. Nirenberg and Matthaei cracked the first entry in 1961 by adding
synthetic poly-U to a cell-free extract and recovering a polypeptide of
pure phenylalanine, so UUU = Phe.
Model
A tRNA is charged with its amino acid by an
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase using ATP, and carries an
anticodon antiparallel and complementary to the codon.
The ribosome's small subunit holds the mRNA; the large subunit catalyzes
peptide bonds and provides three sites: A where the
next charged tRNA arrives, P holding the growing chain,
E from which the spent tRNA exits.
Initiation: small subunit plus initiator Met-tRNA finds
the AUG, then the large subunit joins. Elongation
repeats codon recognition in A, peptide bond formation, and
translocation shifting every tRNA one site over.
Termination: a release factor occupies the A site at a
stop codon and the polypeptide is freed. Many ribosomes work one mRNA at
once as a polyribosome, and the finished chain folds by
the rules of Unit 1: sequence sets shape, shape sets function.
Worked example · Translating a message and sizing its gene
Translate 5'-AUGGCUCAUUGGAAGUGA-3', give the anticodon that reads its
second codon, and calculate the coding-sequence length for the
146-amino-acid β chain of hemoglobin.
Break at the AUG and take triplets: AUG GCU CAU UGG AAG UGA →
Met–Ala–His–Trp–Lys–stop, a 5-residue peptide from 18
nucleotides. The second codon is 5'-GCU-3', so its anticodon is
3'-CGA-5' (written conventionally, 5'-AGC-3') on a tRNA charged with
alanine. For the β chain, 146 amino acids need 146 codons plus one stop
codon:
\[ (146 + 1)\times 3 = 441\ \text{nucleotides of coding mRNA} \]
and therefore 441 base pairs of coding DNA. The real HBB gene is
about 1,600 bp because of introns, untranslated regions, and the
promoter: a favorite exam follow-up.
Worked example · Beadle and Tatum order a pathway
Question: what does one gene actually do? Design: X-ray
Neurospora crassa spores, keep the mutants that cannot grow on
minimal medium, and test each on minimal medium supplemented with one
intermediate of the arginine pathway. Independent variable: which
supplement is present. Dependent variable: growth or no growth. Control:
wild type on all four media, plus each mutant on complete medium to prove
it is alive.
Strain
Minimal
+ ornithine
+ citrulline
+ arginine
Wild type
grows
grows
grows
grows
arg-A
none
none
none
grows
arg-B
none
grows
grows
grows
arg-C
none
none
grows
grows
A mutant grows on any intermediate downstream of its block, so
the more supplements rescue a strain, the earlier its block. That orders
the pathway precursor → ornithine → citrulline → arginine, with
arg-B blocking the first step, arg-C the second, and
arg-A the third. Conclusion, justified: each mutation
knocks out one enzyme catalyzing one step (one gene, one enzyme), because each strain fails at a single point and is rescued by anything
past it.
Practice
A tRNA carries the anticodon 3'-AAG-5'. Identify the codon it reads and the amino acid it delivers, then calculate how many charged tRNAs are consumed to build a 79-amino-acid polypeptide and how many mRNA nucleotides encode it.
Show answer
The anticodon pairs antiparallel with the codon, so 3'-AAG-5' reads 5'-UUC-3', which is phenylalanine. Building a 79-residue chain uses one charged tRNA per residue, so 79 tRNAs are consumed: the initiator Met-tRNA is one of them. The coding sequence needs 79 codons plus a stop codon: \((79+1)\times 3 = 240\) nucleotides. Watch the direction: reading the anticodon 5'→3' and pairing it directly with the codon is the standard way students get the wrong amino acid.
An electron micrograph is described as a single long mRNA strand with twelve ribosomes spaced along it. The polypeptide chains trailing from the ribosomes get steadily longer from one end of the mRNA toward the other. Identify the direction of translation and explain what the structure shows about protein output.
Show answer
Translation runs toward the end where the chains are longest, because a chain grows as its ribosome advances, so the short-chain end is the 5' end of the mRNA, where each ribosome started. The structure is a polyribosome: twelve ribosomes are translating the same transcript simultaneously, so the cell gets up to twelve copies of the polypeptide from one mRNA in the time one ribosome would take to make a single copy. Identify wants the direction named; the explanation point comes from tying chain length to how far the ribosome has traveled.
A mutation in a tRNA gene changes a tyrosine tRNA's anticodon so that it now base-pairs with UAG, while the tRNA is still charged with tyrosine. Predict what happens in a cell whose lysozyme mRNA carries a premature UAG partway through the message, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: a full-length lysozyme is made, with tyrosine at the position where the premature stop sits, and at least partial enzyme activity is restored. Justification: termination requires a release factor to enter a vacant A site at a stop codon, so a charged tRNA that can base-pair with UAG occupies that site first and elongation simply continues. The evidence that this is the mechanism is the tRNA's own change: nothing in the lysozyme gene was repaired. Note the cost worth mentioning: the same tRNA also reads through legitimate UAG stops in other mRNAs, producing abnormally extended proteins.
Lesson 6.5 · Unit 6 · CED topics 6.5–6.6
Regulation of gene expression and cell specialization
A bacterium in a glucose broth has the genes for digesting lactose and no
reason to build the enzymes. Your neurons and your pancreatic β cells carry
the identical genome and could not be more different. Both facts are the
same fact: having a gene and expressing it are separate things, and almost
all of the control happens at transcription, before a single amino acid is
spent.
Definition
An operon is a cluster of bacterial genes sharing one
promoter and one operator, transcribed as a single mRNA.
The lac operon is inducible: a separate
regulatory gene makes a repressor that sits on the
operator and blocks RNA polymerase, until
allolactose, an isomer of lactose, binds the repressor,
changes its shape, and knocks it off, so β-galactosidase and lactose
permease get made only when lactose is present. Layered on top is
catabolite repression: glucose lowers cAMP, the CAP
activator goes inactive, and transcription stays weak even with the
repressor gone. The trp operon is the mirror image,
repressible: its repressor cannot bind the operator
alone, and tryptophan acts as a corepressor that
activates it, so the cell shuts off tryptophan synthesis exactly when
tryptophan is abundant.
Model
Eukaryotes have no operons. Each gene has its own promoter, and distant
enhancers bound by activator
transcription factors loop around to contact the
machinery at the promoter; a cell's identity is essentially the set of
transcription factors it is running. On top of that sit
epigenetic marks, which change expression without
changing a base: methylation of promoter cytosines generally silences a
gene, while acetylation of histone tails loosens the
chromatin and opens it. Those marks are copied through mitosis, which is
how a differentiated cell stays differentiated. Cells are ranked by
potency:
totipotent (the zygote, any cell type plus placenta),
pluripotent (embryonic stem cells, any body cell type),
and multipotent (adult stem cells, a limited family such
as the blood lineages).
Worked example · Jacob and Monod's lac mutants
β-galactosidase activity in arbitrary units for four E. coli
strains grown on glycerol (no lactose, no glucose), on lactose, and on
lactose plus glucose. Deduce what is broken in each mutant.
Strain
Glycerol
+ lactose
+ lactose and glucose
Wild type
3
1,650
60
A
1,520
1,600
58
B
2
4
3
C
3
70
65
Wild type is induced \(1650/3 = 550\)-fold by lactose, and glucose cuts
that to \(60/1650 = 3.6\%\) of the lactose-only level, a 96.4% drop:
catabolite repression, not the repressor. Strain A already sits at 1,520
units with no lactose (\(1600/1520 = 1.05\)-fold induction), so it is
constitutive: either the repressor protein or the
operator it binds is broken. Glucose still suppresses A normally, so its
CAP system is intact. Strain B never rises above background: stuck off,
either a repressor that cannot release the operator or a dead
lacZ. Strain C responds to lactose but tops out at 70 units
(23-fold) and glucose barely changes it (\(65/70 = 93\%\)), so its
repressor works while its CAP activation does not.
Worked example · One genome, two cells
Transcript abundance in relative units from two human cell types, with
the methylation state of the insulin promoter.
Measurement
Pancreatic β cell
Liver hepatocyte
Insulin mRNA
12,000
2
Albumin mRNA
3
9,500
GAPDH mRNA (housekeeping)
1,000
1,050
Insulin promoter methylation
4%
91%
Describe: insulin mRNA is \(12000/2 = 6{,}000\) times higher in
the β cell, albumin is about \(9500/3 \approx 3{,}200\) times higher in
the hepatocyte, and GAPDH differs by a factor of
\(1050/1000 = 1.05\). Explain: both cells descend from one
zygote and carry both genes, so the difference cannot be gene content:
it is which promoters are accessible. The insulin promoter is 91%
methylated in the liver and 4% methylated in the β cell, and methylated
promoter DNA recruits proteins that compact the chromatin and exclude
transcription factors. GAPDH is the control that proves the assay works
in both cells.
Practice
For each of the four combinations (no sugars, glucose only, lactose only, lactose and glucose) describe whether the lac repressor is on the operator and whether β-galactosidase is made at a high level.
Show answer
No sugars: repressor bound, operon off. Glucose only: repressor bound, operon off. Lactose only: allolactose pulls the repressor off and low glucose means high cAMP, so CAP is active and transcription is maximal: this is the only combination giving high β-galactosidase. Lactose and glucose: the repressor is off the operator, but cAMP is low, CAP is inactive, and transcription is weak. The point of the design is economy: the cell builds the enzymes only when the substrate is there and the better fuel is not.
A silenced human gene is measured in cultured cells after two drug treatments. Describe the pattern and explain what it implies about how the gene is kept off.
Treatment
None
Histone deacetylase inhibitor
DNA methyltransferase inhibitor
Both
Relative mRNA level
1.0
8.4
6.1
22.0
Show answer
Describe: either drug alone raises expression several-fold; 8.4-fold and 6.1-fold, and together they raise it 22.0-fold, more than the 13.5-fold you would get by adding the two separate increases. Explain: two cooperating epigenetic mechanisms hold the gene off. Blocking deacetylases leaves histone tails acetylated and the chromatin loose; blocking methyltransferases strips methyl marks from the promoter cytosines that recruit silencing proteins. Removing both opens the promoter more completely than removing either, evidence that the marks reinforce each other rather than acting independently. Neither drug alters a base sequence, so this is regulation, not mutation.
A mutant E. coli makes a trp repressor protein that folds normally but can no longer bind tryptophan. Predict the level of tryptophan-synthesis enzymes in this strain when tryptophan is plentiful, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the enzymes stay high, the operon is transcribed constitutively even in tryptophan-rich medium. Justification: the trp repressor is inactive on its own and only binds the operator after tryptophan, the corepressor, attaches and changes its shape; a repressor that cannot bind tryptophan can never reach that active conformation, so the operator stays free and RNA polymerase transcribes. The consequence worth naming is the cost: the strain wastes ATP and carbon skeletons making an amino acid already available, so it will be outgrown by wild type in tryptophan-rich medium. A claim with no mechanism earns the prediction point only.
Lesson 6.6 · Unit 6 · CED topic 6.7
Mutations and the sources of genetic variation
Meiosis, fertilization, and horizontal gene transfer all shuffle alleles.
Only mutation makes new ones. Most are neutral, a minority
are harmful, and a few are useful, but "useful" is never a property of the
mutation by itself, only of the mutation in a particular environment. Keep
that straight and you will avoid the single most-penalized error on this
exam: writing that an organism mutated because it needed to.
Definition
A point mutation substitutes one base pair, and
redundancy in the code gives three outcomes. Silent: the
new codon specifies the same amino acid, common at the third position.
Missense: a different amino acid, with effects from
undetectable to lethal depending on where it sits and how different the R
group is. Nonsense: a sense codon becomes a stop,
truncating the protein. Insertions and deletions of a
number of bases not divisible by three cause a
frameshift, so every codon downstream is misread and a
premature stop usually follows. Location decides the stakes:
germ-line mutations pass to offspring and feed
evolution, somatic ones affect only that individual's
tissue, and a mutation in a promoter, enhancer, or splice site changes
how much normal protein is made without altering the protein at all.
Model
Whole-chromosome changes come from errors in crossing over and
segregation: duplication (raw material for new genes,
since one copy is free to diverge), deletion,
inversion, translocation between
nonhomologous chromosomes, and polyploidy, whole extra
sets that can found a new plant species in one generation. Causes are
uncorrected replication errors plus mutagens:
ultraviolet light making thymine dimers, X-rays, base-modifying
chemicals. Prokaryotes add variation sideways by
horizontal gene transfer:
transformation (uptake of free DNA),
transduction (a phage carries bacterial DNA between
hosts), conjugation (a pilus passes a plasmid), and
transposons that relocate within and between DNA
molecules. That is why an antibiotic-resistance plasmid can cross between
species in a hospital in months: far faster than any lineage could
evolve resistance on its own.
Worked example · Four mutations in one gene
The first ten triplets of the coding strand of the human β-globin gene
read 5'-ATG GTG CAC CTG ACT CCT GAG GAG AAG TCT-3', which transcribes to
5'-AUG GUG CAC CUG ACU CCU GAG GAG AAG UCU-3' and translates to
Met–Val–His–Leu–Thr–Pro–Glu–Glu–Lys–Ser. Classify each change and predict
its effect on the protein.
(i) A→T in the seventh triplet turns GAG into GTG, so
the codon GAG (Glu) becomes GUG (Val): missense. Because the
initiator methionine is cleaved off, that seventh triplet is the sixth
residue of the mature chain: this is the sickle-cell mutation, swapping
a charged glutamate for a hydrophobic valine on the surface, which lets
deoxygenated molecules polymerize.
(ii) G→A in the ninth triplet makes AAG into AAA; both
read as lysine, so it is silent.
(iii) G→T in the eighth triplet makes GAG into TAG, so
the mRNA codon becomes UAG: nonsense, and translation stops
after seven residues. (iv) deleting the C that begins the fourth
triplet shifts the frame: the message now reads AUG GUG CAC UGA,
so a stop appears immediately and only three amino acids are made, a
frameshift, and the most damaging of the four.
Worked example · Lederberg replica plating, 1952
Question: does exposure to a lethal agent cause resistance
mutations, or does it merely select ones already there? Design: grow
colonies on a non-selective master plate, press sterile velvet onto it,
and stamp that pattern onto several plates containing the selective agent
so every replica inherits the same colony coordinates.
Independent variable: whether the cells have ever met the agent.
Dependent variable: the positions of surviving colonies on each replica.
Control: the master plate, never exposed. Result: resistant
colonies appeared at the same coordinates on every independent
replica, and the matching colony picked from the never-exposed master
plate grew into an already-resistant culture.
Conclusion, justified: the mutations pre-existed selection,
because cells that never met the agent were resistant and because
independent plates could not match by chance. Selection edits variation;
it does not create it, and no individual bacterium became resistant
during the experiment.
Practice
Using a codon chart, classify each substitution as silent, missense, or nonsense, and explain why silent changes cluster at one codon position: (i) UCA → UCG, (ii) CAU → CGU, (iii) UGG → UGA, (iv) GGA → GGG.
Show answer
(i) UCA and UCG are both serine: silent. (ii) CAU is histidine and CGU is arginine: missense, and a large change, swapping a weakly basic ring for a strongly basic side chain. (iii) UGG is tryptophan and UGA is a stop codon: nonsense, truncating the protein. (iv) GGA and GGG are both glycine: silent. Silent changes cluster in the third position because the code is redundant there: for serine and glycine every one of the four third-base options gives the same amino acid, so the first two bases carry most of the information.
A hospital surveys three unrelated bacterial species for a plasmid-borne resistance gene whose sequence turns out to be identical in all three. Describe the pattern and explain which mechanism accounts for it.
Year
Species A (% of isolates)
Species B
Species C
2021
18
0
0
2022
41
6
0
2023
63
29
11
Show answer
Describe: species A rises from 18% to 63% of isolates, a 45 percentage-point increase; B appears in 2022 and reaches 29%; C appears only in 2023 at 11%. Explain: horizontal gene transfer, most likely conjugative transfer of the plasmid, because the sequence is identical in three unrelated species. Independent mutation would almost certainly give different sequences, and vertical inheritance cannot move a gene between species at all. Watch the causal direction: antibiotic use selects cells that already carry the plasmid, it does not induce the gene.
A gene encodes a 146-amino-acid protein. One allele carries a single-base deletion in codon 3; another carries a single-base deletion in codon 140. Predict which protein is more severely affected, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the codon-3 deletion is far more severe. Justification: a single-base deletion shifts the reading frame for everything downstream, so the codon-3 allele misreads roughly 144 of the 146 codons and, with 3 of the 64 triplets being stops, almost certainly hits a premature stop within the first few dozen residues, leaving a short non-functional fragment. The codon-140 deletion leaves the first 139 residues correct and garbles only the last handful, so a partly functional protein is likely. The justification point comes from naming the reading frame and how much sequence lies downstream, not from saying one mutation is "earlier."
Lesson 6.7 · Unit 6 · CED topic 6.8
Biotechnology: cutting, sorting, copying, and editing DNA
Every tool in this lesson was stolen from a cell. Restriction enzymes are a
bacterium's defense against phage DNA. Plasmids are how bacteria trade
genes. Taq polymerase came from a hot-spring bacterium that needed a
polymerase surviving 95 °C. CRISPR is a bacterial immune memory. Once you
see what each one did for its owner, the lab techniques stop being a list
to memorize.
Method
Restriction enzymes cut double-stranded DNA wherever a
specific palindromic recognition site occurs: EcoRI at
GAATTC, HindIII at AAGCTT, SmaI at CCCGGG. A staggered cut leaves short
single-stranded sticky ends that anneal to any fragment
cut by the same enzyme, no matter what organism it came from, that is what makes recombinant DNA possible, and ligase seals the
backbone. Gel electrophoresis then sorts the fragments:
samples go in wells at the negative end, and because the
sugar–phosphate backbone carries a negative charge at every pH used,
every fragment migrates toward the positive electrode. The agarose mesh
slows large fragments most, so small fragments travel
farthest. Migration distance is approximately linear in
\(\log_{10}\) of fragment size, which is why a ladder of
known sizes run alongside can calibrate the gel.
Method
A plasmid is a small circular DNA molecule. Splice a
gene into one, mix it with competent bacteria, heat-shock them so some
take it up, transformation, and plate on medium
containing the antibiotic whose resistance gene the plasmid also carries.
Only transformed cells grow, which is what makes that gene a
selectable marker. PCR copies a chosen
region using three temperatures per cycle:
denaturation near 95 °C separates the strands,
annealing near 55 °C lets two primers bind and define
the target's boundaries, and extension at 72 °C lets
heat-stable Taq polymerase build the new strands. Every cycle doubles the
target, so \(n\) cycles give \(2^{n}\) copies per starting molecule.
Sequencing reads the base order outright.
CRISPR-Cas9 edits it: a guide RNA base-pairs with a
chosen 20-base target and Cas9 cuts both strands there, so the cell's
repair either disables the gene or, given a template, writes in a new
sequence.
Worked example · Sizing fragments against a ladder
The ladder lane has bands 12, 18, 26, 32, and 38 mm from the well,
corresponding to 10,000, 5,000, 2,000, 1,000, and 500 bp. The sample lane, a circular plasmid digested with EcoRI, has two bands, at 22 mm and 29
mm. Estimate both fragment sizes and the size of the plasmid.
Interpolate on \(\log_{10}\) size between the ladder bands that bracket
each unknown. The 22 mm band lies halfway between 18 mm (5,000 bp,
\(\log_{10} = 3.699\)) and 26 mm (2,000 bp, \(\log_{10} = 3.301\)):
\[ \log_{10}S = 3.699 + 0.50(3.301 - 3.699) = 3.500 \Rightarrow S = 10^{3.500} \approx 3{,}200\ \text{bp} \]
The 29 mm band is halfway between 26 mm (2,000 bp) and 32 mm (1,000 bp):
\[ \log_{10}S = 3.301 + 0.50(3.000 - 3.301) = 3.151 \Rightarrow S \approx 1{,}400\ \text{bp} \]
Two fragments from a circle means two EcoRI sites, and the plasmid is
\(3{,}200 + 1{,}400 = 4{,}600\) bp. Interpolating on the raw sizes rather
than their logarithms is the standard way to lose this point: it would
have given about 3,500 bp for the first band.
Worked example · Transformation efficiency
A student adds 0.10 µg of an ampicillin-resistance plasmid to competent
E. coli, heat-shocks them, and brings the recovered mixture to
500 µL. She spreads 100 µL on an LB/ampicillin plate and counts 84
colonies after 18 hours at 37 °C. Calculate the transformation efficiency
in colonies per microgram.
Only the plated share of the DNA could produce the colonies she counted:
\[ \text{fraction plated} = \frac{100\ \mu\mathrm{L}}{500\ \mu\mathrm{L}} = 0.20
\qquad 0.10\ \mu\mathrm{g} \times 0.20 = 0.020\ \mu\mathrm{g} \]
\[ \text{efficiency} = \frac{84\ \text{colonies}}{0.020\ \mu\mathrm{g}} = 4{,}200\ \text{colonies}/\mu\mathrm{g} \]
Cross-check the other way: 84 colonies from one-fifth of the mixture
implies 420 in the whole of it, and \(420/0.10 = 4{,}200\) colonies/µg.
Forgetting the dilution: reporting \(84/0.10 = 840\): is the classic
five-fold error, and the units are part of the answer.
Practice
A PCR reaction starts with 8 copies of a target sequence. Calculate the number of copies after 25 cycles, and identify the temperature and purpose of each step in a cycle.
Show answer
Each cycle doubles the target, so after 25 cycles there are \(8 \times 2^{25} = 8 \times 33{,}554{,}432 = 2.68 \times 10^{8}\) copies. The three steps: denaturation at about 95 °C breaks the hydrogen bonds and separates the strands; annealing at about 55 °C lets the two primers base-pair to the ends of the region you want, which is what makes the reaction specific; extension at 72 °C is where Taq polymerase, stable at the denaturation temperature, adds nucleotides 5'→3' from each primer's 3' end. Taq is the reason the tube does not need fresh enzyme every cycle.
A 6,000 bp circular plasmid is digested three ways and run on a gel. Determine how many recognition sites each enzyme has, and explain where the EcoRI site must lie.
Lane
EcoRI only
HindIII only
Both enzymes
Band sizes (bp)
6,000
4,500 and 1,500
3,000, 1,500, 1,500
Show answer
EcoRI gives one band of the full 6,000 bp, so it has exactly one site: a single cut turns a circle into one linear molecule of the whole length. HindIII gives two bands summing to \(4{,}500 + 1{,}500 = 6{,}000\) bp, so it has two sites. Together the three cuts give three fragments, \(3{,}000 + 1{,}500 + 1{,}500 = 6{,}000\) bp. The 4,500 bp HindIII fragment is the one that disappears in the double digest and is replaced by 3,000 and 1,500, so the EcoRI site lies inside it, 3,000 bp from one HindIII site and 1,500 bp from the other.
Alongside her transformation plate, a student plates untransformed competent cells on LB/ampicillin and, separately, on plain LB. Predict the result on each of those two plates, and justify why both are needed.
Show answer
Prediction: no colonies on the LB/ampicillin plate, a dense lawn on the plain LB plate. Justification: untransformed cells carry no resistance gene, so ampicillin blocks their cell-wall synthesis and they cannot divide, that plate establishes that growth on the experimental plate required the plasmid and was not contamination. The plain LB plate is the positive control showing the cells were alive and competent, so an empty experimental plate could be read as a failed transformation rather than dead cells. Naming the outcomes without saying what each control rules out earns the prediction point only.
Unit 6 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 6 quiz: Gene Expression and Regulation
Fifteen multiple-choice questions and five short free-response questions covering the experiments that identified DNA, replication, transcription and RNA processing, translation and the genetic code, operons and epigenetic regulation, mutations and horizontal gene transfer, and the tools of biotechnology: click an option to see why each answer works or fails, and write each FRQ on paper before you open the model response.
Multiple choice
Data: a repetition of the Hershey–Chase experiment. T2 bacteriophage were grown with either 35S or 32P, allowed to infect E. coli for ten minutes, blended to shear off the spent coats, and centrifuged. Heavy bacteria form the pellet; light phage ghosts stay in the supernatant.
Labeled phage
Radioactivity in pellet (cells)
Radioactivity in supernatant (ghosts)
35S, labels protein only
18%
82%
32P, labels DNA only
72%
28%
Which conclusion is best supported by these data?
Correct. Sulfur labels only protein and phosphorus only DNA, so the two rows track the two candidate molecules independently. Four-fifths of the protein label stays outside with the ghosts while nearly three-quarters of the DNA label goes in with the cells that make new phage, which identifies DNA as the injected genetic material.
Radioactivity appears in both fractions because separation is imperfect, not because both molecules enter. The design answers the question through the difference between the two rows, and 18% versus 72% is not an equal split by any reading.
DNA contains phosphorus in its sugar–phosphate backbone and the protein coat contains essentially none, which is exactly why 32P is a DNA label. The coat is protein, which is why it carries the 35S and is left behind in the supernatant.
An 18% carryover is what you expect when blending does not shear every coat free of every cell, and it is the small fraction rather than the large one. The comparison that matters is 18% against 72%: the isotope that ends up inside the infected cells is the one in DNA.
In the Avery–MacLeod–McCarty experiment, extract from heat-killed S cells was divided among tubes treated with protease, with RNase, or with DNase before being mixed with live R cells. Why was it essential to include the protease and RNase treatments rather than testing DNase alone?
DNase acts on DNA in a crude mixture perfectly well, and the three enzymes were used on separate portions of the same extract rather than in sequence. Reading them as purification steps loses the entire logic of the design, which is elimination one component at a time.
Correct. Without them, a critic could argue that any enzyme treatment, or simply the handling, ruins the extract. Protease and RNase show that the extract survives an equally destructive treatment aimed at a different molecule, so only the removal of DNA abolishes the transforming activity.
The extract certainly contained protein and RNA: that is why those enzymes had something to digest. What the experiment shows is that neither of those molecules is required for transformation, which is a different claim from their being absent.
The dependent variable is whether R cells are converted into S cells, not whether R cells survive. All three treatments had to leave the R cells alive for the assay to work at all, so killing them would have destroyed the experiment rather than served as a control.
Data: base composition, in mol %, of nucleic acid isolated from three sources.
Sample
A
T
G
C
P
31.0
31.0
19.0
19.0
Q
17.5
17.5
32.5
32.5
R
24.0
32.0
26.0
18.0
Which statement is best supported by the data?
A low G + C content is normal for double-stranded DNA, the A + T to G + C ratio varies widely among species, and sample P satisfies both Chargaff equalities exactly. Strandedness is read from the equalities, not from the size of the GC fraction.
This reverses the relationship. Sample Q is 65% G + C and sample P is 38%, and each G–C pair is held by three hydrogen bonds rather than two, so Q requires a higher temperature to melt.
The premise is true and the conclusion does not follow: in sample R, A + G = 50.0 and T + C = 50.0, yet A ≠ T. Chargaff's rule for double-stranded DNA is the stricter pairwise equality, because every A is hydrogen-bonded to a specific T and every G to a specific C.
Correct. In sample R, A is 24.0 while T is 32.0, and G is 26.0 while C is 18.0. With no complementary partner strand, nothing forces those equalities, so a molecule that breaks both of them is single-stranded.
Figure: one replication fork of a bacterial chromosome, drawn as the parental duplex opens toward the right.
The upper parental strand runs 3' at the left end to 5' at the right end; the lower parental strand runs 5' at the left to 3' at the right. Against the upper parental strand a single new strand is drawn as one long arrow whose head points right, toward the fork. Against the lower parental strand three short new arrows are drawn, each with its head pointing left, away from the fork, and each begins with a short segment shaded differently from the rest of the arrow.
Which statement about the three short new segments is correct?
Helicase unwinds the double helix as a unit, so both templates become available at the same rate. The asymmetry comes from the antiparallel arrangement of the two parental strands, which is a matter of orientation rather than speed.
The leading strand is the continuous arrow on the upper template, drawn as a single piece pointing toward the fork. The differently shaded starts are RNA primers laid down by primase, not binding proteins: single-strand binding proteins coat the separated parental DNA and are not part of the new strand.
Correct. Because the lower template runs 5'→3' toward the fork, a new strand copied from it must grow away from the fork to keep its own 5'→3' direction. That forces discontinuous synthesis: the polymerase waits for more template, a new primer is laid, and another fragment is built, later joined by DNA polymerase I and ligase.
No DNA polymerase synthesizes 3'→5'; the enzyme attaches each incoming nucleotide's phosphate to the free 3'-OH at the end of the growing chain, which makes 5'→3' the only possible direction. The fragments point away from the fork despite that rule, not because of an exception to it.
Figure: mean telomere length versus number of population doublings for two cultures of human fibroblasts.
Both axes are linear: population doublings from 0 to 60 on the x-axis, mean telomere length from 0 to 12 kilobases on the y-axis. Curve A, untreated fibroblasts, starts at 10 kb and falls as a straight line to 5 kb at 50 doublings, where the cells stop dividing. Curve B, the same fibroblasts after an active telomerase gene was introduced, starts at 10 kb and stays within 0.3 kb of 10 kb all the way to 60 doublings, and those cells are still dividing.
Which statement best explains the difference between the two curves?
Proofreading and mismatch repair are functions of DNA polymerase III and the repair system; telomerase is a reverse transcriptase that extends chromosome ends using its own RNA template. Error rate and end shortening are separate problems, and the graph measures length, not fidelity.
Correct. Curve A falls 5 kb over 50 doublings, which is \(5/50 = 0.1\) kb, about 100 base pairs, lost per division, exactly the end-replication problem. Telomerase adds repeats back onto the 3' overhang, which is why curve B holds steady and those cells keep dividing past the point where curve A arrests.
Speed is irrelevant to the problem. However fast the polymerase runs, it still cannot replace the terminal RNA primer on the lagging strand, because replacement requires a free 3'-OH upstream and there is no DNA there to provide one.
Replication is semiconservative in all cells, as Meselson and Stahl showed, and a change in that mechanism is not something a single introduced gene could produce. Conservative replication would also not solve end shortening, since the new duplex would still be built by the same primer-dependent polymerase.
The template strand of a short gene reads 3'-TACCCGAAGGTTACT-5'. Which choice gives the mRNA transcript and the coding strand correctly?
Correct. Pairing A→U, T→A, C→G, G→C down the template gives 5'-AUGGGCUUCCAAUGA-3', which reads AUG GGC UUC CAA UGA: start, Gly, Phe, Gln, stop. The coding strand is that same sequence with T for U, which is the check worth running: the mRNA always matches the coding strand, never the template.
The coding strand is right, but the mRNA has been written in the wrong direction; this is the correct transcript read 3' to 5' and then labeled as though it were 5' to 3'. Because the template is given 3'→5' from left to right, its complement comes out 5'→3' in the same left-to-right order.
The mRNA is right, but the coding strand cannot be the template: those are the two different strands of the duplex. The coding strand is the one whose sequence the mRNA reproduces, so it reads 5'-ATGGGCTTCCAATGA-3'.
This copies the template letter for letter, swapping U for T, instead of pairing each template base with its complement. Transcription is complementary base pairing, so a template T specifies an A in the RNA, not a U, and a transcript beginning UAC has no start codon.
Data: three human protein-coding genes compared. In each gene the first and last exon are always retained, and every internal exon can independently be included or skipped during splicing.
Gene
P
Q
R
Pre-mRNA length (nt)
12,000
4,000
2,500
Mature mRNA length (nt)
1,500
3,200
1,000
Number of exons
9
4
3
Which statement is best supported by the data?
Correct. Gene P removes \((12{,}000-1{,}500)/12{,}000 = 87.5\%\) against 20.0% for Q and 60.0% for R, and with 9 exons it has 7 internal exons that can each be kept or skipped, giving \(2^{7} = 128\) combinations versus 4 for Q and 2 for R.
Mature mRNA length says nothing about splice-variant number; what matters is how many internal exons are optional. Gene Q has only 2 internal exons, so it tops out at \(2^{2} = 4\) mature mRNAs even though its finished transcript is the longest of the three.
Gene R loses 1,500 nucleotides, but gene P loses \(12{,}000 - 1{,}500 = 10{,}500\), so R does not lose the most in absolute terms either. As a fraction, R removes 60.0% and P removes 87.5%, so the claim fails on both readings.
Alternative splicing means the same pre-mRNA can be cut in more than one way, some internal exons are removed along with the introns that flank them, which is precisely why one gene can specify several proteins. If splicing were fixed, there would be exactly one mature mRNA per gene.
An mRNA reads 5'-AUGCACGGAUCCUAG-3'. How many amino acids does the polypeptide contain, and what anticodon does the tRNA that delivers the third amino acid carry?
This counts the stop codon as a fifth amino acid. UAG is read by a release factor, not by a charged tRNA, and no residue is added when it enters the A site: the polypeptide is simply let go.
Correct. The triplets are AUG CAC GGA UCC UAG, which is Met–His–Gly–Ser–stop, so four amino acids are joined. The third amino acid is glycine from the codon 5'-GGA-3', and its anticodon pairs antiparallel and complementary: 3'-CCU-5'.
An anticodon is complementary to its codon, not identical to it. Writing 5'-GGA-3' simply repeats the codon, which would leave the tRNA unable to base-pair with the message at all.
The anticodon is right, but the initiator methionine is a real residue in the polypeptide as it comes off the ribosome. It is often cleaved off afterward by a separate enzyme, which is why sickle-cell is called a change at the sixth residue of the mature β chain, but the ribosome still made it.
Data: growth of wild-type Neurospora crassa and three arginine-requiring mutants on minimal medium and on minimal medium supplemented with one intermediate of the arginine pathway, which runs precursor → ornithine → citrulline → arginine.
Strain
Minimal
+ ornithine
+ citrulline
+ arginine
Wild type
grows
grows
grows
grows
arg-1
none
none
none
grows
arg-2
none
none
grows
grows
arg-3
none
grows
grows
grows
Which strain carries a defect in the enzyme that converts ornithine to citrulline?
arg-1 grows only when arginine itself is supplied, so it is blocked at the last step, converting citrulline to arginine. Supplying ornithine or citrulline does not help because neither can get past that block.
Correct. A mutant grows on any intermediate downstream of its block. arg-2 is rescued by citrulline and arginine but not by ornithine, which places the broken enzyme exactly between ornithine and citrulline.
arg-3 is rescued by all three supplements, including the earliest one, so its block lies before ornithine, in the conversion of the precursor to ornithine. The rule to remember is that the more supplements rescue a strain, the earlier its block.
Wild type is the control, and it grows everywhere precisely because it has every enzyme in the pathway. Its row establishes that the media themselves support growth, so a "none" in any mutant row reflects a missing enzyme rather than a bad plate.
E. coli growing in medium containing both lactose and glucose makes only a small amount of β-galactosidase. Which statement best explains this result?
The operator is bound by the repressor protein, not by a sugar, and glucose never contacts the DNA. Mistaking a small-molecule signal for a DNA-binding protein loses the two-layer design that makes catabolite repression work.
Regulation changes how much a gene is transcribed; it does not delete or restore genes. A cell that discarded lacZ in glucose could never induce it again when lactose returned, which is the opposite of what the wild type does.
This describes the trp operon's corepressor logic, not the lac operon's. The lac repressor is switched off by allolactose and has no binding site for glucose; glucose acts one level up, through cAMP and CAP.
Correct. Two switches control this operon. Lactose removes the block, and low glucose supplies the push: when glucose is abundant, cAMP falls, CAP cannot bind upstream of the promoter, and transcription is weak even with the operator free. The cell builds the enzymes only when lactose is present and the better fuel is not.
A hepatocyte and a neuron taken from the same person contain identical DNA sequences but very different sets of proteins. Which statement best explains this difference?
Somatic mutations do accumulate, but they are rare, random, and scattered, so they cannot produce the reproducible, cell-type-specific protein profiles that define a hepatocyte or a neuron in every person. A mechanism that explains a reliable outcome cannot itself be random.
The stem states that the DNA sequences are identical, and that is the experimental fact: every somatic cell descends by mitosis from one zygote and inherits the whole genome. Differentiation changes which genes are read, not which genes are present.
Correct. A cell's identity is essentially the set of transcription factors it is expressing; those proteins bind enhancers and promoters and recruit the transcription machinery to a particular subset of genes. Epigenetic marks such as promoter methylation and histone acetylation keep that subset stable through mitosis.
The genetic code is nearly universal (the same codon table runs in bacteria, yeast, and every cell of your body), which is why a bacterium can be engineered to build human insulin. Two cells of one person certainly do not read different codes.
Sequence: the first six triplets of the template strand of a gene, written 3' to 5'.
3'-TAC AGA GGT CTC TTC ACC-5'. A single base substitution changes the sixth template triplet from ACC to ACT. No other change is made to the gene.
Which classification of this mutation, with its predicted effect on the polypeptide, is correct?
Redundancy often does make third-position changes silent, but not always, and this is one of the exceptions: the original codon UGG is the only codon for tryptophan, so any change to it must change the message. Checking the actual codon beats relying on the general rule.
This is the outcome of a different substitution. Template ACC → ACA would give the mRNA codon UGU, which is cysteine, and that change would be missense. The substitution given here is to ACT, which specifies UGA.
Correct. The template reads 3'-TAC AGA GGT CTC TTC ACC-5', so the mRNA is 5'-AUG UCU CCA GAG AAG UGG-3': Met–Ser–Pro–Glu–Lys–Trp. Changing the template's ACC to ACT makes that sixth codon UGA, a stop, so a release factor ends translation after five residues.
Frameshifts are caused by insertions or deletions of a number of bases not divisible by three, which changes how the message is parsed downstream. A substitution swaps one base for another and leaves the total length, and therefore the reading frame, untouched.
Colonies were grown on a non-selective master plate, stamped with sterile velvet onto several plates containing an antibiotic, and resistant colonies appeared at the same coordinates on every independent replica. Which conclusion is best supported?
Correct. Because each replica preserves the master plate's colony map, identical positions across replicas trace the resistance back to particular master-plate colonies, and picking that colony from the never-exposed master plate yields an already-resistant culture. Selection edits existing variation; it does not create it.
Individual organisms do not evolve, and a bacterium cannot direct a mutation to the gene it needs. The variation arises randomly during replication, and the environment then determines which pre-existing variants leave descendants.
Conjugation would transfer resistance to whichever cells happened to be adjacent on each plate, which would scatter survivors differently on every replica. The perfectly reproducible pattern is exactly what horizontal transfer after stamping cannot produce.
Independent plates could not agree on coordinates by chance if the antibiotic were creating the mutations after stamping; matching positions can only mean the difference was already there in the master plate's colonies. This is the reversed cause and effect the exam penalizes most heavily.
Data: a 9,000 bp circular plasmid digested to completion with EcoRI alone, with BamHI alone, and with both enzymes together, then separated by gel electrophoresis.
Digest
EcoRI only
BamHI only
EcoRI + BamHI
Fragment sizes (bp)
9,000
6,000 and 3,000
4,000, 3,000, and 2,000
Which statement is best supported by the gel?
This swaps the two enzymes. BamHI produces two fragments and so has two sites; EcoRI produces one full-length linear molecule and so has one.
The 3,000 bp band appears unchanged in both the BamHI lane and the double-digest lane, which is the evidence that EcoRI does not cut inside it. The fragment that disappears in the double digest is the one containing the extra site.
One cut in a circle produces one linear molecule of the full length, which is the single 9,000 bp band in the EcoRI lane. Two cuts would give two fragments summing to 9,000, as the BamHI lane shows.
Correct. The single full-length EcoRI band means one site; BamHI's two bands summing to 9,000 bp mean two sites. In the double digest the 3,000 bp band survives untouched while the 6,000 bp fragment is replaced by 4,000 and 2,000, which places the EcoRI site within it and fixes both distances.
A student adds 0.25 µg of a plasmid carrying an ampicillin-resistance gene to competent E. coli, heat-shocks them, and brings the recovery mixture to a total volume of 1,000 µL. She spreads 200 µL on an LB/ampicillin plate and counts 96 colonies. What is the transformation efficiency?
This is \(96/0.25\), which ignores the fact that only one-fifth of the mixture was plated. The colonies you counted came from the DNA in 200 µL, not from all 0.25 µg, so the dilution has to be applied before dividing.
480 is the number of colonies the whole 1,000 µL would have produced: a useful intermediate, but not an efficiency, because efficiency is colonies per microgram of plasmid DNA. The last step, dividing by 0.25 µg, is still missing.
Correct. The fraction plated is \(200/1000 = 0.20\), so the DNA represented on the plate is \(0.25 \times 0.20 = 0.050\) µg, and \(96/0.050 = 1{,}920\) colonies/µg. Cross-check the other way: 96 colonies from one-fifth implies 480 in the whole mixture, and \(480/0.25 = 1{,}920\).
This divides by 0.010 µg, as though one twenty-fifth of the mixture had been plated. Multiplying by the dilution factor twice, once on the volume and again on the mass, is the usual route to a five-fold overestimate, and the units do not catch it.
Free response
Data: a density-gradient investigation. E. coli were grown for many generations in medium whose only nitrogen source was 15N, then transferred at time zero into medium containing only 14N. A sample was taken each generation, its DNA was spun to equilibrium in a cesium chloride gradient, and the percentage of DNA at each of three band positions was recorded.
Generations after transfer
0
1
2
3
% at heavy position
100
0
0
0
% at hybrid position
0
100
50
25
% at light position
0
0
50
75
Using the investigation and the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the independent variable in this investigation, and describe the purpose of the generation-0 sample.
Explain how the generation-1 result eliminates the conservative model of replication.
Predict the percentage of DNA at the hybrid position after four generations, and show the calculation that supports your prediction.
Justify the claim that replication is semiconservative rather than dispersive, using evidence from more than one generation.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the independent variable is the number of generations after the transfer to 14N medium; the generation-0 sample marks the position of fully heavy DNA in the gradient so that later bands can be located relative to it. Accept "a reference/control that establishes the heavy band position". Do not accept: naming 15N as the independent variable; naming the variable with no description of the sample's purpose; "it is the control" with no statement of what it establishes.
(b) Accept: the conservative model predicts that the two original strands stay together, so generation 1 would show a heavy band and a light band and no DNA in between; the data show 100% at a single intermediate position, which conservative replication cannot produce. Do not accept: "the DNA was hybrid, so it is semiconservative" with no statement of what conservative predicted; describing the conservative model without applying it to generation 1.
(c) Accept: 12.5%, supported by \(2/2^{4} = 2/16 = 0.125\): only the two original 15N strands can ever be in hybrid molecules, and the total number of molecules doubles each generation. Accept the equivalent \(1/2^{\,n-1}\) form. Do not accept: a value with no calculation; 6.25% (an extra generation); any answer implying the hybrid band disappears.
(d) Accept: dispersive replication predicts one band that drifts steadily lighter and never splits, because every strand is a patchwork; the data show a single hybrid band at generation 1 that then splits into two discrete bands at generations 2 and 3, with a constant hybrid position. The evidence must be tied to at least two generations. Do not accept: citing generation 1 alone (both models predict one intermediate band); a conclusion with no reference to what dispersive replication predicts.
Show a 4/4 response
a The independent variable is the number of generations the cells have grown in 14N after the switch. The generation-0 sample is taken before any replication in light medium, so it shows where fully heavy DNA sits in the gradient and gives me a reference position to compare every later band against.
b If replication were conservative, the two original 15N strands would stay paired with each other and the brand-new duplex would be all 14N, so generation 1 should show two bands, one heavy and one light, and nothing in between. Instead 100% of the DNA sits at one intermediate position, which means every molecule contains one old strand and one new one.
c Only the two original heavy strands exist, and they can never be in more than two molecules. After 4 generations there are \(2^{4} = 16\) molecules per starting duplex, so hybrid \(= 2/16 = 0.125 = 12.5\%\), and the other 87.5% is light.
d The dispersive model says every strand is a patchwork of old and new, so there should be one band that gets steadily lighter each generation and never splits. The data show the opposite: at generation 1 there is one hybrid band, and at generations 2 and 3 it splits into two separate bands, with the hybrid band staying at exactly the same position while it shrinks from 50% to 25%. A fixed hybrid position plus a second, distinct light band is what semiconservative replication predicts and dispersive replication cannot give.
Data: β-galactosidase activity, in arbitrary units, for wild-type E. coli and three mutant strains grown in three media. Glycerol supplies carbon without lactose or glucose.
Strain
Glycerol
+ lactose
+ lactose and glucose
Wild type
4
2,000
80
Strain 1
1,600
1,700
70
Strain 2
5
60
55
Strain 3
3
5
4
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the strain that expresses the operon constitutively, and describe the evidence in the table that supports your choice.
Explain why wild-type cells produce far less β-galactosidase in lactose plus glucose than in lactose alone.
Calculate the fold induction by lactose for the wild type and for strain 1. Show your setup.
Justify a conclusion about which component of the lac system is defective in strain 2, using evidence from the table.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: strain 1, because its activity in glycerol is 1,600 units (nearly its fully induced level of 1,700), so it makes the enzyme with no lactose present, which is what constitutive means. Do not accept: naming strain 1 with no number cited; "it is always on" with no reference to the glycerol column; selecting strain 2 or 3.
(b) Accept: glucose lowers cAMP, so the CAP activator cannot bind upstream of the lac promoter and RNA polymerase binds only weakly; the repressor is already off the operator because allolactose is present, so the loss of activity is due to the missing activator, not to repression. Do not accept: "glucose represses the operon" with no mechanism; claiming the repressor rebinds in the presence of glucose; any answer that never mentions cAMP or CAP.
(c) Accept: wild type \(2{,}000/4 = 500\)-fold; strain 1 \(1{,}700/1{,}600 = 1.06\)-fold (accept ≈1.1 or "about 1-fold, essentially no induction"). Setup must be shown. Do not accept: differences instead of ratios (1,996 and 100); a ratio taken against the lactose-plus-glucose column; bare numbers with no setup.
(d) Accept: the cAMP–CAP activation system is defective, justified by the pattern that strain 2 is inducible but only to 60 units, a 12-fold rise, and that adding glucose barely changes it (55 versus 60, about a 9% drop) whereas glucose cuts the wild type by 96%. The repressor must still work because activity in glycerol is at background. Do not accept: "the repressor is broken" (contradicted by the glycerol column); naming CAP with no supporting numbers; a claim with no comparison to the wild-type glucose effect.
Show a 4/4 response
a Strain 1 is constitutive. In glycerol, with no lactose anywhere, it already shows 1,600 units, and adding lactose only takes it to 1,700, so it is making β-galactosidase all the time instead of only when the substrate is there. Either its repressor protein or its operator is broken.
b In lactose alone, allolactose knocks the repressor off the operator and low glucose means cAMP is high, so CAP binds upstream and helps RNA polymerase onto the promoter. Adding glucose drops cAMP, CAP goes inactive, and without that activator the polymerase binds the lac promoter weakly, so transcription, and enzyme activity, falls to 80 units even though the operator is free.
c Wild type: \(2{,}000/4 = 500\)-fold induction. Strain 1: \(1{,}700/1{,}600 = 1.06\)-fold, so essentially none.
d Strain 2's CAP activation is broken. Its glycerol value of 5 units is background, so the repressor still holds the operator shut, and lactose does induce it, but only to 60 units, 12-fold instead of 500-fold. The clincher is the glucose column: glucose cuts wild type from 2,000 to 80, a 96% drop, but only takes strain 2 from 60 to 55, about 9%. A strain that barely notices glucose is a strain that was never getting the CAP boost in the first place.
Model: a scale drawing of a eukaryotic protein-coding gene, read left to right along the coding strand from 5' to 3'.
The labeled segments, in order from left to right, are: a promoter of 150 base pairs; exon 1, 210 base pairs; intron 1, 1,500 base pairs; exon 2, 402 base pairs; intron 2, 900 base pairs; exon 3, 351 base pairs; and a polyadenylation signal at the right-hand end. Transcription begins at the first base of exon 1 and ends downstream of the polyadenylation signal. Assume that every base of the three exons is translated, including the stop codon.
Using the model, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the segments of the primary transcript that are absent from the mature mRNA, and describe the structure that removes them.
Explain why the promoter sequence is not represented in the mature mRNA even though the gene cannot be expressed without it.
Calculate the length of the mature mRNA's coding sequence and the number of amino acids in the polypeptide it specifies. Show your setup.
A student claims that a single-base substitution anywhere inside intron 1 cannot affect the protein. Justify a response to that claim, using the model as your evidence.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: intron 1 (1,500 nt) and intron 2 (900 nt) are transcribed but excised; the spliceosome, built from snRNPs, cuts them out and joins the flanking exons. Do not accept: naming the introns with no structure named; "enzymes remove them"; identifying the promoter or the poly-A tail as removed sequence.
(b) Accept: the promoter is the DNA sequence upstream of the transcription start site where RNA polymerase and general transcription factors assemble, and transcription begins downstream of it, so it is never copied into RNA; it acts as a binding site on DNA rather than as information carried in the message. Do not accept: "it is spliced out" (it is never transcribed); "it is not a gene"; a restatement that it is upstream with no consequence drawn.
(c) Accept: \(210 + 402 + 351 = 963\) nucleotides; \(963/3 = 321\) codons; one of those is the stop codon, so the polypeptide is 320 amino acids. Do not accept: including intron lengths; 321 amino acids (counting the stop codon as a residue); an answer with no setup.
(d) Accept: reject the claim, the spliceosome recognizes conserved sequences at each intron's 5' and 3' boundaries, and those bases lie inside intron 1, so a substitution at a splice site can prevent the cut and leave all 1,500 nucleotides of the intron in the mature mRNA; the ribosome then translates intron sequence until it reaches an in-frame stop codon, truncating or altering the protein. The evidence must name the splice site. Do not accept: "mutations can always matter" with no mechanism; agreeing with the student; claiming that a substitution anywhere in the intron would change the protein.
Show a 4/4 response
a Intron 1 (1,500 nt) and intron 2 (900 nt) are in the primary transcript but not in the mature mRNA. The spliceosome, a complex of snRNPs and proteins, recognizes each intron's boundaries, cuts it out, and ligates exon 1 to exon 2 and exon 2 to exon 3.
b The promoter is a stretch of DNA upstream of where transcription starts. RNA polymerase and general transcription factors assemble on it to position the polymerase, and then the polymerase begins copying at the first base of exon 1, so the promoter is behind the enzyme the whole time and never gets transcribed. It works as a landing pad on the DNA, not as information in the message.
c Coding sequence \(= 210 + 402 + 351 = 963\) nucleotides. That is \(963/3 = 321\) codons, and one of them is the stop codon, which does not add a residue. So the polypeptide is 320 amino acids long.
d I would reject the claim. The spliceosome finds an intron by its conserved sequences at the 5' and 3' ends, and those bases are inside intron 1. If a substitution destroys the 5' splice site, intron 1 is not cut out and all 1,500 of its nucleotides stay in the mature mRNA, so the ribosome translates intron sequence until it hits an in-frame stop, usually within a few dozen codons, and the protein comes out truncated or completely different. So a base deep in the middle of the intron probably does nothing, but a base at its boundary is as damaging as a mutation in an exon.
A liquid culture of \(2.0 \times 10^{9}\) E. coli cells was grown from a single streptomycin-sensitive cell in antibiotic-free medium. The culture is then spread on plates containing streptomycin, and a small number of colonies grow. Answer (a) through (d).
Identify the process that produced the streptomycin-resistance allele in this culture, and describe where in the cell the change occurred.
Explain why exposure to streptomycin cannot have been the cause of the resistance alleles in this investigation.
The spontaneous mutation rate at this locus is \(1.0 \times 10^{-8}\) per cell per generation. Calculate the expected number of resistant cells in the culture before it was plated. Show your setup.
Justify the claim that the resistant cells were present before plating, using the design of a replica-plating experiment as your reasoning.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: spontaneous mutation, an uncorrected error during DNA replication (or damage by a mutagen), in the bacterium's chromosomal DNA, in the gene encoding the ribosomal target of streptomycin. Accept "a point mutation in a chromosomal gene". Do not accept: "the bacteria adapted"; naming mutation with no location; horizontal gene transfer, which is excluded because the culture descends from one cell in pure medium.
(b) Accept: the culture was grown in antibiotic-free medium from a single cell, so every cell's genome was copied billions of times before any cell met streptomycin; the antibiotic was added only at plating and therefore could not have directed a change that was already present. Mutations are random with respect to what the cell needs. Do not accept: "mutations are random" with no reference to this culture; any answer that allows the antibiotic to induce a specific useful change.
(c) Accept: \((1.0 \times 10^{-8})(2.0 \times 10^{9}) = 20\) resistant cells. Setup must be shown. Do not accept: a number with no multiplication shown; \(2 \times 10^{-17}\) or other order-of-magnitude errors; an answer given as a rate rather than a count.
(d) Accept: in replica plating, colonies are grown on a non-selective master plate and stamped onto antibiotic plates, and resistant colonies appear at the same coordinates on every independent replica; cells picked from that position on the never-exposed master plate are already resistant, which shows the allele existed before exposure. Selection acts on existing variation. Do not accept: restating the claim; describing replica plating with no statement of what the matching coordinates prove; using the plate count from (c) as the justification.
Show a 4/4 response
a Spontaneous mutation produced it: an error during DNA replication that was not caught by proofreading or mismatch repair. The change is in the cell's chromosomal DNA, in the gene coding for the ribosomal protein that streptomycin binds, so the altered ribosome no longer binds the drug.
b The whole culture grew from one sensitive cell in medium with no streptomycin in it, so all \(2.0 \times 10^{9}\) genomes were copied long before a single cell ever encountered the drug. Streptomycin was only added at the moment of plating, so it cannot have caused a change that had to exist already for those colonies to survive the plating. Mutations happen at random and the environment sorts them afterwards.
c Expected resistant cells \(= (1.0 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{per cell})(2.0 \times 10^{9}\ \text{cells}) = 20\) cells. That handful is enough to explain the small number of colonies on the plate.
d Replica plating settles it. You grow colonies on a plate with no antibiotic, press velvet onto it, and stamp several antibiotic plates so each replica keeps the same colony map. The resistant colonies come up at identical coordinates on every replica, which independent plates could never match by chance if the drug were creating the mutations, and when you go back and pick that colony from the master plate, which never met streptomycin, it is already resistant. That is direct evidence the allele was there first.
Data: an agarose gel. Lane 1 holds a size ladder; lane 2 holds a circular plasmid of unknown size digested to completion with EcoRI. Migration distance is measured from the well.
Ladder band
1
2
3
4
Distance migrated (mm)
15
25
35
45
Fragment size (bp)
8,000
4,000
2,000
1,000
Lane 2 contains exactly two bands, one at 20 mm and one at 30 mm.
Using the gel, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the electrode toward which the fragments migrate, and describe the feature of DNA that makes them move that way.
Explain why smaller fragments migrate farther through the agarose than larger ones.
Construct a calibration graph: put distance migrated in mm on the x-axis with a scale from 0 to 50, put \(\log_{10}\) of fragment size on the y-axis with a scale from 3.0 to 4.0, label both axes, plot the four ladder bands, and draw a best-fit straight line. Then use the line to estimate the size of each band in lane 2, and calculate the total size of the plasmid.
Justify the claim that this plasmid carries exactly two EcoRI recognition sites, using evidence from the gel.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: toward the positive electrode (anode), because the sugar–phosphate backbone carries a negative charge at every pH used for electrophoresis, so the whole molecule is an anion regardless of its base sequence. Do not accept: naming the electrode with no reason; attributing the charge to the nitrogenous bases; "DNA is attracted to the positive end" with no structural feature named.
(b) Accept: agarose is a porous mesh, and small fragments pass through the pores with less obstruction while large fragments are slowed by having to thread through, so in a fixed run time the small ones travel farther. Do not accept: "small ones are lighter"; "small ones move faster" with no reference to the gel matrix; restating the trend as its own explanation.
(c) Accept: distance on the x-axis (0–50 mm) and \(\log_{10}\) size on the y-axis (3.0–4.0), both labeled with units where applicable, the four ladder points plotted at (15, 3.90), (25, 3.60), (35, 3.30), (45, 3.00), and a best-fit straight line; then about 5,700 bp at 20 mm and about 2,800 bp at 30 mm (accept 5,500–5,900 and 2,700–2,900), and a plasmid of about 8,500 bp (accept 8,200–8,800). Do not accept: reversed axes; plotting raw size rather than its logarithm; interpolating on raw size, which gives 6,000 and 3,000 bp; a total with no sizes shown.
(d) Accept: the digest of a circular molecule produced two bands, and a circle must be cut twice before it yields two separate fragments, one cut converts a circle into a single full-length linear molecule. Therefore two sites. Do not accept: "two bands means two sites" stated for a linear molecule; counting the sites with no reference to the plasmid being circular; a claim with no evidence from the gel.
Show a 4/4 response
a The fragments move toward the positive electrode. Every nucleotide in the sugar–phosphate backbone carries a negatively charged phosphate group at the pH of the running buffer, so a DNA fragment of any sequence is a large anion and is pulled toward the anode.
b Agarose sets as a mesh full of pores. A short fragment slips through the pores with little obstruction, while a long fragment has to worm its way through and gets hung up constantly, so in the same run time the short fragment ends up farther from the well.
c I put distance migrated (mm) on the x-axis from 0 to 50 and \(\log_{10}\)(size in bp) on the y-axis from 3.0 to 4.0, labeled both, and plotted (15, 3.90), (25, 3.60), (35, 3.30), and (45, 3.00), then drew a best-fit line through them; the line drops 0.301 log units per 10 mm. At 20 mm, \(\log_{10}S = 3.90 - 0.15 = 3.75\), so \(S \approx 5{,}700\) bp. At 30 mm, \(\log_{10}S = 3.60 - 0.15 = 3.45\), so \(S \approx 2{,}800\) bp. Plasmid \(= 5{,}700 + 2{,}800 \approx 8{,}500\) bp.
d The plasmid is circular, and cutting a circle once just opens it into one linear molecule of the full length: you would see a single band. Lane 2 has two bands, so the circle had to be cut in two places to release two separate pieces. That is the evidence for exactly two EcoRI sites, and the two fragment sizes tell me how far apart they are around the circle.
Lesson 7.1 · Unit 7 · CED topics 7.1–7.2
Natural selection and the evidence from the field
Darwin and Wallace presented the idea jointly in 1858, and its power is how
little it assumes. If individuals differ, if some of that difference is
inherited, and if more offspring are produced than the environment supports,
then whichever variants leave more offspring become more common.
The trap is language. Selection does not try to improve anything and
cannot reach into the future: it sorts variation that already exists, in the
environment that exists now.
Definition
Variation: individuals differ in the trait.
Heritability: some of that variation is passed to offspring.
Overproduction: more offspring are produced than resources support.
Differential reproductive success: the variants differ in how many offspring survive to reproduce.
Fitness is that last quantity and nothing else: surviving,
reproducing offspring relative to others in the population. Not strength,
not size, not lifespan.
Model
Put the trait on the x-axis and number of individuals on the y-axis.
Directional selection favors one tail, so the curve slides
and the mean moves. Stabilizing selection favors the middle,
trimming both tails: the mean holds and the curve narrows.
Disruptive selection favors both tails, so one peak splits in
two and the variance rises while the mean barely moves. Name the mode from the
mean and the spread together: "the graph changed" is not a
description. Kettlewell's peppered moths are the textbook directional case:
the dark form passed 90% in soot-blackened English woodlands and fell back
after clean-air laws, tracking which form birds could see against the bark.
Worked example · The Grants' finches, 1977 drought
Peter and Rosemary Grant measured beak depth in the medium ground finch on
Daphne Major. The 1977 drought exhausted the small soft seeds, leaving large
hard ones. Beak depths, binned to the nearest 0.5 mm:
Beak depth (mm)
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
Birds in 1976 (n = 100)
4
13
25
28
19
9
2
Birds in 1978 (n = 100)
0
2
7
19
29
27
16
Weighted means: \(\bar{x}_{1976} = 940.0/100 = 9.40\) mm and
\(\bar{x}_{1978} = 1010.0/100 = 10.10\) mm, a shift of \(+0.70\) mm, or
\(0.70/9.40 = 7.4\%\) in one generation, and the proportion at or above
10.0 mm rose from 30% to 72%. The mean moved and the distribution slid as a
unit: directional selection. Independent variable, the year
before versus after the drought; dependent variable, beak depth; baseline, the
1976 sample. Deep-beaked birds cracked the large seeds and passed the alleles
on, no bird's beak grew.
Worked example · Endler's guppies
In Trinidadian streams, guppies below waterfalls live with the pike cichlid,
which takes adults, and are drab; those above the falls live with the
killifish, which takes only juveniles, and are brightly spotted. John Endler
stocked greenhouse ponds with mixed guppies, then added pike cichlids to
some, killifish to others, and no predator to the rest.
The independent variable is predator type, the
dependent variable is spots per male, the predator-free
ponds the control. Within about ten generations spot number
had fallen in the pike-cichlid ponds and risen in the others. Conclusion,
justified: predation drives the pattern, because ponds differing only in
predator diverged the same way the wild populations do.
Practice
A peacock with an enormous train survives two breeding seasons and sires 30 chicks that fledge; a drab male survives six seasons and sires 4. Identify which male has higher fitness, and explain what that says about equating fitness with survival.
Show answer
The train-bearing male: 30 surviving offspring against 4, which is \(30/4 = 7.5\) times the output for a third of the lifespan. Fitness is counted in offspring that themselves reproduce, so a trait that shortens life is still favored when it raises mating success enough: sexual selection is selection with mate choice as the agent. A grader will not accept "he is fitter because he is more attractive"; the point comes from naming offspring number as the currency.
The table gives infant mortality by birth weight in a large human data set. Identify the mode of selection acting, and describe what it does to the mean and to the variance.
Birth weight (kg)
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
Infant mortality (%)
18
6.0
2.5
2.0
4.0
12
Show answer
Mortality is lowest at 3.5 kg and rises toward both ends, so both tails are removed: stabilizing selection. Relative survival scaled to the best class is \(82/98 = 0.84\) at 2.0 kg and \(88/98 = 0.90\) at 4.5 kg, against 1.00 at 3.5 kg. The mean holds near 3.4–3.5 kg while the variance falls, so the curve narrows around the same center. Calling the distribution "normal" is not an answer: the mode is named from the mean and the spread.
A researcher moves 200 guppies from a pike-cichlid pool below a waterfall into a killifish pool above it. Predict how mean spot number in the males will change over the next fifteen generations, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: mean spot number increases. Justification: the killifish takes only small juveniles, so the survival cost of being conspicuous drops while female preference for spotted males remains. Net selection on spots turns positive, and because spot number is heritable the population mean rises across generations. "They get brighter to attract mates" leaves out the change in predation that made the trait affordable: that earns the prediction point but not the justification point.
Lesson 7.2 · Unit 7 · CED topic 7.3
Artificial selection, and the variation selection acts on
Cabbage, broccoli, kale, kohlrabi, cauliflower, and Brussels sprouts are all
Brassica oleracea: one species, one wild mustard ancestor, six
different organs enlarged by breeders who kept what they liked. Maize came the
same way from teosinte, a Mexican grass with a few hard-cased kernels in two
rows, over roughly 9,000 years.
Artificial selection is natural selection with the environment swapped for a
human decision, and it happens whether we mean it or not: every antibiotic
course and every pesticide spray is a selection experiment run by accident.
Definition
Selection cannot manufacture the variant it needs: only enrich one already
present. The supply is mutation, the sole original source of
new alleles; recombination, which reshuffles existing
alleles by crossing over and independent assortment; and, in prokaryotes,
horizontal gene transfer by transformation, transduction,
and conjugation, which can move a resistance gene between species in one
step. Joshua and Esther Lederberg's 1952 replica-plating experiment settled
the direction of causation: resistant colonies could be located on
antibiotic-free master plates before any antibiotic was applied, so
the mutations pre-existed the selection.
Caution
Write "the population evolved resistance," never "the bacteria became
resistant because of the antibiotic." Individuals do not evolve, and a drug
does not induce the allele that defeats it. If no cell happens to carry a
variant that survives, the population dies out, which is why a combination
requiring two independent mutations at once beats one drug alone.
Worked example · Lenski's long-term evolution experiment
Question: how repeatable is evolution? In 1988 Richard Lenski
founded 12 populations of E. coli from one ancestral clone in a
glucose-limited medium that also contained citrate the bacteria could not
use aerobically, and transferred 1% of each culture to fresh medium daily:
\(\log_2 100 = 6.64\) generations per day.
The independent variable is elapsed generations, the
dependent variable is fitness relative to the ancestor in
head-to-head competition, and the control is the ancestor
itself, frozen and revivable: samples are archived every 500 generations, a
fossil record you can thaw. Result: all 12 populations gained
fitness, but only one evolved aerobic citrate use, at about generation
31,500, and in replays from frozen clones the trait re-evolved only from
clones later than roughly 20,000 generations.
Conclusion, justified: it required an earlier mutation that made it
possible, because earlier clones never produced it in replay.
Worked example · Why the gains slow down
Approximate relative fitness of one LTEE population, measured against the
1988 ancestor (a value of 1.35 means 35% faster growth in competition):
Generations
0
2,000
5,000
10,000
20,000
50,000
Relative fitness
1.00
1.35
1.44
1.52
1.61
1.75
Gain per 1,000 generations: \(0.35/2 = 0.175\) over the first interval,
\(0.09/3 = 0.030\), then \(0.08/5 = 0.016\), \(0.09/10 = 0.0090\), and
\(0.14/30 = 0.0047\) over the last: a \(0.175/0.0047 = 37\)-fold slowdown.
Describe: the curve rises steeply, then bends toward a nearly flat line.
Explain: the largest-effect beneficial mutations are picked up first and
cannot be picked up twice, so later substitutions have smaller effects in an
unchanging medium. The curve never truly flattens, though: it is still
climbing at 50,000.
Practice
Kale and kohlrabi belong to the same species yet look nothing alike. Explain how that is possible, and identify the source of the variation the breeders selected on.
Show answer
Breeders selected on different organs of the same plant (leaves in kale, the swollen stem in kohlrabi) enriching alleles for leaf size in one line and stem thickness in the other. The lines diverged in appearance while staying interfertile, which is why they are still one species. The variation was not created by the breeders: it arose by mutation, was reshuffled by recombination, and selection only changed which combinations became common. "The breeders made new traits" is the error being tested.
The table gives the percent of Staphylococcus aureus isolates in one hospital that were methicillin-resistant. Describe the trend and explain what produced it.
Year
1995
2000
2005
2010
2015
Resistant isolates (%)
2
14
38
52
49
Show answer
Describe: resistance rises steeply from 2% to 52% between 1995 and 2010, a \(52/2 = 26\)-fold increase, then levels off and dips slightly by 2015. Explain: methicillin kills susceptible cells and spares the rare cells already carrying the resistance allele, so those cells reproduce and the allele's frequency climbs; horizontal transfer spreads it faster than mutation alone could. The 2010–2015 flattening is consistent with reduced antibiotic use or infection-control measures lowering the advantage. Saying "the bacteria became resistant in response to the drug" reverses the cause and earns nothing.
A grower has sprayed one pyrethroid insecticide on the same field every season for eight years and now finds it barely works. A consultant proposes rotating three unrelated insecticides. Predict what happens to the frequency of the pyrethroid-resistance allele under rotation, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the allele's frequency falls slowly but does not disappear. Justification: resistance alleles usually carry a metabolic cost, so in seasons without the pyrethroid resistant insects are slightly less fit and selection runs against the allele; rotation also keeps any one allele from being favored long enough to sweep to fixation. It will not vanish, because selection acts on phenotype and rare heterozygotes shelter the allele. A direction with no named cost is half an answer: the justification point needs the trade-off stated.
Lesson 7.3 · Unit 7 · CED topics 7.4–7.5
Population genetics and Hardy–Weinberg equilibrium
Evolution is a change in allele frequencies over time, so to detect it you
need to know what "no change" looks like. That is all Hardy–Weinberg is: a
null model of a population in which nothing is happening, written precisely
enough to test real data against.
Because it is a null hypothesis, the interesting outcome is failure: when
observed genotype counts depart from the prediction, one of five conditions
is being violated, and finding out which one is the biology.
Formula
For one gene with two alleles, let \(p\) be the frequency of the dominant
allele and \(q\) the recessive:
\[ p + q = 1 \qquad p^2 + 2pq + q^2 = 1 \]
\(p^2\) is the frequency of homozygous dominants, \(2pq\) heterozygotes,
\(q^2\) homozygous recessives. The second equation is the first one squared,
which is why it holds only if alleles pair at random. Start from the phenotype
you can count (the recessive one, which has a single genotype) take
\(q = \sqrt{q^2}\), and work outward.
Conditions
Frequencies stay put only when all five hold: no mutation,
no gene flow, no natural selection,
random mating with respect to the gene, and a
very large population so drift is negligible. No real
population meets all five: the model is useful precisely because it gives
you a prediction to be wrong about.
Worked example · From one phenotype to the whole population
In a beetle population meeting the five conditions, 9% of individuals are
pale, a recessive phenotype. Find every allele and genotype frequency, and
the number of carriers among 4,000 beetles.
\[ q^2 = 0.09 \Rightarrow q = \sqrt{0.09} = 0.30 \qquad p = 1 - 0.30 = 0.70 \]
\[ p^2 = 0.49 \qquad 2pq = 2(0.70)(0.30) = 0.42 \qquad q^2 = 0.09 \]
Check: \(0.49 + 0.42 + 0.09 = 1.00\). In 4,000 beetles that is
\(0.49(4000) = 1{,}960\) homozygous dominant, \(0.42(4000) = 1{,}680\)
carriers, \(0.09(4000) = 360\) pale. Carriers outnumber pale beetles more
than four to one, and \(1680/3640 = 46.2\%\) of dark beetles carry the
allele, which is why selection against a recessive phenotype is so slow.
Worked example · Chi-square test against the model
A snail population is scored for a banding gene: 100 BB, 95
Bb, 5 bb, for \(n = 200\). Is it in equilibrium?
Get the allele frequencies from the counts, not the other way round:
\[ p = \frac{2(100) + 95}{2(200)} = \frac{295}{400} = 0.7375 \qquad q = 0.2625 \]
Expected counts: \(p^2 n = 108.78\), \(2pqn = 77.44\), \(q^2 n = 13.78\).
\[ \chi^2 = \frac{(100-108.78)^2}{108.78} + \frac{(95-77.44)^2}{77.44} + \frac{(5-13.78)^2}{13.78} = 0.71 + 3.98 + 5.59 = 10.29 \]
Degrees of freedom are 1 (three genotype classes, minus one for the total
and one more because \(p\) came from the data), so the critical value is
3.841. Since \(10.29 \gt 3.841\), reject the null: this population is
not in equilibrium. Too many heterozygotes and too few
bb snails points to selection against bb, or heterozygote
advantage. Rejecting the null never tells you which condition
failed: say so, and name the candidates.
Practice
In a population at equilibrium the recessive allele is at \(q = 0.20\). Calculate the expected percentage of heterozygotes and the percentage of dominant-phenotype individuals that are carriers.
Show answer
\(p = 0.80\), so \(2pq = 2(0.80)(0.20) = 0.32\), or 32% heterozygotes; \(p^2 = 0.64\) and \(q^2 = 0.04\). Check: \(0.64 + 0.32 + 0.04 = 1.00\). Dominant-phenotype individuals make up \(0.64 + 0.32 = 0.96\), so carriers are \(0.32/0.96 = 33.3\%\) of them. Setting \(q = 0.20\) equal to the recessive phenotype frequency is the classic error: the phenotype frequency is \(q^2 = 0.04\).
A human population of 1,000 is typed for the MN blood group, which is codominant: 357 MM, 485 MN, 158 NN. Use a chi-square test to decide whether it is in Hardy–Weinberg equilibrium.
Show answer
\(p(M) = [2(357) + 485]/2000 = 1199/2000 = 0.5995\), so \(q(N) = 0.4005\). Expected: \(p^2n = 359.4\), \(2pqn = 480.2\), \(q^2n = 160.4\). Then \(\chi^2 = (357-359.4)^2/359.4 + (485-480.2)^2/480.2 + (158-160.4)^2/160.4 = 0.016 + 0.048 + 0.036 = 0.10\). With df = 1 the critical value is 3.841, and \(0.10 \lt 3.841\), so fail to reject: the counts are consistent with equilibrium. "Fail to reject" is the required wording: the test cannot prove the five conditions hold.
Predators begin taking every pale beetle in the population from the first worked example, leaving \(q^2 = 0.09\) behind. Predict how \(q\) and the frequency of carriers change over many generations, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: \(q\) falls every generation but by smaller and smaller amounts, and never reaches zero in any realistic time. Justification: selection sees only phenotypes, and at \(q = 0.30\) most copies of the allele (1,680 carriers' worth against 360 pale beetles) sit in heterozygotes the predators ignore. As \(q\) shrinks, the share of copies sheltered that way grows, so each generation removes a smaller fraction of them. Naming that sheltering is what earns the justification point.
Lesson 7.4 · Unit 7 · CED topics 7.4, 7.8
Mechanisms that change allele frequencies
Reject Hardy–Weinberg and the next question is which condition failed.
Selection is one answer, and in small populations often not the main one:
chance alone moves allele frequencies, and chance does not care whether an
allele is useful.
Besides mutation, four mechanisms shift frequencies: drift, gene flow,
nonrandom mating, and selection. Keep them separate: the exam hands you a
scenario and asks which one is operating.
Definition
Genetic drift is change in allele frequency from random
sampling of who happens to reproduce. It is directionless and scales with
\(1/\sqrt{N}\), so it dominates small populations and is negligible in huge
ones. A bottleneck is drift after a crash: northern elephant
seals were hunted to perhaps twenty animals in the 1890s, and though the
population now exceeds 100,000, a survey of 24 protein-coding loci found no
variation at any of them; cheetahs carry the same signature. A
founder effect is drift at the start: Ellis–van Creveld
syndrome runs far above its worldwide frequency among the Old Order Amish of
Lancaster County, not because it helps, but because a founder carried it.
Rule
Gene flow, migrants moving alleles between populations, makes populations more alike and adds variation to each.
Nonrandom mating, including inbreeding, changes
genotype frequencies (more homozygotes) without by itself changing
allele frequencies; that distinction is worth a point on its own.
Sexual selection does change them, because differences in
mating success are differences in reproductive success.
Worked example · Drift in a small and a large population
Two populations start at \(q = 0.50\). One holds 10 breeding adults, the
other 10,000. Frequency of the same allele, tracked for six generations:
Generation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
q, N = 10
0.50
0.60
0.45
0.30
0.35
0.15
0.00
q, N = 10,000
0.500
0.503
0.498
0.504
0.499
0.502
0.500
Describe both traces: the small population lurches up and down with no
direction and loses the allele at generation 6; the large one wanders inside
a band of about 0.006 and ends where it started. Mean step size is
\(0.80/6 = 0.133\) against \(0.024/6 = 0.0040\), a factor of 33: what theory
predicts, since the standard deviation of one generation's change is
\(\sqrt{pq/2N}\): \(\sqrt{0.25/20} = 0.112\) for \(N = 10\) and
\(\sqrt{0.25/20000} = 0.0035\) for \(N = 10{,}000\), a ratio of
\(\sqrt{1000} = 32\). Drift dominates the small population; in the large one
sampling error is too small to move anything, so real change there would
require selection or gene flow.
Worked example · Heterozygote advantage
In parts of West Africa where Plasmodium falciparum malaria is
endemic, the sickle-cell allele sits near \(q = 0.12\) instead of being
driven out. Calculate the genotype frequencies and explain why the allele
persists.
\(q^2 = 0.0144\) and \(2pq = 2(0.88)(0.12) = 0.2112\), so per 10,000 births
about 144 children have sickle-cell disease and 2,112 are carriers. Both
homozygotes are at a disadvantage (SS individuals suffer severe
anemia, AA individuals have no malaria protection), while AS
heterozygotes are protected and not anemic. Selection removes copies of both
alleles and holds \(q\) intermediate: balancing selection. The allele is
neither good nor bad; its fitness depends on whether the parasite is there.
Practice
Northern elephant seals now number in the hundreds of thousands. Explain why their genetic variation is still extremely low, and identify the mechanism responsible.
Show answer
The mechanism is a bottleneck, a form of genetic drift. When the population passed through about twenty animals, every allele not carried by one of those survivors was lost permanently; growth since then only copies the alleles that remain, and new variation returns at the mutation rate, far too slowly to matter over a century. "They recovered, so their diversity recovered" is the error: census size and genetic diversity are not the same thing.
An island population of 900 snails has \(q = 0.10\) for a shell allele. A storm washes 100 snails from a mainland population with \(q = 0.60\) onto the island, and they breed freely with the residents. Calculate the allele frequency in the combined population and identify the mechanism.
Show answer
Count allele copies: residents contribute \(2(900)(0.10) = 180\) copies, migrants \(2(100)(0.60) = 120\), out of \(2(1000) = 2000\) total. So \(q = 300/2000 = 0.15\). The mechanism is gene flow, and note its two effects: the island's frequency moves toward the mainland's, and the island gains variation it did not have. Averaging 0.10 and 0.60 to get 0.35 is the common mistake: the populations must be weighted by their sizes.
A sustained mosquito-control program eliminates P. falciparum from the region in the second worked example. Predict what happens to the sickle-cell allele frequency over the following generations, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: \(q\) declines steadily from 0.12 toward a low value set by mutation, though it will take many generations. Justification: the heterozygote's advantage existed only because malaria was present, so with the parasite gone AS individuals no longer out-reproduce AA individuals while SS individuals still suffer severe anemia and reduced reproduction. Balancing selection becomes straightforward directional selection against the allele. The decline slows as \(q\) falls, because most remaining copies are sheltered in heterozygotes. A prediction that the allele "disappears" overstates it: say the direction and the reason selection changed.
Lesson 7.5 · Unit 7 · CED topics 7.6–7.7
Evidence of evolution and common ancestry
No single observation would carry the argument for common ancestry. What
carries it is that fossils, geography, anatomy, embryos, and molecules, five
independent kinds of evidence, keep producing the same nested pattern of
relatedness.
On the exam this is a reasoning task: you are handed data and asked which
hypothesis it supports. Say what the evidence is, then say what it rules out.
Definition
Homologous structures share ancestry and underlying anatomy
even when their functions differ: the same bone arrangement runs through a
human arm, a bat wing, a whale flipper, and a horse leg.
Analogous structures share function without shared ancestry,
the product of convergent evolution: an insect wing and a bird wing, or the
streamlined bodies of sharks and dolphins. Vestigial
structures are reduced remnants of an ancestor's working features, such as
the internal pelvic bones of whales. Similar early embryos (pharyngeal
arches and a post-anal tail in fish, chicks, and humans alike) are homology
showing before development diverges.
Model
Molecular evidence is strongest because it is hardest to explain any other
way. Nearly every organism reads the same genetic code, uses DNA and RNA, and
runs the same core machinery (ribosomes, ATP synthase, the enzymes of
glycolysis), and all eukaryotes share membrane-bound organelles, a nucleus,
and 80S ribosomes. Conserved genes such as those for cytochrome c and
ribosomal RNA differ between species by amounts that track how long ago their
lineages split, which turns sequence data into a measuring tool.
Worked example · A cytochrome c difference table
Cytochrome c is 104 amino acids long in vertebrates. Differences from the
human sequence, with divergence times from the fossil record:
Compared with human
Rhesus monkey
Horse
Chicken
Tuna
Amino-acid differences
1
12
13
21
Fossil divergence (Mya)
25
95
310
430
Rank by relatedness: fewest differences first: rhesus monkey, horse,
chicken, tuna. Now calibrate a clock on the deepest split:
\[ \text{rate} = \frac{21\ \text{differences}}{430\ \text{My}} = 0.0488\ \text{differences per My}, \]
one change about every 20.5 million years. Estimating the human–chicken
split from its 13 differences gives \(13/0.0488 = 266\) million years,
against 310 million from the fossils: about 14% low, which for a single
104-residue protein is a good match.
Worked example · When the clock and the fossils disagree
Run the same calculation for the horse: \(12/0.0488 = 246\) million years,
while the fossil record puts the split at roughly 95 million. The clock
overestimates by more than 150%. Explain the disagreement.
An exam answer needs at least one reason stated as a mechanism. The clock
assumes a constant substitution rate, and rates differ among lineages. Deep
comparisons are also saturated: over 430 million years some sites
change twice or change back, so the tuna count understates the substitutions
that happened, the calibrated rate comes out too slow, and every shallower
estimate comes out too old. The fix is to calibrate on several fossil-dated
nodes and average over many genes.
Practice
A bird's wing and a bat's wing are both used for flapping flight. Identify whether they are homologous or analogous, and explain how the same pair of structures can be described both ways.
Show answer
As wings they are analogous: powered flight evolved separately, and the surfaces differ; feathers on a fused, reduced hand in the bird, skin over four elongated fingers in the bat. As forelimbs they are homologous: both hold one humerus, a radius and ulna, carpals, and digits in the same arrangement, from a shared tetrapod ancestor. Homology is judged by structure and ancestry, never by function: an answer that never names the bones is not an explanation.
A 450-residue enzyme is compared with its human version. Percent identity: chimpanzee 99.5%, mouse 85%, chicken 72%, yeast 40%. Calculate the number of differing residues in each and describe what the yeast value implies.
Show answer
Differing residues are \((100 - \%\text{identity})/100 \times 450\): chimpanzee \(0.005 \times 450 = 2.25\), so about 2; mouse \(0.15 \times 450 = 67.5\), about 68; chicken \(0.28 \times 450 = 126\); yeast \(0.60 \times 450 = 270\). The ranking matches the branching order from anatomy and fossils. The yeast value is the striking one: a single-celled fungus still shares 180 of 450 residues with the human enzyme, so the gene existed in the common ancestor of fungi and animals and has been conserved since; chance convergence on 40% of a 450-residue sequence is not a credible alternative.
Whales have a reduced pelvis and femur embedded in the body wall and attached to no limb. Predict what a search of the whale genome for tetrapod hind-limb development genes should find, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: those genes are present, but either inactivated as pseudogenes or intact and no longer expressed in the hind-limb region. Justification: a vestigial structure is a homologous remnant, so the claim is that whales descend from four-limbed land mammals, and descent predicts the developmental toolkit was inherited with the reduced bones, then lost function once selection stopped maintaining it. The alternative, that whales never had hind limbs, predicts no such genes at all, so the genome is a real test rather than a restatement.
Lesson 7.6 · Unit 7 · CED topic 7.9
Phylogeny and cladistics
A cladogram is not a picture of what happened. It is a hypothesis about
branching order, built from data and revised when new data conflict with it.
What carries information is the branching order and the characters placed on
the branches. What carries none is the left-to-right order of the tips, since
any branch can be swapped around its node, or, in a plain cladogram, the
length of the branches.
Definition
A shared derived character, or synapomorphy, arose in the
common ancestor of a group and is found in its descendants; only these define
clades. A trait inherited from further back, an ancestral character shared
with the out-group, groups nothing. A node is a common
ancestor, not a living species, and a clade (monophyletic
group) is one node plus every descendant of it. The
out-group branched off before the rest and tells you which
state is ancestral. Branch length means something (change, or time) only in
a phylogram or chronogram whose axis says so.
Method
Maximum parsimony: among competing trees, prefer the one
requiring the fewest character changes, not because evolution is economical
but because extra changes are extra assumptions. Count character by
character, add the totals, and say by how many steps one tree wins.
Worked example · Two trees, one character table
Five chordates scored for five characters; 1 means present.
Taxon
Vertebrae
Hinged jaws
Bony skeleton
Limbs with digits
Amniotic egg
Lancelet (out-group)
0
0
0
0
0
Lamprey
1
0
0
0
0
Tuna
1
1
1
0
0
Salamander
1
1
1
1
0
Lizard
1
1
1
1
1
Tree 1 is fully nested: the lancelet branches off first,
then the lamprey, then the tuna, and the last node splits salamander from
lizard. Each character arises exactly once, on the branch below every taxon
that has it: vertebrae below the lamprey's node, jaws and bone below the
tuna's, limbs below the salamander–lizard node, the amniotic egg on the
lizard's branch. Total: 5 changes.
Tree 2 groups the lamprey with the tuna as "fishes",
salamander and lizard as their sister group. Vertebrae, limbs, and the
amniotic egg still take one change each, but jaws must now evolve twice, in the tuna and in the salamander–lizard ancestor, or evolve once and be
lost in the lamprey, and the bony skeleton costs a second change the same
way. Total: 7 changes. Tree 1 wins by 2 steps, and that is
the justification: it explains the same data with two fewer assumed events.
Worked example · When molecules and morphology disagree
Anatomists long placed whales outside the even-toed ungulates. Molecular
comparisons in the 1990s put them inside that group, as the closest
living relatives of hippopotamuses. Two data sets, two trees, which is the
hypothesis?
Both are, and the disagreement is the useful part, because it makes a
testable prediction: if whales are nested among even-toed ungulates, early
whale fossils should carry that group's diagnostic double-pulley ankle bone.
Fossil whales with hind limbs described in 2001 have exactly that bone, and
the tree was revised toward the molecular result. A grader wants not
"scientists changed their minds" but which evidence resolved the conflict.
Practice
A student groups the lamprey and the tuna together because both live in water and lack limbs. Explain why that reasoning is invalid.
Show answer
Both traits are ancestral, not derived: the lancelet out-group is also aquatic and limbless, so those states existed before any of these lineages split. Ancestral characters are shared by everything descended from that ancestor and so cannot distinguish subgroups within it: only shared derived characters can. "Fish" defined this way is not even a clade, since it excludes tetrapods that descend from the same ancestor. The point is earned by naming the trait ancestral and saying how you know: the out-group has it.
Four beetle populations are compared at one gene. The percent sequence differences are: A–B 2.0, C–D 5.0, and every pair with one member from each of those couples 8.0. Determine the branching order and describe the tree you would draw.
Show answer
Smallest distance first: A and B (2.0%) join at the shallowest node, C and D (5.0%) at their own. Every A-or-B to C-or-D comparison is the same 8.0%, so both couples descend from one deeper node. Draw a root splitting in two, one branch leading to a node giving A and B, the other to a node giving C and D. The distances are additive, so you can place the branch lengths too: 1.0 out to A and to B, 2.5 out to C and to D, and \(8.0 - 1.0 - 2.5 = 4.5\) along the internal branch between the couples.
A researcher adds the character "eggs laid in water": scored 1 in the lancelet, lamprey, tuna, and salamander, and 0 in the lizard. Predict whether it supports a clade containing the lamprey, tuna, and salamander, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: no; it supports no such clade, and adds only one step to either tree. Justification: the out-group has state 1, so state 1 is ancestral, and its presence in three ingroup taxa reflects inheritance from further back rather than a common ancestor unique to those three. The informative part is the lizard's 0, a derived loss that maps onto the lizard's own branch alongside the amniotic egg. Before using any character, check the out-group to see which state came first.
Lesson 7.7 · Unit 7 · CED topics 7.10–7.11
Speciation and extinction
Selection changes a population. Speciation splits one lineage into two that
can no longer merge, and the whole question is what stops the gene flow:
geography, chromosomes, courtship songs are all answers to that one question.
Extinction is the other end of the process, and the two rates set how many
species exist. Right now one of them is far out of line with the other.
Definition
Under the biological species concept, a species is a group
of populations whose members interbreed in nature and produce fertile
offspring, reproductively isolated from other such groups. It is the concept
the exam uses, and it has real limits: it cannot be applied to fossils, to
asexual organisms, or to the many plants and birds that hybridize where their
ranges meet.
Model
Prezygotic barriers act before fertilization:
habitat (the populations occupy different microhabitats),
temporal (they breed at different times), behavioral
(courtship signals do not match), mechanical (genitalia or flower
structures do not fit), and gametic (sperm and egg, or pollen and
stigma, are chemically incompatible). Postzygotic barriers
act after: reduced hybrid viability, reduced hybrid
fertility, and hybrid breakdown, where the first hybrid
generation is fine but the second is weak or sterile. Speciation is
allopatric when a physical barrier separates the
populations, and sympatric when it happens without one.
Worked example · Sympatric speciation in the apple maggot fly
Rhagoletis pomonella laid its eggs in hawthorn fruit until apples
were introduced to North America; by the mid-1800s a Hudson Valley population
was using apples instead. Both host races share the orchards today. What
keeps them apart?
Two prezygotic barriers together. Mating happens on the host fruit, so a fly
that chooses apples courts other apple flies: habitat isolation. Apples ripen
weeks earlier than hawthorn, and the apple race emerges earlier to match:
temporal isolation. Gene flow is low but real, and allele frequencies at
several loci now differ. Conclusion, justified: sympatric speciation
in progress, not two species, because the barriers are partial: calling them
separate species overstates the evidence, and saying nothing is happening
ignores the allele frequencies.
Worked example · Is the current extinction rate unusual?
The background rate from the fossil record is about 1
extinction per million species-years (1 E/MSY). A data set lists 80 documented
mammal extinctions in the past 500 years, from 5,513 mammal species.
\[ 5513 \times 500 = 2{,}756{,}500\ \text{species-years} = 2.76\ \text{million} \]
At the background rate that predicts \(1 \times 2.76 = 2.76\) extinctions.
Observed is 80, so the current rate is \(80/2.76 = 29\) times background.
Turned around: 80 mammal extinctions at the background rate would take
\(80/(5513/10^6) \approx 14{,}500\) years, not 500. That is the comparison a
grader wants: a computed ratio with the assumption stated, not "extinction is
faster now." A mass extinction is this kind of excess: the
K–Pg event 66 million years ago, marked worldwide by a thin iridium-rich clay
layer, removed about 75% of species. Emptied niches then drive
adaptive radiation: mammals after the K–Pg, about 30
Hawaiian silversword species from one tarweed colonist, hundreds of cichlids
in a single African lake.
Practice
Two tree frog species breed in the same ponds during the same two weeks, but females approach only males producing their own species' call. Identify the isolating barrier and explain why it is classified where it is.
Show answer
Behavioral isolation, a prezygotic barrier: it stops mating from happening at all, so no zygote forms and nothing is invested in a hybrid. Habitat and temporal isolation are ruled out by the stem, the frogs share both the pond and the calendar, which is why it specifies them. Identify a barrier by what the data exclude as much as by what they show; "they do not like each other" names no mechanism.
In a cliff face, one species of snail appears in a layer dated 6 million years old and is found unchanged through 4 million years of strata; a visibly different but clearly related form appears abruptly above it and persists unchanged for the next 2 million years, with no intermediates. Identify which model of the tempo of evolution this pattern supports, and describe what the alternative would look like.
Show answer
It supports punctuated equilibrium: long stasis interrupted by rapid change concentrated at speciation events. Under gradualism the same cliff would show a series of intermediates, each slightly different from the one below, with shell shape drifting steadily through all 6 million years. One caution worth stating: an abrupt appearance can also mean intermediates are missing because that habitat stopped depositing sediment, so the pattern supports the model without proving it.
A diploid plant with \(2n = 14\) produces an offspring in which the chromosome number has doubled to \(4n = 28\), and the tetraploid can self-pollinate. Predict whether the tetraploid and its diploid parents remain one species, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: they are now two species, split in a single generation. Justification: a cross joins a 14-chromosome gamete from the tetraploid with a 7-chromosome gamete from the diploid, giving a triploid with \(14 + 7 = 21\) chromosomes. With three of each chromosome, homologs cannot pair evenly at meiosis I, so gametes get unbalanced sets and the triploid is sterile: reduced hybrid fertility, a postzygotic barrier. The tetraploid still reproduces, since self-pollination pairs its chromosomes two by two. This is why polyploidy accounts for roughly 15% of speciation events in flowering plants.
Lesson 7.8 · Unit 7 · CED topics 7.12–7.13
The origin of life on Earth, and evolution now
Earth formed about 4.6 billion years ago; the oldest widely accepted microbial
fossils are roughly 3.5 billion years old. What happened in between happened
once and cannot be replayed, so the origin of life is studied as hypotheses
about steps, each testable in a flask even though the sequence is not.
Know the steps, and be careful with the wording: these experiments show the
chemistry is possible, not that this is how it happened.
Model
The standard four steps: (1) abiotic synthesis of monomers (amino acids, sugars, nucleotides) from simple gases and an energy source;
(2) polymerization, which open water does not favor but which
proceeds on hot clay and mineral surfaces that concentrate and align monomers;
(3) a self-replicating molecule, almost certainly RNA, which
both stores information and catalyzes reactions as a
ribozyme: Cech and Altman found catalytic RNA in living
cells, and the ribosome's peptide-bond-forming site is one;
(4) protobionts, membrane-bounded droplets that form
spontaneously when phospholipids are shaken in water. Then: prokaryotes by 3.5
billion years ago, atmospheric O2 from oxygenic photosynthesis about
2.4 billion years ago, and eukaryotes by endosymbiosis:
evidenced by the double membranes, circular DNA, and bacteria-sized ribosomes
of mitochondria and chloroplasts.
Formula
Radiometric dating measures the fraction of a parent isotope left:
\[ \frac{N}{N_0} = \left(\tfrac{1}{2}\right)^{t/t_{1/2}} \qquad\Rightarrow\qquad t = t_{1/2}\,\frac{\ln(N/N_0)}{\ln(0.5)} \]
Match the isotope to the age. Carbon-14 (\(t_{1/2} = 5{,}730\) years) dates
once-living material to roughly 50,000 years; potassium-40
(\(t_{1/2} = 1.25\) billion years) dates the volcanic ash above and below a
fossil bed, which is how the fossil record is calibrated.
Worked example · Miller and Urey, 1953
Question: can organic monomers form without life? Stanley Miller, in
Harold Urey's laboratory, sealed a flask of boiling water into a glass loop
holding methane, ammonia, and hydrogen, sparked the gas continuously to
simulate lightning, and condensed the products back into the water.
The independent variable is the spark discharge, the
dependent variable is the organic compounds accumulating in
the water, and the control is the same apparatus run without
the spark, which produced none. Result: within a week about 2% of the
carbon had entered amino acids, glycine most abundantly; a 2008 re-analysis of
Miller's archived vials identified more than 20. Conclusion, justified:
amino acid synthesis needs no organism, only simple gases and energy. The
caveat: Earth's early atmosphere was probably less reducing than Miller's
mixture, though conditions near volcanic vents may have resembled it.
Worked example · Reading a decay curve
Sketch the graph: fraction of original carbon-14 on the y-axis from 0 to 1,
time on the x-axis in thousands of years. The curve starts at 1.00, falls
steeply, passes 0.50 at 5,730 years, 0.25 at 11,460, and 0.125 at 17,190,
flattening toward zero. A charred bone retains 12.5% of its carbon-14. How
old is it?
\(0.125 = (1/2)^3\), so three half-lives have passed:
\(t = 3(5730) = 17{,}190\) years. For a fraction that is not a neat power of
two, use the logarithm: a sample at 30% gives
\(t = 5730\ln(0.30)/\ln(0.5) = 9{,}950\) years. Note where the method runs
out: after ten half-lives, 57,300 years, only \((1/2)^{10} = 0.098\%\) of the
carbon-14 remains, too little to measure. Older material takes potassium-40:
a rock retaining 25% of its original \(^{40}\)K has passed two half-lives,
\(2(1.25) = 2.5\) billion years.
Practice
Explain why RNA, rather than DNA or protein, is proposed as the first self-replicating molecule.
Show answer
RNA is the only one of the three that does both jobs. Its base sequence stores information and can be copied by complementary base pairing, and because it is single-stranded it folds into shapes that catalyze reactions: ribozymes, which Cech and Altman found operating in living cells. DNA stores information but catalyzes nothing; proteins catalyze but are not copied from themselves. A first replicator needs both functions in one molecule, or there is no way out of the chicken-and-egg problem.
A piece of charcoal from a campfire retains 60% of its original carbon-14. Calculate its age, and explain why the same method would be useless on a 2-million-year-old volcanic ash layer.
Show answer
\(t = 5730 \times \ln(0.60)/\ln(0.5) = 5730 \times 0.737 = 4{,}220\) years. The method fails on the ash for two reasons. Time: 2 million years is about 350 carbon-14 half-lives, so no measurable parent isotope remains, the method is limited to roughly 50,000 years, where 0.24% is still present. Material: carbon-14 dating requires carbon that was once in a living organism exchanging with the atmosphere, and volcanic ash never was. Potassium-40, with a 1.25-billion-year half-life, fits both the timescale and the material.
The seasonal influenza vaccine is reformulated every year. Predict what would happen to its effectiveness if the same formulation were used for five consecutive years, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: effectiveness falls year over year, and by the fifth season it would be substantially lower. Justification: influenza's surface proteins accumulate mutations every replication cycle, and in a vaccinated population the variants whose surface proteins antibodies no longer recognize have the highest reproductive success; antigenic drift is natural selection with the immune system as the selective agent. The longer one formulation is used, the greater the advantage of escaping it. The same logic covers MRSA, herbicide-resistant weeds, and tumors that return after chemotherapy: evolution did not finish, and "the virus adapts to the vaccine" reverses the cause.
Unit 7 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 7 quiz: Natural Selection
Fifteen multiple-choice items and five short free-response questions across all eight
lessons (selection in the field, artificial selection, Hardy–Weinberg, drift and gene flow, the
evidence for common ancestry, cladistics, speciation and extinction, and the origin of life), so click an option to see why each answer is right or wrong, then write each FRQ in ten minutes
before you open the model.
Multiple choice
Figure: bill width in a West African seedcracker finch population. Every
fledgling in one cohort was measured and banded at the start of the dry season, and the
survivors of that same cohort were re-measured six months later.
Bill width (mm)
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
Fledglings (n = 200)
20
50
60
50
20
Survivors (n = 100)
25
20
10
20
25
Which statement best identifies the mode of selection acting on bill width and the evidence for it?
The mean does not move at all: the fledgling mean is 2800/200 = 14.0 mm and the survivor mean is 1400/100 = 14.0 mm. Directional selection requires the whole distribution to slide toward one tail, and this one stayed centered while it spread.
Stabilizing selection trims both tails and narrows the curve, which is the exact opposite of this result: the 14.0 mm class fell from 30% of the cohort to 10%, the worst survival of any class. Mortality highest in the middle is the signature of disruptive selection.
Correct. The mean is unchanged but the spread grows: the 12.0 mm and 16.0 mm classes together go from 40/200 = 20% of the birds to 50/100 = 50%, while the intermediate class collapses. Name a mode from the mean and the spread together, and here only the spread changed.
A constant mean is not evidence of no selection, because the mean is blind to changes in shape. Half the cohort died, and the survivors are not a random sample of it: the extremes were strongly favored, which is selection by definition.
A male Pacific salmon returns to spawn at age 3, fertilizes about 900 eggs, and dies; 18 of his offspring survive to spawn themselves. A rival male of the same species delays returning until age 5, fertilizes about 2,400 eggs, and dies; 12 of his offspring survive to spawn. Which comparison of the two males' fitness is correct?
Eggs fertilized is an intermediate step, not the currency. Most of those 2,400 zygotes never reach spawning age, and only the ones that do can pass the male's alleles into the next generation, which is why the count that matters is 12, not 2,400.
Correct. Fitness is the number of offspring that survive to reproduce, relative to others in the population, so 18 beats 12 and nothing else in the stem changes that. The shorter lifespan is irrelevant except through its effect on that number.
Survival raises fitness only insofar as it converts into offspring that themselves reproduce, and here the extra two years did not: the older male ended with six fewer reproducing offspring. Equating fitness with longevity, size, or strength is the most common error on this topic.
"Both reproduced" is a yes-or-no statement, and fitness is a comparison of quantities. Selection works on the difference between 18 and 12, and over many generations a 50% edge in reproducing offspring per generation changes allele frequencies quickly.
Description of: a replica-plating experiment on Escherichia coli, of the
kind Joshua and Esther Lederberg performed in 1952.
A master plate of antibiotic-free agar carries about 200 colonies in a scattered pattern. A
sterile velvet pad is pressed onto the master plate and then onto each of three plates
containing streptomycin, transferring the pattern intact. After incubation, all three
streptomycin plates show colonies in the same three positions relative to a reference mark,
and nowhere else. Cells are then scraped from those three positions on the master plate, which has never held any antibiotic, and grown in streptomycin broth. All three grow into
fully resistant cultures.
Which conclusion about the origin of streptomycin resistance is best supported by this result?
If the drug induced the mutations, the surviving positions would differ from replica to replica, because induction would strike cells at random. Instead the same three positions grow every time, and the untreated master-plate cells from those positions are already resistant: so the drug selected variants, it did not create them.
Correct. Resistance can be located on a plate that has never seen the antibiotic, which is only possible if the alleles arose by mutation beforehand. The antibiotic's role is to kill everything else, raising the frequency of a variant that was already there.
The velvet transfers cells, not traits, and it touches every position equally, if it were spreading resistance, resistant growth would appear in far more than three positions and would not repeat in the same three each time.
Conjugation does move resistance plasmids between bacteria, so this is a real mechanism, but it cannot explain this result: the master-plate cells that never touched streptomycin were already resistant before any incubation on the drug plates occurred.
Over eighteen months, a hospital ward records carbapenem-resistant isolates of Klebsiella, Escherichia, and Enterobacter. Sequencing shows that all three genera carry the same resistance gene, with an identical sequence, on a plasmid of the same size. Which process best accounts for this pattern?
Independent mutation is the source of new alleles, but it would not produce an identical sequence on an identically sized plasmid in three genera within eighteen months: convergence at that level of detail is vanishingly unlikely. Identical sequence in distant lineages points to a shared copy, not to three coincidences.
Correct. Conjugation, transformation, and transduction move DNA between bacteria that are not parent and offspring, and a conjugative plasmid can cross genus boundaries in a single step. That is why resistance can appear in a new species faster than mutation and selection alone could deliver it.
Bacteria are prokaryotes: they have no meiosis and no crossing over between homologous chromosomes in the eukaryotic sense. Recombination does reshuffle alleles in sexually reproducing eukaryotes, but it is not the route by which a gene enters a different species.
An antibiotic cannot instruct a cell to build the protein that defeats it; drugs kill or fail to kill, and nothing more. Writing that the drug "made" the bacteria resistant reverses cause and effect, which costs the point every time it appears.
A recessive metabolic disorder affects 1 in 2,500 newborns in a population that meets the Hardy–Weinberg conditions at this locus. Approximately what fraction of the population carries one copy of the allele without being affected?
1 in 50 is \(q\) itself: \(q = \sqrt{1/2500} = 0.02\). But \(q\) is the frequency of allele copies in the gene pool, and carriers are individuals with one copy, whose frequency is \(2pq\): about twice as large. Stopping at \(q\) is the single most common slip on this calculation.
Correct. \(q^2 = 1/2500 = 0.0004\), so \(q = 0.02\) and \(p = 0.98\), giving \(2pq = 2(0.98)(0.02) = 0.0392\), or about 1 in 25. Carriers outnumber affected individuals by \(0.0392/0.0004 = 98\) to 1, which is why a recessive allele persists so stubbornly.
1 in 1,250 is half the affected frequency, which corresponds to no genotype in the model. Heterozygotes are the \(2pq\) term and are always far more common than the recessive homozygotes whenever \(q\) is small, never rarer.
1 in 2,500 is \(q^2\), the frequency of the affected homozygote given in the stem. Carriers are unaffected by definition, so their frequency cannot equal the frequency of the disorder.
Data: genotype counts at a shell-banding locus in 1,000 adult land snails
collected from one hillside, shown with the counts expected under Hardy–Weinberg equilibrium
calculated from the allele frequencies of this same sample.
Genotype
BB
Bb
bb
Observed snails
300
200
500
Expected under equilibrium
160
480
360
A chi-square test on these counts gives \(\chi^2 = 340\) with 1 degree of freedom; the critical value at p = 0.05 is 3.841.
Which explanation is most consistent with the direction of the departure from the expected counts?
The expected counts were computed from this sample: \(p = [2(300) + 200]/2000 = 0.40\) and \(q = 0.60\), giving \(0.16(1000) = 160\), \(2(0.4)(0.6)(1000) = 480\), and \(0.36(1000) = 360\). The allele frequencies match by construction; it is the way those alleles are packaged into genotypes that does not.
Correct. Both homozygote classes are far above expectation and the heterozygotes are less than half of it: the signature of assortative mating, inbreeding, or a sample pooled across patches that rarely interbreed. Nonrandom mating shifts genotype frequencies while leaving \(p\) and \(q\) untouched, exactly as the two rows show.
Gene flow adds migrants carrying different allele frequencies, and mixing two differentiated groups and then letting them interbreed produces heterozygotes; on its own it does not create a two-thirds shortfall of them. The data show a heterozygote deficit, which points the other way.
This sentence is true (drift is weak at \(N = 1000\), and it correctly rules one mechanism out), but ruling something out is not an explanation of the pattern. The question asks what produced the excess of homozygotes, and this option never says.
Figure: allele frequency \(q\) at a neutral marker plotted against generation
for 24 laboratory Drosophila populations, all founded at \(q = 0.50\) and followed for
20 generations with no selection on the marker.
Twelve populations were held to 8 breeding adults each. Their traces fan out in both
directions within five generations; by generation 20, seven have reached \(q = 0\), four have
reached \(q = 1.00\), and the last sits at 0.31. The other twelve populations were held to 800
breeding adults each. Every one of those traces stays between 0.47 and 0.53 for all 20
generations, wandering with no consistent direction.
Which statement is best supported by the figure?
If the allele were deleterious in small populations, the small-population traces would move in one direction: down. They do not: four fixed the allele at \(q = 1.00\) while seven lost it entirely, and a selective disadvantage cannot push different populations opposite ways.
Correct. This is genetic drift: sampling error in which gametes happen to make the next generation. Its magnitude scales as \(\sqrt{pq/2N}\), so the standard deviation of one generation's change is about \(\sqrt{0.25/16} = 0.125\) at \(N = 8\) but only \(\sqrt{0.25/1600} = 0.0125\) at \(N = 800\): a tenfold difference, and the traces show exactly that.
The stem states there is no selection on the marker, and nothing in the figure measures resources. Attributing any allele-frequency change to selection by default is the habit this experiment was designed to break: chance alone moves frequencies, and in small populations it moves them a lot.
The populations are separate cultures with no migration between them, so there is no gene flow to invoke. Gene flow would also make the populations more alike, whereas these diverged until most hit opposite ends of the scale.
An island population of 750 beetles has \(q = 0.20\) for a wing-pattern allele. A storm carries 250 beetles from the mainland, where \(q = 0.80\), onto the island, and the newcomers breed freely with the residents. What is \(q\) in the combined population, and what mechanism has operated?
Correct. Count allele copies rather than averaging frequencies: residents contribute \(2(750)(0.20) = 300\) copies and migrants \(2(250)(0.80) = 400\), out of \(2(1000) = 2000\) total, so \(q = 700/2000 = 0.35\). Migrants moving alleles between populations is the definition of gene flow.
0.50 is the unweighted average of 0.20 and 0.80, which would be right only if the two groups were the same size. The residents outnumber the migrants three to one, so the combined frequency must sit much closer to the island's 0.20 than to the midpoint.
0.60 weights the small migrant group far too heavily, and the mechanism is misnamed as well: drift is change from random sampling of who reproduces within a population, not from the arrival of individuals from outside it.
Nonrandom mating really does change genotype frequencies without changing allele frequencies, that rule is worth knowing, but it is the wrong rule here. Immigrants physically add allele copies to the gene pool, so \(p\) and \(q\) must change.
Data: amino-acid differences in a conserved 110-residue enzyme, each species
compared with species A, alongside divergence times taken from the fossil record.
Compared with species A
B
C
D
E
Amino-acid differences
6
24
18
36
Fossil divergence time (Mya)
25
100
not known
150
Using the three fossil-calibrated comparisons to set the rate, the best estimate of the time since species A and species D last shared a common ancestor is
18 is the number of amino-acid differences, not a time. Differences only become a date once you divide by a rate, and the rate here is well under one difference per million years, so the age must be far larger than 18.
Correct. All three calibration points give the same rate, \(6/25 = 0.24\), \(24/100 = 0.24\), and \(36/150 = 0.24\) differences per million years, so \(18/0.24 = 75\) million years. A clock this consistent across three independent nodes is about as good as molecular dating gets.
92 is roughly the average of the three known divergence times (25, 100, and 150), which ignores species D's own data entirely. Averaging the calibration ages estimates nothing about D; the calibration is used to get a rate, and the rate is then applied to D's 18 differences.
4.3 comes from multiplying by the rate, \(18 \times 0.24\), instead of dividing by it. Check the units: differences divided by (differences per million years) yields million years, which is the quantity the question asks for.
The eye of an octopus and the eye of a vertebrate each have a cornea, a lens, an iris, and a retina. But in the octopus the photoreceptors face the incoming light, while in the vertebrate they face away from it, behind a layer of nerve fibers that exits through a hole in the retina and creates a blind spot. Which conclusion does this difference best support?
Homologous structures share an underlying construction inherited from a common ancestor, and these two are built back to front relative to each other. The last common ancestor of molluscs and vertebrates had at most a light-sensitive patch, so the shared camera design was assembled twice.
Correct. Similar function plus different underlying construction is the definition of analogy. Focusing light onto a sheet of receptors is a physics problem with a limited number of good solutions, so lineages that never shared a camera eye converged on one, and the inverted vertebrate retina is the developmental fingerprint that gives the separate origins away.
Selection has no target and no scale of advancement; it sorts whatever variation exists in the environment that exists. The vertebrate retina's wiring is a historical constraint that works well enough, and "more highly evolved" is not a claim any data in the stem could support.
A vestigial structure is a reduced remnant of a feature that was functional in an ancestor, such as a whale's internal pelvis. The vertebrate retina is fully functional; the blind spot is a byproduct of how the nerve fibers exit, not a leftover of anything.
Data: five land plants scored for five characters (1 = present, 0 = absent),
with two competing trees proposed for them.
Taxon
Protected embryo
Vascular tissue
True roots
Seeds
Flowers
Green alga (out-group)
0
0
0
0
0
Moss
1
0
0
0
0
Fern
1
1
1
0
0
Pine
1
1
1
1
0
Sunflower
1
1
1
1
1
Tree 1 is fully nested: the green alga branches off first, then the moss, then
the fern, and the last node splits the pine from the sunflower. Tree 2 has the
green alga branch off first, after which the remaining four taxa split into a moss + fern clade
and a pine + sunflower clade.
Under maximum parsimony, how many fewer character-state changes does Tree 1 require than Tree 2?
They are not equally parsimonious, because the moss + fern grouping forces two characters to be explained twice. Run the count character by character before deciding: a tie is possible in principle, but here the totals differ.
One character is not enough. Both vascular tissue and true roots have the same distribution (fern, pine, sunflower), so Tree 2 pays an extra change for each of them, not just for one.
Correct. On Tree 1 every character arises exactly once on the branch below all the taxa that have it, for a total of 5 changes. On Tree 2, vascular tissue and true roots must each evolve twice, once in the fern and once in the pine + sunflower ancestor, or evolve once and be lost in the moss, so the total is 7. Tree 1 wins by \(7 - 5 = 2\) steps.
5 is the total number of changes Tree 1 requires, not the difference between the trees. The comparison the question asks for is 7 minus 5, which is how you state a parsimony result: this tree explains the same data with two fewer assumed events.
A published cladogram of eukaryotes places yeast at the far left-hand tip and humans at the far right-hand tip. A student concludes that humans are the most advanced taxon on the tree and that yeast is a human ancestor. Which statement identifies the errors in that reading?
Correct. Tip order carries no information, since rotating a branch around its node produces a different-looking drawing of the same hypothesis. And every tip is a terminal lineage: yeast and humans are cousins descended from the node between them, so the ancestor is that node, which is not any living species.
Reversing the direction of the same mistake does not fix it. Neither end of a cladogram is privileged, and no rotation of the branches makes any tip more "advanced" than another: all the tips are equally far in time from the root.
Living species belong at tips, which is exactly where yeast is drawn. Nodes represent inferred common ancestors, and placing an extant species at one would assert something the data cannot show.
Branch length means something only in a phylogram, where it represents amount of change, or a chronogram, where it represents time, and only when an axis or scale bar says so. In a plain cladogram branch lengths are drawn for legibility and carry no information at all.
Two species of Ambystoma salamander breed in the same ponds during the same two weeks of March. Males of each species release a distinct chemical courtship signal, and females approach only the signal of their own species. When researchers fertilize eggs of one species with sperm of the other in the laboratory, the eggs develop into healthy, fully fertile hybrids. Which barrier maintains the separation in nature, and how is it classified?
Gametic isolation means sperm and egg are chemically incompatible, and the laboratory cross rules it out: mixed gametes fuse and develop normally. The signal that fails is between adults, not between cells.
Correct. Courtship signals that do not match keep females from ever approaching heterospecific males, so mating does not occur and no zygote is formed, which is what makes the barrier prezygotic. Prezygotic barriers are the cheaper kind, because nothing is invested in a hybrid that will not pay off.
Postzygotic barriers act after fertilization, and the stem explicitly closes that door: the hybrids are healthy and fertile. If the hybrids thrive, the isolation in nature must be happening before the gametes ever meet.
Temporal isolation means breeding at different times, and the stem specifies the same two weeks in the same ponds. The question lists that detail precisely so you can eliminate both temporal and habitat isolation: identify a barrier by what the data exclude as much as by what they show.
Data: documented bird extinctions since 1500 CE, set beside the background
extinction rate estimated from the fossil record.
Quantity
Value
Bird species described
10,425
Interval considered
500 years
Documented extinctions in that interval
161
Background rate from the fossil record
1 extinction per million species-years
Which calculation and conclusion correctly use these data?
Correct. The background rate is per million species-years, so you must multiply species by years first: \(10{,}425 \times 500 = 5{,}212{,}500\) species-years, or 5.21 million, which predicts 5.21 extinctions. Then \(161/5.21 = 30.9\), about 31 times background: a computed ratio with the assumption stated is what earns the point.
A percentage of species lost has no time in it, and a rate must. The same 1.5% spread over 500,000 years instead of 500 would be unremarkable; it is the interval that makes this figure alarming, and dropping it throws the comparison away.
0.32 extinctions per year is a legitimate description of the observed data, but it is not the background rate: it is the very quantity that needs to be compared with the background. The option relabels the observation as the expectation, which makes any excess vanish by definition.
Dividing species by extinctions produces a number with the wrong units entirely and happens to land near the right order of magnitude by coincidence. Always check that the arithmetic matches the units of the rate you were given: extinctions per million species-years.
A volcanic ash layer lying directly beneath a bed of microbial fossils contains potassium-40 at 12.5% of its original abundance. The half-life of potassium-40 is 1.25 billion years. What is the best estimate of the age of the ash, and what does the result establish about the fossils?
0.16 billion years is \(0.125 \times 1.25\), which multiplies the half-life by the fraction remaining. Decay is exponential, not proportional: the fraction tells you how many half-lives have elapsed, and you multiply that count by the half-life.
Correct. \(0.125 = (1/2)^3\), so three half-lives have passed and \(t = 3(1.25) = 3.75\) billion years. Ash beneath a fossil bed was deposited before the fossils were, so it sets a maximum age: the fossils are younger than 3.75 billion years, and dating ash above them would set the minimum.
The age is right but the inference is not. The fossil bed sits on top of the ash, which means it formed afterward by an unknown interval; only bracketing the bed with dated layers above and below pins the fossils down, which is how the fossil record is actually calibrated.
Three half-lives is correct, but the half-life used is carbon-14's 5,730 years rather than potassium-40's 1.25 billion. Match the isotope to the material and the timescale: carbon-14 works only on once-living material younger than roughly 50,000 years, and volcanic ash was never alive.
Free response
Data: a student's investigation of streptomycin resistance in
Escherichia coli. On day 0, \(1.0 \times 10^{8}\) cells from a culture that had never
been exposed to an antibiotic were spread on each of ten agar plates containing streptomycin
and on each of ten plates of plain agar. The plain plates grew a confluent lawn; the
streptomycin plates averaged 40 colonies each. Survivors were then carried through 20 daily
transfers in streptomycin broth, and each day's population was sampled to measure the
percentage able to grow on streptomycin.
Daily transfers
0
5
10
15
20
Population able to grow on streptomycin (%)
0.00004
0.5
12
58
94
Using the investigation and the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the independent variable in the day-0 plating, and describe the purpose of the ten plates of plain agar.
Explain how the percentage of the population able to grow on streptomycin rose from 0.00004% to 94% over 20 transfers, in terms of what happens to the cells in this culture.
Construct a graph of the data. Put the number of daily transfers on the x-axis with a scale running from 0 to 20, put the percentage of the population able to grow on streptomycin on the y-axis with a scale running from 0 to 100, label both axes including units, plot the five points, and draw the curve through them.
Justify, using the day-0 plate counts as evidence, the claim that alleles conferring streptomycin resistance were present in the culture before streptomycin was ever applied.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: presence or absence of streptomycin in the agar as the independent variable, plus a description of the plain plates as the control that shows the cells were viable and plated at the stated density, so that low colony counts on the drug plates can be attributed to the drug rather than to a bad culture or a plating error. Do not accept: naming the variable with no description of the control's purpose; identifying "the bacteria" or "colony number" as the independent variable (colony number is the dependent variable); "the plain plates are the control" with nothing further.
(b) Accept: an explanation that runs cause to effect in this culture; rare cells already carrying a resistance allele survive each transfer while susceptible cells die, the survivors divide and pass the allele to their descendants, so the allele's frequency in the population climbs with each transfer; heritable variation plus differential reproduction equals a change in allele frequency. Do not accept: any statement that streptomycin caused, induced, or triggered the mutations; "the bacteria adapted" or "the bacteria became resistant" with no mechanism; an explanation that describes selection in general without ever applying it to this E. coli population.
(c) Accept: transfers on the x-axis and percent resistant on the y-axis, both axes labeled with units, a linear scale that spans 0–20 and 0–100 respectively, all five points plotted correctly, and a curve that is nearly flat through transfer 5, rises steeply between 10 and 15, and bends toward the top by 20. Award the point only if the axes are correctly assigned and labeled. Do not accept: the variables on reversed axes; unlabeled axes or missing units; a scale that does not accommodate all five points; a straight line drawn from (0, 0.00004) to (20, 94).
(d) Accept: a claim supported by the named evidence; 40 colonies grew on the very first streptomycin plates from a culture with no prior exposure, so about \(40/(1.0\times10^{8}) = 4 \times 10^{-7}\) of the cells were already resistant; the drug could only select among cells that already existed on the plate, so the alleles pre-dated the exposure. A reference to the Lederbergs' replica-plating result as corroboration may be included but cannot substitute for the data. Do not accept: restating the claim ("they were already resistant because resistance was already there"); citing the 94% value at transfer 20, which is after exposure and cannot establish what preceded it; a justification with no number from the day-0 plates.
Show a 4/4 response
a The independent variable is whether the agar contains streptomycin. The plain plates are the control: they show the cells were alive and plated at the density I claimed, so when only 40 colonies grow on the drug plates I can blame the streptomycin rather than a dead culture.
b A few cells in the starting culture already carried a resistance allele from an earlier mutation. Each transfer into streptomycin broth killed the susceptible cells, and only those rare resistant cells divided and passed the allele on. Because resistance is heritable and only resistant cells reproduced, its frequency climbed each day until nearly every cell had it.
c I put daily transfers on the x-axis from 0 to 20, marked every 5, and percent of the population able to grow on streptomycin on the y-axis from 0 to 100, marked every 10. I plotted (0, 0.00004), (5, 0.5), (10, 12), (15, 58) and (20, 94) and drew an S-shaped curve: flat to transfer 5, steepest from 10 to 15, bending toward 100 by 20.
d On day 0, 40 colonies grew from \(1.0 \times 10^{8}\) cells that had never met an antibiotic, so about \(4 \times 10^{-7}\) of the population was already resistant. Streptomycin cannot make a colony appear; it can only fail to kill one, so those alleles were there first.
Scenario: two populations of a stream salamander in the southern Appalachians.
About 12,000 years ago a ridge uplift split one salamander species into an eastern and a
western drainage, with no water connecting them. A canal dug in 1954 rejoined the drainages,
and the two forms now meet along a 3 km contact zone. Genetic markers identify 8% of adults in
the contact zone as hybrids. Clutches from within-population pairs hatch at 87%; clutches from
hybrid pairs hatch at 21%, and the hybrids that do reach adulthood produce almost no viable
sperm. Males of the two forms release different chemical courtship signals, and in the contact
zone females approach a male of their own form in 9 of every 10 trials.
Using the scenario, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the mode of speciation that produced the two salamander populations, and describe the evidence in the scenario that supports that identification.
Explain how the difference in hatching success between within-population pairs and hybrid pairs affects the strength of selection on female response to the courtship signal in the contact zone.
Predict how the percentage of adults in the contact zone that are hybrids will change over the next several hundred generations, and state the direction of that change.
Justify your prediction in (c) using specific evidence from the scenario.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: allopatric speciation, described with the evidence, a physical barrier (the ridge uplift) separated the populations for about 12,000 years with no gene flow between drainages, and the reproductive barriers observed today accumulated during that separation. Do not accept: "sympatric speciation" (the divergence happened while the populations were physically separated, and the canal only reunited them); naming allopatric speciation with no reference to the uplift, the barrier, or the interruption of gene flow; a definition of speciation in general.
(b) Accept: an explanation linking the fitness cost of hybridizing to selection on mate choice in these salamanders, a female that responds to the wrong signal produces a clutch that hatches at 21% instead of 87% and whose sons are effectively sterile, so she leaves far fewer reproducing offspring; alleles for responding only to the home signal are therefore favored, and selection on discrimination is strong. Do not accept: "hybrids are less fit, so the species stay separate" with no link to female response or to allele frequencies; a statement that hybrids die without saying what that does to selection on the females; a correct general account of reinforcement that never uses the salamander numbers or the signal.
(c) Accept: a specific directional claim that the hybrid percentage decreases, falls below 8%, or approaches zero over that span. A numerical estimate is not required. Do not accept: "it will change"; "the two forms will become one species"; a prediction that hybrids increase; a restatement of the 8% figure with no direction.
(d) Accept: a justification naming evidence and saying why it supports the claim, the hybrid hatching rate of 21% against 87%, and the sterility of hybrid males, mean hybrid matings contribute very few reproducing offspring, so alleles for accurate signal discrimination rise in frequency each generation; the 9-in-10 discrimination already observed is evidence that the process is under way (reinforcement). Do not accept: a claim with no cited number or observation; "hybrids are unfit" restated as the reason without connecting it to the change in female behavior; evidence listed without an explanation of why it supports the prediction.
Show a 4/4 response
a This is allopatric speciation. The ridge uplift physically separated one species into two drainages 12,000 years ago and stopped gene flow between them, and the courtship-signal difference and the hybrid problems both built up during that separation.
b A female that answers the wrong male's signal pays a large cost: her clutch hatches at 21% instead of 87%, and the few hybrid sons she raises make almost no viable sperm, so she gets very few grandchildren. A female that answers only her own form's signal gets the 87% clutch and fertile sons. Alleles for a picky response to the home signal therefore spread, so selection on discrimination in the contact zone is strong.
c I predict the hybrid share of adults in the contact zone drops: below 8%, and eventually close to zero.
d Hybrid clutches hatch at 21% against 87%, and hybrid males are effectively sterile, so almost none of the hybrids formed each generation reproduce. Meanwhile females already choose their own form 9 times in 10, which shows discrimination alleles are common and still being favored, so mismatched pairings should get rarer every generation.
Figure: a cladogram of five tetrapods, with the characters that define each
node listed beside it.
The salamander branches off first. The next node leads to the turtle on one side and, on the
other, to a clade containing the lizard, the crocodile, and the pigeon. Within that clade the
lizard branches next, and the final node splits the crocodile from the pigeon. The characters
are placed as follows: four limbs is present in all five taxa; the amniotic egg marks the node
leading to turtle, lizard, crocodile, and pigeon; two openings behind the eye socket marks the
node leading to lizard, crocodile, and pigeon; a muscular gizzard marks the node leading to
crocodile and pigeon; feathers appear on the pigeon's branch alone.
Using the cladogram, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the shared derived character that defines the clade containing only the crocodile and the pigeon, and describe what the node at the base of that clade represents.
Explain why the presence of four limbs in all five taxa provides no support for any grouping within this cladogram.
A newly described fossil tetrapod has an amniotic egg and two openings behind the eye socket, but no gizzard and no feathers. Represent its position: identify the part of the cladogram where its branch should attach, and describe how you would draw it.
Justify your placement in (c) using the character data, and state what additional evidence would be needed to resolve its position further.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the muscular gizzard as the shared derived character (synapomorphy), plus a description of the node as the most recent common ancestor of the crocodile and the pigeon: an inferred ancestral population in which the gizzard arose, not a living species. Do not accept: naming feathers (which mark only the pigeon's own branch) or the amniotic egg (which defines a larger clade); naming the gizzard with no description of the node; describing the node as "where the crocodile turned into the pigeon" or as one of the two living taxa.
(b) Accept: an explanation that four limbs is an ancestral (shared primitive) character for this set of taxa; it is present in the salamander, which is the out-group, so it arose before any of the splits shown and is simply inherited by everything descended from that ancestor; a character shared by all taxa cannot distinguish subgroups within them. Only shared derived characters define clades. Do not accept: "it is not important"; "limbs evolved more than once"; a statement that the character is ancestral with no reference to the out-group or to why that prevents it from grouping taxa.
(c) Accept: the fossil attaches inside the clade defined by the two skull openings but outside the clade defined by the gizzard (that is, its branch comes off the tree after the skull-opening node and before the crocodile + pigeon node) drawn either as a sister branch to the crocodile + pigeon clade or as a sister branch to the lizard, since the characters given cannot distinguish those two positions. Do not accept: placing it outside the amniotic-egg node; placing it inside the crocodile + pigeon clade; placing it on the pigeon's branch; an answer that names a position but never describes how the branch is drawn.
(d) Accept: a justification that names the characters and says what each rules in or out, the amniotic egg puts it inside the amniote clade, the two skull openings put it inside the next clade down, and the absence of a gizzard means there is no evidence placing it inside the crocodile + pigeon clade; further resolution requires additional characters shared with one lineage and not the other (more skeletal characters, or DNA from a close relative if it were recoverable). Do not accept: a placement with no characters cited; citing the characters without saying how they support the branch point; claiming the position is certain when the data leave two possibilities.
Show a 4/4 response
a The muscular gizzard is the shared derived character for the crocodile + pigeon clade. The node at its base stands for the most recent common ancestor those two share: an ancestral population in which the gizzard first appeared, not a living animal.
b Four limbs is ancestral here. I know because the salamander, the out-group, already has it, so the character arose before any split shown. Something every taxon inherited from the same earlier ancestor cannot separate one subgroup from another. Only characters that arose within the tree, like the gizzard, mark clades.
c I would attach the fossil's branch after the node marked by the two skull openings but before the node marked by the gizzard: a short branch off that stretch of the tree, drawn as sister either to the crocodile + pigeon clade or to the lizard.
d The amniotic egg puts it inside the amniote clade and the two skull openings put it inside the lizard–crocodile–pigeon clade, while having no gizzard gives me no reason to nest it with the crocodile and pigeon, so it sits below that node. To choose between the two possible positions I would need more characters that the fossil shares with only one of those lineages.
Data: mean hindlimb index (hindlimb length divided by body length) and mean
perch diameter for Anolis lizards on six small islands. In year 0 a ground-hunting
predatory lizard was introduced onto three of the islands; three comparable islands received no
predator. Values are the means of the three islands in each group.
Island group
Hindlimb index, year 0
Hindlimb index, year 6
Perch diameter, year 0 (cm)
Perch diameter, year 6 (cm)
Predator introduced
0.480
0.441
5.8
2.1
No predator
0.478
0.475
5.9
5.6
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the control in this investigation, and describe the change in mean hindlimb index on the predator islands between year 0 and year 6.
Explain the relationship between the change in perch diameter and the change in hindlimb index in these lizards.
Calculate the percent change in mean hindlimb index for the predator islands and for the predator-free islands, showing your setup for each.
Justify the claim that the change on the predator islands resulted from natural selection rather than from some pre-existing difference between the two groups of islands, using evidence from the data.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: the three islands with no predator introduced as the control, plus a description of the change: mean hindlimb index fell from 0.480 to 0.441, a decrease of 0.039, so the lizards' hindlimbs became shorter relative to body length. Do not accept: "the lizards" or "year 0" as the control; a description that says only "it changed" or "it went down" with no values; reporting the perch data in place of the hindlimb data.
(b) Accept: an explanation connecting the two trends causally in these lizards, the ground predator makes the ground and wide low perches dangerous, so lizards that spend time on narrow high twigs survive better; long hindlimbs give speed on broad surfaces but poor balance and maneuvering on narrow ones, so on narrow perches shorter-limbed individuals survive and reproduce better and the mean index falls. Do not accept: "the perches got smaller so the legs got smaller"; any statement that individual lizards' legs shortened during their lives; a general statement that predators cause evolution, with no link between perch diameter and limb length.
(c) Accept, with setup shown: predator islands \((0.441 - 0.480)/0.480 \times 100 = -8.1\%\) (a decrease of about 8.1%), and predator-free islands \((0.475 - 0.478)/0.478 \times 100 = -0.6\%\) (a decrease of about 0.6%). Sign or the word "decrease" is required; answers rounded to 8% and 0.6% are acceptable. Do not accept: the raw differences 0.039 and 0.003 with no percentage; a percentage with no setup shown; dividing by the year-6 value.
(d) Accept: a claim supported by named evidence, the two island groups started at effectively the same hindlimb index (0.480 and 0.478) and the same perch diameter (5.8 and 5.9 cm), so they were not different to begin with; only the islands that received the predator changed appreciably (−8.1% against −0.6%), and the predator is the one factor that differed, so the change tracks the treatment. Do not accept: a justification that never mentions the control islands; "the data show natural selection" with no comparison; citing the year-6 values alone without the year-0 baseline that establishes the islands were alike.
Show a 4/4 response
a The control is the three islands that got no predator. On the predator islands the mean hindlimb index fell from 0.480 in year 0 to 0.441 in year 6, a drop of 0.039, so those lizards ended up with shorter hindlimbs relative to body length.
b The introduced predator hunts on the ground, so wide low perches became dangerous and the lizards shifted to narrow twigs: perch diameter fell from 5.8 cm to 2.1 cm. Long hindlimbs are good for sprinting on broad surfaces but clumsy on a thin twig, so the shorter-limbed lizards kept their footing, survived, and reproduced. Their alleles became more common, which is why the mean index dropped.
c Predator islands: \((0.441 - 0.480)/0.480 = -0.039/0.480 = -0.081\), an 8.1% decrease. Predator-free islands: \((0.475 - 0.478)/0.478 = -0.003/0.478 = -0.006\), a 0.6% decrease.
d The two groups started the same, 0.480 against 0.478 for hindlimb index and 5.8 cm against 5.9 cm for perch diameter, so the islands were not different beforehand. After six years the predator islands had changed by 8.1% and the controls by only 0.6%, and the predator is the only thing that differed, so the shift came from selection rather than from the islands themselves.
Data: genotype counts for a coat-color gene in a rodent population living on
a lava field, sampled in year 1 and again in year 20. Between the samples the surrounding
vegetation was cleared, leaving more bare dark rock exposed. Allele D gives dark fur
and is dominant to d, which gives pale fur. Each sample contains 1,000 adults.
Sample
DD
Dd
dd
Year 1
360
480
160
Year 20
490
420
90
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Using the year-1 counts, identify the frequency of the d allele, and describe how you obtained it from the genotype counts.
Explain how both samples can match Hardy–Weinberg expectations and yet show that this population is evolving.
Calculate the number of heterozygotes expected in year 20 if the population were in Hardy–Weinberg equilibrium at the year-20 allele frequencies, showing your setup, and compare that value with the observed number.
Justify a claim about which Hardy–Weinberg condition is most likely to have been violated between year 1 and year 20, using evidence from the data and the scenario.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: \(q = 0.40\), described as obtained by counting allele copies: \(q = [2(160) + 480]/2000 = 800/2000 = 0.40\), or equivalently from \(q = \sqrt{160/1000} = \sqrt{0.16} = 0.40\). The description of the method is required. Do not accept: 0.16 (that is \(q^2\), the frequency of the recessive phenotype); 0.60 (that is \(p\)); the correct value with no statement of how it was obtained.
(b) Accept: an explanation distinguishing the two things Hardy–Weinberg describes, the equation predicts how alleles are packaged into genotypes within a single generation, so a sample can fit it at whatever allele frequencies happen to exist at that moment; evolution is a change in allele frequencies across generations, and here \(q\) fell from 0.40 to 0.30 between the samples, so the population evolved even though each snapshot fits. Do not accept: "the population is in equilibrium, so it is not evolving"; a restatement of the five conditions with no reference to the change in \(q\); an answer that treats a good fit in one generation as proof that nothing changed.
(c) Accept, with setup shown: \(p = [2(490) + 420]/2000 = 0.70\), \(q = 0.30\), so expected heterozygotes \(= 2pq(1000) = 2(0.70)(0.30)(1000) = 420\), which equals the observed 420: the genotype counts fit equilibrium exactly at the new allele frequencies. Do not accept: 480 (the year-1 value, carried over); a value with no setup; a comparison that reports the numbers but never states that they match.
(d) Accept: natural selection as the best-supported violated condition, justified with evidence; \(q\) fell from 0.40 to 0.30 in a directional way while the vegetation was cleared and more dark rock was exposed, which favours dark fur as camouflage; the sample is large (\(N = 1000\)), so drift is an unlikely explanation for a change of that size, and nothing in the scenario indicates migration or nonrandom mating. Do not accept: naming a condition with no evidence cited; "the population is not in equilibrium" (each sample fits the equation); claiming drift without addressing the population size; listing several conditions without arguing for one.
Show a 4/4 response
a In year 1, \(q = 0.40\). I counted allele copies rather than individuals: the 160 dd mice carry two d each and the 480 Dd mice carry one, so \(q = [2(160) + 480]/2000 = 800/2000 = 0.40\).
b Hardy–Weinberg only predicts how the alleles present right now get combined into genotypes in one round of random mating, so a sample can fit it at any allele frequency. Evolution is a change in those frequencies over time, and \(q\) went from 0.40 in year 1 to 0.30 in year 20: the gene pool changed even though each snapshot matches the prediction.
c Year 20: \(p = [2(490) + 420]/2000 = 1400/2000 = 0.70\), so \(q = 0.30\). Expected heterozygotes \(= 2pq \times 1000 = 2(0.70)(0.30)(1000) = 420\), which equals the observed 420, so the counts fit equilibrium exactly at the new frequencies.
d Natural selection. \(q\) dropped from 0.40 to 0.30 over 20 years just as the vegetation was cleared and more dark rock was exposed, which makes dark fur better camouflage. With 1,000 adults sampled, drift is far too weak to move an allele that much, and nothing in the scenario mentions migrants or mate choice by color.
Lesson 8.1 · Unit 8 · CED topic 8.1
Behavioral and physiological responses to the environment
An organism that cannot detect its environment cannot respond to it, and
one that cannot respond dies in the first cold snap. Behavior is a
phenotype: built by genes, tuned by experience, selected on exactly like
beak depth. So the exam question is rarely "what did the animal do?" It is
"how does doing that raise its fitness?"
Definition
Innate behavior is inherited and right the first time; learned behavior is modified by experience.
Taxis:directed movement along a stimulus gradient; a moth flying straight at a light is positive phototaxis.
Kinesis: a change in speed or turning rate with no steering. Pill bugs race in dry air and dawdle in damp air, so they pile up where it is damp.
Circadian rhythm: an endogenous ~24-hour cycle entrained by light. Photoperiodism keys a response to night length: flowering, gonad growth, and the timed programs of migration and hibernation, in which body temperature and metabolic rate fall for weeks.
Phototropism and gravitropism: auxin shifts to the shaded or lower side, elongates those cells, and bends the organ.
Model
In Karl von Frisch's waggle dance, a returning honeybee
forager runs a figure eight on the vertical comb: the angle of the
straight waggle run from vertical matches the angle of the food from
the sun, and the run's duration encodes distance. Every
cooperative-behavior answer has that shape: name the information
transferred, then the fitness benefit.
Formula
Choice-chamber counts are tested with chi-square:
\[ \chi^2 = \sum \frac{(o-e)^2}{e} \]
\(o\) observed, \(e\) expected, df = (categories) − 1. A two-chamber
test has df = 1 and a critical value of 3.841 at
p = 0.05; if \(\chi^2\) exceeds it, reject the null hypothesis
of a random distribution.
Worked example · Tinbergen's digger wasp
Question: how does a female digger wasp find her own burrow
among dozens? Niko Tinbergen ringed one entrance with pine cones, then
shifted the whole ring to one side after the wasp flew off to hunt.
Independent variable: position of the landmark ring.
Dependent variable: where the returning wasp searches.
Control: trials with the ring left untouched.
Result: she searched the center of the displaced ring,
ignoring the real burrow centimeters away. Conclusion,
justified: she navigates by learned visual landmarks: moving only
the landmarks moved her search, and the burrow never moved.
Worked example · Pill bugs and humidity
Sixty pill bugs are released at the junction of a two-chamber choice
apparatus, one half lined with moist filter paper and one dry. After 10
minutes, 44 sit in the moist half and 16 in the dry half. Test the null
hypothesis that humidity has no effect.
Under the null the bugs split 50:50, so \(e = 60/2 = 30\) per chamber.
\[ \chi^2 = \frac{(44-30)^2}{30} + \frac{(16-30)^2}{30}
= 6.533 + 6.533 = 13.07 \]
With df = 1 the critical value is 3.841, and 13.07 is larger, so
reject the null hypothesis (p < 0.05). Say it that
way: "the pill bugs liked the wet side" is the observation, and "the
results were significant" earns nothing without the comparison to
3.841. Note too that this is kinesis: nothing steered the
bugs, they just stopped moving once they arrived.
Practice
A blowfly maggot crawls in long straight lines under bright light and in short, reversing paths in shade, ending up mostly in shade. A mosquito flies directly up a carbon dioxide gradient toward a host. Identify each response as taxis or kinesis, and explain the difference.
Show answer
The maggot shows kinesis: the stimulus changes its speed and turning rate, not its heading, and the build-up in shade follows from moving less there. The mosquito shows taxis: it orients to the gradient and holds a direction. The test is whether the stimulus sets the animal's heading. "One moves toward and one moves away" is the classic wrong answer: kinesis has no direction at all.
Eighty pill bugs choose between a dark half and a lit half of a chamber; after 10 minutes, 52 are in the dark and 28 in the light. Calculate \(\chi^2\), compare it to the critical value, and state the conclusion.
Show answer
Expected is \(80/2 = 40\) per half. \(\chi^2 = (52-40)^2/40 + (28-40)^2/40 = 3.6 + 3.6 = 7.20\). With df = 1 the critical value is 3.841, and 7.20 exceeds it, so reject the null hypothesis that pill bugs distribute independently of light. The response is adaptive: pill bugs breathe through gill-like structures and dry out fast, and dark crevices are damp ones.
Chrysanthemum flowers only when the uninterrupted dark period exceeds a critical length. A grower holds plants on 10 hours light and 14 hours dark but switches on a lamp for two minutes in the middle of each night. Predict whether the plants flower, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: they will not flower. Justification: "short-day" plants are really long-night plants: the cue is continuous darkness, measured by phytochrome. The flash converts the pigment to its active form and restarts the clock, splitting one 14-hour night into two short nights, neither reaching the critical length. The justification point comes from naming night length as the cue, not from saying the light "disturbs" the plant.
Lesson 8.2 · Unit 8 · CED topic 8.2
Energy flow, productivity, and the 10% rule
Energy enters an ecosystem once, as sunlight, and leaves once, as heat.
It never comes back. Matter is different: the same carbon atom cycles
through a leaf, a caterpillar, a bird, and the soil indefinitely. Almost
every rule about food webs falls out of that one asymmetry:
matter cycles, energy flows through.
Definition
Autotrophs build organic molecules from inorganic carbon: photoautotrophs using light, chemoautotrophs using the oxidation of H2S or NH3. They are producers, trophic level 1.
Heterotrophs consume organic molecules: primary consumers eat producers, secondary consumers eat primary consumers, and so on. Decomposers feed on dead material at every level and return inorganic nutrients to the soil and water.
A food chain is one path; a food web is the real network, in which an omnivore occupies several levels at once.
Formula
\[ \mathrm{NPP} = \mathrm{GPP} - R \]
Gross primary productivity is all the energy a
producer fixes; \(R\) is what it burns in its own respiration;
net primary productivity is the leftover stored as new
biomass, and it is the only part a consumer can ever eat. Between
levels, roughly 10% of the energy becomes new biomass.
The missing 90% leaves as heat from cellular respiration, is never
eaten at all, or passes out undigested. That is also why a pyramid of
energy can never invert: a level cannot store more energy than the one
that feeds it supplied.
Worked example · Four trophic levels
A salt marsh has an NPP of 20,000 kcal/(m²·yr). Using the 10% rule,
calculate the energy available at each of the next three levels and
explain why five-link food chains are rare.
\[\begin{aligned}
\text{producers} &= 20{,}000\ \mathrm{kcal/(m^2{\cdot}yr)} \\
\text{primary consumers} &= 0.10(20{,}000) = 2{,}000 \\
\text{secondary consumers} &= 0.10(2{,}000) = 200 \\
\text{tertiary consumers} &= 0.10(200) = 20
\end{aligned}\]
The top predator gets \(20/20{,}000 = 0.1\%\) of what the marsh grass
fixed. A fifth level would have 2 kcal/(m²·yr), too little to support
a breeding population of anything large enough to eat a tertiary
consumer. Length is limited by energy, not by appetite.
Worked example · Reading a productivity table
Calculate NPP for each ecosystem and the percentage of GPP it represents.
Ecosystem
Tropical forest
Temperate grassland
Open ocean
GPP (g/m²·yr)
9000
1600
500
Respiration (g/m²·yr)
6500
800
375
NPP is 9000 − 6500 = 2500, 1600 − 800 =
800, and 500 − 375 = 125 g/(m²·yr).
As a share of GPP that is 27.8%, 50.0%, and 25.0%. The forest fixes by
far the most carbon yet keeps the smallest fraction, because it
maintains an enormous mass of non-photosynthetic trunk and root that
respires day and night. The same logic explains why endotherms are
expensive: a mammal spends most of its assimilated energy holding body
temperature constant and converts only about 1–2% into new biomass,
while an ectothermic fish at the same trophic level converts roughly
10%.
Practice
A meadow's producers store 45,000 kJ/(m²·yr) as NPP. Calculate the energy available to tertiary consumers, and describe two specific fates of the energy that does not reach the next level.
Show answer
Apply 10% three times: \(0.10(45{,}000) = 4{,}500\), then 450, then 45 kJ/(m²·yr) for tertiary consumers. Two fates: most is released as heat during cellular respiration at each level, and much of the rest is simply never consumed (roots, bark, dead leaves) or leaves the consumer undigested in feces. Note that decomposers recover the matter in all of it, but not the energy: that heat is gone from the ecosystem.
Three plots are measured for one year. Calculate NPP for each and identify which stores the largest share of its fixed energy as new biomass.
Plot
Mangrove
Desert shrub
Young pine plantation
GPP (g/m²·yr)
6000
400
3000
Respiration (g/m²·yr)
3000
250
1200
Show answer
NPP = GPP − R: mangrove 6000 − 3000 = 3000; desert shrub 400 − 250 = 150; pine plantation 3000 − 1200 = 1800 g/(m²·yr). As a share of GPP: 50.0%, 37.5%, and 60.0%. The young pine plantation stores the largest share, because a stand of small fast-growing trees carries little accumulated woody tissue to respire. Highest GPP and highest efficiency are not the same question: the mangrove wins the first and loses the second.
A region currently grows grain, feeds it to cattle, and feeds the beef to people. It converts entirely to growing the same grain for people to eat directly. Predict the change in the number of people the land can feed, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: roughly a tenfold increase. Justification: eating beef puts people at the third trophic level, so the grain's energy passes through one extra transfer in which about 90% is lost as heat, unconsumed tissue, and feces. Eating the grain directly makes people primary consumers and removes that step, so about ten times as much of the same NPP reaches human biomass. A prediction with no number and no reference to the 10% transfer earns the prediction point only.
Lesson 8.3 · Unit 8 · CED topics 8.3–8.4
Population ecology: density, demography, and growth models
A population is just a number that changes, and every change comes from
four events: births, deaths, immigration, emigration. Two models cover
almost all of it: one for a population with nothing in its way, one for
a population running into a limit.
Definition
Density is individuals per unit area. Dispersion is their pattern: clumped (patchy resources or social groups, the commonest), uniform (territoriality), random (rare, and only where individuals ignore each other).
Demography tracks birth and death rates by age; an age-structure diagram wide at the base forecasts growth even if the current rate is low.
Survivorship curves plot log survivors against percent of maximum lifespan. Type I stays flat, then drops late (heavy parental care: elephants); Type II is a straight line (constant risk at every age: many songbirds); Type III plunges at once, then flattens (huge broods, no care: oysters).
Formula
\[ \frac{dN}{dt} = r_{\max}N \qquad\qquad
\frac{dN}{dt} = r_{\max}N\frac{(K-N)}{K} \]
\(N\) is population size, \(r_{\max}\) the maximum per-capita growth
rate, and \(K\) the carrying capacity: the population
the environment can sustain. The per-capita rate itself is
\(r = b - d\), births minus deaths per individual per unit time. The
left model gives a J-shaped curve that never stops accelerating; the
right one multiplies it by \((K-N)/K\), the fraction of the
environment still unused, which falls to zero as \(N\) approaches
\(K\).
Model
Density-dependent limits intensify as the population
packs in (competition, predation, disease, waste), and they are what
produce \(K\). Density-independent events (fire,
flood, hard freeze) kill the same fraction whatever the
density. r-selected species make many cheap offspring
fast; K-selected species invest heavily in few
offspring near \(K\).
Worked example · Per-capita rate from raw counts
A deer herd of 2,000 records 300 births and 100 deaths in one year,
with no migration. Calculate \(b\), \(d\), \(r\), and the growth rate
for that year.
\[ b = \frac{300}{2000} = 0.15\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}, \qquad
d = \frac{100}{2000} = 0.05\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}} \]
\[ r = b - d = 0.10\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}, \qquad
\frac{dN}{dt} = rN = 0.10(2000) = 200\ \text{deer/yr} \]
Keep the two straight: \(r\) is a per-individual rate with units of
1/time, while \(dN/dt\) is whole animals per year. Writing "the growth
rate is 0.10 deer per year" mixes them and loses the point.
Worked example · Where logistic growth is fastest
The same herd is now limited to \(K = 1500\) with
\(r_{\max} = 0.10\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}\). Evaluate \(dN/dt\) at
\(N = K/4\), \(K/2\), and \(3K/4\), and describe the curve.
\[\begin{aligned}
N = 375:\ & 0.10(375)\tfrac{1500-375}{1500} = 37.5(0.75) = 28.125\ \text{deer/yr} \\
N = 750:\ & 0.10(750)\tfrac{1500-750}{1500} = 75.0(0.50) = 37.5\ \text{deer/yr} \\
N = 1125:\ & 0.10(1125)\tfrac{1500-1125}{1500} = 112.5(0.25) = 28.125\ \text{deer/yr}
\end{aligned}\]
Growth peaks exactly at \(K/2\), symmetric either side. Plot \(N\)
against time and you get the sigmoid curve: a slow
start near zero, the steepest slope as it passes 750, then a bend that
flattens against a dashed line at \(N = 1500\), where
\(dN/dt = 0\). Fisheries hold stocks near \(K/2\) for that reason.
Practice
A culture of 500 bacteria records 90 divisions and 15 deaths in one hour. Calculate \(r\) and \(dN/dt\), and identify whether this species is r-selected or K-selected.
Show answer
\(b = 90/500 = 0.18\ \mathrm{hr^{-1}}\), \(d = 15/500 = 0.03\ \mathrm{hr^{-1}}\), so \(r = 0.15\ \mathrm{hr^{-1}}\) and \(dN/dt = 0.15(500) = 75\) cells/hr. The species is r-selected: a very high maximum per-capita rate, tiny cheap offspring, and no parental investment, the strategy that wins in a new or disturbed habitat well below \(K\).
Three species are plotted on one survivorship graph, log number of survivors on the y-axis against percent of maximum lifespan on the x-axis. Curve A runs almost flat to 70% of lifespan, then falls steeply. Curve B is a straight diagonal. Curve C drops almost vertically in the first 10%, then levels off. Identify the type of each curve and describe the reproductive strategy that goes with curve C.
Show answer
A is Type I, B is Type II, C is Type III. Curve C's strategy: release enormous numbers of small offspring with no parental care, as an oyster or sea turtle does, so almost all die young but the few that survive live a long life. The log scale matters: it is what makes constant proportional mortality plot as the straight line in B.
An elephant seal colony has \(K = 400\) and \(r_{\max} = 0.25\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}\) and currently numbers 100. Predict whether the number of pups added per year will be larger when the colony reaches 200 or when it reaches 300, and justify your prediction with a calculation.
Show answer
Prediction: larger at 200. Justification: \(dN/dt = 0.25(200)(400-200)/400 = 50(0.50) = 25.0\) seals/yr, while at 300 it is \(0.25(300)(400-300)/400 = 75(0.25) = 18.75\) seals/yr. Logistic growth is fastest at \(K/2 = 200\) because that is where the product of population size and unused capacity is greatest; past it, density-dependent limits such as beach space and food competition cut the rate even though the population is still rising.
Lesson 8.4 · Unit 8 · CED topic 8.5
Community ecology: competition, predation, and symbiosis
Carrying capacity is not a property of a species: it is set by the
other species around it. Three classic removal experiments built almost
everything the exam asks about communities, and all three work the same
way: take one species out, leave an untouched plot beside it, and watch
what the rest do.
Definition
A niche is the full set of conditions and resources a
species uses. The fundamental niche is everywhere it
could live; the realized niche is where it
actually does, after competitors push it around. The
competitive exclusion principle says two species whose
niches overlap completely cannot coexist indefinitely on the same
limiting resource: one is eliminated. The usual escape is
resource partitioning: the species diverge in what,
where, or when they feed, and each keeps a narrower realized niche.
Model
Predation drives defenses: aposematic coloration
advertises a real toxin, Batesian mimicry is a
harmless species copying a dangerous one, and
Müllerian mimicry is two genuinely dangerous species
converging on one warning pattern so predators learn faster.
Symbioses are scored by who benefits: mutualism (+/+),
commensalism (+/0), parasitism (+/−). A keystone species
has an effect on the community far out of proportion to its biomass,
and removing one starts a trophic cascade that runs
down through the levels below it.
Worked example · Gause's Paramecium cultures
Question: can two species that eat the same bacteria share one
tube? G. F. Gause grew Paramecium aurelia and
P. caudatum separately and together on a fixed daily ration.
IV: presence of the competitor. DV:
population density over 16 days. Control: the
single-species tubes.
Density on day 16 (individuals/mL)
P. aurelia
P. caudatum
Grown alone
105
64
Grown together
90
6
Alone, each curve is sigmoid and flattens at its own \(K\). Together,
P. caudatum peaks near day 6 and then falls steadily, ending
\((64-6)/64 = 90.6\%\) below its own carrying capacity while
P. aurelia loses only \((105-90)/105 = 14.3\%\).
Conclusion, justified:P. caudatum was competitively
excluded: it declined toward zero only in the shared tube, and the
control shows the food and conditions alone could sustain it.
Worked example · Connell's barnacles
On Scottish rocks, Chthamalus adults occupy only the upper
intertidal and Balanus the lower. Joseph Connell scraped
Balanus off patches of the lower zone and left neighboring
patches untouched as a control. IV: presence of
Balanus. DV: survival and vertical range of
Chthamalus.
Young Chthamalus settled through both zones, but in control
patches the faster-growing Balanus undercut and crushed them;
where Balanus was removed, Chthamalus survived and
spread down. So the upper zone is Chthamalus's realized niche
while its fundamental niche covers both, and Balanus stays
low for a different reason, desiccation, not competition.
Worked example · Paine's keystone predator
Robert Paine removed the sea star Pisaster ochraceus from
intertidal plots on the Washington coast and left adjacent plots
stocked. Within a few years the mussel Mytilus californianus,
released from predation, monopolized the rock, and richness in the
removal plots fell from 15 species to 8: a 46.7% loss.
Conclusion:Pisaster is a keystone species, because
its predation on the dominant competitor for space is what kept space
open for everyone else.
Practice
Five warbler species feed on insects in the same spruce trees, but one works the topmost new needles, another the mid-crown interior, another the lower outer branches, and so on. Name the phenomenon and explain how it permits coexistence.
Show answer
This is resource partitioning, which narrows each species' realized niche. Coexistence follows because the species no longer compete for an identical limiting resource: each takes insects from a different microhabitat, so no one species' foraging drives another's death rate high enough to exclude it. This is the alternative outcome to competitive exclusion, and it is how the principle is tested: complete overlap eliminates one species, partial overlap does not.
Two flour beetle species are reared in identical jars at 29 °C, alone and together. Calculate the percent change in each species' population when the competitor is present, and identify which species is being excluded.
Adults after 60 days
Species X
Species Y
Reared alone
240
180
Reared together
205
12
Show answer
Species X: \((240-205)/240 = 14.6\%\) lower. Species Y: \((180-12)/180 = 93.3\%\) lower. Species Y is being excluded. The single-species jars are the control that makes the claim possible: they show both species thrive on that flour and temperature alone, so the collapse of Y can be attributed to the presence of X rather than to the conditions.
Sea otters eat sea urchins, and sea urchins graze the holdfasts of kelp. A fur trade removes otters from a stretch of coast. Predict what happens to urchin density and to kelp cover, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: urchin density rises sharply and kelp cover collapses, leaving bare "urchin barrens." Justification: the otter is a keystone predator, so its removal releases the herbivore from top-down control, and the enlarged urchin population grazes kelp faster than it regrows, a trophic cascade running down three levels. Paine's result is the same mechanism: removing Pisaster let Mytilus take the rock. A grader wants the cascade named and traced level by level, not just "the ecosystem is damaged."
Lesson 8.5 · Unit 8 · CED topic 8.6
Biodiversity, resilience, and succession
Two prairies can hold the same four species and still be nothing alike:
one has them in equal numbers, the other is 85% a single dominant grass.
"How many species?" is the wrong question on its own, which is exactly
why the exam gives you an index to compute instead of a list to count.
Definition
Species richness is the number of species present.
Evenness is how equally individuals are spread among
them. Diversity combines both. Diverse communities are
more resilient, they recover function faster after a
disturbance, for two reasons: redundancy, several species
doing the same job so the loss of one is covered, and response
diversity, those species tolerating different conditions, so
whatever the stress, something survives to keep the process running.
Formula
\[ D = 1 - \sum \left(\frac{n}{N}\right)^{2} \]
\(n\) is the number of individuals of one species and \(N\) the total
of all species. \(D\) is the probability that two individuals drawn at
random are different species, so it runs from 0 (one species only)
toward 1, and it rises with both richness and evenness.
Model
Primary succession starts on bare rock with no soil:
lichens and mosses are the pioneer species, and they
weather the rock and add organic matter until larger plants can root.
Secondary succession follows a disturbance that leaves
soil, a seed bank, and surviving roots, so it is far faster.
Island biogeography sets richness at the balance of
immigration and extinction: large islands hold bigger populations and
so lose fewer species, and near islands receive more colonists.
Worked example · Same richness, different diversity
Calculate Simpson's index for both 100-plant surveys.
Community
Big bluestem
Indiangrass
Coneflower
Dropseed
Restored prairie
25
25
25
25
Old field
85
5
5
5
Restored prairie: each \(n/N = 0.25\), so
\(\sum (n/N)^2 = 4(0.0625) = 0.25\) and \(D = 1 - 0.25 = 0.75\).
Old field: \(0.85^2 + 3(0.05^2) = 0.7225 + 0.0075 = 0.73\), so
\(D = 1 - 0.73 = 0.27\). Richness is 4 in both: the entire difference
is evenness. Interpreting it: two plants picked at
random in the prairie are different species 75% of the time, against
27% in the old field, which is dominated by one species. Reporting only
"the prairie is more diverse" without the index values is a description
with no evidence attached.
Worked example · Area and distance on islands
Resident bird species were counted on four islands in one archipelago.
Island
W
X
Y
Z
Area (km²)
10
10
250
250
Distance to mainland (km)
25
400
25
400
Species
32
18
61
39
Hold distance constant at 25 km and change area: 32 → 61 species, a
\((61-32)/32 = 90.6\%\) increase. Hold area constant at 10 km² and
change distance: 32 → 18, a \((32-18)/32 = 43.8\%\) decrease. The
design is a 2 × 2, so each effect is isolated. Explain: larger
islands support larger populations and more habitat types, lowering the
extinction rate; nearer islands intercept more dispersing colonists,
raising the immigration rate. Richness settles where the two rates meet.
Practice
A retreating glacier exposes bare rock. Elsewhere a forest burns but its soil is left intact. Identify the type of succession at each site and explain which reaches a mature community sooner.
Show answer
Bare rock is primary succession; the burned forest is secondary succession. The burned forest recovers far sooner, because soil already exists along with a seed bank and surviving root systems, so plants re-establish within a growing season. On bare rock, pioneer lichens and mosses must first weather the substrate and accumulate enough organic matter to make soil, which takes decades to centuries before larger plants can root at all.
Sixty invertebrates are collected from each of two ponds. Pond A holds 12 individuals of each of 5 species; pond B holds 50, 5, 3, 1, and 1. Calculate Simpson's index for each and interpret the difference.
Show answer
Pond A: each \(n/N = 12/60 = 0.20\), so \(\sum(n/N)^2 = 5(0.04) = 0.20\) and \(D = 0.80\). Pond B: \((50/60)^2 + (5/60)^2 + (3/60)^2 + 2(1/60)^2 = 0.6944 + 0.0069 + 0.0025 + 0.0006 = 0.7044\), so \(D = 0.30\). Both ponds have a richness of 5, so the gap comes entirely from evenness: pond B is 83% one species. Two individuals netted at random in pond A differ 80% of the time, against 30% in pond B.
A researcher plants two plots of equal area: one sown with a single grass cultivar, the other with sixteen prairie species. A two-year drought follows. Predict which plot loses the larger fraction of its productivity, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: the monoculture loses the larger fraction. Justification: resilience comes from redundancy and response diversity. In the sixteen-species plot the species differ in rooting depth and drought tolerance, so the deep-rooted ones keep fixing carbon while the shallow-rooted ones fail, and total productivity falls only partway. The monoculture has one tolerance; if that cultivar's threshold is crossed, nothing is left to compensate, and productivity collapses. Saying "diversity is good" is not a justification: the point comes from naming the mechanism that buffers the loss.
Lesson 8.6 · Unit 8 · CED topic 8.7
Disruptions: invasion, pollution, and climate change
Every ecosystem is disturbed; what matters is how fast, and how far
outside anything the community has experience with. A fire a forest has
burned through for millennia is a reset. A pollutant no lineage has met,
or warming faster than ranges can shift, is something else.
Definition
An invasive species is introduced, spreads, and causes harm. It spreads because it arrives without the predators and parasites that held it in check at home, usually with a high \(r_{\max}\): the zebra mussel in the Great Lakes, kudzu in the South, the brown tree snake on Guam.
Habitat loss removes area outright; fragmentation chops what is left into patches, raising the proportion of edge, cutting each patch's carrying capacity, and blocking gene flow between the small populations left.
Eutrophication: nitrogen and phosphorus runoff triggers an algal bloom; the algae die, decomposers multiply and respire, and their oxygen demand strips the deep water, producing hypoxia and a dead zone.
Climate change shifts ranges poleward and upslope, pulls spring events earlier (phenology) until interacting species fall out of step, and acidifies the ocean, since dissolved CO2 forms carbonic acid and leaves less carbonate for shells. Geological and meteorological disruptions (El Niño, wildfire, volcanic eruption) hit on their own schedule.
Caution
Bioaccumulation is one organism building up a
fat-soluble, slowly excreted toxin over its lifetime.
Biomagnification is the concentration climbing from
one trophic level to the next, because a predator eats many
contaminated prey but loses about 90% of their energy and none of their
DDT. Don't swap the words. And populations adapt, allele
frequencies shift, while individuals do not; a species facing a
disruption has three outcomes, adapt, migrate, or go
extinct.
Worked example · Biomagnification of DDT
DDT concentrations were measured along one estuary food chain.
Trophic level
Zooplankton
Small fish
Large fish
Osprey
DDT (ppm)
0.04
0.5
2.0
25
Step factors: \(0.5/0.04 = 12.5\times\), \(2.0/0.5 = 4.0\times\),
\(25/2.0 = 12.5\times\). Across the whole chain,
\(25/0.04 = 625\times\). Explain the mechanism: DDT is
lipid-soluble and excreted slowly, so it stays in body fat instead of
leaving in urine. An osprey eats many kilograms of fish to build one
kilogram of itself, and every molecule of DDT in those fish comes along: the energy is lost, the toxin is not. That is why it was the top
predators whose eggshells thinned.
Worked example · Reading the Mauna Loa CO₂ record
Sketch this graph: year on the x-axis from 1959 to 2023,
CO2 in ppm on the y-axis from 310 to 425. The trace climbs
from about 316 ppm to about 421 ppm, steepening slightly, and carries a
yearly sawtooth about 6 ppm tall that peaks in May and bottoms in late
September. Account for both patterns.
Average rate of the trend:
\(\dfrac{421 - 316}{2023 - 1959} = \dfrac{105}{64} = 1.64\) ppm per
year, a \(105/316 = 33.2\%\) rise overall. Trend: burning
fossil fuels and clearing forests release CO2 faster than
the oceans and biosphere take it up. Oscillation: most land is
in the Northern Hemisphere, so from May to September photosynthesis
there outpaces respiration and draws CO2 down, while through
the northern winter respiration and decomposition outpace
photosynthesis and it rises again. Two patterns, two causes: answer
both or lose half the credit.
Practice
Zebra mussels reached the Great Lakes in ballast water and spread across the basin within a decade. Explain two features that let an introduced species expand that fast, and describe one consequence for the native community.
Show answer
First, it left its coevolved predators and parasites behind, so its death rate in the new range is far lower than at home. Second, it has high reproductive output and broad tolerance, giving a large \(r_{\max}\) in a habitat far below its carrying capacity. Consequence: filter feeding at enormous densities strips plankton from the water and cuts the food supply of native larval fish. "It has no natural predators" alone is a restatement; the explanation needs the effect on birth or death rates.
Mercury was measured at four levels of a lake food chain: algae 0.02 ppm, zooplankton 0.24 ppm, minnows 1.2 ppm, walleye 9.6 ppm. Calculate the factor at each step and across the whole chain, and identify which consumer a public-health advisory should target.
Show answer
Step factors: \(0.24/0.02 = 12\times\), \(1.2/0.24 = 5\times\), \(9.6/1.2 = 8\times\). Overall, \(9.6/0.02 = 480\times\) from algae to walleye. The advisory should target walleye, the top consumer, because methylmercury binds tissue and is excreted slowly, so it accumulates within each fish and magnifies again at every transfer.
A migratory warbler times its arrival on the breeding grounds by day length, while the caterpillars it feeds its nestlings hatch when spring temperature crosses a threshold. Springs are now warming earlier, but day length is unchanged. Predict the effect on warbler reproductive success, and justify your prediction.
Show answer
Prediction: reproductive success falls; fewer nestlings fledged per pair. Justification: the caterpillar peak now comes earlier each year while the warbler's arrival cue does not shift at all, so the nestlings' period of greatest food demand no longer lines up with the peak prey supply. This phenological mismatch cuts provisioning rate and raises nestling mortality. The population's three options are the same three as always: shift the cue by natural selection on early-arriving genotypes, move to a range where the timing still matches, or decline toward local extinction.
Unit 8 quiz · 15 multiple-choice · 5 free-response
Unit 8 quiz: Ecology
Fifteen multiple-choice items and five short free-response questions across all six
lessons (responses to the environment, energy flow and productivity, population growth models,
species interactions, biodiversity and succession, and ecosystem disruption), so click an option to
see why each answer is right or wrong, then write each FRQ in ten minutes before you open the model.
Multiple choice
Data: a two-chamber choice test. Ninety terrestrial isopods were released at
the junction of a chamber whose two halves were identical in temperature and humidity but
differed in light. Counts were taken after 10 minutes.
Chamber half
Dark
Lit
Isopods observed
63
27
Expected if light has no effect
45
45
The critical value of \(\chi^2\) at df = 1 and p = 0.05 is 3.841.
Which statement correctly reports the chi-square analysis and its conclusion?
Correct. \(\chi^2 = (63-45)^2/45 + (27-45)^2/45 = 7.2 + 7.2 = 14.4\), and since 14.4 is larger than the critical value the deviation is too big to attribute to chance. "Reject the null hypothesis" is the required wording: the null is the 45:45 split, not the claim that light matters.
The statistic is right and so is the decision, but the explanation attached to it is not something a chi-square test can deliver. The test says the observed split is unlikely under a random distribution; it says nothing about humidity, and no statistical test ever "proves" a mechanism.
7.2 is only the first term. Chi-square sums \((o-e)^2/e\) over every category, so both the dark and the lit halves contribute, and dropping one halves the statistic. Here it happens not to change the decision, but on borderline data it would.
17.1 comes from dividing each squared difference by the observed count, \(324/63 + 324/27\), rather than by the expected count. The denominator in \(\chi^2\) is always the expected value, because that is what sets the scale of the deviation you would tolerate by chance.
A beetle larva moves in long straight runs across dry sand and in short, frequently reversing paths across damp sand, so that over an hour most of the larvae end up on the damp side of a tray. In a separate experiment, a male moth flies steadily upwind along a plume of female pheromone until it reaches the source. Which classification of the two responses is correct?
Where the animals end up is the outcome, not the test. Kinesis produces a non-random final distribution without any steering at all (the larvae simply move less on damp sand, so they accumulate there), so a sensible endpoint cannot distinguish the two categories.
Correct. The damp sand changes the larva's speed and turning rate but not the direction it faces, which is kinesis; the moth orients its body relative to the plume and holds a heading, which is taxis. The single question to ask is whether the stimulus sets the animal's heading.
This reverses both. The larva never orients to the moisture gradient, and the moth's flight is directed by definition: it tracks a plume upwind rather than wandering until it happens to arrive.
Kinesis and taxis are distinguished by whether movement is directed, not by which sense organ or stimulus type is involved. A chemical gradient can drive either one: chemotaxis in the moth here, and a chemically triggered kinesis in other species.
Data: energy measured at four trophic levels of a salt-marsh food chain over
one year, in kJ per square metre per year.
Trophic level
Producers
Primary consumers
Secondary consumers
Tertiary consumers
Energy [kJ/(m²·yr)]
15,000
1,800
150
12
Which statement is best supported by these measurements?
Correct. The three transfer efficiencies are \(1800/15000 = 12.0\%\), \(150/1800 = 8.3\%\), and \(12/150 = 8.0\%\), so the first is the largest. Real ecosystems scatter around 10% rather than hitting it exactly, which is why the exam wants the ratio computed rather than assumed.
Less energy is lost there in absolute terms (138 kJ against 13,200 kJ at the first step), but efficiency is a proportion, not a difference. As a proportion the last step is the worst of the three at 8.0%, and comparing raw losses across levels of wildly different size is the trap here.
The 10% rule is a rough average, not a law that data must obey, and these data do not obey it: 12.0%, 8.3%, and 8.0%. Use it to estimate when you are given nothing else, but when you are handed numbers, divide.
The arithmetic is off by a factor of ten: \(12/15000 = 0.0008 = 0.08\%\), not 0.8%. The point the number makes is still worth holding on to: a top predator here lives on eight parts in ten thousand of what the marsh grass stored.
A forest plot's producers fix 4,200 g/(m²·yr) of carbon, and those producers respire 1,900 g/(m²·yr) of it in their own cellular respiration. Which quantity is available to the plot's primary consumers, and why?
4,200 is gross primary productivity, the total fixed. A large share of it is spent immediately by the plants themselves keeping their own cells alive, and a consumer cannot eat energy that has already left as heat.
Correct. \(\mathrm{NPP} = \mathrm{GPP} - R = 4200 - 1900 = 2300\) g/(m²·yr), which is 54.8% of GPP. NPP is the only part stored in leaves, stems, and roots, and it is therefore the only part that can move to the next trophic level.
Producer respiration removes energy from the ecosystem as heat; it is the term you subtract, not the term consumers receive. Consumers run their own respiration on the biomass they eat, but the plants' respiration is gone before any herbivore arrives.
Adding respiration to GPP double-counts, and it moves in the wrong direction as well: respiration is a loss. The equation has a minus sign for exactly this reason, and 6,100 exceeds the total the plot ever captured.
In open-ocean plankton communities the standing biomass of phytoplankton at any moment is often smaller than the standing biomass of the zooplankton feeding on them, so a pyramid of biomass drawn for a single instant is inverted. Which statement explains how this is possible when a pyramid of energy can never be inverted?
Zooplankton are heterotrophs and fix no carbon from light. Even if some did, the explanation the question asks for concerns the difference between a standing stock measured at one moment and a flow measured over time.
Correct. A biomass pyramid is a snapshot; an energy pyramid is a rate. Phytoplankton turn over every few days, so the annual production passing through that thin standing crop is enormous, and the energy reaching the zooplankton is still far less than the producers fixed.
Transfer efficiency near 10% is observed in aquatic systems too: it follows from respiration, unconsumed tissue, and undigested material, none of which are peculiar to land. The inverted biomass pyramid is about turnover time, not about a suspended rule.
Decomposers recycle matter, returning nitrogen and phosphorus to the water, but the energy in dead material leaves as heat when they respire it. Energy flows through an ecosystem once and never returns to a higher level.
Figure: population size \(N\) of a yeast culture plotted against time in hours.
The curve starts at \(N = 60\) and rises slowly for the first few hours, then climbs steeply,
reaching its steepest slope as it passes \(N = 3{,}000\) near hour 14. After that the slope
eases and the curve bends over, approaching a dashed horizontal line drawn at \(N = 6{,}000\)
without crossing it. The culture's maximum per-capita growth rate is
\(r_{\max} = 0.4\ \mathrm{hr^{-1}}\).
Applying the logistic model \(dN/dt = r_{\max}N(K-N)/K\) to this culture, which statement is correct?
Correct. \(K = 6000\) is read off the dashed asymptote, and \(dN/dt = 0.4(3000)(6000-3000)/6000 = 1200(0.50) = 600\) cells/hr. Logistic growth always peaks at \(K/2\), where the product of population size and unused capacity is largest, which is exactly where the drawn curve is steepest.
At \(N = 5900\) the population is large but the unused fraction \((K-N)/K = 100/6000 = 0.0167\) is nearly gone, so \(dN/dt = 0.4(5900)(0.0167) = 39\) cells/hr. Growth is the product of two terms, and near \(K\) the second one collapses.
Per-capita rate and whole-population rate are different quantities. The per-capita rate \(r_{\max}(K-N)/K\) is greatest when \(N\) is smallest: near 60 cells it is almost the full 0.4 hr⁻¹, while the number of new cells per hour peaks at \(K/2\).
\(dN/dt = 0\) at \(N = K = 6000\), the dashed line the curve approaches, not at \(N = 3000\). Half the carrying capacity is where growth is fastest, which is the opposite of where it stops.
A population of 4,000 voles records 560 births and 240 deaths over one year, with no immigration or emigration. Which pair of values correctly reports the per-capita growth rate and the population growth rate?
Correct. \(b = 560/4000 = 0.14\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}\), \(d = 240/4000 = 0.06\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}\), so \(r = b - d = 0.08\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}\) and \(dN/dt = rN = 0.08(4000) = 320\) voles per year. Check the units as a safeguard: \(r\) is per individual per year, \(dN/dt\) is whole animals per year.
The two values are swapped. A per-capita rate cannot be measured in voles, and a population growth rate cannot be a pure reciprocal-time quantity: the units alone rule this out without any arithmetic.
0.14 is the birth rate \(b\) alone, and 560 is the number of births alone. Deaths are part of the population's change and must be subtracted, or the herd appears to grow at nearly twice its true rate.
Adding \(b\) and \(d\) instead of subtracting gives 0.20 and 800. Births add individuals and deaths remove them, so the two terms have opposite signs in \(r = b - d\).
Two factors reduce a deer herd. An unusually hard freeze kills roughly 30% of the animals whether the herd numbers 200 or 2,000. A lungworm parasite kills a far larger fraction of the herd when animals are crowded than when they are sparse. Which classification is correct, and which factor sets the herd's carrying capacity?
Correct. The freeze removes the same fraction regardless of crowding, which is the definition of density-independent. The parasite's effect intensifies with crowding, so it feeds back on the population and produces the levelling-off at \(K\): density-dependent factors are what \(K\) is made of.
This reverses the definitions. The test is not how many animals die but whether the proportion killed depends on density, and the stem states explicitly that the freeze's 30% does not.
Every mortality factor reduces numbers, so that cannot be the criterion. A density-independent event such as weather would cut the same fraction from a herd of 20 or 2,000, and it therefore cannot hold a population at any particular size.
Range size influences \(K\), but it does not act on the population on its own: it acts through density-dependent competition for the food and space that the range contains. And the parasite is clearly density-dependent by the stem's own description.
Data: two ciliate species reared in identical tubes on the same daily ration of
bacteria, each grown alone and the two grown together. Values are mean density on day 20.
Mean density on day 20 (individuals/mL)
Species M
Species N
Grown alone
320
150
Grown together
290
14
Which conclusion is best supported, and what role do the single-species tubes play?
Correct. Species N falls \((150-14)/150 = 90.7\%\) below its own carrying capacity in the shared tube while species M loses only \((320-290)/320 = 9.4\%\). The single-species tubes are what make the claim possible: they show N thrives alone on this ration, so its collapse can be attributed to M's presence.
Both species decline when together, so the direction of the effect is not what distinguishes them: the magnitude is. A 9.4% reduction is the cost of sharing a resource; a 90.7% reduction heading toward zero is exclusion.
Mutualism is a +/+ interaction in which both partners benefit. Here both species do worse together than alone, which is a −/− interaction: competition.
The control rules this out rather than supporting it. Grown alone on the same ration, species N reached 150 individuals per millilitre, so the food supply by itself was clearly sufficient; only the presence of M changed the outcome.
In a rocky intertidal community, a predatory sea star that makes up under 2% of the total animal biomass is removed from experimental plots. Within three years mussels cover nearly all the rock in those plots and species richness falls from 15 to 8, while adjacent untouched plots remain at 15 species. Which statement best describes the sea star's role and the evidence for it?
Correct. A keystone species has an effect out of all proportion to its biomass, and the removal experiment with untouched controls is exactly what demonstrates it: richness dropped \((15-8)/15 = 46.7\%\) where the sea star was taken out and held steady where it was not. The mechanism is predation on the dominant space competitor, which keeps rock open for everyone else.
A dominant species does shape a community through sheer abundance, but the stem rules that out, under 2% of biomass. That contrast between tiny biomass and huge effect is precisely what makes "keystone" the right word.
Pioneer species are the first colonists of bare substrate in primary succession, such as lichens on new rock. The sea star is a top predator in an established community, and nothing here concerns colonization of new surfaces.
An invasive species is introduced from elsewhere and causes harm as it spreads. This sea star is a native resident, and the experiment removes it rather than adding it.
Cattle egrets follow grazing cattle and catch insects flushed from the grass by the cattle's movement. A study finds that egrets foraging beside cattle capture significantly more insects per hour than egrets foraging alone, while the cattle's feeding rate, weight gain, and tick loads are statistically unchanged whether egrets are present or absent. How should the interaction be classified?
Mutualism requires a measurable benefit to both partners, and the study looked for one in the cattle (feeding rate, weight gain, and tick load), and found none. Assuming the cattle must gain something because the egrets are nearby is the error the data were collected to test.
Correct. The egret benefits from a higher capture rate and the cattle are measurably unaffected, which is the +/0 pattern. Note how the classification rests on the measurements rather than on the appearance of the association.
Parasitism requires harm to the host, and no cost to the cattle was detected on any of the three measures. The egrets take insects from the grass, not resources from the cattle.
Competition is a −/− interaction between species using the same limiting resource. Cattle eat grass and egrets eat insects, so they are not competing for anything, and only one of the two is affected at all.
Data: two quadrat surveys, each counting 100 individuals across four plant
species.
Community
Species 1
Species 2
Species 3
Species 4
Community 1
40
30
20
10
Community 2
70
10
10
10
Using Simpson's index \(D = 1 - \sum (n/N)^2\), which comparison of the two communities is correct?
Correct. Community 1: \(0.40^2 + 0.30^2 + 0.20^2 + 0.10^2 = 0.30\), so \(D = 0.70\). Community 2: \(0.70^2 + 3(0.10^2) = 0.52\), so \(D = 0.48\). Both hold four species, so richness is identical and only the spread of individuals among them differs.
These are the \(\sum(n/N)^2\) values with the final subtraction left out, and leaving it out reverses the ranking. The sum alone is the probability that two individuals drawn at random are the same species, which runs opposite to diversity.
Both communities contain exactly four species, so richness cannot be the difference. This is the situation the index exists for: a count of species alone would call these two communities identical.
Equal richness and equal sample size do not make equal diversity. Two plants drawn at random differ 70% of the time in community 1 but only 48% of the time in community 2, which is 70% one species.
A conservation agency must choose between two reserves of equal total area. Reserve P is one continuous 250 km² block lying 5 km from a large intact forest. Reserve Q is fifty separate 5 km² fragments scattered across farmland, the nearest of them 60 km from any intact forest. Island biogeography theory predicts that reserve P will support more species. Which pair of reasons supports that prediction?
Correct. Richness settles where immigration and extinction balance. Large area means larger populations, which are less vulnerable to drift, disease, and bad years, so extinction is lower; nearness means more dispersing colonists arrive, so immigration is higher. P wins on both rates at once.
Fifty small fragments have far more edge per unit area than one compact block, so the premise is backwards. Edge also tends to favour a few disturbance-tolerant and invasive species while interior specialists disappear, which is why fragmentation reduces richness.
Fragmentation cuts gene flow rather than raising it, that is one of the harms listed for it, because small populations are separated by farmland they cannot cross. Gene flow between populations generally lowers extinction risk by adding variation.
Small patches often do show more species per square kilometre, partly because they are almost all edge, but that does not settle total richness. The species-area relationship rises with area, and each isolated 5 km² fragment loses its large-bodied and interior species independently.
Data: PCB concentration measured at four levels of a marine food chain, in parts
per million of wet mass.
Organism
Phytoplankton
Zooplankton
Herring
Seal
PCB (ppm)
0.025
0.35
2.8
42
Which statement correctly describes the pattern in the data and the mechanism that produces it?
Correct. \(42/0.025 = 1680\), with step factors of \(0.35/0.025 = 14\), \(2.8/0.35 = 8\), and \(42/2.8 = 15\). The asymmetry is the whole mechanism: a seal must eat many kilograms of herring to build one kilogram of itself, the energy in the rest is lost as heat, and the fat-soluble PCB in all of it stays behind.
The factor is right and the word is wrong. Bioaccumulation is the build-up of a toxin within one organism across its own lifetime; the rise between trophic levels shown here is biomagnification. Both happen, but the table measures the second.
16.8 is off by a factor of one hundred: \(42/0.025 = 1680\). Check an order-of-magnitude estimate before committing: going from hundredths of a ppm to tens of ppm is four orders of magnitude of movement, not one.
Energy does the opposite: roughly 90% of it is lost at each transfer, which is why the pyramid of energy narrows upward. The toxin concentrates precisely because the energy does not: the biomass shrinks while the contaminant it carried does not.
Fertilizer runoff raises the nitrate and phosphate concentrations of a shallow coastal bay. Which sequence best describes how that produces a hypoxic dead zone in the deep water?
Correct. The oxygen is consumed by decomposers working on the dead bloom, not by the algae themselves, and the loss is worst at the bottom where the dead cells settle and where no light supports photosynthesis. Every step in the chain is needed: nutrients, bloom, die-off, decomposition, oxygen demand, hypoxia.
Photosynthesis releases oxygen; it does not consume it. A living bloom actually raises surface oxygen during the day, which is why the dead zone appears below the bloom and after it, once decomposers take over.
Ocean acidification is real but it is driven by dissolved CO₂ forming carbonic acid, not by nitrate and phosphate, and it is a separate consequence of climate change. This option swaps one disruption for another.
Fish populations do not rise during eutrophication: they collapse or flee. And fish respiration is a minor oxygen sink next to the bacterial decomposition of an entire bloom's worth of dead algae.
Free response
Data: a student's investigation of nutrient enrichment. Thirty identical flasks
were filled from the same pond and held at 22 °C under identical light. Six flasks received
each of five nitrate concentrations. Algal density and dissolved oxygen at the bottom of each
flask were measured after 14 days; values are treatment means.
Nitrate added (mg/L)
0
2
5
10
20
Algal density (10³ cells/mL)
15
48
120
265
280
Dissolved O₂ at day 14 (mg/L)
8.6
7.9
6.2
3.4
1.1
Using the investigation and the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the dependent variables in this investigation, and describe the purpose of the 0 mg/L treatment.
Explain how adding nitrate to a flask leads to the fall in dissolved oxygen measured at day 14.
Calculate the percent decrease in dissolved oxygen between the 0 mg/L and the 20 mg/L treatments, showing your setup.
Justify a claim about whether these results support the hypothesis that agricultural runoff causes hypoxic dead zones in coastal bays, using evidence from the data and naming one limitation of the investigation.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: algal density and dissolved oxygen concentration as the dependent variables, plus a description of the 0 mg/L flasks as the control: the baseline showing what the pond water does with no added nitrate, so any change in the other treatments can be attributed to the nitrate rather than to the flask, the light, or the temperature. Do not accept: nitrate concentration as a dependent variable (it is the independent variable); "the 0 mg/L flasks are the control" with no statement of what they establish; naming only one dependent variable when the table reports two.
(b) Accept: a mechanism traced through these flasks; added nitrate relieves the nutrient limit on algal growth, so algal density rises; the enlarged algal population dies and settles; decomposing bacteria multiply on the dead algae and consume oxygen in aerobic respiration faster than photosynthesis and diffusion replace it at the bottom of the flask, so dissolved oxygen falls. Do not accept: "the algae used up the oxygen" (photosynthesis releases oxygen; the decomposers consume it); "more nitrate means less oxygen" with no intervening steps; a correct textbook account of eutrophication that never refers to the flasks or the data.
(c) Accept, with setup shown: \((8.6 - 1.1)/8.6 \times 100 = 7.5/8.6 \times 100 = 87.2\%\) decrease (accept 87% or 87.2%). The word "decrease" or a negative sign is required. Do not accept: 7.5 mg/L reported as a percentage; a percentage with no setup; dividing by 1.1 instead of by the initial value of 8.6.
(d) Accept: a claim with named evidence and a named limitation, the data support the hypothesis, because oxygen falls monotonically as nitrate rises (8.6 to 1.1 mg/L, an 87% drop) while every other condition was held constant across the six-flask treatments, which is a controlled dose-response; the limitation must be specific, such as a 250 mL flask not reproducing the mixing, depth, tides, or grazers of a bay, only 14 days of observation, or a single pond's community. Do not accept: a claim with no data cited; a limitation stated as "more research is needed" or "the sample was small" without saying why that matters here; naming the limitation but never stating a claim.
Show a 4/4 response
a The dependent variables are algal density and dissolved oxygen, both measured at day 14. The 0 mg/L flasks are the control: they show what this pond water does over 14 days with no nitrate added, so changes in the other flasks can be blamed on the nitrate and not on the glassware, light, or temperature.
b Nitrate was the nutrient limiting algal growth, so adding it let the algae divide until density climbed from 15 to 280 thousand cells per millilitre. Those extra algae die and sink, and decomposing bacteria grow on them and respire aerobically. At the bottom there is little light and little mixing, so the bacteria pull oxygen out faster than it is replaced and dissolved oxygen drops to 1.1 mg/L.
c \((8.6 - 1.1)/8.6 = 7.5/8.6 = 0.872\), so an 87.2% decrease.
d The data support the hypothesis: oxygen fell at every step up in nitrate, to an 87% loss at 20 mg/L, and with six replicates per treatment under identical light and temperature the nitrate is the only thing that differed. The limitation is scale: a still flask has no tides, depth, or grazers, so it cannot show whether mixing would keep a real bay's bottom water oxygenated.
A temperate grassland has a net primary productivity of 32,000 kJ/(m²·yr). Grasshoppers eat the grasses, spiders eat the grasshoppers, and shrews eat the spiders. Assume the standard 10% transfer between trophic levels, and answer (a) through (d).
Identify the trophic level occupied by the spiders, and describe the difference between gross primary productivity and net primary productivity.
Explain why roughly 90% of the energy at one trophic level never becomes biomass at the next level in this grassland.
Calculate the energy available each year to the shrews, showing your setup.
Justify, using your calculation, the claim that this grassland could not support a fifth trophic level of predators that eat shrews.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: spiders as secondary consumers, trophic level 3, plus a description distinguishing the two productivities: GPP is all the energy the producers fix by photosynthesis, while NPP is what remains after the producers' own cellular respiration (\(\mathrm{NPP} = \mathrm{GPP} - R\)) and is the only portion stored as biomass available to consumers. Do not accept: "tertiary consumer" or "level 4"; a definition of NPP with no mention of respiration or of GPP; naming the level without describing the productivities.
(b) Accept: at least two named fates applied to this grassland, most assimilated energy is released as heat in cellular respiration, a large share of each level is never eaten at all (roots, stems, dead leaves, uneaten insects), and part of what is eaten passes out undigested in faeces; endotherms such as shrews spend most of their intake maintaining body temperature. Do not accept: "energy is lost" with no fate named; "energy is destroyed" or "used up" (it leaves as heat, and is conserved); a single fate named with no second.
(c) Accept, with setup shown: \(0.10(32{,}000) = 3{,}200\) kJ/(m²·yr) to grasshoppers, \(0.10(3{,}200) = 320\) to spiders, \(0.10(320) = 32\) kJ/(m²·yr) to shrews. Units are required. Do not accept: 320 (stopping one level short); 3,200; a value with no setup; a number with no units.
(d) Accept: a claim tied to the computed value, a fifth level would receive about \(0.10(32) = 3.2\) kJ/(m²·yr), which is far too little to meet the metabolic demands of a breeding population of predators large enough to catch shrews, so the chain is limited by energy supply rather than by the availability of prey species. Do not accept: "there is not enough energy" with no number; "food chains are usually four levels long" offered as the reason; a justification that restates (b) without using the calculation from (c).
Show a 4/4 response
a The spiders are secondary consumers, trophic level 3, because they eat the grasshoppers that ate the grass. Gross primary productivity is everything the grasses fix by photosynthesis; net primary productivity is what remains after the grasses respire some of it themselves, \(\mathrm{NPP} = \mathrm{GPP} - R\). Only NPP becomes plant biomass, so only NPP can be eaten.
b Most of the energy at each level is burned in cellular respiration and leaves as heat, which nothing recovers. A lot more is never eaten at all (roots, stems, and dead leaves that decomposers get instead of grasshoppers), and part of what is eaten passes through as faeces. The shrews are endotherms besides, so they spend most of what they assimilate holding body temperature rather than building tissue.
d A fifth level would get about \(0.10(32) = 3.2\) kJ per square metre per year. A predator big enough to hunt shrews needs far more than that, and needs a whole breeding population's worth of it, so the energy simply is not there. Chain length is set by energy, not by whether a suitable predator exists.
Model: elk reintroduced to a fenced mountain valley. Wildlife biologists
estimate the valley's carrying capacity at \(K = 2{,}000\) elk and the herd's maximum
per-capita growth rate at \(r_{\max} = 0.30\ \mathrm{yr^{-1}}\). The herd currently numbers 100
animals, and biologists model it with the logistic equation
\(dN/dt = r_{\max}N(K-N)/K\).
Using the model, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the carrying capacity of the valley, and describe what the term \((K-N)/K\) represents in the logistic model.
Explain how density-dependent factors acting on this elk herd produce the flattening of the logistic curve as \(N\) approaches \(K\).
Calculate \(dN/dt\) at \(N = 500\) and at \(N = 1{,}000\), showing your setup. Then construct a graph of \(dN/dt\) against \(N\): put \(N\) on the x-axis with a scale from 0 to 2,000, put \(dN/dt\) in elk per year on the y-axis, label both axes with units, plot your two calculated points together with the values at \(N = 0\) and \(N = 2{,}000\), and mark the population size at which growth is fastest.
Justify, using your calculated values, why a wildlife agency seeking the largest sustainable annual harvest would hold the herd near 1,000 animals rather than let it grow to 2,000.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: \(K = 2{,}000\) elk, plus a description of \((K-N)/K\) as the fraction of the environment's capacity still unused: it equals 1 when the valley is empty and 0 when \(N = K\), and it is the factor that scales exponential growth down as the herd fills the valley. Do not accept: identifying \(K\) with no description of the term; describing \((K-N)/K\) as "the number of elk that can still be added" (it is a fraction, not a count); calling it the growth rate.
(b) Accept: an explanation naming at least one density-dependent factor and tracing it to the rate in this herd, as elk density rises, competition for forage, winter range, and calving ground intensifies, and parasite and disease transmission increases, so the per-capita birth rate falls and the per-capita death rate rises; \(r\) declines toward zero and the curve levels off at \(K\). Do not accept: naming a density-independent factor such as a blizzard as the cause of levelling; "the elk run out of food, so they stop growing" with no reference to birth or death rates; a general definition of density dependence never applied to the elk.
(c) Accept, with setup shown: \(dN/dt = 0.30(500)(2000-500)/2000 = 150(0.75) = 112.5\) elk/yr and \(0.30(1000)(2000-1000)/2000 = 300(0.50) = 150\) elk/yr, together with a graph that has \(N\) on the x-axis and \(dN/dt\) on the y-axis, both labeled with units, a scale accommodating 0–2,000 and 0–150, the points (0, 0), (500, 112.5), (1000, 150), and (2000, 0) plotted, and \(N = 1{,}000\) marked as the maximum. Award the point only if both calculations are correct and the axes are correctly assigned and labeled. Do not accept: reversed axes; a plot of \(N\) against time in place of the requested graph; unlabeled axes; the maximum marked at \(N = 2{,}000\).
(d) Accept: a justification built on the computed values, at \(N = 1{,}000\) the herd adds 150 elk per year, the largest surplus available, so 150 animals can be removed annually without reducing the herd, whereas at \(N = 2{,}000\) growth is \(0.30(2000)(0)/2000 = 0\) and any harvest drives the population below \(K\); holding the herd at \(K/2\) maximizes sustainable yield. Do not accept: "1,000 is half of \(K\), and \(K/2\) is best" with no values; a justification citing no number from (c); an answer that recommends 1,000 because the herd is healthier without linking it to growth rate.
Show a 4/4 response
a The carrying capacity is 2,000 elk. The term \((K-N)/K\) is the fraction of the valley's capacity still unused: near 1 when the herd is tiny, so growth is nearly exponential, and 0 when \(N\) reaches 2,000, which shuts growth off.
b As the herd gets denser, elk compete harder for forage, winter range, and calving areas, and parasites spread more easily between crowded animals. Cows in poor condition raise fewer calves and more animals die over winter, so the per-capita birth rate falls and the death rate climbs, squeezing \(r\) toward zero until the curve flattens at 2,000.
c \(dN/dt = 0.30(500)(2000-500)/2000 = 150(0.75) = 112.5\) elk/yr, and \(0.30(1000)(2000-1000)/2000 = 300(0.50) = 150\) elk/yr. On my graph \(N\) (elk) goes on the x-axis from 0 to 2,000 every 500 and \(dN/dt\) (elk per year) on the y-axis from 0 to 160 every 20. I plotted (0, 0), (500, 112.5), (1000, 150) and (2000, 0), drew a smooth arch, and marked \(N = 1{,}000\) as the peak.
d At 1,000 elk the herd adds 150 animals a year, the largest surplus on my curve, so the agency could take 150 annually and still leave 1,000 behind. At 2,000 the herd sits at \(K\) with \(dN/dt = 0\), so there is no surplus and any harvest pushes it down.
Data: all woody stems over 10 cm diameter were counted in two 1-hectare forest
plots on the same soil type. Plot A has never been logged; plot B was selectively logged 15
years ago. Each plot yielded 200 stems belonging to the same five canopy species.
Plot
Species 1
Species 2
Species 3
Species 4
Species 5
Plot A (unlogged)
50
45
40
35
30
Plot B (logged)
150
20
15
10
5
Simpson's index of diversity is \(D = 1 - \sum (n/N)^2\). For plot A, \(D = 0.794\).
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the species richness of each plot, and describe how the two plots differ in evenness.
Explain why two plots with the same species richness can have very different values of Simpson's index.
Calculate Simpson's index for plot B, showing your setup.
Justify a prediction about which plot will lose the smaller fraction of its productivity during a two-year drought, naming the mechanism that accounts for the difference.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: richness is 5 in both plots, plus a description of the evenness difference using the counts: plot A's stems are spread almost equally across the five species (50 down to 30), while plot B is dominated by species 1, which holds 150 of 200 stems, or 75% of them. Do not accept: reporting richness without describing evenness; "plot A is more even" with no reference to the counts; treating the 200 stems as the richness.
(b) Accept: an explanation that Simpson's index measures the probability that two individuals drawn at random are different species, so it responds to how individuals are distributed among species and not only to how many species are present; when one species dominates, most random pairs are the same species, the \(\sum(n/N)^2\) term is large, and \(D\) drops even though richness is unchanged. Do not accept: "the index includes evenness" with no account of how; a restatement of (a); an explanation that says richness differs between the plots.
(c) Accept, with setup shown: \((150/200)^2 + (20/200)^2 + (15/200)^2 + (10/200)^2 + (5/200)^2 = 0.5625 + 0.0100 + 0.0056 + 0.0025 + 0.0006 = 0.5813\), so \(D = 1 - 0.5813 = 0.419\) (accept 0.42). Do not accept: 0.581 (the sum, with the subtraction omitted); a value with no setup; squaring the raw counts instead of the proportions.
(d) Accept: a prediction that plot A loses the smaller fraction, justified by a named mechanism; redundancy and response diversity, in that plot A's stems are spread across five species that differ in rooting depth and drought tolerance, so the more tolerant ones keep fixing carbon while the sensitive ones fail; in plot B, 75% of the stems belong to one species, so if that species' drought threshold is crossed there is nothing left to compensate. Do not accept: "diversity is good" or "plot A is more diverse, so it does better" with no mechanism; a prediction with no direction; naming plot B as the more resilient plot.
Show a 4/4 response
a Both plots have a richness of 5, since the same five canopy species appear in each. They differ in evenness: plot A's 200 stems are spread almost equally, 50 down to 30 per species, while in plot B one species holds 150 of the 200 stems, 75% of the plot, and the rarest is down to 5.
b Simpson's index is the chance that two stems picked at random are different species, so it depends on how individuals are shared out, not only on how many species there are. When one species takes most of the stems its \((n/N)^2\) term gets very large and \(D\) collapses, even though the species list is unchanged.
d Plot A loses the smaller fraction. Its stems are split nearly evenly across five species (\(D = 0.794\)) that differ in rooting depth and drought tolerance, so the deep-rooted ones keep photosynthesizing while the shallow-rooted ones shut down: response diversity, plus redundancy. Plot B has \(D = 0.419\) and 75% of its stems in one species, so once that species' threshold is crossed nothing takes up the slack.
Data: a mountain valley from which wolves had been absent for seventy years.
Wolves were reintroduced in 1995. Elk are the wolves' main prey and the main browser of young
willow shoots along the streams.
Year
1995
2000
2005
2010
2015
Wolves in the valley
21
72
106
97
99
Elk in the valley
17,000
11,700
6,600
4,600
4,800
Mean willow height (cm)
45
62
118
195
240
Using the data, answer (a) through (d).
Identify the trophic level occupied by the elk in this food chain, and describe the trend in mean willow height between 1995 and 2015.
Explain how the change in the wolf population between 1995 and 2005 produced the change in willow height over the same period.
Calculate the percent change in the elk population between 1995 and 2015, showing your setup.
Justify the claim that the wolf functions as a keystone species in this valley, citing specific evidence from the data.
Your response
Scoring notes
(a) Accept: elk as primary consumers, trophic level 2 (herbivores eating the willows), plus a description of the willow trend with values: mean height rose steadily from 45 cm in 1995 to 240 cm in 2015, with the steepest gains after 2005. Do not accept: "secondary consumer"; "the willows got taller" with no values or no time span; describing the elk trend in place of the willow trend.
(b) Accept: a cause-and-effect chain traced through these three levels; wolves rose from 21 to 106 and their predation, together with the elk's avoidance of exposed streamside areas, cut the elk herd from 17,000 to 6,600; with far fewer elk browsing, willow shoots survived their first seasons and grew, so mean height rose from 45 cm to 118 cm. The answer must connect all three levels. Do not accept: "wolves ate the elk, so the willows grew" with no reference to browsing pressure; an explanation that stops at the elk; a description of the trends with no causal link.
(c) Accept, with setup shown: \((4{,}800 - 17{,}000)/17{,}000 \times 100 = -12{,}200/17{,}000 \times 100 = -71.8\%\), a decrease of about 72%. Sign or the word "decrease" is required. Do not accept: 12,200 reported as a percentage; dividing by 4,800; a percentage with no setup.
(d) Accept: a claim supported by named evidence, the wolf is a keystone species because its effect on the community is far larger than its own abundance or biomass would suggest: about 100 wolves are associated with a 72% reduction in a 17,000-strong elk herd and a fivefold rise in willow height (45 cm to 240 cm), a trophic cascade running down three levels from predator to herbivore to producer. Do not accept: a claim with no numbers cited; "wolves are important to the ecosystem"; evidence listed with no statement of how it supports the keystone claim; confusing keystone with dominant (biomass-based) or invasive.
Show a 4/4 response
a The elk are primary consumers, trophic level 2, because they eat the willows. Mean willow height climbed steadily from 45 cm in 1995 to 240 cm in 2015, with the fastest gains after 2005, once the elk herd was already far smaller.
b Between 1995 and 2005 the wolf population went from 21 to 106. Wolves killed elk and pushed the survivors away from open streamside areas where they were easy to ambush, so the herd fell from 17,000 to 6,600. With far fewer elk browsing the banks, young willow shoots were no longer eaten back every season and survived their first years, so mean height more than doubled from 45 cm to 118 cm.
c \((4{,}800 - 17{,}000)/17{,}000 = -12{,}200/17{,}000 = -0.718\), a decrease of about 71.8%.
d About 100 wolves, a tiny share of the valley's animal biomass next to thousands of elk, go with a 71.8% drop in the elk herd and a willow canopy more than five times taller, 45 cm to 240 cm. That effect is far out of proportion to the wolves' numbers and runs down three trophic levels from predator to herbivore to producer, which is what a keystone species and a trophic cascade look like.
Unit recap
Unit recap
0:00 / 0:00
Animated recap with on-screen narration. Turn on Voice to
have it read aloud (uses your device's built-in voice). Pressing play
counts as your one free video.
Free preview complete
That's the end of the free preview.
You've opened five lessons (or watched a unit video), which is
as much as we can show without a subscription. Everything you've
already opened stays available; use the outline on the left to go
back to it.